Important information,
Table of contents
Product overview 1
Brief instructions 2
Installation 3
Commissioning and
diagnostics 4
General technical
specifications 5
Terminal modules 6
Power modules 7
Direct and soft starters
Fail-safe direct starter 8
Reversing starters
Fail-safe reversing starter 9
Functions 10
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S
Local Solution 11
Expansion modules 12
Fail-safe modules 13
Appendix
Data formats and data records A
Order numbers B
Dimensioned drawings C
Applications D
Glossary, Index
SIMATIC
ET 200S
Manual
Fail-Safe Motor Starters
Motor starters
Safety-Integrated Systems
Edition 06/2015
GWA-4NEB950007202-15
3ZX1012-0RK13-0AC0
Safety guidelines
This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety, as well as to protect
the product and connected equipment. The information regarding your personal safety is indicated by a warning
triangle, while information regarding only property damage does not have a warning triangle. According to the
warning level, the warnings are shown in decreasing order as follows:
Danger
Indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
Warning
Indicates that death or severe personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
With a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
Without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Attention
Indicates that an undesired result or state can occur if the corresponding notice is not observed.
If multiple warning levels occur, the warning for the highest level is always used. If a warning triangle indicat-
ing an injury hazard is shown in a warning message, a warning indicating property damage can also be
included in the same warning message.
Qualified personnel
The product/system belonging to this documentation must only be used for the relevant task by qualified per-
sonnel observing the relevant documentation for the corresponding task, in particular the safety and warning
information included. Thanks to their training and experience, qualified personnel are able to recognize haz-
ards when using these products/systems and avoid possible dangers.
Correct usage of SIEMENS products
Note the following:
Warning
Siemens products must only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical documenta-
tion. If third party products and components are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens.
The correct and safe operation of the products requires correct transportation, correct storage, setup, assem-
bly, installation, commissioning, operation and maintenance. The permissible ambient conditions must be
observed. Information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names marked with the trademark symbol ® are registered trademarks of
Siemens AG. Some other designations used in these documents are also brands; the owner's rights may be
violated if they are used by third parties for their own purposes.
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Postfach 4848
90026 Nürnberg
GERMANY
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
© Siemens AG 2005
Technical data subject to change without notice.
Copyright Siemens AG 2005 All rights reserved
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its con-
tents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders
will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by pat-
ent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved.
Disclaimer of liability
We have checked this manual to ensure that its contents are correct
and applicable in relation to the hardware and software it describes.
Despite all our endeavors, however, discrepancies cannot be wholly
excluded and so we cannot guarantee complete correctness and
applicability. However, the data in this manual are reviewed regularly
and any necessary corrections included in subsequent editions.
Technical Assistance: Telephone: +49 (0) 911-895-5900 (8.00 am - 5.00 pm CET) SIEMENS AG
Fax: +49 (0) 911-895-5907 Technical Assistance
Email: technical-assistance@siemens.com Breslauer Str. 5
Website: www.siemens.com/sirius/technical-assistance D-90766 Fürth
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 i
Important information
Purpose of the manual
This manual is an addition to the following manuals:
• ET 200S Distributed I/O Device
• IM 151/CPU Interface Module
• ET 200S Process-Related Functions
• ET 200S Positioning
• ET 200S Serial Interface Module
• Distributed I/O System ET 200S Fail-Safe Modules
• Safety Engineering in SIMATIC S7, System Description
• S7 Distributed Safety Configuration and Programming
This manual describes all the functions of the ET 200S motor starters. The
manual does not deal with general ET 200S functions. You can find descrip-
tions of these in the SIMATIC ET 200S Distributed I/O Device manual.
Target group
This manual describes the hardware of the ET 200S motor starters and fail-
safe motor starters and the safety-integrated system.
It is aimed at configuration engineers, commissioning engineers and main-
tenance personnel.
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
ii GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Manuals
The following list provides a table of contents of the manuals
(also see Section B.6):
Distributed I/O System
ET 200S
Automation Systems S7-300,
Operations list
IM 151-7 CPU Interface Module
in Internet only in Internet only in Internet only
• Installing and wiring the
ET 200S
• Commissioning and diagnos-
tics of the ET 200S
• ET 200S distributed I/O sys-
tem, fail-safe technology
• PM-D F PROFIsafe module
• Technical data from IM 151-1,
digital and analog electronic
modules
• Order numbers for ET 200S
• IM 151-7 CPU • Addressing of
IM 151-7 CPU
• ET 200S with IM 151-7 CPU
in a PROFIBUS network
• Commissioning and diagnos-
tics of the IM 151-7 CPU
• Technical data for the IM 151-
7 CPU
Positioning
ET 200S
Process-Related Functions
ET 200S
Serial
interface module ET 200S
in Internet only in Internet only in Internet only
• 1STEP 5V/204 kHZ
•1POS INC/Digital
• 1POS SSI/Digital
• 1POS INC/Analog
• 1POS SSI/Analog
• 1COUNT 24V/100kHz
• 1COUNT 5V/500kHz
•1SSI
•2PULSE
• 1SI 3964/ASCII
• 1SI MODBUS/USS
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 iii
Note
The fail-safe modules are described in the "ET 200S Distributed I/O Device for
Fail-Safe Modules" manual. This and additional manuals for fail-safe systems
can be downloaded on the Internet.
Scope of validity
This manual is valid for ET 200S motor starters. It contains a description of
the components that were valid at the time the manual was published. We
reserve the right to enclose a product information document containing up-
to-date information about new components and new versions of compo-
nents.
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
iv GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Approvals
The product series in the ET 200S distributed I/O device - motor starters,
fail-safe motor starters, and safety-integrated system corresponds to the fol-
lowing regulations:
• EC Directive 2006/95/EC on low voltage
• EC Directive 2004/108/EC on electromagnetic compatibility
• Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.: UL 508 registered (Industrial Control Equipment)
• Canadian Standards Association: CSA C22.2 Number 142, tested (Process Control
Equipment)
Standards, certificates and approvals
The ET 200S distributed I/O system is based on IEC 61158/EN 50170, Vol-
ume 2, PROFIBUS. The ET 200S distributed I/O device fulfills the require-
ments and criteria of IEC 61131, Part 2 and the requirements for obtaining
the CE marking. ET 200S has CSA and UL approval.
You will find detailed information on the relevant standards, certificates, and
approvals in the SIMATIC manual ET 200S Distributed I/O System.
Disclaimer of liability
The products described in this manual were developed to discharge safety-
oriented functions as part of a higher-order system or machine. A complete
safety system generally comprises sensors, analyzers, signaling devices and
concepts for safe shutdowns. The manufacturer of the system or machine
is responsible for ensuring correct overall functioning. Siemens AG, its sub-
sidiaries and its affiliated companies (hereinafter designated “Siemens”) are
not in a position to guarantee all features of an overall system or machine
not designed by Siemens.
Siemens also refuses to accept liability for recommendations, express or
implicit, in the subsequent description. No warranty, guarantee or liability
claims above and beyond the General Terms and Conditions of Supply and
Sale of Siemens can be derived from the subsequent description.
Installation notes
Measures to be observed for improving immunity to
conducted radio-frequency emissions:
* Spatial separation of sensitive electrical circuit from sources of interfer-
ence
* Use of transposed conductors
* Maintaining a sufficient distance between interference from emitting con-
ductors and conductors in sensitive electrical circuits
* Aligning cables and lines as close to 90° as possible at crossovers
* Using the thickest possible conductor routing at groundplane
* Use of electrostatic / electromagnetic shields
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 v
Position in the information landscape
As well as this manual, you will need the manual for the DP master you are
using.
Note
A guide to the contents of the SIMATIC ET 200S manuals can be found in Section 1.5
of this manual.
We recommend that you first look in this section to find out which contents of which
manual are important for solving your problem.
Aids to accessing information
You can find specific information in the manual quickly by using the follow-
ing aids:
• There is a table of contents at the front of the manual.
• Each section contains subheadings that provide you with an overview of the contents
of the relevant sections.
• Following the appendices you will find a glossary, in which important technical terms
used in the manual are defined.
• At the end of the manual you will find a detailed index, which makes it easy for you to
find the information you are looking for.
Constantly updated information
Should you have any queries regarding motor starters, please get in touch
with the point of contact in your region responsible for low-voltage switch-
gear/controlgear with communication capability. You can obtain a list of the
points of contact, along with the latest release of the manual, at the follow-
ing Internet address:
www.siemens.de/sirius-motorstarter
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
vi GWA-4NEB950007202-15
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 vii
Table of contents
1.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.1.1 General components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.1.2 Components up to 5.5 kW and 45/90 mm installation width for
standard motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.1.3 Components up to 7.5 kW and 65/130 mm installation width for
High Feature motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.1.4 Fail-safe components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.1.5 Components for safety-integrated systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1.1.6 Components of the expansion modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.2 ET 200S configuration options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1.3 Maximum number of modules that can be connected/maximum
configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1.4 PROFIenergy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
1.5 Guide to the ET 200S manuals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
2 Brief commissioning instructions
2.1 Introduction and purpose of the example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2 ET 200S components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.3 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.4 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.4.1 Circuitry for the example setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.5 Wiring and fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.6 Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.6.1 Design of 24 VDC power pack for F-DS1e-x, FRS1e-x failsafe motor starter 2-9
2.7 Integration into the user program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.8 Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.9 Diagnostic options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2.9.1 Diagnosis via "Hardware configuration (HW Config)" from STEP 7 . . . 2-13
2.10 Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
3 Installation
3.1 Slot rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2 Installation rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.3 Installation measurements and clearances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.4 Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.4.1 What is derating? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.4.2 Derating factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.4.3 DM-V15 spacing module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.4.4 Criteria for configurations with/without DM-V15 spacing module . . . 3-10
3.5 Installing terminal modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3.6 Inserting power modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3.7 Installing and removing motor starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3.7.1 Standard motor starter with installation width of 45 or 90 mm . . . . 3-23
1Product overview
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
viii GWA-4NEB950007202-15
3.7.2 High feature/failsafe motor starter with installation width
of 65 or 130 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3.8 Inserting the terminating module, terminating cover and caps . . . . . 3-36
3.9 Labeling motor starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
4 Commissioning and diagnostics
4.1 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2 Control kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.3 Control unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.4 2DI COM control module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.5 2DI LC COM control module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.6 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4.7 Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4.7.1 Diagnosis and monitoring through the user program . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4.7.2 Diagnosis by LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
4.8 LED indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
4.8.1 Diagnosis of the PM-D power module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
4.8.2 Diagnosis of the PM-D F1 power module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4.8.3 Diagnosis of the PM-D F2 power module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4.8.4 Diagnosis of the PM-D F3 power module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4.8.5 Diagnosis of the PM-D F4 power module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4.8.6 Diagnosis of the PM-D F5 power module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
4.8.7 Diagnosis of the PM-X connection module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
4.8.8 Diagnosis of the PM-D F X1 fail-safe power/expansion module. . . . . 4-33
4.8.9 Diagnosis of the F-CM fail-safe contact replicator. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
4.8.10 Diagnosis of the DS1-x and RS1-x motor starters; standard . . . . . . 4-35
4.8.11 Diagnosis of DS1e-x, RS1e-x and DSS1e-x motor starters; high feature
F-DS1e-x and FRS1e-x fail-safe motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
4.8.12 Diagnosis of brake control modules xB3, xB4, xB6 . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
4.9 Process mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
4.9.1 Process mapping of DS1-x and RS1-x motor starters; standard . . . . . 4-40
4.9.2 Process mapping of DS1e-x, RS1e-x and DSS1e-x motor starters;
high feature F-DS1e-x and FRS1e-x fail-safe motor starters . . . . . . . 4-41
4.9.3 Process mapping of xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control modules . . . . . . . 4-44
4.10 Motor Starter ES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
4.11 High Feature motor starter with order number suffix -.AB4. . . . . . . 4-46
4.11.1 Device replacement of HF starters -.AA3 and -.AA4 with -.AB4 starters 4-46
4.11.2 Device response during parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
4.11.3 Power supply for High Feature motor starter with
order number suffix -.AB4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
4.11.4 Configuration of High Feature motor starter with order
number suffix -.AB4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 ix
5 General technical specifications
5.1 Shipping and storage conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2 Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.3 Electromagnetic compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
6 Terminal modules
6.1 Assignment of the terminal modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2 TM-P15 S27-01 terminal module for PM-D power module . . . . . . . 6-4
6.3 Terminal modules for motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6.3.1 TM-DS45 terminal modules for the DS1-x direct starter; standard . . . 6-6
6.3.2 TM-DS65 terminal modules for DS1e-x direct starter; high feature
and DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6.3.3 TM-FDS65 terminal modules for fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starters . . . 6-8
6.3.4 Technical specifications, TM-DS45 and TM-DS65/TM-FDS65 . . . . . . 6-9
6.3.5 TM-RS90 terminal modules for RS1-x reversing starter; standard. . . . 6-10
6.3.6 TM-RS130 terminal modules for RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature. 6-11
6.3.7 TM-FRS130 terminal modules for fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starters . 6-12
6.3.8 Technical specifications - TM-RS90 and TM-RS130/TM-FRS130 . . . . 6-13
6.4 Power bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
7 PM-D power module
7.1 PM-D power module for motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.1.1 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.1.2 Technical specifications - PM-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7.1.3 Power supply for High Feature motor starter with order
number suffix -.AB4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
8 Direct and soft starters
8.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.2 DS1-x direct starter; standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.2.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.2.2 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.2.3 Technical specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
8.3 DS1e-x direct starter; high feature F-DS1e-x fail-safe direct starter . . . 8-11
8.3.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8.3.2 Additional features of the F-DS1e-x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
8.3.3 Module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
8.3.4 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
8.3.5 Technical specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
8.4 DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
8.4.1 Physical principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
8.4.2 Application and use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
8.4.3 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
8.4.4 Notes on configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
8.4.5 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
8.4.6 Technical specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
xGWA-4NEB950007202-15
9 Reversing starters
9.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.2 RS1-x reversing starter; standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9.2.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9.2.2 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
9.2.3 Technical specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.3 RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature F-RS1e-x fail-safe reversing starter 9-10
9.3.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
9.3.2 Additional features of the F-RS1e-x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
9.3.3 Module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
9.3.4 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
9.3.5 Technical specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
10 Functions
10.1 Functions - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
10.3 Basic function / basic parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
10.3.1 Rated operating current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
10.3.2 Load type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
10.3.3 Non-resetting on voltage failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
10.3.4 Behavior with supply voltage switching element missing. . . . . . . . 10-8
10.4 Motor control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
10.4.1 Electronic / mechanical switch technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
10.4.2 Reversing starter control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
10.5 Brake output (actuation via expansion modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
10.6 Thermal motor model - motor protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
10.7 System monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
10.7.1 Current limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
10.7.2 Asymmetry monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
10.7.3 Shortcircuit protection (power switch / repair switch). . . . . . . . . . 10-23
10.8 Field bus interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
10.8.1 Response to CPU/master STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
10.8.2 Group diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
10.8.3 Wait for startup parameter data records (from order number suffix -.AB4) 10-26
10.9 Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
10.9.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
10.9.2 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
10.9.3 Plausibility check of data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
10.9.4 Output of messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
10.9.5 Local device interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
10.10 PROFIenergy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
10.10.1What is PROFIenergy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
10.10.2PROFIenergy (version V1.0) in the ET 200S motor starter . . . . . . . 10-34
10.11 Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
10.12 Cold run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
10.13 Emergency start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
10.14 Trip Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
10.15 Self-test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
10.16 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
10.17 Log book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
10.18 Factory setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 xi
11 Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution
11.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
11.2 Terminal modules TM-PF30 S47 and TM-X15 S27-01 . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
11.2.1 Assignment of the terminal modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
11.2.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
11.2.3 Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
11.2.4 View of the TM-PF30 S47 terminal modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
11.2.5 Terminal assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
11.2.6 Technical specifications of the TM-PF30 S47 terminal modules . . . . 11-11
11.2.7 TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
11.3 Power modules PM-D F1 through F5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
11.3.1 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
11.3.2 Electrical configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18
11.3.3 Technical specifications - PM-D F1 to F5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21
11.4 PM-X connection module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23
11.5 ET 200S with "local" safety-integrated system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24
11.6 Safety-integrated system configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-28
11.6.1 Safety circuit with safety-integrated system combination . . . . . . . 11-28
11.6.2 Two safety circuits with safety-integrated system
combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-31
11.6.3 Two cascaded safety circuits with safety-integrated system
combinations (potential group, potential subgroup). . . . . . . . . . . 11-33
11.6.4 Safety circuit with an external safety-integrated system
combination 3TK2824 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-37
11.6.5 Safety circuit with an external safety-integrated system
combination 3TK2823 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-39
11.6.6 Emergency stop combined with protective door . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-41
11.6.7 Emergency stop circuit with cascaded time delay PL d or PL e. . . . . 11-43
11.6.8 One emergency stop circuit for two or more ET 200S rails . . . . . . . 11-45
11.6.9 Potential-free connection between an ET 200S safety circuit
and autonomous safety circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-47
11.6.10 DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature to PL e . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-49
11.6.11 ET 200S safety-integrated system with AS-i Safety at work . . . . . . 11-51
12 Expansion modules
12.1 Overview of expansion modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
12.2 Terminal modules TM-xB15 S24-01 and TM-xB215 S24-01 . . . . . . . 12-3
12.2.1 Assignment of the terminal modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
12.3 Brake control modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
12.3.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
12.3.2 Terminal modules TM-xB15 S24-01 and TM-xB215 S24-01 . . . . . . . 12-12
12.3.3 Signal response of xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control module and
DS1-x, DS1e-x, and F-DS1e-x motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
12.3.4 Signal response of the xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control module and
RS1-x, RS1e-x, F-RS1e-x motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
12.3.5 Externally powered brake xB1, xB3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18
12.3.6 Internally powered brake xB2 and xB4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21
12.3.7 Brake xB5, xB6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25
12.3.8 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-30
12.3.9 Removing the brake control module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-32
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
xii GWA-4NEB950007202-15
13 Fail-safe modules
13.1 General description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
13.1.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
13.2 Terminal modules TM-PFX30 S47 and TM-FCM30-S47 . . . . . . . . . 13-4
13.2.1 Assignment of the terminal modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
13.2.2 TM-PFX30 S47 terminal modules for PM-D F X1 power/
expansion module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
13.2.3 Terminal module TM-FCM30-S47 for the F-CM contact replicator . . . 13-7
13.3 PM-D F X1 power/expansion module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
13.3.1 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
13.3.2 Electrical configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
13.3.3 Technical specifications - PM-D F X1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
13.4 F-CM contact replicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
13.4.1 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
13.4.2 Electrical configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
13.4.3 Technical specifications - F-CM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
13.5 Examples with fail-safe modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23
13.5.1 Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and 4 emergency stop circuits. . . . 13-24
13.5.2 Example with the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and
external safety combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26
13.5.3 Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and several stations . . . . . . . . . 13-28
13.5.4 Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and contact replicator . . . . . . . . 13-30
13.5.5 Example with PM-D F X1 power module and contact replicator . . . . 13-32
13.5.6 ET 200S fail-safe motor starter with AS-i Safety at work . . . . . . . . 13-34
13.5.7 Example with the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and
external safety combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-36
13.5.8 ET 200S fail-safe motor starters and PM-D F X1 with central
safety PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-38
13.5.9 Distributed selective detection of safety signals . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-40
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 xiii
A Data formats and data records
A.1 Data formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A.2 Error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
A.3 Data records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
A.4 DS68 - Read/write process output images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
A.5 DS69 - Read/write process input images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
A.6 DS72 Read log book - device errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
A.7 DS73 Read log book - trips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
A.8 DS75 Read log book - events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
A.9 DS81 Read basic (factory) setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
A.10 DS92 Read device diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
A.11 DS93 Write command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20
A.12 DS94 Read measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
A.13 DS95 Read statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22
A.14 DS96 Read slave pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23
A.15 DS 100 Read device identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24
A.16 DS131 Read / write device parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
A.17 DS134 Read / write maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-32
A.18 DS165 Read / write comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-32
A.19 I&M data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-33
A.19.1 DS231 Read device identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-33
A.19.2 DS232 Read / write equipment identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
A.19.3 DS233 Read / write installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
A.19.4 DS234 Read / write description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
B Order numbers
B.1 Motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
B.1.1 ET 200S DS1-x direct starter; standard / ET 200S RS1-x reversing starter;
standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
B.1.2 ET 200S High Feature motor starters for Motor Starter ES . . . . . . . B-3
B.1.3 ET 200S fail-safe motor starters with electronic overload protection
(F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
B.2 Components for ET 200S motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
B.3 Components for the safety-integrated system (local safety) . . . . . . B-6
B.4 Components for expansion modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
B.5 Fail-safe components (PM-D F PROFIsafe, PM-D F X1) . . . . . . . . B-7
B.6 Manuals for ET 200S distributed I/O system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
xiv GWA-4NEB950007202-15
C Dimensioned drawings
C.1 Motor starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
C.1.1 DS1-x direct starter; standard and TM-DS45 terminal module . . . . . C-2
C.1.2 DS1e-x direct starter; high feature,
DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature and TM-DS65 terminal module;
F-DS1e-x fail-safe direct starter and TM-FDS65 terminal module . . . . C-3
C.1.3 RS1-x reversing starter; standard and TM-RS90 terminal module. . . . C-4
C.1.4 RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature and TM-RS130 terminal module
F-RS1e-x fail-safe reversing starter and TM-FRS130 terminal module . . C-5
C.2 Power modules, connection module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
C.2.1 PM-D power module and TM-P15 S27-01 terminal module . . . . . . . C-6
C.2.2 Power modules PM-D F1 to 5 and
terminal modules TM-PF30 S47-B0/-B1/-C0/-C1/-D0;
PM-D F PROFIsafe power module and TM-PF30 S47-F1 terminal module;
PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and
terminal modules TM-PFX30 S47-G0/-G1;
F-CM contact replicator and TM-FCM30 S47-E0 terminal module. . . . C-7
C.2.3 PM-X connection module and TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module . . . . C-8
C.3 DM-V15 spacing module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
C.4 Expansion modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9
C.4.1 Brake control module xB1 to 4 and
terminal module TM-xB15 S24-01, TM-xB215 S24-01. . . . . . . . . . C-9
D Applications
D.1 Examples with brake control modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
D.1.1 Example with 2 directions of rotation and limit-switch operation
without brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
D.1.2 Example with 2 directions of rotation, 2 speeds and 24 V brake with
external power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
D.1.3 Example with 2 directions of rotation, 2 speeds and 400 V brake with
internal power supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
D.1.4 Example of lifting platform - up with motor, down with valve . . . . . . D-8
D.1.5 Example of lifting platform - up and down with brake motor . . . . . . D-10
D.2 Examples with reversible-pole motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12
D.2.1 Example with 2 directions of rotation and 2 speeds with one Dahlander
winding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12
D.2.2 Example with 2 directions of rotation and 3 speeds with 2 Dahlander
windings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-14
Glossary
Index
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 1-1
Product overview 1
Section Subject Page
1.1 Over v iew 1-2
1.1.1 General components 1-2
1.1.2 Components up to 5.5 kW and 45/90 mm installation width for
standard motor starters
1-4
1.1.3 Components up to 7.5 kW and 65/130 mm installation width for
High Feature motor starters
1-6
1.1.4 Fail-safe components 1-8
1.1.5 Components for safety-integrated systems 1-10
1.1.6 Components of the expansion modules 1-12
1.2 ET 200S configuration options 1-13
1.3 Maximum number of modules that can be connected/maximum
configuration
1-18
1.4 PROFIenergy 1-20
1.5 Guide to the ET 200S manuals 1-21
Product overview
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
1-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
1.1 Overview
1.1.1 General components
The following table shows the general components required for a configuration
with motor starters.
Component Function Drawing
DIN rails ... are the mechanical supports onto which
the terminal modules of the ET 200S are
snapped.
Interface
module
IM 151
... connects the ET 200S with the control via
a field bus system and prepares the data for
the electronic modules and motor starters
connected.
(See the ET 200S Distributed I/O System
manual.)
PM-D power
module
The module monitors the voltage of the
electronic components and contactors for a
group of motor starters (potential group)
(see Section 7).
Terminal mod-
ules
TM-P15
S27-01
... carry the wiring and take the PM-D power
module (with terminating cover)
(see Section 6.2).
Spacing mod-
ule
DM-V15
... in the case of specific mounting posi-
tions, high ambient temperatures and for
operation in the upper current range, it may
be necessary to insert a spacing module.
Configuration is not necessary.
(see Section 3.4.3).
Table 1-1: General components
100 mm
Product overview
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 1-3
Jumper mod-
ule
L1/L2/L3
... loops L1, L2 and L3 through
... for closing gaps in the power bus, for
example when expansion modules and
spacing modules are used
Available types:
• With L1/L2/L3 throughfeed,
15 mm, 30 mm
PE/N jumper
module
... adds a PEN conductor (N) and protective
ground (PE) to the power bus.
... for closing gaps in the PE/N bus, for
example when expansion modules and
spacing modules are used
Available types:
• with PE/N throughfeed,
15 mm, 30 mm
Caps ... protect the contacts of the power bus
from touching (IP20) and included with the
terminal modules with power bus infeed and
with the terminal blocks with PE/N infeed
(see Section 3.8).
Terminating
module
... terminates the internal data bus of the
ET 200S electrically and is included with the
IM module.
(see Section 3.8 and ET 200S Distributed
I/O System manual).
Terminating
cover
... prevents the contacts of the motor start-
ers from being touched and is included with
the terminal modules TM-P15 S27-01, TM-
PF30 S47 B1/C1/F1, and TM-PFX30 S47-G1.
(see Section 3.8).
3-phase feed-
in terminal for
S0
... for expanding the conductor cross section
for power infeed - if necessary - as follows:
• solid or stranded:
2.5 to 25 mm2
• finely stranded with end sleeve:
2.5 to 25 mm2
• solid or stranded:
12 to 4 AWG
(see Section B.2)
Component Function Drawing
Table 1-1: General components (Contd.)
15/30 mm
15/30 mm
Product overview
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
1-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
1.1.2 Components up to 5.5 kW and 45/90 mm installation width for standard
motor starters
Component Function Drawing
Direct starter;
standard
DS-x1
direct starter; standard SIRIUS
... switches a motor on or off.
... protects three-phase motors up to 5.5 kW
in the event of overloading and short-circuit-
ing.
... also controls a brake control module (xB1
to xB6).
Only the brake function of the xB3, xB4 and
xB6 is supported, the inputs have no effect.
... also controls a brake control module (xB3
or xB4)
(see Section 8.2).
Terminal mod-
ule
TM-DS45
... carries the wiring and takes a DS1-x direct
starter; standard.
... distributes L1, L2 and L3 via the inte-
grated power bus.
Available types:
• with power bus infeed for a load group
(drawing on left), including 3 caps
• with power bus throughfeed
(drawing on right)
(see Section 6.3.1).
Reversing
starters;
standard
RS1-x
reversing starter; standard SIRIUS
... switches a motor rotating clockwise or
counterclockwise on or off.
... protects three-phase motors up to 5.5 kW
in the event of overloading and short-circuit-
ing.
... also controls a brake control module (xB1
to xB6).
Only the brake function of the xB3, xB4 and
xB6 is supported, the inputs have no effect.
... also controls a brake control module (xB3
or xB4)
(see Section 9.2).
Terminal mod-
ule
TM-RS90
... carries the wiring and takes an RS1-x
reversing starter; standard.
... distributes L1, L2 and L3 via the inte-
grated power bus.
Available types:
• with power bus infeed for a load group
(drawing on left), including 3 caps
• with power bus throughfeed
(drawing on right)
(see Section 6.3.5).
Table 1-2: Components for motor starters, standard up to 5.5 kW and 45/90 mm installation width
Product overview
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 1-5
PE/N
terminal block
... adds a PEN conductor (N) and protective
ground (PE) to the power bus.
Available types:
• with PE/N infeed and connection to
right, including 2 caps,
45 mm
• with PE/N connection and throughfeed,
45 mm
(see Section 6.3.1 and 6.3.5).
Control kit ... for manual operation of the contactor
(only for DS1-x, RS1-x)
(see Section 4.2).
Control unit
for ET 200S
... for direct drive of the contactor coils and
for checking the wiring and operation of the
powers section for commissioning and ser-
vice purposes.
(only for DS1-x, RS1-x)
(see Section 4.3).
Component Function Drawing
Table 1-2: Components for motor starters, standard up to 5.5 kW and 45/90 mm installation width (Contd.)
Product overview
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
1-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
1.1.3 Components up to 7.5 kW and 65/130 mm installation width for High Fea-
ture motor starters
Component Function Drawing
Direct starter
DS1e-x;
high feature
direct starter; high feature with electronic
overload protection
... switches a motor on or off.
... protects three-phase motors up to 7.5 kW
in the event of overloading and short circuit-
ing.
... also controls a brake control module (xB1
to xB6).
... with integrated fail-safe kit
(see Section 8.3).
Direct soft
starters
DSS1e-x;
high feature
direct soft starter; high feature with elec-
tronic overload protection
... switches a motor on or off.
... protects three-phase motors up to
7.5 kW in the event of overloading and short
circuiting.
... also controls a brake control module (xB1,
xB3)
(see Section 8.4).
Terminal mod-
ule
TM-DS65
carries the wiring and takes a DS1e-x direct
starter; high feature or DSS1e-x direct soft
starter; high feature.
... distributes L1, L2 and L3 via the inte-
grated power bus.
Available types:
• with power bus infeed for a load group
(drawing on left), including 3 caps
• with power bus throughfeed
(drawing on right)
(see Section 6.3.2).
RS1e-x
reversingstart
er;
high feature
reversing starter; high feature with elec-
tronic overload protection
... switches a motor rotating clockwise or
counterclockwise on or off.
... protects three-phase motors up to
7.5 kW in the event of overloading and short
circuiting.
... also controls a brake control module (xB1
to xB6).
... with integrated fail-safe kit
(see Section 9.3).
Terminal mod-
ule
TM-RS130
... carries the wiring and takes an RS1e-x
reversing starter; high feature.
... distributes L1, L2 and L3 via the inte-
grated power bus.
Available types:
• with power bus infeed for a load group
(drawing on left), including 3 caps
• with power bus throughfeed
(drawing on right)
(see Section 6.3.6).
Table 1-3: Components up to 7.5 kW and 65/130 mm installation width for motor starters; high feature
Product overview
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 1-7
Terminal block
and jumper
module
PE/N
... adds a PEN conductor (N) and protective
ground (PE) to the power bus.
Available types:
• with PE/N infeed and connection to
right, including 2 caps,
65 mm
• with PE/N connection and throughfeed,
65 mm
(see Section 6.3.2, 6.3.3, 6.3.6, and 6.3.7).
Control mod-
ule
2DI COM
Digital module with
• 2 inputs for parameterizable motor start-
ers; high feature. Actions, e.g., for local
operating mode, end position operation,
emergency start, etc.
(for DS1e-x, RS1e-x, DSS1e-x,
F-DS1e -x, F-RS1e-x)
• Connection possibility on the PC via the
’LOGO! PC cable
(order no.: 6ED1057-1AA00-0BA0)
(see Section 4.4).
Control mod-
ule
2DI LC COM
Like 2DI COM control module, but also with
input for switching to the manual local oper-
ating mode.
(see Section 4.5).
Component Function Drawing
Table 1-3: Components up to 7.5 kW and 65/130 mm installation width for motor starters; high feature (Contd.)
Product overview
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
1-8 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
1.1.4 Fail-safe components
Component Function Drawing
Fail-safe
direct starters
F-DS1e-x
fail-safe direct starter with electronic over-
load protection
... switches a motor on or off.
... switches off safely if there is no SG sig-
nal.
... protects three-phase motors up to 7.5 kW
in the event of overloading and short circuit-
ing.
... also controls a brake control module (xB1
to xB6).
(see Section 8.3).
Terminal mod-
ule
TM-FDS65
... carries the wiring and takes a fail-safe F-
DS1e-x direct starter.
... distributes L1, L2 and L3 via the inte-
grated power bus.
... contains the coding for the safety group
(SG1 to SG6)
Available types:
• with power bus infeed for a load group
(drawing on left), including 3 caps
• with power bus throughfeed
(drawing on right)
(see Section 6.3.3).
Fail-safe
reversing
starters
F-RS1e-x
fail-safe reversing starter; high feature with
electronic overload protection
... switches a motor rotating clockwise or
counterclockwise on or off.
... switches off safely if there is no SG sig-
nal.
... protects three-phase motors up to 7.5 kW
in the event of overloading and short circuit-
ing.
... also controls a brake control module (xB1
to xB6).
(see Section 9.3).
Terminal mod-
ule
TM-FRS130
... carries the wiring and takes a fail-safe F-
RS1e-x reversing starter.
... distributes L1, L2 and L3 via the inte-
grated power bus.
... contains the coding for the safety group
(SG1 to SG6)
Available types:
• with power bus infeed for a load group
(drawing on left), including 3 caps
• with power bus throughfeed
(drawing on right)
(see Section 6.3.7).
Table 1-4: Fail-safe components
Product overview
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 1-9
PM-D F X1
power/expan-
sion module
... supplies external safety devices
... loops the 6 SG buses and U1 and M
through
(see Section 13.3).
TM-PFX30
terminal mod-
ule
... carries the wiring and takes a PM-D F X1
power/expansion module
Available types:
• Incoming supply from the left for expan-
sion
• Without an incoming supply from the left
as power module
(see Section 13.2).
F-CM
contact repli-
cator
... used in conjunction with a fail-safe power
module PM-D F PROFIsafe 1) or PM-D F X1
... makes 4 floating relay contacts available
for safe shutdown of external components.
Switches off the relay contacts safely if
there is no SG signal.
... for safe shutdown of external compo-
nents, such as valves.
(see Section 13.4).
TM-FCM30
terminal mod-
ule
... carries the wiring and takes a contact rep-
licator module
(see Section 13.2).
1) PM-D F PROFIsafe power module; see the "ET 200S Distributed I/O Device for Fail-Safe Modules" manual.
Component Function Drawing
Table 1-4: Fail-safe components (Contd.)
STAT
PWR
SF
Product overview
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
1-10 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
1.1.5 Components for safety-integrated systems
The following table shows the components required to set up an
emergency stop circuit.
Technical data, see Section 11.3 or Table 11-13.
Component Function Drawing
Power mod-
ule PM-D F1
through 4
PM-D F5
The module monitors the voltage of the elec-
tronic components and contactors for a group
of motor feeders (potential group).
... Ensures that all motor starters in a group
are switched off in the interests of safety.
... In combination with PM-D F 1 to 4, makes
available four additional enabling circuits for
safe shutdown.
(see Section 11.3).
TM-PF30
S47
terminal
modules
... carry the wiring and take the PM-D F1 to 5
power module.
... incorporate the terminals for the sensor cir-
cuits (PM-D F1, 2).
... incorporate the terminals for the auxiliary
voltages (PM-D F1 to 4).
... incorporate the terminals for the enabling
circuits (PM-D F5).
... ... types ...B1 and ...C1
with terminating cover
(see Section 11.2).
Connection
module
PM-X
... for terminating the release circuit
... for connecting an external infeed contac-
tor/release circuit
... for integrating ET 200S motor starter
groups in external safety circuits
(see Section 11.4).
TM-X15
S27-01 ter-
minal mod-
ule
... carries the wiring and takes the
PM-X connection module.
The same model is used for the start and end
of a motor starter group
(see Section 11.2.7).
Table 1-5: Components for safety-integrated systems
Product overview
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 1-11
Infeed con-
tactor, e.g.
SIRIUS
... is a second circuit-breaking element in the
main circuit.
(see Section 11.6).
Fail-safe
kit 1 for
DS1-x direct
starter;
standard
... is necessary to achieve a moderate to high
level of diagnostic coverage
... consists of
• an auxiliary switch block (a)
• a contact holder with a connecting lead
for the direct starter (b)
• two contact supports for the terminal
module (c)
... is already integrated into the DS1e-x and
TM-DS65 high feature starters
(see Section 11.5).
Fail-safe
kit 2 for
RS1-x
reversing
starter;
standard
... is necessary to achieve a moderate to high
level of diagnostic coverage
... consists of
• two auxiliary switch blocks (a)
• a contact holder with a connecting lead
for the reversing starter (b)
• four contact holders for the terminal
module (c)
• a connecting lead (d)
... is already integrated into the RS1e-x and
TM-RS130 high feature starters
(see Section 11.5).
Component Function Drawing
Table 1-5: Components for safety-integrated systems (Contd.)
Infeed con-
tactor
ab
c
c
a
b
d
Product overview
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
1-12 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
1.1.6 Components of the expansion modules
Component Function Drawing
Brake control
module
xB1
xB3
xB2
xB4
xB5
xB6
... for all motor starters except DS and RS
... with externally powered mechanical
brakes (24 V DC/4 A)
... and 2 inputs
(see Section 12.3.5).
... with internally powered mechanical
brakes (500 V DC/0.7 A)
... and 2 inputs
(see Section 12.3.6).
... with internally powered mechanical
brakes (400 V AC/0.5 A)
(see Section 12.3.7).
... and 2 inputs
(see Section 12.3.7).
Terminal mod-
ule
TM-xB15
S24-01
Terminal mod-
ule
TM-xB215
S24-01
... carries the wiring and takes a brake con-
trol module xB1, xB2 or xB5.
... carries the wiring and takes a brake con-
trol module xB3, xB4 or xB6.
(see Section 12.3.2).
Table 1-6: Components of the expansion modules
Stat
34
X2
DC24V/4A
xB1
84
3RK1903-
0CB00
Product overview
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 1-13
1.2 ET 200S configuration options
Motor starters with the following features can be combined as follows:
• Motor starters of installation width 45/90 mm (motor starters; standard) and 65/130
mm (motor starters; high feature) can be used in any combination.
• Supply through the backplane bus is compatible.
• Power infeed between the motor starters with installation widths of 45/90 mm and
65/130 mm is separate on account of the different installation lengths.
Safety note
Only applies in fail-safe mode (fail-safe technology)
It is not permissible to combine fail-safe modules with standard modules in a
single fail-safe potential group,
(Exception: expansion racks, e.g. xB1 to xB6 according to performance level,
see Section 8.3, 9.3).
ET 200S with motor starters
Figure 1-1: ET 200S with motor starters
Product overview
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
1-14 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
ET 200S with motor starters and electronic modules
Figure 1-2: ET 200S with motor starters and electronic modules
ET 200S with motor starters and safety-integrated systems up to PL e
Figure 1-3: ET 200S with motor starters and safety-integrated systems up to PL e
Product overview
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 1-15
Parts list
The following parts list contains all the components required for an ET 200S
sample configuration with motor starters and safety-integrated systems (see
Figure 1-3).
Abbreviation Order number Description
IM 151 6ES7151-1AA00-0AB0 IM 151 interface module
PM-D 3RK1903-0BA00 Power module for motor starter
TM-P15
S27-01
3RK1903-0AA00 Terminal module for power module
TM-DS45S32 3RK1903-0AB00 Terminal module for direct starter; standard with power
bus infeed
DS-x1 3RK1301-0KB00-0AA2 Direct starter; standard, electromechanical, 0.9 to 1.25 A
TM-PF30
S47-B1
3RK1903-1AA10 Terminal module with infeed for power module
PM-D F1 3RK1903-1BA00 Power module for emergency stop
TM-DS45S32 3RK1903-0AB00 Terminal module for direct starter; standard with power
bus infeed
DS-x1 3RK1301-1EB00-0AA2 Direct starter; standard, electromechanical, 2.8 to
4.0 A
Fail-safe kit 1 3RK1903-1CA00 Fail-safe kit 1, for direct starter; standard
TM-RS90S31 3RK1903-0AC10 Terminal module for reversing starter; standard with
power bus throughfeed
RS-x1 3RK1301-1BB00-1AA2 Reversing starter; standard, electromechanical,
1.4 to 2.0 A
Fail-safe kit 2 3RK1903-1CA01 Fail-safe kit 2, for reversing starter; standard
TM-DS65 S32
-01 FS L
3RK1903-0AK00 Terminal module for direct starter; high feature with
power bus infeed
DS1e-x 3RK1301-0CB10-0AB4 Direct starter; high feature with electronic overload pro-
tection, 2.4 to 16 A
TM-X15
S27-01
3RK1903-1AB00 Terminal module for connection module
PM-X 3RK1903-1CB00 Connection module
Terminating cover (component of the terminal modules
with power bus infeed for power modules of motor start-
ers)
Terminating module (component of the IM 151)
3RT1035-1BB40 Infeed contactor as 2nd deactivation possibility, e.g.
SIRIUS, size 2
Product overview
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
1-16 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
ET 200S with fail-safe motor starters up to PL e / SIL3
Figure 1-4: ET 200S with fail-safe motor starters up to PL e / SIL3
ET 200S with fail-safe motor starters and fail-safe electronic modules up to
PL e / SIL3
Figure 1-5: ET 200S with fail-safe motor starters and fail-safe electronic modules up to PL e / SIL3
Product overview
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 1-17
Potential groups and load groups
A potential group (24V) consists of a PM-D power module and all the modules to
the right of the power module up to the next PM-D power module.
A load group (400V) consists of a motor starter with power infeed and all the
motor starters to the right of it up to the next motor starter with a power infeed.
Figure 1-6: Potential groups and load groups
Product overview
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
1-18 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
1.3 Maximum number of modules that can be con-
nected/maximum configuration
Please note the following rules when configuring your ET 200S station:
• The maximum number of of modules is 64.
This includes:
- interface module
- power modules
- electronic modules
- modules for reserve
- motor starter
• The maximum length of the parameters is 244 bytes (depending on the DP master
used).
The following table contains the parameter length of the different modules in bytes:
Module Parameters
(bytes)
PAA /PA E
(bytes)
Module Parameters
(bytes)
PAA/PAE
(bytes)
PM-D 3 0/0 DS-x1 3 1/1 1)
PM-D F1 3 0/0 RS-x1 3 1/1 1)
PM-D F2 3 0/0 DS1e-x 12 2/2
PM-D F3 3 0/0 RS1e-x 12 2/2
PM-D F4 3 0/0 DSS1e-x 12 2/2
PM-D F5 3 0/0 F-DS1e-x 12 2/2
PM-X 1 0/0 F-RS1e-x 12 2/2
PM-D F X1 3 0/0 DS1e-x ab -.AB422
3) 2/2
F-CM 3 0/0 RS1e-x ab -.AB422
3) 2/2
PM-D F PROFIsafe 20 5/5 DSS1e-x ab -.AB422
3) 2/2
xB3 3 1/1 1)
xB4 3 1/1 1)
xB1 - 2) 0/0
xB2 - 2) 0/0
xB5 - 2) 0/0
xB6 3 1/1 1)
DM V15 - 2) 0/0
1) 2 bits each in PAA/PAE are used; addresses can be packed
2) Not included with the configuration tool
3) This shows that max. 10 starters could be operated on a head-end in the DPV0 operating mode from the point of view of data volume frame-
work: 22 bytes + (10 * 22 bytes) = 242 bytes.
Table 1-7: Parameter length of the modules
Product overview
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 1-19
• The following table shows you the maximum current-carrying capacity of the modules
you have to take into consideration:
Power modules Maximum current-
carrying capacity Modules that can be connected
PM-D 10 A The number of modules that can
be connected depends on the
total current of all the modules
in this potential group. This
must not exceed the relevant
maximum current-carrying
capacity.
PM-D F1
4 A
(see Section 11.3.3)
PM-D F2
PM-D F3
PM-D F4
PM-D F5
PM-D F X1 6 A
PM-D F PROFIsafe Making current:10 A
Continuous current:5
A
Table 1-8: Maximum current-carrying capacity
Product overview
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
1-20 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
1.4 PROFIenergy
What is PROFIenergy
PROFIenergy is a manufacturer-independent profile on PROFINET. The profile
supports the shutdown in idle times (energy-saving function), measurement of
the energy flow (measurement function) and the status function that is used to
export the current status conditions and other information on PROFIenergy.
PROFIenergy uses field-tested PROFINET mechanisms ensuring rapid and sim-
ple implementation
Origination
Both standards and regulations are increasingly focussing on environmental pro-
tection and energy management as well as the desire to save energy costs in a
production plant and thus secure a sustainable competitive advantage. As a
result, the aim of industry is to save energy and to actively reduce CO2 emis-
sions. The careful use of valuable resources means that the manacturer-non-
specific PROFIenergy profile defined on PROFINET PROFIenergy makes an
active contribution to environmental protection.
PROFIenergy (version 1.0) in the ET 200S motor starter (from order suffix: -.AB4)
PROFIenergy allows consumption data from the equipment to be read in a stan-
dardized format. This data is recorded during operation and displayed on control
device, for example, or transferred to higher level energy management software
packages. This ensures that these measurements, as currently present in
motor starters, are available to the user for onward processing in a standard-
ized, manufacturer-nonspecific defined format and structure. These functions
von PROFIenergy therefore form the basis for an active load and energy man-
agement system in ongoing operations.
The system and device manufacturers provide the user with function blocks for
PROFIenergy and implement the relevant commands and status functions in
the field devices. The plant and machinery engineer and the plant operator
coordinate the switch-on and switch-off sequences as before, as well as the
enabling signals for the process. The control stores which components are
switched off with which pause type. The system operator does not need to get
involved with the technology in detail.
Product overview
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 1-21
1.5 Guide to the ET 200S manuals
The components of the ET 200S are described in various manuals in the
ET 200S manual package. The examples below show the possible ET 200S con-
figurations and the manuals required for them.
You use the following components ...
ET 200S Motor Starters
ET 200S Distributed I/O Device
ET 200S Distributed I/O Device
Fail-Safe Motor Starters
IM 151
PM-E
2DI
PM-D
DO2
2AI
2AO
IM 151
PM-E
2DI
DO2
2AI
2AO
DS-x1 DS-x1
ET 200S Distributed I/O Device
IM 151
PM-E
2DI
DO2
1SSI
2PULSE
+
+
ET 200S Process-Related Functions
IM 151
PM-E
2DI
DO2
1Posinc/Dig.
1Posinc/An.
IM 151
PM-E
2DI
DO2
2AI
Modbus/USS
Safety-Integrated Systems
ET 200S Distributed I/O Device
IM 151/
PM-E
2DI
DO2
2AI
2AO
CPU
+
IM 151/CPU Interface Module
ET 200S Distributed I/O Device
+
ET 200S Positioning
ET 200S Distributed I/O Device
+
ET 200S Serial Interface Module
6ES7151-1AA10-8xA0 1)
6ES7151-1AA10-8xA0 1)
Available on the Internet
6ES7151-1AA10-8xA0 1)
Available on the Internet
6ES7151-1AA10-8xA0 1)
Available on the Internet
6ES7151-1AA10-8xA0 1)
Available on the Internet
6ES7151-1AA10-8xA0 1)
1) x = The documentation packages or manuals can be ordered in the following languages:
A = German
B = English
French, Spanish, and Italian are also available on the Internet.
ET 200S consists of the fol-
lowing components:
You need the information
from the following manu-
als:
Order numbers of the
required documenta-
tion packages and
manuals
Product overview
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
1-22 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
You use the following fail-safe components ...
PM-D F PROFIsafe
IM 151-1 HF
PM-E
F DI
F DI
F DO
F DO
F-DS1e-x F-DS1e-x
ET 200S Distributed I/O Device
IM 151-1 HF
PM-E
2DI
DO2
F DI
F DO
+
+
PM-E
ET 200S Distributed I/O Device
Fail-safe modules
6ES7151-1AA10-8xA0 1)
Available on the Internet
1) x = The documentation packages or manuals can be ordered in the following languages:
A = German
B = English
ET 200S Distributed I/O Device
Fail-safe modules Available on the Internet
ET 200S Motor Starters
ET 200S Distributed I/O Device
Fail-Safe Motor Starters
+
Safety-Integrated Systems
6ES7151-1AA10-8xA0 1)
French, Spanish, and Italian are also available on the Internet.
Product overview
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 1-23
Where do you find information?
The following table is designed to help you quickly find the information you
need. It tells you which manual you need to refer to and which section deals
with the topic you are interested in.
Subject
Manual section/appendix
ET 200S Motor Starters
Fail-Safe Motor Starters
ET 200S
Distributed I/O Device
IM 151/CPU
Interface Module
ET 200S
Process-Related Functions
ET 200S
Positioning
ET 200S
Serial Interface Module
Distributed I/O System
ET 200S Fail-Safe Modules
Safety-Integrated Systems in S7
System Description
S7 Distributed Safety
Configuration and Programming
Components of ET 200S
111 222
Brief instructions
222
Configuration options
134 33
Communication
4
Configuration
473
Addressing
25
Mounting
34 5
Electrical layout and wiring of the ET 200S
56
Programming
85
Commissioning and diagnostics
46 7
Functions
10 5
Function diagrams
General technical specifications
57 8
Technical specifications
6,
11-13
6 2-5 2 2, 3
Terminal modules
7, 11 ,
13
9
Power modules
7, 1 0 ,
12
10
Direct and soft starters
8
Reversing starters
9
ET 200S safety-integrated system
10
Interface modules
8
Electronic modules
11-15
Positioning modules
3-6
Expansion modules
12
Fail-safe modules
13 9
Monitoring, cycle, and response times
7129
Order numbers
BA 11
Dimensioned drawings
CB 10
Applications
D
Glossary
Gl Gl Gl 13 10 9
Product overview
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
1-24 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 2-1
Brief commissioning instructions 2
Brief instructions
Section Subject Page
2.1 Introduction and purpose of the example 2-2
2.2 ET 200S components 2-3
2.3 Requirements 2-4
2.4 Installation 2-4
2.4.1 Circuitry for the example setup 2-6
2.5 Wiring and fitting 2-7
2.6 Configuring 2-8
2.7 Integration into the user program 2-10
2.8 Activation 2-11
2.9 Diagnostic options 2-12
2.9.1 Diagnosis via "Hardware configuration (HW Config)" from STEP 7 2-13
2.10 Help 2-14
Brief commissioning instructions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
2-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
2.1 Introduction and purpose of the example
Introduction
By means of the following example, you will learn how to commission the
ET 200S with motor starters step by step.
The DS1-x direct starter; standard is controlled by an ON button and an OFF
button connected to a 4DI DC24V ST module.
The STEP 7 software is used for configuration. The configuration and
parameterization is carried out in hardware configuration using STEP 7.
Purpose of the example
This example shall
1. show you how to commission a simple DS1-x direct starter; standard with
ET 200S in a few steps.
2. let you modify this example for your application.
3. help you easily realize other applications.
Essential steps
The essential steps with ET 200S are always as follows:
• Mounting of ET 200S components and the external wiring of control elements
(buttons) and actuators (e.g. motors)
• Configuration with STEP 7
• Integration into the user program
• Activation of the ET 200S
• Evaluation of the diagnostics
Information on PROFINET commissioning can be found in the SIMATIC
PROFINET system description manual. You can download the manual on the
internet from the following address:
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127
Brief commissioning instructions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 2-3
2.2 ET 200S components
Required components
The following table contains the components you need for this example:
Number Order number Description
1 According to design Short circuit and overload protection for
AC 400 V infeed
1 According to design Power supply unit for DC 24 V
1 According to design Button with normally open contact function
for ON
1 According to design Button with normally closed contact function
for OFF
1 According to design PLC with master for PROFIBUS-DP according
to your selection
1 6ES7151-1AA01-0AB0 Interface modules
IM151-1 STANDARD (with terminating
module)
1 6ES7193-4CE00-0AA0 Terminal module for PM-E DC24V
TM-P15S22-01
1 6ES7138-4CA00-0AA0 Power module for electronic modules
PM-E DC24V
1 6ES7193-4CB20-0AA0 Terminal module for 4DI DC24V ST
TM-E15S24-01
1 6ES7131-4BD00-0AA0 Digital electronic module with 4 inputs
4DI DC24V ST
1 3RK1903-0AA00 Terminal module for PM-D
TM-P15 S27-01 (with terminating cover)
1 3RK1903-0BA00 Power module for motor starter
PM-D
1 3RK1903-0AB00 Terminal module for DS1-x with infeed
TM-DS45-S32 (with 3 caps)
1 3RK1903-2AA00 Terminal block with infeed
PE/N (with 2 caps)
1 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 1) Direct starter; standard
DS1-x
1) xx = The current range should be selected according to your connected load.
Table 2-1: Components for the example
Brief commissioning instructions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
2-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
2.3 Requirements
The requirements for the example are as follows:
• You have set up an S7 station, consisting of a power supply module and a DP master
(e.g. CPU 315-2 DP). For this example, a CPU 315-2 DP was used as the DP master.
Every other DP master (standard: IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1) can naturally be used
as well.
• STEP 7 (V5.2 or later) is fully installed on your PG. You know how to use STEP 7.
• The PG is connected to the DP master.
Note
Information regarding the operation of STEP 7 can be found in the online help.
2.4 Installation
Warning
Dangerous electrical voltage! This can lead to electrical shock and burns.
Before starting work, de-energize the plant and device.
The following diagram shows you in which order you should mount the ET 200S
components to the mounting rails.
Figure 2-1: Components and setup for the example
IM
151-1
CPU
Master
Profibus-DP
PM-D
TM-P15 S27-01
3
DS-x1
4
PM-E
4DI
12
3 caps
315-2 DP
Power supply
ET 200SPLC
Slot in "STEP 7HW Config"
2 caps
PE/N
Terminating
cover
Terminating
module
Brief commissioning instructions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 2-5
Installation sequence
A precise mounting description can be found for the following:
• Installing terminal modules in Section 3.5
• Inserting power modules in Section 3.6
• Installing and removing motor starters in Section 3.7
For mounting, proceed as follows:
1. Mount both profile rails (35 x 7.5 mm or 15 mm)
with a length of at least 210 mm to a solid base
with a center-to-center-to-center clearance of
100 mm.
2. Start mounting the individual modules from the
left of the profile rail (suspend – pivot – push to
the left).
Observe the following sequence:
- Interface module IM151-1 STANDARD
- Terminal module TM-P15 S22-01
- Terminal module TM-E15 S24-01
- Terminal module TM-P15 S27-01
- Plug together the PE/N terminal block and terminal module TM-DS45-S32
- Mount terminal module TM-DS45-S32 to the mounting rail
3. On the right hand side of the TM-DS45-S32, position the following parts:
- The termination module (included with IM151-1)
- The end cover (included with TM-P15 S27-01)
- The 3 caps for L1 through L3 (included with TM-DS45-S32)
- The 2 caps for PE and N (included with PE/N terminal block)
(see Figure 2-1)
4. Set PROFIBUS address 3 on the interface module IM151-1 STANDARD.
Figure 2-2: Set PROFIBUS address 3
100 mm
PROFIBUS address 3
OFF ON
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
Coding switch under the slide
bottom right on the front
Brief commissioning instructions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
2-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
2.4.1 Circuitry for the example setup
The following diagram shows the circuitry of the main circuit and the control cir-
cuit for the example.
Figure 2-3: Circuitry for the example
Brief commissioning instructions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 2-7
2.5 Wiring and fitting
Perform the following steps:
1.
Caution
Provide sufficient short circuit and overload protection for the entire setup.
2. Wire the ET 200S as shown in Figure 2-3. The bolded external lines must
still be wired. These are:
- 400 VAC at L1 - L3 on the terminal module of the motor starter
- PE and N on terminal block PE/N
- Consumer (motor) at T1 - T3 and PE
- 24 VDC at IM151-1
- 24 VDC at terminal module for PM-E
- 24 VDC at terminal module for PM-D
- Both buttons for ON (normally open contact) and OFF (normally closed con-
tact)
3. Using the PROFIBUS bus connecting plug, connect the DP master with the
ET 200S. The PROFIBUS DP interface is located on the IM151-1 STAN-
DARD.
4. Plug the power and electronic modules and the motor starters into the ter-
minal modules.
5. Switch on the voltage supply for the DP master.
6. Observe the status LEDs on the DP master.
CPU 315-2 DP:
- 5 VDC green
- SF DP off
- BF flashes red
Note on power supply of motor starters; high feature with order number
suffix -.AB4
High feature motor starters with order number suffix -.AB4 that are not inte-
grated via
GSD/GSDML into the ET200S substation use extended start-up data records:
To ensure that the high feature motor starters are automatically assigned the
extended start-up data records on the re-start of the ET200S substation, the
electronics power supply (U1 of the PM-D module) of the high feature motor
starter must be supplied from the same voltage source as the interface module
(header module).
Brief commissioning instructions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
2-8 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
2.6 Configuring
1. Start the SIMATIC Manager and create a new project with a
DP master (e.g. CPU315-2 DP) (see Figure 2-4).
2. Generate the PROFIBUS subnet.
3. Add the ET 200S to PROFIBUS from the hardware catalogue.
4. Set PROFIBUS address 3 for ET 200S.
5. Drag the individual ET 200S modules from the hardware catalog into the
configuration table (see Figure 2-4).
Table 2-2: Configuration table in STEP 7 "hardware configuration"
Note
Brake modules xB1, xB2 and xB5 are not configured in the hardware configura-
tion of STEP 7.
Module/
DP code
Order number Input
address
Output
address
Comment
1 6ES7138-4CA00-0AA0 Power module
PM-E DC24V
2 6ES7131-4BD00-0AA0 0.0 - 0.3 Input module
4DI DC24V ST
3 3RK1903-0BA00 Power module
PM-D 1)
4 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 2) 1.0 - 1.3 0.0 - 0.3 Motor starter
DS1-x
1) Can be found in the module selection under "Motor starters."
2) xx = The current range should be selected according to your connected load.
Brief commissioning instructions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 2-9
You should then see the following screen.
Figure 2-4: Modules in STEP 7 "hardware configuration"
Parameter setting
6. To obtain diagnoses of the modules, set the following parameters for the
individual modules:
-In the Properties of DP Slave for ET 200S dialog box
Start at setpoint <> actual setup: Enable
Module change during operation: Enable
- In the Properties of DP Slave for PM-E DC24V dialogue box:
Module/DP code 1 (in the configuration table)
Diagnosis: Missing load voltage
- In the Properties of DP Slave for PM-D dialogue box:
Module/DP code 3 (in the configuration table)
Diagnosis: Enable collective diagnosis
- In the Properties of DP Slave for DS1-x dialogue box:
Module/DP Code 4 (in the configuration table)
Diagnosis: Enable collective diagnosis
7. Save the configuration.
2.6.1 Design of 24 VDC power pack for F-DS1e-x, FRS1e-x failsafe motor starter
When configuring the 24 VDC power pack for the voltage U1, ensure that the
power pack has a current of 1.5A * number of starters when the test function of
several motor starters is activated.
See technical specifications page 8-23
Brief commissioning instructions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
2-10 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
2.7 Integration into the user program
1. Create the user program using the KOP/AWL/FUP editor in OB1.
2. Save the project in the SIMATIC Manager.
3. Load the configuration in the DP master.
AWL
U E 0.0 And input 0.0 (ON button)
S A 0.0 Set output 0.0
UN E 0.1 And not input 0.1 (OFF button)
R A 0.0 Reset output 0.0
Brief commissioning instructions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 2-11
2.8 Activation
1. Switch on the following voltage supplies on ET 200S.
- IM151-1 STANDARD
- PM-E DC24V
- PM-D with U1 and U2
- Do not yet switch on supply voltage 400 VAC!
2. Observe the status LEDs on the DP master and ET 200S
- CPU 315-2 DP:
5 VDC: Lights up
SF DP: off
BF: Off
3. Observe the status LEDs on IM151-1 STANDARD.
- SF off
- BF off
- ON green
4. Observe the status LEDs on PM-E DC24V
- SF off
- PWR green
5. Observe the status LEDs on 4DI DC24V ST
- DI0 off
- DI1 green
- DI2 off
- DI3 green
6. Observe the status LEDs on PM-D
- SF off
- PWR green
- CON green
7. Observe the status LEDs on motor starter DS1-x
- SF off
- C-STAT off
Brief commissioning instructions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
2-12 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Check the wiring
Check the correct wiring of the ON and OFF buttons.
8. Press the ON button
Watch the LEDs
- 4DI DC24V ST, DI0 green
- Motor starter DS1-x, C-STAT yellow
9. Press the OFF button
Watch the LEDs
- 4DI DC24V ST, DI1 off
- Motor starter DS1-x, C-STAT off
10. Switch on the supply voltage AC 400 V for the motor starter.
Danger
Make sure that no dangerous live parts can be touched.
11. Repeat steps 8 and 9 whilst observing the behavior of the connected con-
sumer.
Warning
Make sure that the actuators connected to the motor starters do not present a
danger (e.g. uncontrolled rotary movements of the motor).
2.9 Diagnostic options
There are several options for accessing the diagnostics of the ET 200S modules:
• via the DP diagnostics modules for SIMATIC S7 "FB125" or "FC125".
You can download both modules and a description in PDF format from the following
web address:
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/26996747
•via STEP 7 "Hardware configuration" S7 (or STEP 7+ in "Devices and power systems").
See following Section 2.9.1
• using the convenient parameterization and diagnostics software "Motor Starter ES".
Using this software, which is integrated into S7, it is very easy and convenient to
parameterize, operate and observe (diagnosis) the ET 200S High Feature motor
starter.
Information about functionality and license types can be found online at the following
address:
DE: http://www.siemens.de/sirius/software
EN: http://www.siemens.com/sirius/software
Brief commissioning instructions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 2-13
2.9.1 Diagnosis via "Hardware configuration (HW Config)" from STEP 7
1. Open the "STEP 7 "Hardware configuration"" window in the SIMATIC Man-
ager on your computer or programming device.
2. Open the "Online" station.
3. Simulate the various errors and observe the messages in the "DP Slave diag-
nosis" status window such as:
- Pull out and plug in the motor starter in the ON state and the OFF state
-Switch off the U1 and/or U2 voltages at the PM-D
- Trip the circuit breaker
In the following image, for example, a motor starter has been removed from
Slot 7.
Figure 2-5: View of the "DP Slave Diagnosis" status window
4. After every performed action, press the F5 on the computer/programming
device to update the status window. The IM151-1 module is marked by a
red dot with a white cross in case of an error message.
5. Double-click the missing station to display the module state of IM151-1
("General" tab). For precise error diagnosis, select "DP Slave Diagnosis." The
individual diagnoses of the malfunctioning slave are shown in text form.
Brief commissioning instructions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
2-14 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
2.10 Help
If you have problems or questions, please contact:
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 3-1
Installation 3
Section Subject Page
3.1 Slot rules 3-2
3.2 Installation rules 3-3
3.3 Installation measurements and clearances 3-5
3.4 Derating 3-6
3.4.1 What is derating? 3-6
3.4.2 Derating factors 3-6
3.4.3 DM-V15 spacing module 3-9
3.4.4 DM-V15 spacing module 3-10
3.5 Installing terminal modules 3-17
3.6 Inserting power modules 3-20
3.7 Installing and removing motor starters 3-22
3.7.1 Standard motor starter with installation width of 45 or 90 mm 3-23
3.7.2 High feature/failsafe motor starter with installation width of 65 or
130 mm
3-29
3.8 Inserting the terminating module, terminating cover and caps 3-36
3.9 Labeling motor starters 3-38
Installation
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
3-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
3.1 Slot rules
Compliance with the following slot rules is essential in order to ensure correct
and reliable operation of an ET 200S system.
Rule Module
The slot immediately to the right of an
IM 151 module is always occupied by a...
•PM-E
•PM-D
• PM-D F1 to 4 1)
• PM-E F PROFIsafe
•PM-D F X1
• PM-D F PROFIsafe
The slot immediately to the left of a PM-X
module is always occupied by a...
• Motor starter DS1-x
DS1e-x
RS...
•PM-D
•PM-D F1 to 5
•xB1 to xB6
The slot immediately to the left of an xB1
to xB6 module is always occupied by a ...
•DS-x1
•DS1e-x
• DSS1e-x 3)
•F-DS1e-x
4)
•RS-x1
•RS1e-x
• F-RS1e-x 4)
Between a PM-D F1 to F5 and a PM-X
module there must never be a...
• DSS1e-x
•F-DS1e-x
•F-RS1e-x
The slot immediately to the left of a PM-
D F5 module is always occupied by a...
• Motor starter DS...
RS...
•PM-D F1 to 5
•xB1 to xB6
The slot immediately to the right of a PM-
D F X1 module is always occupied by a...
•F-CM
•F-DS1e-x
•F-RS1e-x
•PM-D F X1
The slot immediately to the left of an F-
CM module is always occupied by a...
•PM-D F X1
• PM-D F PROFIsafe
•F-DS1e-x
•F-RS1e-x
•xB1 to xB6
•F-CM
1) Precondition for PM-D F3, 4 is that another row of the same EMERGENCY STOP group must include a PM-D F1, 2 basic unit
2) The inputs of xB3, xB4 have no function
3) See Section 12.3
4) Depending on the performance level for xB3, xB4 and xB6, see Section 8.3, 9.3
Table 3-1: Slot rules
Installation
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 3-3
3.2 Installation rules
Easy installation
The ET 200S distributed I/O device is designed for easy installation.
To install an ET 200S with power modules, first snap on the terminal modules
and then insert the power modules and motor starters into them.
Installation rules for the configuration of an ET 200S with motor starters
To install an ET 200S, comply with the following installation rules (also see the
figures in Section 1.2, ET 200S configuration options):
• The components are arranged in a single line in groups.
• Each line begins on the left with an IM 151 interface module.
• A power module comes after the interface module or at the beginning of each
potential group.
• Groups with motor starters require special power modules with connections
for contactor supply voltage.
• The ET 200S distributed I/O device ends with the termination module, motor
starters additionally with an end cover and with cover caps for the power
bus.
Station width, number of modules and usable motor starters of an ET 200S rail
The station width, the number of connectable modules, and usable motor
starters of an ET 200S rail depend on the IM 151 interface module used.
Information regarding the IM 151 interface module can be found in the "ET 200S
Distributed I/O Device" manual.
Removing the cover cap in the case of a backplane bus connector
Remove the cover cap at the rear of the motor starter before you plug the motor
starter onto the terminal module!
Bild 3-1: Cover cap in the case of a backplane bus connector
Installation
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
3-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Installation position and station width
Both perpendicular and parallel installation positions on a perpendicular mount-
ing surface of a mounting rail are permissible.
Here, the following rules apply for motor starters:
.
Figure 3-2: Installation on rails
Rail
The ET 200S distributed I/O device is installed on profile rails complying with
EN 50022 (35 x 7.5 mm or 35 x 15 mm). To install an ET 200S with motor
starters you need two profile rails installed with center-to-center clearance of
100 mm.
Important
We recommend screwing the rails to the fixing surface at intervals of 200 mm.
Please note:
During configuration, please observe the following points:
• A suitable IM 151 interface module depending on the used motor starters for
the intended station width.
• Sufficient parameter capacity.
• Sufficient heat dissipation in the switch cabinet.
• Any required derating for the motor starter (see Section 3.4).
Motor starters Horizontal profile rails Vertical profile rails
standard
DS1-x,
RS1-x
max. 2 m
max. 1 m
high feature
DS1e-x, RS1e-x max. 2 m
fail-safe
F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x
Table 3-2: Installation position and station width
Perpendicular installation on
horizontal rails Parallel installation on
vertical rails
Installation
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 3-5
3.3 Installation measurements and clearances
Measure-
ments Module mm
Installation
width
Terminal module for
• PM-D power module
• DM-V15 spacing module
• PM-X connection module (safety-integrated system)
• PM-D power module F1 to F5 (safety-integrated system)
• PM-D F PROFIsafe power module
• PM-D F X1 power module
• DS1-x direct starter; standard
• DS1e-x direct starter; high feature
• DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature
• Fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter
• RS1-x reversing starter; standard
• RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature
• Fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starter
15
15
15
30
30
30
45
65
65
65
90
130
130
Installation
height
Terminal module for direct and reversing starters; standard with installation
width of 45 or 90 mm
• With 3-pin power bus (L1, L2, L3)
• With 5-pin power bus (incl. PE/N)
Terminal module for direct and reversing starters; high feature or fail-safe,
with installation width of 65 or 130 mm
• With 3-pin power bus (L1, L2, L3)
• With 5-pin power bus (incl. PE/N)
264
306
290
332
Installation
depth
ET 200S on rail with 7.5 mm depth:
• ET 200S
• ET 200S for motor starters; standard with 45 or 90 mm installation
width
• ET 200S for motor starters; standard with 45 or 90 mm installation
width and safety-integrated system
• ET 200S for motor starters; high feature or fail-safe with 65 or 130 mm
installation width
• ET 200S for motor starters; high feature or fail-safe with 65 or 130 mm
installation width and 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control module
• ET 200S for motor starters; high feature or fail-safe with 65 or 130 mm
installation width and 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control module with
LOGO! PC cable
75
127
152
157
180
220
Minimum
spacing for
installation
and wiring
• Above and below the terminal module
• To the left of the IM 151 interface module
• To the right of the ET 200S terminating module
• Under the installed shield bus
35
20
20
15
Table 3-3: Installation measurements and clearances
Installation
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
3-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
3.4 Derating
3.4.1 What is derating?
Derating refers to the use of devices in difficult operating conditions by selec-
tively limiting their performance. In the case of motor starters, this generally
involves operating at high ambient temperatures.
3.4.2 Derating factors
The following applies exclusively to the following motor starters, which are
installed side by side in a row.
• Standard motor starter:
- DS1-x
• High Feature motor starters:
- DS1e-x 2.4 - 16
- RS1e-x 2.4 - 16A
- DSS1e-x 2.4 - 16A
• Fail-safe motor starters:
- F-DS1e-x
- F-RS1e-x
In the case of the ET 200S motor starters, the following factors must be taken
into account in difficult environmental conditions:
• Ambient temperature Tu:
The ambient temperature Tu is the temperature surrounding the housing of
the motor starter.
The lower the max. ambient temperature Tu, the higher the current load
within the motor starter can be.
• Absolute current load:
The lower the current through a motor starter, the lower the heat loss in the
device. If the device does not generate much heat, the ambient temperature
Tu can be higher.
Installation
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 3-7
Motors with a high efficiency and high motor starting currents
High starting currents may have to be taken into consideration when using motor
starters on high-efficiency motors. Motor starters are designed for motors with a
maximum 8-fold starting current in accordance with IEC 60947-4-2. If motors are
operated that have a higher starting current, refer to the following table for the max-
imum adjustable motor current:
Motor starter version Ie [A]
at 40°C max. motor
starting current
< 8-fold Ie9-fold Ie10-fold Ie
3RK1301-0AB* 3 A 2,9 A 2,6 A
3RK1301-0BB* 8 A 6,8 A 6 A
3RK1301-0CB* 16 A 13 A 12 A
ET 200S High Feature motor starters
Motor starter version Ie [A]
at 40°C max. motor
starting current
< 8-fach Ie9-fach Ie10-fach Ie
3RK1301-0BB00* 0,2 A 0,18 A 0,16 A
3RK1301-0CB00* 0,25 A 0,22 A 0,2 A
3RK1301-0DB00* 0,32 A 0,29 A 0,26 A
3RK1301-0EB00* 0,4 A 0,35 A 0,3 A
3RK1301-0FB00* 0,5 A 0,41 A 0,32 A
3RK1301-0GB00* 0,63 A 0,49 A 0,4 A
3RK1301-0HB00* 0,8 A 0,65 A 0,5 A
3RK1301-0JB00* 1 A 0,85 A 0,7 A
3RK1301-0KB00* 1,25 A 1 A 0,8 A
3RK1301-1AB00* 1,6 A 1,3 A 1 A
3RK1301-1BB00* 2 A 1,65 A 1,3 A
3RK1301-1CB00* 2,5 A 2,1 A 1,7 A
3RK1301-1DB00* 3,2 A 2,65 A 2,1 A
3RK1301-1EB00* 4 A 3,25 A 2,5 A
3RK1301-1FB00* 5 A 4,1 A 3,2 A
ET 200S standard motor starters
Installation
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
3-8 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Site altitude
If site altitude is above 1000 m, the following are necessary:
• A reduction in the rated current for thermal reasons
• A reduction in rated voltage on account of the diminished dielectric strength
The diagram below plots the reduction in rated device current and rated operat-
ing voltage as a function of site altitude:
Figure 3-3: Reductions as a function of site altitude
3RK1301-1GB00* 6,3 A 5,15 A 4 A
3RK1301-1HB00* 8 A 6,6 A 5,3 A
3RK1301-1JB00* 10 A 8,5 A 7 A
3RK1301-1KB00* 12 A 10 A 8 A
Motor starter version Ie [A]
at 40°C max. motor
starting current
< 8-fach Ie9-fach Ie10-fach Ie
ET 200S standard motor starters
Installation
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 3-9
3.4.3 DM-V15 spacing module
If operating conditions are difficult and render derating necessary, a DM-V15
spacing module is inserted between the corresponding motor starters.
The DM-V15 spacing module is suitable for all motor starter series. It is entirely
passive and requires no configuration. The bus and all the other connections
are looped through for the following modules.
The elements of the spacing module are illustrated below.
Figure 3-4: DM-V15 spacing module
Note
No specific measurements are required for the following motor starters:
- RS1-x reversing starter; standard
- DS1e-x direct starter; high feature, order number suffix -.AA2, -.AA4
- DS1e-x direct starter; high feature, 0.3 - 3A, 2.4 - 8A, order number suffix -.AB4
- DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature, order number suffix -.AA2, -.AA4
- DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature, 0.3 - 3A, 2.4 - 8A
order number suffix -.AB4
- RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature, order number suffix -.AA2, -.AA4
RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature, 0.3 - 3A, 2.4 - 8A
order number suffix -.AB4
Bus
AUX1
AUX2/3 or SG5/6
RF1/2 or SG1/2
Ventilation grid
Support
Supply voltage U1 for elec-
tronics
Supply voltage U2 for con-
tactors or SG3/4
Installation
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
3-10 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
3.4.4 Criteria for configurations with/without DM-V15 spacing module
The graphics below show under which criteria and designs distance modules
are recommended.
Criteria for DS1-x
Vertical installation on horizontal rails
Figure 3-5: Criteria for vertical installation on horizontal mounting rails with DS1-x
Installation
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 3-11
Horizontal installation on vertical rails
Figure 3-6: Criteria for horizontal installation on vertical mounting rails with DS1-x
Installation
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
3-12 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Criteria for DS1e-x, RS1e-x, DSS1e-x with order number suffix -.AB4
Vertical installation on horizontal rails
Figure 3-7: Criteria for vertical installation on horizontal rails with DS1e-x, RS1e-x and DSS1e-x
2.4 - 16A with order number suffix -.AB4
Installation
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 3-13
Horizontal installation on vertical rails
Horizontal installation is permissible for an ambient temperature up to
Tu = 40°C.
Derating and therefore a DM-V15 is not required for high feature motor starters
installed horizontally up to a temperature of Tu = 40 °C.
Installation
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
3-14 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Criteria for F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x
Vertical installation on horizontal rails
Figure 3-8: Criteria for vertical installation on horizontal rails with F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x
Caution
Above an ambient temperature of Tu ≥ 50 °C, a DM-V15 must be inserted
between a PM-D F PROFIsafe and an F-DS1e-x.
Installation
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 3-15
Example:
The following sample configuration shows you when a DM-V15 spacing module
is recommended.
Figure 3-9: Configuration example for derating
The following criteria were taken into consideration in this example:
• The ambient temperature Tu is 55°C.
• A3 is necessary because Tu > 50 °C and A4 is an F-DS1e-x on the right of a
PM-D F PROFIsafe.
• A4 is loaded with 3 A (100%) and therefore a DM-V15 is not necessary.
• A5 is loaded with 12 A (75%) and therefore a DM-V15 (A7) is required next to
the brake control module.
• A8 is loaded with 12 A (75%) and therefore a DM-V15 is required on the right
(A9) and left (A7).
• A10 is loaded with 7.2 A (90%) and therefore a DM-V15 is required on the left
(A9). The DM-V15 to the right of A10 is not necessary because the ET 200S
station is finished at this point.
The following diagram shows you how to determine when a DM-V15 is neces-
sary.
Figure 3-10: Determining the derating for a configuration example
Motor current as % of the maximum current setting Ie
Ie
50 % 75 % 100 %90 %
60 °C
Tu
50 °C
55 °C A5 A8 A10 A4
Installation
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
3-16 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Horizontal installation on vertical rails
Horizontal installation is permissible for an ambient temperature up to
Tu = 40°C.
Derating and therefore a DM-V15 is not required for fail-safe motor starters
installed horizontally up to a temperature of Tu = 40°C.
Other configurations
The configurations shown above can also be combined, in which case the derat-
ing factors specified above change. In these circumstances, please contact
your Siemens contact person or Technical Assistance.
Installation
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 3-17
3.5 Installing terminal modules
Features
• Terminal modules replace the control wiring in the switch cabinet and are
mechanical carriers for the function modules (e.g. the power modules and the
motor starters).
• With the terminal modules, you can completely prewire the switch cabinet
without the power modules and motor starters being fitted.
Requirements
• Two rails are installed (center-to-center spacing 100 mm).
• Space is left for the IM 151 interface module.
Mechanical coding of the modules
When the module is first inserted, the terminal module is mechanically coded to
ensure that, in the event of a fault, it can only be replaced by a module with
identical functions.
If a brand-new module is plugged into a terminal module that is already coded,
the part of the code element for the terminal module must be removed from the
module beforehand.
Note the configured structure when installing and identify the terminal modules
using the labels (see Section 3.2).
Installing terminal modules for motor starters
The example below illustrates the installation of terminal modules with an
installation width of 45 mm for direct starter; standard.
Drawing Procedure
1Hang the terminal module on the upper rail.
Table 3-4: Installing terminal modules - example: direct starter; standard
Installation
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
3-18 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
2Tilt the terminal module backwards into the
lower rail until you hear it engage.
3Push the terminal to the left with both hands
towards the module you have already installed,
keeping it straight, until you can hear it engage
with the adjacent module.
Drawing Procedure
Table 3-4: Installing terminal modules - example: direct starter; standard (Contd.)
Installation
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 3-19
Removing terminal modules for motor starters
Warning
Switch off all the connected supply voltage!
You can only remove a terminal module if there are no modules connected on
the right. If necessary, you must remove all the modules on the right or move
them to the side.
The example below illustrates the removal of terminal modules with an installa-
tion width of 45 mm for direct starter; standard.
Drawing Procedure
1Use a screwdriver (5 mm) to push down the
locking mechanism of the next module to the
left.
2With the locking mechanism of the neighboring
module open, pull the module to be removed
to the right parallel to the rails.
Table 3-5: Removing terminal modules - example: direct starter; standard
Installation
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
3-20 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
3.6 Inserting power modules
Requirements
Before inserting power modules, the following requirements must be met:
• Both rails must be installed.
• The terminal module for the power module must be installed.
3Unlock the module by inserting the screwdriver
in the opening of the locking mechanism and
pushing the locking mechanism downward.
This unlocks both the upper and lower rail.
4With the locking mechanism depressed, tilt the
module so that it comes off the lower rail.
You can then remove the module from the
upper rail.
Drawing Procedure
Table 3-5: Removing terminal modules - example: direct starter; standard (Contd.)
Installation
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 3-21
Mechanical coding
When the modules are inserted, the corresponding terminal module is mechani-
cally coded (two coding elements) to ensure that, in the event of a fault, it can
only be replaced by a module with identical functions.
You must therefore bear the config-
ured layout in mind when you insert
the modules.
The illustration on the right shows the
coding of a PM-D power module by
way of example.
Incorrectly inserted code elements
can be removed from the terminal
module using a 3 mm screwdriver.
Note
If a brand-new module is plugged into
a terminal module that is already
coded, the part of the code element
for the terminal module must be
removed from the module beforehand.
Figure 3-11: Mechanical coding of terminal mod-
ules
Inserting power modules
Insert the power module onto the installed and prewired terminal module as
shown in the drawing. Power modules can only be connected to the correct ter-
minal modules regardless of the code element.
Figure 3-12: Inserting power modules
Code elements
Power module
Terminal module
PM-D
or
PM-D F1 to 4 TM-P15 S27-01
or
TM-PF30 S45
Installation
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
3-22 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
3.7 Installing and removing motor starters
Requirements
• Both rails must be installed.
• All the terminal modules for the power modules and motor starters must be
installed.
Note
Before installation, check the socket and plug on the rear wall bus interface. It is
not permissible to use any damaged sockets. The plugs must be straight and
central in sequence.
Note
The rear wall bus must only be engaged after the power bus has been con-
nected. Never engage both connections at the same time.
Mechanical coding
When the motor starters are installed, the terminal modules are mechanically
coded to ensure that, in the event of a fault, they can only be replaced by mod-
ules with identical functions.
If a brand-new module is plugged into a terminal module that is already coded,
the part of the code element for the terminal module must be removed from the
module beforehand.
You must therefore bear the configured layout in mind when you insert the mod-
ules.
Installation
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 3-23
3.7.1 Standard motor starter with installation width of 45 or 90 mm
Installing standard motor starters
• The motor starters are inserted in the installed terminal modules, whereby
two "latched positions" must be observed. Depending on the position, electri-
cal connections are established or disconnected at removal. The locking
spring prevents you removing the motor starters under load.
• The following table describes how the motor starters should be installed,
using the example of a direct starter; standard.
Drawing Procedure/Description
1Slide the motor starter; standard
at a slight incline (see figure)
from the front into the terminal
module.
Avoid a lateral slope.
Push firmly on the lower part until
contact is established with the
power bus.
• The motor starter; standard
remains slightly inclined, and
the latch piece is not
engaged.
• The locking spring is not yet
engaged.
The motor starter; standard is
mechanically insecure in this
position and connected only to
the power bus.
Table 3-6: Motor starter; standard with installation width of 45 or 90 mm: installation
1Locking spring
Latch piece
Installation
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
3-24 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
2
3
Press the latch piece and move
the motor starter further towards
the rail until the latch piece
engages.
The motor starter; standard is
now located in the parked posi-
tion.
Parked position
• The connection to the back-
plane bus is not yet estab-
lished.
• There is no supply to the elec-
tronic components.
• The connection to the power
bus is established. The con-
tactors cannot respond, how-
ever, because there is no con-
nection to the backplane bus
and the electronic compo-
nents and switching com-
mands thus remain ineffec-
tive.
4
5
Press the latch piece again and
move the motor starter further
towards the DIN rail until the
latch piece engages again.
The motor starter; standard is
now located in the operating
position.
Operating position
• The connection to the back-
plane bus is established. The
electronic components and
contactors are supplied with
power.
• The locking spring is
engaged.
The locking spring prevents the
motor starter from being
removed when live.
Drawing Procedure/Description
Table 3-6: Motor starter; standard with installation width of 45 or 90 mm: installation (Contd.)
3
2
2
4
5
4
Locking spring
Installation
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 3-25
Removing the standard motor starter
A motor starter can be removed from the terminal module during operation.
The feeder must be dead, e.g. circuit breaker switched off. Before you can
remove the module, the latch piece must be taken beyond both latched posi-
tions, thus interrupting the electrical connections. The locking spring prevents
you removing the load feeders under load.
Important
If you remove more than one module from the ET 200S, the substation
switches to STOP mode.
Danger
In version 1 of the IM 151, no modules can be removed during operation. Mod-
ule replacement is only permitted when the supply of the IM 151 is switched
off.
The following table describes how the motor starters should be removed, using
the example of a reversing starter; standard.
Drawing Procedure/Description
1
2
Ensure that the motor starter is
switched off.
• Press both latches down.
• Move the latch piece beyond
the first latched position. The
connection to the bus and the
supply voltages is interrupted.
The motor starter is now in its
parked position, i.e. the con-
nection to the backplane bus
has been interrupted and the
module is (still) in a mechani-
cally secure position (see also
Table 3-5).
• Once you move the latch
piece beyond the second
latched position, the motor
starter is released, the locking
spring is disengaged and the
motor starter is no longer
mechanically secure.
Table 3-7: Motor starter; standard with installation width of 45 or 90 mm: removal
2
11
1
2
Locking spring
Installation
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
3-26 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Note
It is advisable to inform maintenance and service personnel in detail about cor-
rect handling of the motor starters before the system is handed over to ensure
that the advantages of ET 200S will be available immediately in the event of
replacement.
3Take hold of the load feeder in
both hands using the upper and
lower grip recesses, and pull the
motor starter out.
Pull the module from the bottom
in a continuous movement
(approx. 30 N tensile force) at an
angle out of the plug-in connec-
tion.
Drawing Procedure/Description
Table 3-7: Motor starter; standard with installation width of 45 or 90 mm: removal (Contd.)
3
Locking spring
Installation
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 3-27
Electrical connections during installation and removal
The figures below show the various installation and removal positions of a stan-
dard motor starter and the resultant electrical connections.
Drawing Description
Insertion or release position
The motor starter; standard is electri-
cally connected only to the power bus
in this position.
The locking spring is in the release
position, and the load feeder is
mechanically insecure in this position.
Parked position
The motor starter; standard is electri-
cally connected only to the power bus
in this position.
The connection to the backplane bus
is not established.
The supply to the contactors is estab-
lished but remains ineffective
because there is no connection to the
ET 200S backplane bus.
In this position, the feeder is mechan-
ically secured against falling out.
Table 3-8: El. connections with installation/removal of motor starter; standard (45 or 90 mm)
Installation
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
3-28 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Operating position
The connections to the backplane bus
and the supply to the electronic com-
ponents and to the contactors have
been established.
The locking spring is engaged, which
means the motor starter cannot be
removed.
Drawing Description
Table 3-8: El. connections with installation/removal of motor starter; standard (45 or 90 mm) (Contd.)
Installation
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 3-29
3.7.2 High feature/failsafe motor starter with installation width of 65 or 130 mm
Requirements
• Both rails must be installed.
• All the terminal modules for the power modules and motor starters must be
installed.
• The safety group (SG) must be specified in the terminal modules of the fail-
safe motor starters before the fail-safe motor starters are installed.
Specifying the safety group
Only relevant for the fail-safe motor starters.
One of the six safety groups can be coded for each terminal module.
The terminal modules can be arranged in any order.
The terminal modules are supplied coded for the SG1 safety group.
Use the light gray coding connector to set the safety group. The indentation
indicates the connection to which the contact of the coding connector applies.
The two dark gray coding connectors do not have any contacts.
To change the coding to another safety group, proceed as follows
• Coding for safety group SG2.
Pull the light gray coding plug (see the illustration below) from the terminal
module, turn it by 180°, and reinsert it.
• Coding for safety groups SG3 through SG6.
First pull out the dark gray coding plug for safety group SG3/4 or SG5/6. After
that, insert the light grey coding plug into the corresponding position. Insert
the dark gray coding plug in the free position.
Figure 3-13: Specifying the safety group
Safety note
Only one safety group can be selected for each terminal module.
State on delivery Example for SG2 Example for SG5
Installation
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
3-30 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Mechanical coding
When the motor starters are installed, the terminal modules are mechanically
coded to ensure that, in the event of a fault, they can only be replaced by power
modules with identical functions.
You must therefore bear the configured layout in mind when you insert the
modules.
Installing the motor starter; high feature/failsafe
• The motor starters are inserted in the installed terminal modules, whereby
two "latched positions" must be observed. Depending on the position, electri-
cal connections are established or disconnected at removal. The locking hook
prevents you removing the motor starters under load.
• The following table describes how the motor starters should be installed,
using the example of a direct starter; high feature.
Drawing Procedure/Description
1Slide the motor starter; high fea-
ture at a slight incline (see figure)
fron the front into the terminal
module.
Avoid a lateral slope.
Push firmly on the lower part until
contact is established with the
power bus.
• The motor starter; high fea-
ture remains slightly inclined,
and the latch piece is not
engaged.
• The locking hook is not yet
engaged.
The motor starter; high feature is
mechanically insecure in this
position and connected only to
the power bus.
Table 3-9: Installing high feature/failsafe motor starter with installation width of 65 or 130 mm
Latch piece
1
1
Installation
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 3-31
2
3
Press the latch piece and move
the motor starter further towards
the rail until the latch piece
engages.
The motor starter; high feature is
now located in the parked posi-
tion.
Parked position
• The connection to the back-
plane bus is not yet estab-
lished.
• There is no supply to the elec-
tronic components.
• The connection to the power
bus is established. The con-
tactors cannot respond, how-
ever, because there is no con-
nection to the backplane bus
and the electronic compo-
nents and switching com-
mands thus remain ineffec-
tive.
4
5
Press the latch piece again and
move the motor starter further
towards the DIN rail until the
latch piece engages again.
The motor starter; high feature is
now located in the operating
position.
Operating position
• The connection to the back-
plane bus is established. The
electronic components and
contactors are supplied with
power.
• The locking hook is engaged.
The locking hook prevents the
motor starter from being
removed when live.
Drawing Procedure/Description
Table 3-9: Installing high feature/failsafe motor starter with installation width of 65 or 130 mm (Contd.)
2
3
2
5
4
"A"
"A"
4
Locking hook
Installation
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
3-32 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Removing the motor starter; high feature/failsafe
A motor starter can be removed from the terminal module during operation.
The feeder must be dead, e.g. circuit breaker switched off. Before you can
remove the module, the latch piece must be taken beyond both latched posi-
tions, thus interrupting the electrical connections. The locking hook prevents
you removing the load feeders under load.
Important
If you remove more than one module from the ET 200S, the substation
switches to STOP mode.
Danger
In version 1 of the IM 151, no modules can be removed during operation. Mod-
ule replacement is only permitted when the supply of the IM 151 is switched
off.
The following table describes how the motor starters should be removed, using
the example of a reversing starter; high feature.
Drawing Procedure/Description
1
2
Ensure that the motor starter is
switched off.
• Press both latches down.
• Move the latch piece beyond
the first latched position. The
connection to the bus and the
supply voltages is interrupted.
The motor starter is now in its
parked position, i.e. the con-
nection to the backplane bus
has been interrupted and the
module is (still) in a mechani-
cally secure position (see also
Table 3-5).
• Once you move the latch
piece beyond the second
latched position, the motor
starter is released, the locking
hook is disengaged and the
motor starter is no longer
mechanically secure.
Table 3-10: Removing high feature/failsafe motor starter with installation width of 65 or 130 mm
1
1
1
2
2
Installation
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 3-33
Note
It is advisable to inform maintenance and service personnel in detail about cor-
rect handling of the motor starters before the system is handed over to ensure
that the advantages of ET 200S will be available immediately in the event of
replacement.
Caution
Check the F-DS1e-x or F-RS1e-x after the exchange
(see Section 8.3, 9.3).
3Take hold of the load feeder in
both hands using the upper and
lower grip recesses, and pull the
motor starter out.
Pull the module from the bottom
in a continuous movement
(approx. 30 N tensile force) at an
angle out of the plug-in connec-
tion.
Drawing Procedure/Description
Table 3-10: Removing high feature/failsafe motor starter with installation width of 65 or 130 mm (Contd.)
"A"
"A"
3
Locking hook
Installation
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
3-34 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Electrical connections during installation and removal
The figures below show the various installation and removal positions of a high
feature/failsafe motor starter and the resultant electrical connections.
Drawing Description
Insertion or release position
The motor starter; high feature is
electrically connected only to the
power bus in this position.
The locking hook is in the release
position, and the load feeder is
mechanically insecure in this position.
Parked position
The motor starter; high feature is
electrically connected only to the
power bus in this position.
The connection to the backplane bus
is not established.
The supply to the contactors is estab-
lished but remains ineffective
because there is no connection to the
ET 200S backplane bus.
In this position, the feeder is mechan-
ically secured against falling out.
Table 3-11: El. connections with installation/removal of high feature/failsafe motor starter
(65 or 130 mm)
Installation
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 3-35
Operating position
The connections to the backplane bus
and the supply to the electronic com-
ponents and to the contactors have
been established.
The locking hook is engaged, which
means the motor starter cannot be
removed.
Drawing Description
Table 3-11: El. connections with installation/removal of high feature/failsafe motor starter
(65 or 130 mm) (Contd.)
Installation
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
3-36 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
3.8 Inserting the terminating module, terminating cover
and caps
Terminating module
The last module to be installed in the ET 200S distributed I/O device is the ter-
minating module. The ET 200S is ready for operation only when the terminating
module is inserted. The terminating module module is included with the deliv-
ery of the IM 151interface module. More information can be found in the
SIMATIC ET 200S Distributed I/O Device manual.
Terminating cover
In a configuration with motor starters, a terminating cover has to be fitted to the
last terminal module of a potential group if it is followed by a PM-E or a termi-
nating module in order to ensure that open contacts are protected against dirt
and that the ET 200S is "finger-proof".
The terminating cover is supplied with the TM-P15 S27-01, TM-PF30 S47-B1/C1/
F1 and TM-PFX30 S47-G1 terminal modules for the power modules.
Caps
Warning
In the case of the last terminal module for motor starters in a load group, the
open contacts must be sealed with caps on the power bus (L1, L2, L3, N, PE)
prior to commissioning, so that they are safe from touching (push the caps on
firmly). This prevents the contacts being touched and removes the danger of an
electric shock (400 V AC).
When you add to the ET 200S station, you must remove the caps. Use a 1 mm
screwdriver to do this. Then replace the caps on the power bus of the new last
motor starter.
The caps are included in the delivery package of the terminal module for motor
starters with power bus infeed and of the terminal block with PE/N infeed.
If any caps are lost, replacements can be ordered using the following order
number: 3RK1903-0AF20.
Installation
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 3-37
Concluding the line of an ET 200S configuration
You can conclude the installation of the ET 200S distributed I/O device with
motor starters by inserting the following components:
Figure 3-14: Inserting the terminating module, terminating cover and caps
Installing the terminating module
1. Hang the terminating module on the upper rail.
2. Tilt the terminating module backwards onto the rail until you hear it engage.
3. Move the terminating module to the left until you hear it engage with the last
terminal module.
Removing the terminating module
1. Use a screwdriver (5 mm) to push the locking mechanism on the last termi-
nal module to the stop, and move the terminating module to the right.
2. Tilt the terminating module so that it comes off the rail.
Terminating module
Terminating cover
Caps to cover the power bus L1, L2, L3
and PE/N
Installation
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
3-38 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
3.9 Labeling motor starters
The labels for the ET200S motor starter, terminal and power modules can be
produced simply and efficiently from STEP 7 using the S7 Smartlabel program
(2XV9450-1SL03-0YX0).
Further information can be found online at the following web address:
https://www.industry.siemens.com/services/global/en/IT4Industry/products/
simatic_add_ons/s7_smartlabel/Pages/Default.aspx
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-1
Commissioning and diagnostics 4
Section Subject Page
4.1 Commissioning 4-3
4.2 Control kit 4-7
4.3 Control unit 4-8
4.4 2DI COM control module 4-9
4.5 2DI LC COM control module 4-13
4.6 Configuration 4-14
4.7 Diagnostics 4-23
4.7.1 Diagnosis and monitoring through the user program 4-23
4.7.2 Diagnosis by LEDs 4-27
4.8 LED indicators 4-27
4.8.1 Diagnosis of the PM-D power module 4-27
4.8.2 Diagnosis of the PM-D F1 power module 4-28
4.8.3 Diagnosis of the PM-D F2 power module 4-29
4.8.4 Diagnosis of the PM-D F3 power module 4-30
4.8.5 Diagnosis of the PM-D F4 power module 4-31
4.8.6 Diagnosis of the PM-D F5 power module 4-32
4.8.7 Diagnosis of the PM-X connection module 4-32
4.8.8 Diagnosis of the PM-D F X1 fail-safe power/expansion module 4-33
4.8.9 Diagnosis of the F-CM fail-safe contact replicator 4-34
4.8.10 Diagnosis of the DS1-x and RS1-x motor starters; standard 4-35
4.8.11 Diagnosis of DS1e-x, RS1e-x and DSS1e-x motor starters; high
feature F-DS1e-x and FRS1e-x fail-safe motor starters
4-36
4.8.12 Diagnosis of brake control modules xB3, xB4, xB6 4-39
4.9 Process mappings 4-40
4.9.1 Process mapping of DS1-x and RS1-x motor starters; standard 4-40
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
4-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
4.9.2 Process mapping of DS1e-x, RS1e-x and DSS1e-x motor starters;
high feature F-DS1e-x and FRS1e-x fail-safe motor starters
4-41
4.9.3 Process mapping of xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control modules 4-44
4.10 Motor Starter ES 4-45
4.11 High Feature motor starter with order number suffix -.AB4 4-46
4.11.1 Device replacement of HF starters -.AA3 and -.AA4 with -.AB4
starters
4-46
4.11.2 Device response during parameterization 4-46
4.11.3 Power supply for High Feature motor starter with order number
suffix -.AB4
4-46
4.11.4 Configuration of High Feature motor starter with order number
suffix -.AB4
4-47
Section Subject Page
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-3
4.1 Commissioning
Attention
It is essential that you comply with the voltage tolerance for the U2 contactor
supply up to 60 °C: 20.4 V to 28.8 V (does not apply to F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x).
Current setting
• For standard motor starters with an installation width of 45/90 mm
(see Figure 4-1):
Use a screwdriver to adjust the current setting for overload tripping on the
scale of the circuit breaker before commissioning the motor starter. Note the
two possible setting marks:
- Line marking:
Setting mark for the circuit breaker with reverse combination starters or
spacing modules
- Triangular marking:
Setting mark for the circuit breaker in side-by-side installation.
Figure 4-1: Current setting
Warning
The adjusting knob can be rotated 360° clockwise. You can only turn it back
within the setting range.
• For high feature/failsafe motor starters with installation width of 65/130 mm:
Parameterize the current setting via the Motor Starter ES or from STEP 7 or
STEP 7+ in "Devices and power systems"
360° ok
Ie
A
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
4-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
External short-circuit protection
Safety note
External short-circuit protection
If the short-circuit current at the installation position of the motor starter can
exceed the rated short-circuit breaking capacity (50 kA) of the circuit breaker or
starter protection switch, you must provide additional external short-circuit
protection (fuse or circuit breaker).
Overload tripping test
Only for motor starters; standard with 45/90 mm installation width
You can test overload tripping. To do this, proceed as follows:
1. Switch the toggle switch from 0 to 1.
2. Put a screwdriver in the test opening and push it to the left. Overload tripping
works when the toggle switch moves from 1 to 0.
Figure 4-2: Overload tripping test
Test opening
45/90 mm installation width
Scale for set
current Toggle switch of
the power switch
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-5
After overload or short-circuit tripping
• For standard motor starters with installation width of 45/90 mm:
After an overload or short-circuit release during operation, the circuit breaker
must be reset.
1. Switch the toggle switch from 0 to 1.
2. Check that the contactor is working.
• For high feature/failsafe motor starters with installation width of 65/130 mm:
–After short-circuit tripping (knob switch of the power switch is between 0 and 1),
you must turn the knob switch all the way to 0 (reset function) and then back to 1.
–After overload tripping (power switch not tripped), there are two ways of resetting
overload tripping:
a) Using the toggle switch on the motor starter on site:
Turn the toggle switch from 1 to 0 and then back from 0 to 1 within 2 seconds.
b) Via remote reset:
Using a rising signal at the DO 0.3 output.
Disconnecting a load from the power supply
By switching the toggle switch on the circuit breaker or motor circuit protector
from 1 to 0, you can electrically isolate a connected load from the power supply.
Wiring of the contactors with diodes not permitted
The contactors of the motor starters must not be wired with diodes because
Zener diodes are already integrated as induction protection and additional
diodes would thus prolong the switch-off times.
Reversing starters
Before a change of direction, use the user program to ensure that the drive is
switched to "STOP" mode and remains in stop until the motor has stopped turn-
ing.
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
4-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Preventing unauthorized persons from switching on
You can prevent the motor starter from being switched on without authorization
by attaching a padlock (with a bow diameter of 3.5 to 4.5 mm) at position 0
• of the toggle switch of the circuit breaker in motor starter; standard
• in the projecting tip of the power switch knob in motor starter; high feature/
failsafe
Figure 4-3: Preventing unauthorized persons from switching on
This protection loses its effect if a locked motor starter is replaced by an
unlocked motor starter. To ensure isolation, we therefore recommend that you
remove the motor starter and affix a padlock to the terminal module.
Figure 4-4: Lock in the terminal module preventing unauthorized persons from switching on
Ø 3.5 mm to 4.5 mm
Motor starter; standard Motor starter;
high feature falsafe
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-7
4.2 Control kit
The control kit is only intended for motor starters; standard with installation
widths 45 and 90 mm.
The control kit is for the manual operation of the contactors
for initial operation and for troubleshooting.
Note
Before connecting the control kit to the contactor or remov-
ing it again, always deenergize the motor starter in order to
avoid unnecessary wear on the contacts of the contactor.
The load can be switched on and off only by means of the
power circuit breaker.
Warning
Do not use the control kit in conjunction with safety-oriented applications (with
power module PM-D F1 to 5), or with motor starters together with brake control
modules xB1 to xB6!
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
4-8 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
4.3 Control unit
The control unit is only intended for motor starters; standard with installation
widths 45 and 90 mm.
The control unit is for direct drive of the contactor
coils of ET 200S devices (manual control) for com-
missioning, servicing, and troubleshooting pur-
poses.
Mounting
Set the control unit cable end up on the open coil
auxiliary connections of the ET 200S contactor and
press it in until seated.
Warning
Do not use the control unit in conjunction with safety-oriented applications
(with power module PM-D F1 to 5), or with motor starters together with brake
control modules xB1 to xB6!
Wiring
Use non-overlapping switching elements for the "manual/automatic" selector
switch.
The cable of the control unit is 1 m in length.
Wire the control unit in accordance with the circuit diagram below.
Figure 4-5: Wiring diagram for control unit
AUX2
AUX3
K2
ET 200S bus
Control unit
Manual ON
to other motor starters
Motor starters
K1
Manual ON
PM-D
Automatic / Manual
4/11
5/12
A1+
A2-
U2 24 VDC
Terminal module
TM-P15 S27-01 DS... / RS...
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-9
4.4 2DI COM control module
The 2DI COM control module is intended for high feature/failsafe motor starters
of installation widths 65 and 130 mm:
Note
The 2DI COM control module can only be used for motor starters; high feature
from order number suffixes -.AA3 or -.AB4 and failsafe motor starters.
Description
The 2DI COM control module has two inputs for
the integration of internal control cabinet signals;
these inputs can be parameterized by means of
the motor starter on which the module is
mounted. Each input has a green LED which indi-
cates the status.
The signal states of the inputs are as follows:
NO or NC switching elements or 2-wire or 3-wire sensors (PNP) can be con-
nected to the inputs.
The 2DI COM control module also has a computer interface for the integration
of the "Motor Starter ES" parameterization and diagnostics software (from Ver-
sion 2.0). A short description of the software can be found in Section 4.10.
Warning
The inputs are not floating and do not have a diagnostic message for faults such
as: wire break, overload and short-circuit. In the event of the fault stated, it is
not possible to simultaneously recognize and execute the respective input func-
tion to be dealt with.
It may therefore not be used in safety-related system sections.
Safety note
The 2DI COM control module can only be used in conjunction with F-DS1e-x and
F-RS1e-x depending on the performance level (see Section 8.3 and 9.3).
LED IN3, 4 Status
Off Low signal
Green High signal
Table 4-1: Signal states, control module 2DI
3
2
Input 4
Input 3
1234
L+
M
24 VDC
PC interface
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
4-10 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Parameter assignment
The inputs can be parameterized independently of each other for different
actions. Parameterization is described in:
•8.3.4 for direct starter; high feature/failsafe
•8.4.5 for direct soft starter; high feature
•9.3.4 for reversing starter; high feature/failsafe
Installation - removal
To install the 2DI COM control module, slide down the clear cover on the front
of the high feature/failsafe motor starter. After that, clip the 2DI COM control
module onto the motor starter.
Remove the 2DI COM control module by pressing the recessed grips on each
side toward each other and pulling off the high feature/failsafe motor starter.
After removal, push the transparent cover up to protect the connections.
Open the dust cap on the 2DI COM control module on the corresponding motor
starter to insert the cable for the connection to the PC. Insert the other end of
the cable
in your PC in the port for the serial interface.
Supply voltage
The 2DI COM control module is supplied by the U1 voltage. This applies both to
connected sensors and contact elements.
Wiring
Wire the inputs in accordance with the circuit diagram below.
Figure 4-6: 2DI COM control module wiring diagram
The "LOGO! PC Cable" (order no.: 6ED1057-1AA00-0BA0) is used as a connect-
ing line between the 2DI COM control module and the computer.
4
3
L+
IN4
2
1
IN3
M
2-wire 3-wire
U1
DI 0.7
DI 0.6
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-11
Technical specifications of the 2DI COM control module
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W x H x D (mm)
(installed) 23.8 x 45 x 23.3
Weight (g) approx. 15
Module-specific data
Ambient temperature operation
storage
0 to 60 °C
-40 to 80 °C
Degree of protection IP20, IEC 60529
Inputs IN3 and IN4 (terminals 2 and 3)
Input IN LC (terminal 1) (only with 2DI LC COM control module)
Input characteristic curve to IEC 1131 Type 1
Low input current Iin <1.5 mA
High input current Iin >5 mA
Max. input current max. 8 to 10 mA
Input delay tin approx. 10 ms
Supply from U1 (terminals 1 and 4) short circuit-proof and overload-proof
Operating voltage range
(relative to mass U1) 20.4 to 28.8 VDC
Current limitation on short-circuit
against mass of U1approx. 100 mA
Assignment of the inputs
Control module 2DI COM
IN3
IN4
Motor starter; high feature/failsafe
Input 3 (DI 0.6)
Input 4 (DI 0.7)
Conductor cross-sections
Single-core (mm2) 1 x (0.14 to 2.5) to IEC 60947
Single-wire or finely stranded (mm2) 2 x (0.14 to 1)
Finely stranded with wire end ferrule
(mm2)
1 x (0.14 to 1.5) to IEC 60947
AWG cables, single- or multi-core
1 x (18 to 22)
Wiring
Tool required Standard screwdriver, size 1
Tightening torque (Nm) 0.4 to 0.7
Table 4-2: Technical specifications of the 2DI COM control module
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
4-12 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Protective measures
In case of a single high-energy pulse (surge) at the digital inputs according to IEC
61000-4-5, lightning protection elements (e.g. those manufactured by Dehn: DCO RK
D 5 24 order number: 919986) are recommended (see the DP master manual and the
description of the SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS networks).
Table 4-2: Technical specifications of the 2DI COM control module (Contd.)
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-13
4.5 2DI LC COM control module
The control module 2DI LC COM possesses the same characteristics as the
control module 2DI COM described in Section 4.4.
In this section only the additional input point IN LC is described.
Description
The 2DI LC COM control module is suitable for
motor starters with installation widths of 65 and
130 mm:
• High feature with order number suffix -.AA
3
(from product version E02)
or from order number suffix -.AB
4
• Fail-safe motor starters
(revision level E05 or higher).
If the input point IN LC is connected to L+ 24
VDC, the motor starter is switched to "Manual
Operation Local" mode.
Regardless of the parameterized input function,
IN3 (input point 3) for clockwise and IN4 (input point 4) for counterclockwise
operation of the motor starter are then required. In the manual operation local
mode the brake is automatically disengaged by a pending ON signal (IN3/IN4).
If IN LC is open, then this module behaves like the control module 2DI COM.
The parameterized input measures are performed.
Warning
Switching the input point IN LC while simultaneously parameterizing the input
functions of the input points 3 and 4 can lead to unforeseeable motor starter
states (e. g. unwanted switching on and off, if the motor starter is in the end
position and then switched to the manual operation local mode).
Wiring
Wire the inputs in accordance with the circuit diagram below.
Figure 4-7: 2DI LC COM control module wiring diagram
3
2
Input 4
Input 3
1234
L+
IN LC 24 VDC
PC interface
4
3
L+
IN4
2
1
IN3
IN LC
2-wire 3-wire
U1
DI 0.7
DI 0.6
MThe 3-wire ground should be
connected to the ground of the
potential group (e.g. PM-D).
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
4-14 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
4.6 Configuration
Configuring means configuring and parameterizing the ET 200S.
More information can be found in Section l 7.1 of the
’SIMATIC ET 200S Distributed I/O Device’ manual.
The STEP 7 versions from which the individual modules
are included are listed in the table below.
Product label MLFB Brief description STEP 7
version
PM-D DC24V 3RK1903-0BA00 Power module; PM-D; 2 x 24 V DC 5.0 SP3
PM-D F1 3RK1903-1BA00 Power module; emergency stop;
monitored start; 2-channel
5.0 SP3
PM-D F2 3RK1903-1BB00 Power module; protective door; auto-
matic start;
2-channel
5.0 SP3
PM-D F4 3RK1903-1BC00 Power module; expansion board of
F1/2 for another potential group
5.0 SP3
PM-D F3 3RK1903-1BD00 Power module; expansion board of
F1/2 for another potential group;
time-delayed
5.0 SP3
PM-X 3RK1903-1CB00 Connection module for infeed con-
tactor; external safety circuit
5.0 SP3
RS-x1 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA2 Reversing starter; electromechani-
cal; unfused; can be expanded
(brake, local control)
5.1
xB3 DC24V/4A 3RK1903-0CE00 Brake control module 24 V DC/4A,
DI 2 x 24 V DC local control
5.1
xB4 DC500V/0.7A 3RK1903-0CF00 Brake control module
500 V DC/0.7 A,
DI 2 x 24 V DC local control
5.1
xB1
xB2 non-configurable, so not included in STEP 7 HW Config / STEP
7+ in "Devices and power systems"!
xB5
DM-V15
DS-x1 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 Direct starter; electromechanical;
unfused; can be expanded (brake,
local control)
5.1 SP1
PM-D F5 3RK1903-1BE00 Power module; expansion board for
F1 through 4;
contact multiplier
5.1 SP1
Table 4-3: Configuration of the motor starters
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-15
F-DS1e-x 0.3 to 3 A
high feature 1) 3RK1301-0AB13-0AA2 Safe direct starter; switch mechani-
cally; electronic UE protection;
unfused; up to 1.1 kW/400V;
0.3 A to 3 A
Option:
Brake control module xB1 to xB6
2DI (LC) COM control module
5.1 SP4
F-DS1e-x 2.4 to 8 A
high feature 1) 3RK1301-0BB13-0AA2 Safe direct starter; switch mechani-
cally; electronic UE protection;
unfused; up to 3 kW/400V;
2.4 A to 8 A
Option:
Brake control module xB1 to xB6
2DI (LC) COM control module
5.1 SP4
F-DS1e-x 2.4 to 16 A
high feature 1) 3RK1301-0CB13-0AA2 Safe direct starter; switch mechani-
cally; electronic UE protection;
unfused; up to 7.5 kW/400V; 2.4 A to
16 A
Option:
Brake control module xB1 to xB6
control module 2DI (LC) COM
5.1 SP4
F-RS1e-x 0.3 to 3 A
High feature 1) 3RK1301-0AB13-1AA2 Safe reversing starter; switch
mechanically; electronic UE protec-
tion; unfused; up to 1.1 kW/400V;
0.3 A to 3 A
Option:
Brake control module xB1 to xB6
2DI (LC) COM control module
5.1 SP4
F-RS1e-x 2.4 to 8 A
High feature 1) 3RK1301-0BB13-1AA2 Safe reversing starter; switch
mechanically; electronic UE protec-
tion; unfused; up to 3 kW/400V;
2.4 A to 8 A
Option:
Brake control module xB1 to xB6
2DI (LC) COM control module
5.1 SP4
F-RS1e-x 2.4 to 16 A
High feature 1) 3RK1301-0CB13-1AA2 Safe reversing starter; switch
mechanically; electronic UE protec-
tion; unfused; up to 7.5 kW/400V;
2.4 A to 16 A
Option:
Brake control module xB1 to xB6
2DI (LC) COM control module
5.1 SP4
F-CM 3RK1903-3CA00 Fail-safe contact replicator 5.1 SP4
PM-D F X1 3RK1903-3DA00 Fail-safe power/expansion module 5.1 SP4
1) Switching to the manual operation local mode is possible with the 2DI LC COM control module, beginning with revision level 02.
Product label MLFB Brief description STEP 7
version
Table 4-3: Configuration of the motor starters (Contd.)
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
4-16 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
DS1e-x 0.3 to 3 A
High feature 1) 3RK1301-0AB10-0AA3 Direct starter; high feature: switch
mechanically; electronic UE protec-
tion; unfused; up to 1.1 kW/400V;
0.3 A to 3 A
Option:
Brake control module xB1 to xB6
2DI (LC) COM control module
5.2
DS1e-x 2.4 to 8 A
High feature 1) 3RK1301-0BB10-0AA3 Direct starter; high feature: switch
mechanically; electronic UE protec-
tion; unfused; up to 3 kW/400V;
2.4 A to 8 A
Option:
Brake control module xB1 to xB6
2DI (LC) COM control module
5.2
DS1e-x 2.4 to 16 A
High feature 1) 3RK1301-0CB10-0AA3 Direct starter; high feature: switch
mechanically; electronic UE protec-
tion; unfused; up to 7.5 kW/400V;
2.4 A to 16 A
Option:
Brake control module xB1 to xB6
2DI (LC) COM control module
5.2
DSS1e-x 0.3 to 3 A
High feature 1) 3RK1301-0AB20-0AA3 Direct soft starter; high feature:
switch electronically; electronic UE
protection; unfused; up to 1.1 kW/
400V; 0.3 A to 3 A
Option:
Brake control module xB1 to xB6
2DI (LC) COM control module
5.2
DSS1e-x 2.4 to 8 A
High feature 1) 3RK1301-0BB20-0AA3 Direct soft starter; high feature:
switch electronically; electronic UE
protection; unfused; up to
3 kW/400V; 2.4 A to 8 A
Option:
Brake control module xB1 to xB6
2DI (LC) COM control module
5.2
DSS1e-x 2.4 to 16 A
High feature 1) 3RK1301-0CB20-0AA3 Direct soft starter; high feature:
switch electronically; electronic UE
protection; unfused; up to
7.5 kW/400V; 2.4 A to 16 A
Option:
Brake control module xB1 to xB6
2DI (LC) COM control module
5.2
1) Communication possibility via the 2DI COM control module with the "Motor Starter ES" software through the front device interface.
From revision level 02, switchover into "Manual Operation Local" mode possible using the 2DI LC COM control module.
Product label MLFB Brief description STEP 7
version
Table 4-3: Configuration of the motor starters (Contd.)
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-17
RS1e-x 0.3 to 3 A
High feature 1) 3RK1301-0AB10-1AA3 Reversing starter; high feature:
switch mechanically; electronic UE
protection; unfused; up to
1.1 kW/400V; 0.3 A to 3 A
Option:
Brake control module xB1 to xB6
2DI (LC) COM control module
5.2
RS1e-x 2.4 to 8 A
High feature 1) 3RK1301-0BB10-1AA3 Reversing starter; high feature:
switch mechanically; electronic UE
protection; unfused; up to
3 kW/400V; 2.4 A to 8 A
Option:
Brake control module xB1 to xB6
2DI (LC) COM control module
5.2
RS1e-x 2.4 to 16 A
High feature 1) 3RK1301-0CB10-1AA3 Reversing starter; high feature:
switch mechanically; electronic UE
protection; unfused; up to
7.5 kW/400V; 2.4 A to 16 A
Option:
Brake control module xB1 to xB6
2DI (LC) COM control module
5.2
1) Communication possibility via the 2DI COM control module with the "Motor Starter ES" software through the front device interface.
From revision level 02, switchover into "Manual Operation Local" mode possible using the 2DI LC COM control module.
Product label MLFB Brief description STEP 7
version
Table 4-3: Configuration of the motor starters (Contd.)
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
4-18 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
DS1e-x 0.3 to 3 A
High feature 1) 3RK1301-0AB10-0AA4 Direct starter; high feature: switch
mechanically; electronic UE protec-
tion; unfused; up to 1.1 kW/400V;
0.3 A to 3 A
Option:
Brake control module xB1 to xB6
2DI (LC) COM control module
5.4
DS1e-x 2.4 to 8 A
High feature 1) 3RK1301-0BB10-0AA4 Direct starter; high feature: switch
mechanically; electronic UE protec-
tion; unfused; up to 3 kW/400V;
2.4 A to 8 A
Option:
Brake control module xB1 to xB6
2DI (LC) COM control module
5.4
DS1e-x 2.4 to 16 A
High feature 1) 3RK1301-0CB10-0AA4 Direct starter; high feature: switch
mechanically; electronic UE protec-
tion; unfused; up to 7.5 kW/400V;
2.4 A to 16 A
Option:
Brake control module xB1 to xB6
2DI (LC) COM control module
5.4
DSS1e-x 0.3 to 3 A
High feature 1) 3RK1301-0AB20-0AA4 Direct soft starter; high feature:
switch electronically; electronic UE
protection; unfused; up to
1.1 kW/400V; 0.3 A to 3 A
Option:
Brake control module xB1 to xB6
2DI (LC) COM control module
5.4
DSS1e-x 2.4 to 8 A
High feature 1) 3RK1301-0BB20-0AA4 Direct soft starter; high feature:
switch electronically; electronic UE
protection; unfused; up to
3 kW/400V; 2.4 A to 8 A
Option:
Brake control module xB1 to xB6
2DI (LC) COM control module
5.4
DSS1e-x 2.4 to 16 A
High feature 1) 3RK1301-0CB20-0AA4 Direct soft starter; high feature:
switch electronically; electronic UE
protection; unfused; up to
7.5 kW/400V; 2.4 A to 16 A
Option:
Brake control module xB1 to xB6
2DI (LC) COM control module
5.4
Product label MLFB Brief description STEP 7
version
Table 4-3: Configuration of the motor starters (Contd.)
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-19
RS1e-x 0.3 to 3 A
High feature 1) 3RK1301-0AB10-1AA4 Reversing starter; high feature:
switch mechanically; electronic UE
protection; unfused; up to
1.1 kW/400V; 0.3 A to 3 A
Option:
Brake control module xB1 to xB6
2DI (LC) COM control module
5.4
RS1e-x 2.4 to 8 A
High feature 1) 3RK1301-0BB10-1AA4 Reversing starter; high feature:
switch mechanically; electronic UE
protection; unfused; up to
3 kW/400V; 2.4 A to 8 A
Option:
Brake control module xB1 to xB6
2DI (LC) COM control module
5.4
RS1e-x 2.4 to 16 A
High feature 1) 3RK1301-0CB10-1AA4 Reversing starter; high feature:
switch mechanically; electronic UE
protection; unfused; up to
7.5 kW/400V; 2.4 A to 16 A
Option:
Brake control module xB1 to xB6
2DI (LC) COM control module
5.4
F-DS1e-x 0.3 to 3 A
high feature 1) 3RK1301-0AB13-0AA4 Safe direct starter; switch mechani-
cally; electronic UE protection;
unfused; up to 1.1 kW/400V;
0.3 A to 3 A
Option:
Brake control module xB1 to xB6
2DI (LC) COM control module
5.4 SP4
F-DS1e-x 2.4 to 8 A
high feature 1) 3RK1301-0BB13-0AA4 Safe direct starter; switch mechani-
cally; electronic UE protection;
unfused; up to 3 kW/400V;
2.4 A to 8 A
Option:
Brake control module xB1 to xB6
2DI (LC) COM control module
5.4 SP4
F-DS1e-x 2.4 to 16 A
high feature 1) 3RK1301-0CB13-0AA4 Safe direct starter; switch mechani-
cally; electronic UE protection;
unfused; up to 7.5 kW/400V;
2.4 A to 16 A
Option:
Brake control module xB1 to xB6
2DI (LC) COM control module
5.4 SP4
F-RS1e-x 0.3 to 3 A
High feature 1) 3RK1301-0AB13-1AA4 Safe reversing starter; switch
mechanically; electronic UE protec-
tion; unfused; up to 1.1 kW/400V;
0.3 A to 3 A
Option:
Brake control module xB1 to xB6
2DI (LC) COM control module
5.4 SP4
Product label MLFB Brief description STEP 7
version
Table 4-3: Configuration of the motor starters (Contd.)
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
4-20 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
F-RS1e-x 2.4 to 8 A
High feature 1) 3RK1301-0BB13-1AA4 Safe reversing starter; switch
mechanically; electronic UE protec-
tion; unfused; up to 3 kW/400V;
2.4 A to 8 A
Option:
Brake control module xB1 to xB6
2DI (LC) COM control module
5.4 SP4
F-RS1e-x 2.4 to 16 A
High feature 1) 3RK1301-0CB13-1AA4 Safe reversing starter; switch
mechanically; electronic UE protec-
tion; unfused; up to 7.5 kW/400V;
2.4 A to 16 A
Option:
Brake control module xB1 to xB6
2DI (LC) COM control module
5.4 SP4
1) Communication possibility via the 2DI COM control module with the "Motor Starter ES" software through the front device interface.
From revision level 02, switchover into "Manual Operation Local" mode possible using the 2DI LC COM control module.
Product label MLFB Brief description STEP 7
version
Table 4-3: Configuration of the motor starters (Contd.)
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-21
DS1e-x 0.3 to 3 A
High feature 1) 3RK1301-0AB10-0AB4 Direct starter; high feature: switch
mechanically; electronic UE protec-
tion; unfused; up to 1.1 kW/400V;
0.3 A to 3 A
Option:
Brake control module xB1 to xB6
2DI (LC) COM control module
5.5 SP1
DS1e-x 2.4 to 8 A
High feature 1) 3RK1301-0BB10-0AB4 Direct starter; high feature: switch
mechanically; electronic UE protec-
tion; unfused; up to 3 kW/400V;
2.4 A to 8 A
Option:
Brake control module xB1 to xB6
2DI (LC) COM control module
5.5 SP1
DS1e-x 2.4 to 16 A
High feature 1) 3RK1301-0CB10-0AB4 Direct starter; high feature: switch
mechanically; electronic UE protec-
tion; unfused; up to 7.5 kW/400V;
2.4 A to 16 A
Option:
Brake control module xB1 to xB6
2DI (LC) COM control module
5.5 SP1
DSS1e-x 0.3 to 3 A
High feature 1) 3RK1301-0AB20-0AB4 Direct soft starter; high feature:
switch electronically; electronic UE
protection; unfused; up to
1.1 kW/400V; 0.3 A to 3 A
Option:
Brake control module xB1 to xB6
2DI (LC) COM control module
5.5 SP1
DSS1e-x 2.4 to 8 A
High feature 1) 3RK1301-0BB20-0AB4 Direct soft starter; high feature:
switch electronically; electronic UE
protection; unfused; up to
3 kW/400V; 2.4 A to 8 A
Option:
Brake control module xB1 to xB6
2DI (LC) COM control module
5.5 SP1
DSS1e-x 2.4 to 16 A
High feature 1) 3RK1301-0CB20-0AB4 Direct soft starter; high feature:
switch electronically; electronic UE
protection; unfused; up to
7.5 kW/400V; 2.4 A to 16 A
Option:
Brake control module xB1 to xB6
2DI (LC) COM control module
5.5 SP1
Product label MLFB Brief description STEP 7
version
Table 4-3: Configuration of the motor starters (Contd.)
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
4-22 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
RS1e-x 0.3 to 3 A
High feature 1) 3RK1301-0AB10-1AB4 Reversing starter; high feature:
switch mechanically; electronic UE
protection; unfused; up to
1.1 kW/400V; 0.3 A to 3 A
Option:
Brake control module xB1 to xB6
2DI (LC) COM control module
5.5 SP1
RS1e-x 2.4 to 8 A
High feature 1) 3RK1301-0BB10-1AB4 Reversing starter; high feature:
switch mechanically; electronic UE
protection; unfused; up to
3 kW/400V; 2.4 A to 8 A
Option:
Brake control module xB1 to xB6
2DI (LC) COM control module
5.5 SP1
RS1e-x 2.4 to 16 A
High feature 1) 3RK1301-0CB10-1AB4 Reversing starter; high feature:
switch mechanically; electronic UE
protection; unfused; up to
7.5 kW/400V; 2.4 A to 16 A
Option:
Brake control module xB1 to xB6
2DI (LC) COM control module
5.5 SP1
xB6 AC400V/0.5A 3RK1903-0CK00 Brake control module
AC 400 V/0.5 A,
DI 2 x DC 24 V Local Control
5.5 SP1
1) Communication possibility via the 2DI COM control module with the "Motor Starter ES" software through the front device interface.
From revision level 02, switchover into "Manual Operation Local" mode possible using the 2DI LC COM control module.
Product label MLFB Brief description STEP 7
version
Table 4-3: Configuration of the motor starters (Contd.)
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-23
4.7 Diagnostics
4.7.1 Diagnosis and monitoring through the user program
Diagnostics and monitoring for ET 200S motor starters take place via the user
program and/or the diagnostics channel of the field bus system.
For comprehensive diagnostic analysis and demo programs using STEP 5 and
STEP 7, see SIMATIC ET 200S Distributed I/O Device manual.
The S7 modules FB125 and FC125 are available for diagnostic analysis in the
user program. The S7 blocks and the accompanying descriptions are available as
free downloads from:
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/26996747
DE: http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/5362473
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/5362473
In the following tables you will find the respective error types and their mean-
ings as a supplement to the channel-based diagnostics.
Power module fault types
Power mod-
ules Fault type Meaning Remedy
PM-D
PM-D F2 1)
PM-D F3 1)
PM-D F4 1)
PM-D F5 1)
F-CM 1)
01001:
Fault
Module fault has
occurred
Replace the module
PM-D F1 1) Check whether EMERGENCY STOP
was unlatched with ON circuit jump-
ered
PM-D
PM-D F1 1)
PM-D F2 1)
PM-D F3 1)
PM-D F4 1)
PM-D F5 1)
F-CM 1)
PM-D F X1
10001:
No supply voltage
U1 or U2 not measur-
able or too low
Correct the process wiring. Check
the voltage supply
PM-D F1 1)
PM-D F2 1)
PM-D F3 1)
PM-D F4 1)
PM-D F5 1)
1100 0:
Actuator shut-
down
Safety relay OFF Press ON button to acknowledge
PM-D F1 1)
PM-D F2 1) 110 01:
Safety-oriented
tripping
Emergency stop
actuated or cross-
over has occurred
between the cables
of the emergency
stop
Rectify the cause of the shutdown,
e.g. disengage the emergency stop
or rectify crossover.
1) Fault type is mapped correctly only as of revision level 5 of IM 151.
Table 4-4: Power module fault types
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
4-24 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Expansion module fault types
Motor starter fault types
The following table applies to standard motor starters up to 5.5 kW.
Expansion
modules Fault type Meaning Remedy
Brake control
•xB3
•xB4
00100:
Fault
• Brake overload Rectify overload
Table 4-5: Expansion module fault types
Motor starters Fault type Meaning Remedy
Direct starter
•DS-x1
Reversing start-
ers
•RS-x1
01001:
Fault
• Contactor jammed
or welded
• Internal failure/
device fault
Replace the module.
Check the contactor
11000:
Actuator shut-
down
• The circuit breaker
has been tripped.
• All designated faults/
asymmetry/motor
blockage (additional
fault entry for more
detailed fault
description may
exist)
Rectify the cause of the shut-
down and reset.
Check the components
Table 4-6: Fault types for motor starters up to 5.5 kW
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-25
The following table applies for high feature/failsafe motor starters up to 7.5 kW.
Motor starters Fault type Meaning/cause Remedy
Direct starter
• DS1e-x,
•DSS1e-x
• F-DS1e-x
Reversing start-
ers
•RS1e-x
• F-RS1e-x
00001:
Short-circuit
(F1) 1)
• Power switch has
tripped / is switched
off
Correct short-circuit and switch
power switch back on.
00100:
Overload
(F4)
• Thermal motor model
overload
• Allow the motor to cool down
• Check the motor's current con-
sumption
• Check the set current limits
00111:
Upper limit vio-
lated
(F7)
•I
e upper current limit
violated
01000:
Lower limit vio-
lated
(F8)
•I
e lower current limit
violated
01001:
Fault
(F9)
• Internal failure/device
fault
• Switching element
defective (contactor
is fused or jammed)
Switch supply voltage U1 off and
on; replace the motor starter if the
fault persists.
10000:
Parameter error
(F16)
• Invalid parameter
value
Check parameter values.
110 0 0:
Actuator shutdown
(F24)
• Asymmetry
• Motor blocked
• Residual current
detected
• Or in conjunction
with another type of
fault in this table
• Cold run shutdown
• Power switch has
tripped / is switched
off
Check phases L1 to L3.
Clear stalled rotor.
Check main phases L1 to L3 for
interruption.
110 01:
Safety-oriented
shutdown
(F25) 2)
• EMERGENCY STOP Remove the cause of the emer-
gency stop
110 01:
(F17)
• Switching element
power supply missing
Check A1+/A2- (PM-D)
1) Altered response of the circuit breaker for motor starters with order number suffix -.AA3 with revision level E02 and for fail-safe motor start-
ers with revision level E05.
If the circuit breaker is switched to the status
O/TRIPPED when the starter is tripped (DI 0.0 and DI 0.1 = 0) , no "short circuit" diagnosis is generated.
During acceleration, a circuit breaker in the O/TRIPPED position likewise generates no "short circuit" diagnosis.
If the circuit breaker is activated with the motor running (DI 0.0 and DI 0.1 = 1)(due to short circuit or operation in the O/TRIPPED position), a
"short circuit" diagnosis is generated as previously.
2) Only applicable to F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x
Table 4-7: Fault types for motor starters up to 7.5 kW
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
4-26 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Note
The group error bit is cleared when the cause of the shutdown is remedied and
acknowledged using "Trip Reset" (DO 0.3 or by turning the knob from 1-0-1 on
the circuit breaker).
Exception – device fault:
This can only be acknowledged by means of an OFF - ON supply voltage (mod-
ule replacement recommended).
Note
(only for F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x).
An emergency stop always generates a fault of type F24 and F25. An emer-
gency stop does not have to be acknowledged on the motor starter with a "Trip
Reset."
Direct starter
• DS1e-x,
•DSS1e-x
• F-DS1e-x
Reversing start-
ers
•RS1e-x
• F-RS1e-x
11010:
External fault
(F26)
• Input tripping
• Input tripping limit
position
• Process mapping
error
(RS1e-x only: simulta-
neous actuation of
motor clockwise and
motor counterclock-
wise).
• Eliminate the external fault
(withdraw from limit position, for
example)
• Start in opposite direction of
rotation
• Actuate in only one direction of
rotation.
00101
Overload
switching element
(F5)
• Thermal motor type is
loaded to >178 %.
Shutdown occurs to
protect device with
parameter "thermal
motor type"
= alert.
•For DSS1e-x
startup current over-
shoot I>5xIe1)
Check system configuration
Increase starting time
Reduce starting voltage.
1) with DSS1e-x from order number suffix: -.AB4 startup current overshoot I > 5 x Iemax applies
Motor starters Fault type Meaning/cause Remedy
Table 4-7: Fault types for motor starters up to 7.5 kW (Contd.)
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-27
4.7.2 Diagnosis by LEDs
The LEDs on the power modules and on the direct and reversing starters display
the status of the relevant modules.
Note
If a power module (PM-D, PM-D F1 to 5, PM-D F X1, F-CM) returns a diagnostic
message of the type "Error" or "Sensor or load voltage missing", the diagnostic
messages of the modules downstream from the power module as far as the
next power module are suppressed.
4.8 LED indicators
4.8.1 Diagnosis of the PM-D power module
SF Group error Red
PWR Power U1Green
CON Contactor U2Green
LEDs Status/Cause/Remedy
SF 1) PWR CON
Off Green Green Normal operation
Red Green Green Group error
Red Off Green No supply voltage U1 for electronic components
Red Green Off No supply voltage U2 for contactors
Red Off Off No supply voltages U1 and U2
1) Status of the LEDs in this form only when group diagnostics activated
Table 4-8: LED status and error displays on the PM-D power module
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
4-28 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
4.8.2 Diagnosis of the PM-D F1 power module
SF Group error Red
PWR Power (electronic power supply
U1)
Green
CON Contactor (contactor supply U2) Green
STAT Status indicator for safety relay Red/green
LEDs Safety
relay
EMER-
GENCY
STOP
switch
ON but-
ton
Status/Cause/Remedy
SF 1) PWR CON
STAT
Off Green Green Green On Not actu-
ated
Once
actuated
Normal operation
Red Green Green Green On 2) 2) Bus fault
Red Green Green Off Off Not actu-
ated
Not actu-
ated
Safety relay switched off.
Press the ON button to
start.
Red Green Green Red Off actuated 2) Switch-on not possible:
Unlock EMERGENCY STOP.
If the status LED goes red
again there is a cross-cir-
cuit in the EMERGENCY
STOP system (rectify the
external fault) or the power
module is defective.
(Replace the device).
Red Green Green Red Off Transi-
tion from
actuated
to not
actuated
actuated Emergency stop disen-
gaged when ON circuit
closed
Red Green Green Red Off Not actu-
ated
2) Power module defective:
replace the device.
Red Off Green Red Off 2) 2) No supply voltage U1 for
electronics.
Red Green Off 2) 2) 2) 2) No supply voltage U2 for
motor starter.
Red Off Off Red Off 2) 2) No supply voltages U1 and
U2
1) Status of the LEDs in this form only when group diagnostics activated
2) Not relevant
Table 4-9: LED status and error displays on the PM-D F1 power module
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-29
4.8.3 Diagnosis of the PM-D F2 power module
SF Group error Red
PWR Power (electronic power supply
U1)
Green
CON Contactor (contactor supply U2) Green
STAT Status indicator for safety relay Red/green
LEDs Safety
relay
Protec-
tive door
switch
ON but-
ton
Status/Cause/Remedy
SF 1) PWR CON
STAT
Off Green Green Green On Closed Once
actuated
(jump-
ered)
Normal operation
Red Green Green Green On 2) 2) Bus fault
Red Green Green Off Off Closed Not actu-
ated
Safety relay switched off.
Press the
ON button to start.
Red Green Green Red Off Open 2) Switch-on not possible:
close protective doors. If
the status LED goes red
again there is a cross-circuit
in the sensor system (rec-
tify the external fault) or the
power module is defec-
tive. (Replace the device).
Red Green Green Red Off Closed 2) Power module defective:
replace the device.
Red Off Green Red Off 2) 2) No supply voltage U1 for
electronics.
Red Green Off 2) 2) 2) 2) No supply voltage U2 for
motor starter.
Red Off Off Red Off 2) 2) No supply voltages U1 and
U2
1) Status of the LEDs in this form only when group diagnostics activated
2) Not relevant
Table 4-10: LED status and error displays on the PM-D F2 power module
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
4-30 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
4.8.4 Diagnosis of the PM-D F3 power module
SF Group error Red
PWR Power (electronic power supply
U1)
Green
CON Contactor (contactor supply U2) Green
STAT Status indicator for safety relay Red/green
LEDs Safety relay Status/Cause/Remedy
SF 1) PWR CON
STAT
Off Green Green Green On Normal operation
Red Green Green Green On Bus fault
Red Green Green Off On/off Timeout or safety relay
switched off.
Red Green Green Red Off Power module defective:
replace the device.
Red Off Green Red Off No supply voltage U1 for
electronics.
Red Green Off 2) 2) No supply voltage U2 for
motor starter.
Red Off Off Red Off No supply voltages U1 and
U2
1) Status of the LEDs in this form only when group diagnostics activated
2) Not relevant
Table 4-11: LED status and error displays on the PM-D F3 power module
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-31
4.8.5 Diagnosis of the PM-D F4 power module
SF Group error Red
PWR Power (electronic power supply
U1)
Green
CON Contactor (contactor supply U2) Green
STAT Status indicator for safety relay Red/green
LEDs Safety relay Status/Cause/Remedy
SF 1) PWR CON
STAT
Off Green Green Green On Normal operation
Red Green Green Green On Bus fault
Red Green Green Off Off Safety relay switched off.
Red Green Green Red Off Power module defective:
replace the device.
Red Off Green Red Off No supply voltage U1 for
electronics.
Red Green Off 2) 2) No supply voltage U2 for
motor starter.
Red Off Off Red Off No supply voltages U1 and
U2
1) Status of the LEDs in this form only when group diagnostics activated
2) Not relevant
Table 4-12: LED status and error displays on the PM-D F4 power module
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
4-32 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
4.8.6 Diagnosis of the PM-D F5 power module
4.8.7 Diagnosis of the PM-X connection module
SF Group error Red
PWR Power (electronic power supply
U1)
Green
STAT Status indicator for safety relay Red/green
LEDs Safety relay Status/Cause/Remedy
SF 1) PWR
STAT
Off Green Green On Normal operation
Red Green Green On Bus fault
Red Green Off Off Safety relay switched off.
Red Green Red Off Power module defective:
replace the device.
Red Off Red Off No supply voltage U1 for electron-
ics.
1) Status of the LEDs in this form only when group diagnostics activated
Table 4-13: LED status and error displays on the PM-D F5 power module
LED SF Status
Off Normal operation
Red Group error
Table 4-14: Diagnosis of the PM-X connection module
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-33
4.8.8 Diagnosis of the PM-D F X1 fail-safe power/expansion module
SF Group error Red
PWR Power (electronic power supply
U1)
Green
SGx Status display for SG1 to SG6 Green
LEDs Status/Cause/Remedy
SF 1) PWR
SGx
Off Green Normal operation
Red Green Bus fault
Red Off No supply voltage U1 for electronics.
Green Emergency stop not activated
Normal operation
Off Emergency stop on SGx bus
Bus not wired (unused)
Wire break at SGx input
1) Status of the LEDs in this form only when group diagnostics activated
Table 4-15: Status and error displays with LEDs on the fail-safe PM-D F X1 power/expansion module
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
4-34 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
4.8.9 Diagnosis of the F-CM fail-safe contact replicator
SF Group error Red
PWR Power (electronic power supply
U1)
Green
STAT Status indicator for safety relay Red/green
LEDs Safety relay Status/Cause/Remedy
SF 1) PWR
STAT
Off Green Green On Normal operation
Red Green Green On Bus fault
Red Green Off Off Safety relay switched off.
Red Green Red Off F-CM faulty:
replace the device.
Red Off Red Off No supply voltage U1 for electron-
ics.
1) Status of the LEDs in this form only when group diagnostics activated
Table 4-16: Status and error displays with LEDs on the fail-safe F-CM contact replicator
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-35
4.8.10 Diagnosis of the DS1-x and RS1-x motor starters; standard
SF Group error Red
C-STAT Contactor
status
Red/green/
yellow
LEDs
Status/Cause/Remedy
SF 1) C-STAT
Operating status
Off Yellow Motor on (clockwise or counterclockwise in the case
of the RS1-x)
Off Off Motor off
Device fault
Red Green Contactor jammed or coil defective (cannot be
switched on)
In the case of a DS1-x and RS1-x, the limit switch
might be actuated in conjunction with xB3 or xB4
Red Red Contactor welded
Red Off Contactor defective
System fault
Red Off Power switch tripped, contactor off
Red Yellow Power switch tripped, contactor on
Group error via bus
Red Off/yellow Header module sets group error
1) Status of the LEDs in this form only when group diagnostics activated
Table 4-17: Status and error displays via LEDs on the motor starters; standard (5.5 kW)
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
4-36 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
4.8.11 Diagnosis of DS1e-x, RS1e-x and DSS1e-x motor starters; high feature
F-DS1e-x and FRS1e-x fail-safe motor starters
Red Group error SF DEVICE Device sta-
tus
Red/
green/
yellow
Red/
green/
yellow
Contactor
status
C-STAT
Green Safety group SGx (nur bei F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x)
LEDs
Status/Cause/Remedy
SF 1) C-STAT Device
Operating status
Control by bus
Off Yellow Green Motor on
(clockwise or counterclockwise in the case of the
RS1e-x and F-RS1e-x)
Off Off Flashing
green 2) No startup parameters received 4)
Off Off Green Motor off
Off Flickering
green 2) Green Shutdown via input action quick stop 4)
Off Off Flickering
green 5) Energy-saving mode active
Manual operation local
Control via 2DI COM/
-2DI LC COM control modules
Off Flickering
yellow 2) Green Motor on
(clockwise or counterclockwise in the case of the
RS1e-x and F-RS1e-x)
Off Flickering
green 2) Green Motor off
Off Flashing
green 3) Green Lost connection in manual operating mode 4)
Soft starting/coasting down (only with
DSS1e-x)
Off Flashing
yellow 3) Green Motor is in soft start
1) Status of the LEDs in this form only when group diagnostics activated
2) Flicker frequency: 8 to 10 Hz
3) Flash frequency: 0.5 Hz
4) Display/function only from order number suffix: -.AB4
5) Flash sequence: 0.25 s on / 1.75 s from unique flashing rhythm for power-saving mode
Table 4-18: LED status and error displays for DS1e-x, RS1e-x, DSS1e-x, F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-37
LEDs Status/Cause/Remedy
SF 1) C-STAT Device Group error
Category: Device fault
Red Red Red Current flow without switch-on command
(e.g. contactor welded, connection through thy-
ristor)
Safety shutdown due to faults in the fail-safe area
Red Off Red Defective electronics, self test error (e.g. contac-
tor actuation defective, communication fault)
Fault in the fail-safe area
(defective electronic component)
Category: System fault
Red Green Yellow No current flow despite switch-on command
(residual current detected)
(e.g. contactor jammed, coil defective, no 400 V
incoming supply, no load connected)
Red Off Yellow Power switch tripped
Overload, thermal motor model
Overload, switching element
Motor blocked
Asymmetry
Current limit violated
Shutdown on account of input action
(e.g.: end position shutdown through xB3, 4 or
2DI COM/2DI LC COM control module)
Process mapping error
Faulty parameterization
Safety shutdown (SGx/U2 missing)
Switching element power supply missing
Cold run shutdown 4)
Off Off Off Electronics supply voltage missing
Red Off Off Electronics power supply too low
General warning
Category: System fault
Off -.AA3:
Off
-.AA4 and
-.AB4:
Green
Flashing
yellow 2) • No current flow despite switch-on command
(residual current detected)
(e.g. contactor jammed, coil defective, no 400
V incoming supply, no load connected)
Yellow Flashing
yellow 2) • Thermal motor model overload
• Asymmetry
• Current range violation
Group warning regarding input action
(e. g. via 2DI COM/
-2DI LC COM control modules)
• Switching element power supply missing
• Power switch tripped/switched off
• Maintenance timer limit value exceeded 4)
1) Status of the LEDs in this form only when group diagnostics activated
2) Flash frequency: 0.5 Hz
3) Flicker frequency: 8 to 10 Hz
4) Display/function only from order number suffix: -.AB4
Table 4-18: LED status and error displays for DS1e-x, RS1e-x, DSS1e-x, F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
4-38 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Only for F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x
From order number suffix -.AA4, the following applies for the self test after
POWER ON:
Note
If two different SGx LEDs are flashing, the configuration does not correspond to
the mechanically selected SG bus. Please check the mechanical selection or
configuration.
Running light over all SGx LEDs:
Error in decoder for SG bus.
Remedy: replace the motor starter
LEDs
Status/Cause/Remedy
SGx
Off not parameterized and
EMERGENCY STOP on mechanically selected rail
Flashing
green 1) no EMERGENCY STOP and not configured or
EMERGENCY STOP and configured
Green No EMERGENCY STOP and configured
1) Flash frequency: 0.5 Hz
Table 4-19: LED status and error displays for F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x
LEDs
SF C-STAT Device SGx
Red Yellow Yellow Running
light
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-39
4.8.12 Diagnosis of brake control modules xB3, xB4, xB6
Note
The brake control modules xB1, xB2 and xB5 are not active modules and cannot
therefore provide diagnostics, i.e. they cannot be configured in the control
either.
SF Group error Red
2 Input limit switch, clockwise rota-
tion
Green
6 Input limit switch, counterclock-
wise rotation
Green
STAT Circuit state of brake Yellow
LEDs Status/Cause/Remedy
SF 1) 26
STAT
Off Green Green Off Limit switch 4) not activated
Brake is active,
motor braked
Off Green Green Yellow Limit switch 4) not activated
Brake released
Off Off Green Off Limit switch 4) for clockwise rota-
tion activated, brake active
motor braked
Off Green Off Off Limit switch 4) for counterclock-
wise rotation activated, brake
active
motor braked
Red x 2) x 2) Yellow Brake overload
Motor braked 5)
Red x 2) x 2) 3) Bus fault
1) Status of the LEDs in this form only when group diagnostics activated
2) Circuit state is irrelevant
3) Depending on the parameterization in the motor starter
(for response in case of CPU/master STOP, see Section 8.2.2, 8.3.4, 8.4.5, 9.2.2, and 9.3.4)
4) With normally closed contact function
5) does not apply with xB6
Table 4-20: Status and error displays via LEDs for xB3, xB4, xB6
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
4-40 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
4.9 Process mappings
4.9.1 Process mapping of DS1-x and RS1-x motor starters; standard
Input signals
Output signals for DS1-x and RS1-x
DI 0.0 Readiness for operation DI 0.1 Return message from con-
tactor
0 Contactor jammed or fused
(device fault)
0Off
1 Ready for operation, no prob-
lems
1On
(clockwise/counterclockwise
rotation in the case of
RS-x 1)
DI 0.2 Circuit breaker DI 0.3 Not set
0 Switched on (ON)
1 Tripped (OFF)
DO 0.0 Signal to contactor DO 0.1 Signal to contactor
(RS1-x only)
0 Motor off
Clockwise rotation off
(in case of RS1-x)
0 Counterclockwise rotation off
(only RS1-x)
1 Motor on
Clockwise rotation on
(in case of RS1-x)
1 Counterclockwise rotation on
(only RS1-x)
DO 0.2 Drive for expansion mod-
ule
(e.g. brake control)
DO 0.3 Not set
0 No drive
(e.g. brake control
- brake active
- motor braked)
1Drive
(e.g. brake control
- brake released
- motor unbraked)
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-41
4.9.2 Process mapping of DS1e-x, RS1e-x and DSS1e-x motor starters;
high feature F-DS1e-x and FRS1e-x fail-safe motor starters
Input signals
DI 0.0 Ready (automatic) DI 1.0 Motor current Iact 5)
0 Starter cannot be operated by
host/PLC
Bit 0
1 Starter can be operated by
host
DI 0.1 Motor on 1) DI 1.1 Motor current Iact 5)
0Off Bit 1
1 On (clockwise/counterclock-
wise rotation)
DI 0.2 Group error DI 1.2 Motor current Iact 5)
(If one or more faults
described in Ta b l e 4 - 7 occur,
"Group error" is reported
irrespective of whether the
"Group diagnosis" parame-
ter (see Section 8.3.4, 8.4.5,
and 9.3.4) is set to "Disable"
or "Enable").
Bit 2
0No faults
1Fault
DI 0.3 General warning DI 1.3 Motor current Iact 5)
0No warning Bit 3
1Warning
DI 0.4 Input 1 2) DI 1.4 Motor current Iact 5)
04) Bit 4
1
DI 0.5 Input 2 2) DI 1.5 Motor current Iact 5)
04) Bit 5
1
DI 0.6 Input 3 3) DI 1.6 Manual operation local
04) 0 No manual operation local
1 1 Manual operation local
DI 0.7 Input 4 3) DI 1.7 Ramp operation
(for soft starter)
04) 0 Not active
11Active
1) Signal is 1 if the motor current is >18.75% of the set rated current
2) From the expansion module, e.g. brake control xB3,4 (optional)
3) From 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control module (optional)
4) See following Section "Input behavior"
5) See Section 10.3
For parameter description see Section 10
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
4-42 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Input behavior
Inputs 1 to 4 of the fail-safe F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x motor starters behave in
accordance with the motor starter profile of the PNO (PROFIBUS User Organi-
zation).
Inputs 1 to 4 on the DS1e-x, DSS1e-x and RS1e-x motor starter; high feature
with order number suffixes -.AA2 up to revision level E03 respond differently
than do order number suffixes -.AA2 from revision level E04 and order number
suffix -.AA3 and order number suffix -.AB4 when parameterizing NC function in
process mapping of the inputs (PII).
There is no variation in behavior for the parameterization of the inputs for the
normally open contact function.
The table below presents an overview of the differences:
Caution
When replacing a motor starter with revision level up to E03 with order number
suffix -.AA2 with a motor starter with revision level from E04 and order number
suffix -.AA2; -.AA3 or -.AB4 , care should be taken in the PLC user program
because of the different behavior of an input when parameterizing NC function.
Input parameterized for
With order number suffix -.AA2
and revision level up to E03
With order number suffix -.AA2
and revision level from E04
or order number suffix -.AA3 or
order number suffix -.AA4
or order number suffix -.AB4
NO
NC
Table 4-21: Input behavior
LED
PII
0
1
Active
Not active
LED
PII
0
1
Not active Active
0
1
Not active Active
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-43
Output signals
DO 0.0 Motor cw DO 1.0 Not used
0 Motor off
1 Motor on
DO 0.1 Motor ccw
(for RS1e-x, F-RS1e-x)
DO 1.1 Not used
0 Motor off
1 Motor on
DO 0.2 Drive for expansion module
(e.g. brake control)
DO 1.2 Not used
0 No drive
(e.g. brake control
- brake active
- motor braked)
1Drive
(e.g. brake control
- brake released
- motor unbraked)
DO 0.3 Trip Reset (edge 0 > 1) DO 1.3 Not used
0 Trip Reset inactive
1 Trip Reset active
DO 0.4 Emergency start DO 1.4 Not used
0 Not active
1Active
DO 0.5 Self-test (edge 0 > 1)
(F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x only)
DO 1.5 Not used
0 Not active
1Active
DO 0.6 Not used DO 1.6 Not used
DO 0.7 Not used DO 1.7 Quick stop lock
(from order number suffixes: -
.AB4)
0 not activated
1 activated
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
4-44 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
4.9.3 Process mapping of xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control modules
Input signals
Output signals
DI 0.0 Input 1 DI 0.1 Input 2
0 No current flow 0 No current flow
1 Current flow present 1 Current flow present
DO 0.0 Reserved DO 0.1 Reserved
0- 0-
1- 1-
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-45
4.10 Motor Starter ES
Features
The "Motor Starter ES" diagnostics and commissioning tool (version 2.0 and
above) offers:
• Structured and tool-supported configuration of low-voltage switching devices
• Quick diagnosis
Local commissioning and monitoring on site such as:
• Parameter assignment during operation of the programmable controller and
control system
• Observation
• Diagnostics and testing
•Factory setting
• Read individual phase currents as direct values
• Residual current detection
• A parameterization block can be set
• Integrated online help
• Read statistics and measured values
Application
The "Motor Starter ES" diagnostic and commissioning tool is suitable for the fol-
lowing motor starters:
• High feature with order number suffixes -.AA3
• High feature with order number suffixes .AA4
• High feature with order number suffixes -.AB4
(from software motor starter ES 2007 + SP4)
• Fail-safe motor starters:
The connection between the PC or programming device and the motor starter is
set up using a LOGO! PC cable and 2DI COM/2DI LC COM control
module (see Section 4.4/4.5 for a description) that is installed on the corre-
sponding motor starter.
You can find additional information on the software in the online help.
Order numbers
You will require the following order numbers:
• LOGO! PC cable: 6ED1057-1AA00-0BA0
• The diagnostic and commissioning tool "Motor Starter ES":
- Basic package, Floating License 3ZS1310-4CC10-0YA5
- Standard package, Floating License 3ZS1310-5CC10-0YA5
- Premium package, Floating License 3ZS1310-6CC10-0YA5
• 2DI COM control module: 3RK1903-0CH10 or
2DI LC COM control module: 3RK1903-0CH20
Note
When using the high feature starter -.AB4 with Motor Starter ES and a STEP 7,
special diagnosis is not possible for an online diagnosis. The diagnosis can be
carried out using Motor Starter ES.
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
4-46 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
4.11 High Feature motor starter with
order number suffix -.AB4
4.11.1 Device replacement of HF starters -.AA3 and -.AA4 with -.AB4 starters
The new motor starters (-.AB4) are backwards-compatible, i.e. when replace-
ment is required (old -.AA3 or -.AA4 starters), they are replaced with new start-
ers with no S7 re-configuration or modification of the user program), the new
starters runs in DPV0 operation with 12 bytes of parameter data and can be
operated like the replaced unit in terms of data technology. For active use of
the newly integrated DPV1 functionality, the new starter must be re-configured
on the control. In the startup, the following differences in the telegram length
parameter data are generated:
Motor starter; high feature with order number suffixes -.AA3 12 bytes
Motor starter; high feature with order number suffixes -.AA4 12 bytes
Motor starter; high feature with order number suffixes -.AB4 22 Byte (required
due to DPV1 support)
Note
If a -.AA3 starter is replaced by a -.AB4 starter, a change in the device response
is generated with power switch OFF (see Section 10.7.3, table 10-18).
4.11.2 Device response during parameterization
With a DPV0 start-up, the parameter values of all parameters not accessible via
DPV0. This has the advantage that a full parameterization previously carried out
using the DS131 (via DPV1 start-up mode, C2 channel or Motor Starter ES) is
effective apart from the DPV0 part (= differential parameterization).
If backup of all DS131 parameters against overwriting in the new startup operat-
ing state is desired, this can be achieved by setting a parameter lock (com-
mand). A basic factory setting can be carried out directly on the device with
motor starters; high feature with order number suffixes -.AB4 (see
Section 10.18).
4.11.3 Power supply for High Feature motor starter with
order number suffix -.AB4
Note
Motor starters; high feature with order number suffix -.AB4 that are not inte-
grated via GSD/GSDML into the ET200S station use extended start-up data
records
To ensure that the motor starters; high feature are automatically assigned the
extended start-up data records on the re-start of the ET200S station, the elec-
tronics power supply (U1 of the PM-D module) of the motor starter; high feature
are supplied from the same voltage source as the interface module (header
module).
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 4-47
4.11.4 Configuration of High Feature motor starter with order number suffix
-.AB4
4.11.4.1 Configuration and parameterization with STEP
When configuring the motor starter via STEP 7, the complete parameterization
is set in hardware config and automatically sent to the motor starters.
The following interface modules support the complete parameterization of the
motor starters:
On interface modules that do not support the complete parameterization scope
of the motor starters, a motor starter; high feature with order number suffix -
.AB4 must be configured as motor starter; high feature with order number suffix
-.AA4.
For example: a 3RK1301-0AB10-0AB4 must be configured as 3RK1301-0AB10-
0AA4
Note
In the following cases, the full scope of the parameters is reduced as a function
of the system by the calculation tool to the standard parameters:
- Activated DPV0 alarm mode (for PROFIBUS IMs)
- Activated option handling (for PROFIBUS IMs)
- For configuring via GSD/GSDML
• 6ES7 151-1AA04-0AB0
• 6ES7 151-1AA05-0AB0
• 6ES7 151-1AB05-0AB0
• 6ES7 151-1BA02-0AB0
• 6ES7 151-7AA20-0AB0
• 6ES7 151-7FA20-0AB0
• 6ES7 151-3AA23-0AB0 V6.1
• 6ES7 151-3AA23-0AB0 V7.0
• 6ES7 151-3BA23-0AB0 V6.1
• 6ES7 151-3BA23-0AB0 V7.0
• 6ES7 151-3BB23-0AB0 V6.1
• 6ES7 151-3BB23-0AB0 V7.0
• 6ES7 151-8AB00-0AB0
• 6ES7 151-8FB00-0AB0
• 6ES7 151-8AB01-0AB0
• 6ES7 151-8FB01-0AB0
Table 4-22: Interface modules with support of the complete parameterization scope
Commissioning and diagnostics
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
4-48 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
4.11.4.2 Configuration and parameterization with GSD/GSDML
When configuring the motor starter with GSD/GSDML, only the default
parameters are available.
Setting the parameter "Wait for startup data records" means that it is possible to
send the complete parameterization scope to the starter as startup data records
from the user program. This applies in particular to field bus masters from other
manufacturers.
For complete startup parameterization, multiple parameter data records are
required.
If associated data records are to be sent for the startup, the list data set DS128
must be sent to the starter first.
List data set DS128 must contain the data record numbers for all data records to
be sent to the starter.
Layout of the DS128:
The startup data records must be written to the device in the sequence as listed
in the data record 128 (bytes 8 ... 13). The number of startup data records can
vary between one and six data records. The time between sending the individ-
ual startup data records must not exceed 5 seconds.
If no list data record (DS128) is used, the device accepts each data record indi-
vidually. This also occurs with an empty DS128 (number of data records = 0).
After receiving the specified data records, the motor starter is ready for
operation and can be operated via the control.
Byte Meaning Value
0Coordination 32
1 ... 6 Reserved 0 ... 6
7 Number of startup data records 0
8 ... 13 DS131: Device parameters (see Section A.16)
DS134: Maintenance (see Section A.17)
DS165: Comment (see Section A.18)
DS232: Equipment identifier (see Section A.19.2)
DS233: Installation (see Section A.19.3)
DS234: Description (see Section A.19.4)
131
134
165
232
233
234
14 ... 27 Reserved 0
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 5-1
General technical specifications 5
Section Subject Page
5.1 Shipping and storage conditions 5-2
5.2 Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions 5-3
5.3 Electromagnetic compatibility 5-4
General technical specifications
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
5-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
5.1 Shipping and storage conditions
Shipping and storage conditions
The motor starters fulfill the requirements of IEC 61131, part 2 in respect of
shipping and storage conditions. The following information applies to modules
that are shipped and stored in their original packaging.
Insulation resistance
Type of condition Permissible range
Free fall 0.35 m
Temperature from -40 °C to +70 °C
Temperature variation 20 K/h
Air pressure from 1080 to 660 hPa
(corresponds to an altitude of -1000 to 3500 m)
Relative humidity from 5 to 95 %, without condensation
Circuits with rated voltage
Ue against other circuits or
earth
Test voltage
in accordance with IEC 61131, part 2
0 V < Ue ≤ 50 V 500 VDC
300 V < Ue ≤ 600 V 2.6 kVDC to ground
General technical specifications
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 5-3
5.2 Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions
Installation position
The preferred installation position is horizontal on a vertical wall. to do this,
please also observe the information in Section 3.4 ’Derating’.
Mechanical environmental conditions
Climatic environmental conditions
Oscillations tested in accordance with IEC 60068, part 2-6 (sine)
• Oscillation type: Frequency sweeps with a rate of change of 1 octave a
minute
-10 Hz ≤ f ≤ 58 Hz Constant amplitude: 0.15 mm
-58 Hz ≤ f ≤ 150 Hz Constant acceleration: 2 g
• Oscillation time: 10 frequency sweeps per axis in each of the 3 axes
arranged vertically in relation to each other
Shock tested in accordance with IEC 60068, part 2-27 (right angle)
• Type of shock:
• Intensity of shock:
• Direction of shock:
Half sine
5 g peak value, 11 ms duration
3 shocks in the +/– directions in each of the 3 axes
arranged vertically in relation to each other
Betriebstemperatur 0°C to 60°C, from +40°C with derating
(See Section 3.4 ’Derating’)
Temperature variation
Permissible rated current
Relative humidity from 5 to 95 %
Air pressure from 1080 to 795 hPa Corresponds to an alti-
tude of -1000 to
2000 m
Contaminant concentration SO2 : < 0.5 ppm
rel. humidity < 60 %,
no condensation
Test:
10 ppm; 4 days
H2S: < 0.1 ppm
rel. humidity < 60 %,
no condensation
1 ppm; 4 days
General technical specifications
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
5-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
5.3 Electromagnetic compatibility
Definition of "EMC"
Electromagnetic compatibility is the capability of an electrical device to work
satisfactorily in an electromagnetic environment without influencing the envi-
ronment.
ET 200S motor starters and their modules also fulfil the requirements of the
EMC Directive of the European Single Market. The prerequisite for this is that
the ET 200S distributed I/O device meets the requirements and guidelines
regarding the electrical structure.
Pulse-shaped disturbance variables
The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the fail-safe
modules in comparison with pulse-shaped disturbance variables.
Sinusoidal disturbance variables
The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the ET 200S
motor starters and their respective modules in comparison with sinusoidal dis-
turbance variables.
• HF irradiation according to IEC 61000-4-3
Electromagnetic HF field, amplitude-modulated
80 to 1000 MHz, 1.4 to 3 GHz
10 V/m
80% AM (1 kHz)
HF decoupling according to IEC 61000-4-6
0.15 MHz to 80 MHz
10 Veff unmodulated
80% AM (1 kHz)
Pulse-shaped disturbance vari-
able Tested with Corresponds to
degree of severity
Electrostatic discharge according
to IEC 61000-4-4
8 kV
4 kV
3 (air discharge)
3 (contact discharge)
Burst pulse (fast, transient distur-
bance variables) according to
IEC 61000-4-4.
2 kV (supply line)
1 kV
3
3
High-energy individual pulse (surge) according to
IEC 61000-4-5.
For degrees of severity 2 and 3, an external safety circuit is
required (see paragraph below).
3
• Asymmetrical coupling 2 kV (supply line)
2 kV (signal line/data line)
• Asymmetrical coupling 1 kV (supply line)
1 kV (signal line/data line)
General technical specifications
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 5-5
Emission of radio interference
Emitted interference of electromagnetic fields according to EN 55011/CISPR 11:
limit value class A, Group 1 (measured at a distance of 10 m).
Protecting the ET 200S motor starters from overvoltage
If your plant requires protection from overvoltage, an external safety circuit
(surge filter) should be placed upstream of the electronics/contactor supply of
the terminal modules to guarantee the surge resistance of the ET 200S motor
starters.
Note
Lightning protection measures always require an individual assessment of the
plant as a whole.
An almost complete protection from overvoltage can only be achieved, however,
when the entire surrounding building has been designed for protection against
overvoltage. In particular, this includes applying structural measures to the
building right from the planning stage.
For comprehensive protection from overvoltage, get in touch with your Siemens
contact person or a company that specializes in lightning protection.
Fail-safe modules/motor starters
Fail-safe modules/motor starters were additionally tested according to the
IEC 61326-3-1 and IEC 62061 standards.
Explosion protection
The ET 200S Standard starters (3RK1301-xxB00-xAA2) have ATEX approval in
accordance with EU Directive 94/9/EC.
They are suitable for protecting motors of the "Increased Safety e" type of pro-
tection.
The EC type test certificate for Category (2) G/D is available. It has the number
DMT 02 ATEX F OO1.
Frequency Emitted interference
from 30 to 230 MHz < 40 dB (µV/m) Q
from 30 to 230 MHz < 47 dB (µV/m) Q
General technical specifications
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
5-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 6-1
Terminal modules 6
Section Subject Page
6.1 Assignment of the terminal modules 6-2
6.2 TM-P15 S27-01 terminal module for PM-D power module 6-4
6.3 Terminal modules for motor starters 6-6
6.3.1 TM-DS45 terminal modules for the DS1-x direct starter; standard 6-6
6.3.2 TM-DS65 terminal modules for DS1e-x direct starter; high feature and
DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature
6-7
6.3.3 TM-FDS65 terminal modules for fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starters 6-8
6.3.4 Technical specifications, TM-DS45 and TM-DS65/TM-FDS65 6-9
6.3.5 TM-RS90 terminal modules for RS1-x reversing starter; standard 6-10
6.3.6 TM-RS130 terminal modules for RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature 6-11
6.3.7 TM-FRS130 terminal modules for fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starters 6-12
6.3.8 Technical specifications - TM-RS90 and TM-RS130/TM-FRS130 6-13
6.4 Power bus 6-14
Terminal modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
6-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
6.1 Assignment of the terminal modules
The following tables show which power modules, motor starters, expansion
modules, and fail-safe modules you can use with the various terminal modules.
You can find information on the terminal modules in the following sections:
• Safety-integrated systems in Section 11
•Section 12 for expansion modules such as the brake control module
• Fail-safe modules in Section 13
Power modules Terminal modules
TM-P15
S27-01
TM-PF30 S47 TM-X15
S27-01
... -B0 ... -B1 ... -C0 ... -C1 ... -D0
3RK1903 -0AA00 -1AA10 -1AA00 -1AC10 -1AC00 -1AD10 -1AB00
PM-D X
PM-D F1 X X
PM-D F2 X X
PM-D F3 X X
PM-D F4 X X
PM-D F5 X
PM-X X
Table 6-1: Assignment of the terminal modules for power modules
Terminal modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 6-3
Motor starters Terminal modules
TM-DS45
-S32
TM-RS90
-S32
TM-DS65
-S32
TM-RS130
-S32
TM-DS45
-S31
TM-RS90
-S31
TM-DS65
-S31
TM-RS130
-S31
3RK1903 -0AB00
-0AB10
-0AC00
-0AC10
-0AK00
-0AK10
-0AL00
-0AL10
DS1-x direct starter;
standard X
DS1e-x direct starter;
high feature X
DSS1e-x direct soft starter;
high feature X
RS1-x reversing starter;
standard X
RS1e-x reversing starter;
high feature X
Table 6-2: Assignment of the terminal modules for motor starters
Fail-safe modules Terminal modules
TM-FDS65
-S32
TM-FRS130
-S32
TM-PFX30
S47-G1
TM-FCM30
S47
TM-FDS65
-S31
TM-FRS130
-S31
TM-PFX30
S47-G0
3RK1903 -3AC00
-3AC10
-3AD00
-3AD10
-3AE00
-3AE10
-3AB10
Fail-safe F-DS1e-x
direct starter X
Fail-safe F-RS1e-x
reversing starter X
PM-D F X1
power/expansion module X
F-CM
contact replicator X
PM-D F PROFIsafe power module
See the "ET 200S Distributed I/O Devcie for Fail-Safe Modules."
Table 6-3: Assignment of the terminal modules for fail-safe modules
Terminal modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
6-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
6.2 TM-P15 S27-01 terminal module for PM-D power module
Features
• The terminal module consists of a support
and a terminal block.
• TM-P15 S27-01 terminal module for PM-
D power module
• Connection by screw-type terminal
• Prewiring of the terminal module
• AUX1 cable fed through without terminals
Color coding labels
1. You can apply the color coding labels in the
opening provided next to the terminal directly from the strip.
2. Push the color coding labels onto the terminal module with your finger.
Looping the potentials through
Terminals 1/8, 2/9, 4/11, 5/12, 6/13 and 7/14 are bridged in the terminal module
and can be used to loop the potentials through.
Terminal assignment
The following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the TM-P15 S27-01
terminal module:
View Termi-
nal
Meaning
1/8 L+ U1: Voltage supply for electronic compo-
nents
URATED = 24 V DC
2/9 M
4/11 A1+ U2: Voltage supply for contactor
URATED = 24 V DC
5/12 A2-
6/13 AUX2 For safety-integrated systems, see
Section 11.6.6
7/14
-
AUX3
AUX1
For safety-integrated systems, see
Section 11.6.6
Fed through without terminals
Table 6-4: Terminal assignment of the TM-P15 S27-01 terminal module for the PM-D power module
Support
Terminal block
1
3
6
74
1
1
2
5
1
1
4
92
81
Terminal modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 6-5
Note on power supply of motor starters; high feature with order number
suffix -.AB4
Motor starters; high feature with order number suffix -.AB4 that are not inte-
grated via GSD/GSDML into the ET200S station use extended start-up data
records
To ensure that the motor starters; high feature are automatically assigned the
extended start-up data records on the re-start of the ET200S station, the elec-
tronics power supply (U1 of the PM-D module) of the motor starter; high feature
are supplied from the same voltage source as the interface module (header
module).
Technical specifications - TM-P15 S27-01
Dimensions and weight
Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) 15 x 196.5 x 102
Depth with power module (mm) 117.5
Weight (g) approx. 175
Insulation voltages and rated currents
Insulation voltage 500 V
Rated operating voltage 24 VDC
Rated operating current 10 A
Conductor cross-sections
Single-core (mm2) 1 x (0.14 to 2.5) to IEC 60947
1 x 2.5
Finely stranded with wire end ferrule
(mm2)
1 x (0.14 to 1.5) to IEC 60947
AWG cables,
single- or multi-core 1 x (18 to 22)
Wiring
Tool required Standard screwdriver, size 1
Tightening torque (Nm) 0.4 to 0.7
Table 6-5: Technical specifications - TM-P15 S27-01
Terminal modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
6-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
6.3 Terminal modules for motor starters
6.3.1 TM-DS45 terminal modules for the DS1-x direct starter; standard
Features
• TM-DS45... terminal modules for the DS1-x direct starter; standard
– with TM-DS45 S32 power bus infeed
– with TM-DS45 S31 power bus throughfeed
• Connection by screw-type terminals
• Prewiring possible
• AUX1 cable fed through without terminals
• Expansion possible with PE/N terminal block
TM-DS45 terminal modules
Figure 6-1: TM-DS45 terminal modules for the DS1-x direct starter; standard
Important
Install the PE/N terminal blocks before connecting the terminal modules for
motor starters.
Terminal modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 6-7
6.3.2 TM-DS65 terminal modules for DS1e-x direct starter; high feature and
DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature
Features
• TM-DS65... terminal modules for DS1e-x direct starter; high feature and
DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature
– with TM-DS65 S32 power bus infeed
– with TM-DS65 S31 power bus throughfeed
• Connection by screw-type terminals
• Prewiring possible
• AUX1 cable fed through without terminals
• Expansion possible with PE/N terminal block
• Fail-safe-kit functionality is integrated
TM-DS65 terminal modules
Figure 6-2: TM-DS65 terminal modules for DS1e-x direct starter and DSS1e-x soft starter; high feature
Important
Install the PE/N terminal blocks before connecting the terminal modules for
motor starters.
Terminal modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
6-8 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
6.3.3 TM-FDS65 terminal modules for fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starters
Features
• TM-FDS65 terminal modules for fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starters
– with TM-FDS65 S32 power bus infeed
– with TM-FDS65 S31 power bus throughfeed
• Connection by screw-type terminals
• Prewiring possible
• AUX1 cable fed through without terminals
• Coding connector for SG1 to SG6
• Expansion possible with PE/N terminal block
• The fail-safe modules are identified by yellow labeling strips.
TM-FDS65 terminal modules
Figure 6-3: TM-FDS65 terminal modules for fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starters
Important
Install the PE/N terminal blocks before connecting the terminal modules for
motor starters.
Terminal modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 6-9
6.3.4 Technical specifications, TM-DS45 and TM-DS65/TM-FDS65
Dimensions and weight TM-DS45 TM-DS65/TM-FDS65
Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) 45 x 264 x 100 65 x 290 x 100
Height with PE/N terminal block (mm) 306 332
Depth with motor starter (mm) 127 150
Depth with motor starter and fail-safe kit
(safety-integrated system) (mm) 152 -
Depth with motor starter and 2DI COM
control module (mm) - 173
Weight (g) approx. 305 approx. 400
Shock protection
Type of protection according to
IEC 60529
IP20,
(IP00 im Anschlussraum von
L1 - L3, T1 - T3, N und PE)
Rated voltages, currents and frequencies for the power bus
Rated insulation voltage Ui690 V
Rated operating voltage Ue500 V AC
Rated impulse strength Uimp 6 kV
Rated operating current Ie40 A 50 A
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz
Conductor cross-sections
Single-core (mm2)1 x 10
2 x (1 to 2.5) or
2 x (2.5 to 6)
Finely stranded with wire end ferrule
(mm2)
2 x (1 to 2.5 ) or
2 x (2.5 to 6)
in acc. with IEC 60947
AWG cables, single- or multi-core 2 x (14 to 10)
With 3-phase feed-in terminal, if neces-
sary
Single-core or multi-core (mm2)
Finely stranded with wire end ferrule
(mm2)
AWG cables, single- or multi-core
1 x 2.5 to 25
1 x 2.5 to 25
1 x 12 to 4
Wiring
Tool required Standard screwdriver,
size 2 and Pozidriv 2
Tightening torque (Nm) 2.0 to 2.5
Table 6-6: Technical specifications - TM-DS45 and TM-DS65/TM-FDS65
Terminal modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
6-10 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
6.3.5 TM-RS90 terminal modules for RS1-x reversing starter; standard
Features
• TM-RS90... terminal modules for RS1-x reversing starter; standard
– with TM-RS90 S32 power bus infeed
– with TM-RS90 S31 power bus throughfeed
• Connection by screw-type terminal
• Prewiring possible
• AUX1 cable fed through without terminals
• Expansion possible with two PE/N terminal blocks
TM-RS90 terminal modules
Figure 6-4: TM-RS90 terminal modules for RS1-x reversing starter; standard
Important
Install the PE/N terminal blocks before connecting the terminal modules for
motor starters.
Coding
Infeed
max. 40 A
To load
max. 5.5 kW / 12 A
- S31
-S32
PE
N
L1
L2
L3 AUX1
Warning
In the case of the last terminal module for motor starters in a load group, the
open contacts must be sealed with caps on the power bus (L1, L2, L3, N,
PE) prior to commissioning, so that they are safe from touching (push the
caps on firmly). This prevents the contacts being touched and removes the
danger of an electric shock (400 V AC).
U1 supply voltage for
electronics
U2 supply voltage for
contactor
Terminal block for
power bus
PE/N
terminal block
Terminal modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 6-11
6.3.6 TM-RS130 terminal modules for RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature
Features
• TM-RS130... terminal modules for RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature
– with TM-RS130 S32 power bus infeed
– with TM-RS130 S31 power bus throughfeed
• Connection by screw-type terminal
• Prewiring possible
• AUX1 cable fed through without terminals
• Expansion possible with two PE/N terminal blocks
• Fail-safe-kit functionality is integrated
TM-RS130 terminal modules
Figure 6-5: TM-RS130 terminal modules for RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature
Important
Install the PE/N terminal blocks before connecting the terminal modules for
motor starters.
Coding
Terminal blocks
PE/N
Infeed
max. 50 A
To load
max. 7.5 kW / 16 A
- S31
-S32
PE
N
L1
L2
L3
AUX1
RF1, 2
AUX2, 3
Warning
In the case of the last terminal module for motor starters in a load group, the
open contacts must be sealed with caps on the power bus (L1, L2, L3, N,
PE) prior to commissioning, so that they are safe from touching (push the
caps on firmly). This prevents the contacts being touched and removes the
danger of an electric shock (400 V AC).
U1 supply voltage for
electronics
U2 supply voltage for
contactor
Terminal block for
power bus
Terminal modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
6-12 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
6.3.7 TM-FRS130 terminal modules for fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starters
Features
• TM-FRS130 terminal modules for fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starters
– with TM-FRS130 S32 power bus infeed
– with TM-FRS130 S31 power bus throughfeed
• Connection by screw-type terminal
• Prewiring possible
• AUX1 cable fed through without terminals
• Coding connector for SG1 to SG6
• Expansion possible with two PE/N terminal blocks
• The fail-safe modules are identified by yellow labeling strips.
TM-FRS130 terminal modules
Figure 6-6: TM-FRS130 terminal modules for fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starters
Important
Install the PE/N terminal blocks before connecting the terminal modules for
motor starters.
SG3/4
Coding
Terminal blocks
PE/N
Infeed
max. 50 A
To load
max. 7.5 kW / 16 A
- S31
-S32
PE
N
L1
L2
L3
AUX1
SG1/2
SG5/6
Coding connector for SG1 to SG6
Warning
In the case of the last terminal module for motor starters in a load group, the
open contacts must be sealed with caps on the power bus (L1, L2, L3, N,
PE) prior to commissioning, so that they are safe from touching (push the
caps on firmly). This prevents the contacts being touched and removes the
danger of an electric shock (400 V AC).
U1 supply voltage for
electronics
Terminal block for
power bus
Terminal modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 6-13
6.3.8 Technical specifications - TM-RS90 and TM-RS130/TM-FRS130
Dimensions and weight TM-RS90 TM-RS130/TM-FRS130
Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) 90 x 264 x 100 130 x 290 x 100
Height with PE/N (mm) 306 332
Depth with motor starter (mm) 127 150
Depth with motor starter and fail-safe kit
(safety-integrated system) (mm) 152 -
Depth with motor starter and 2DI COM
control module (mm) - 173
Weight (g) approx. 600 approx. 800
Shock protection
Type of protection according to
IEC 60529
IP20,
(IP00 im Anschlussraum von
L1 - L3, T1 - T3, N und PE)
Rated voltages, currents and frequencies for the power bus
Rated insulation voltage Ui690 V
Rated operating voltage Ue500 V AC
Rated impulse strength Uimp 6 kV
Rated operating current Ie40 A 50 A
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz
Conductor cross-sections
Single-core (mm2)1 x 10
2 x (1 to 2.5) or
2 x (2.5 to 6)
Finely stranded with wire end ferrule
(mm2)
2 x (1 to 2.5 ) or
2 x (2.5 to 6)
in acc. with IEC 60947
AWG cables,
single- or multi-core
2 x (14 to 10)
With 3-phase feed-in terminal, if neces-
sary
Single-core or multi-core (mm2)
Finely stranded with wire end ferrule
(mm2)
AWG cables, single- or multi-core
1 x 2.5 to 25
1 x 2.5 to 25
1 x 12 to 4
Wiring
Tool required Standard screwdriver,
size 2 and Pozidriv 2
Tightening torque (Nm) 2.0 to 2.5
Table 6-7: Technical specifications - TM-RS90 and TM-RS130/TM-FRS130
Terminal modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
6-14 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
6.4 Power bus
Features
• The power bus consists of components that have fixed links to the terminal
modules for the motor starters.
• The power bus distributes the power in a load group.
• The maximum current-carrying capacity at 60 °C is:
– In terminal modules with an installation width of 45/90 mm, 40 A for motor starter;
standard
– For terminal modules with 65/130 mm installation width 50 A for motor starter;
high feature/fail-safe
• The wiring is done automatically when the terminal module is installed.
• Terminal blocks with an installation width of 45 or 90 mm and 65 or 130 mm
– with power bus infeed (for one load group) and motor connection
– with power bus throughfeed and motor connection
• Power bus: 3 pins (L1, L2, L3),
expandable to 5 pins with PE/N terminal block.
View
Figure 6-7: TM-DS45 terminal module - example for DS1-x direct starter; standard
Warning
In the case of the last terminal module for motor starters in a load group, the
open contacts must be sealed with caps on the power bus (L1, L2, L3, N, PE)
prior to commissioning, so that they are safe from touching (push the caps on
firmly). This prevents the contacts being touched and removes the danger of an
electric shock (400 V AC).
Motor connection
Terminal module
PE/N terminal block (not
in delivery package)
Power bus
infeed
Opening for padlock to
prevent installation for
motor starter
Terminal modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 6-15
PE/N terminal block accessories
The power bus can be supplemented by a PE/N terminal block. Terminal blocks
with installation widths of 45 and 65 mm are available as follows:
• with infeed at the beginning of a new load group (i.e. contacts on the right
only). This terminal block is supplied with caps for N and PE
• with throughfeed (i.e. with contacts on the right and left)
Figure 6-8: PE/N terminal block
Warning
In the case of the last terminal module for motor starters in a load group, the
open contacts must be sealed with caps on the power bus (L1, L2, L3, N, PE)
prior to commissioning, so that they are safe from touching (push the caps on
firmly). This prevents the contacts being touched and removes the danger of an
electric shock (400 V AC).
Important
Install the PE/N terminal blocks before connecting the terminal modules for
motor starters.
PE
PE
N
PE
PE
NPE
PE
N
PE
PE
N
with infeed with throughfeed
N
N
N
N
PE
PE PE
PE
45 mm installation
width for motor starter;
standard
65 mm installation
width for motor starter;
high feature
Terminal modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
6-16 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Load group
All the motor starters supplied via a single power bus infeed are referred to as a
load group. A load group does not have to be identical to a potential group.
Within a group of motor starters supplied by the same power module, an addi-
tional power bus infeed may be required to ensure that the rated operating cur-
rent (aggregate current) of the terminal modules is not exceeded.
The aggregate current of the power bus may amount to the following:
• for terminal modules with an installation width of 45 or 90 mm: 40 A
(for motor starter; standard)
• for terminal modules with an installation width of 65 or 130 mm: 50 A
(for motor starter; high feature/fail-safe)
Current flow via the power bus
The following image shows the current flow via the power bus:
Figure 6-9: Current flow in the power bus
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 7-1
PM-D power module 7
Power modules
Section Subject Page
7.1 PM-D power module for motor starters 7-2
7.1.1 Parameters 7-3
7.1.2 Technical specifications - PM-D 7-4
7.1.3 Power supply for High Feature motor starter with order number suffix
-.AB4
7-4
PM-D power module
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
7-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
7.1 PM-D power module for motor starters
Features
• A new potential group begins with the power module - together with the associated
terminal module. The motor starters of a potential group are connected to the right of
the power module.
• The power module conducts the voltages for supplying the electronic components to
the voltage buses of the terminal modules. It does this for all the motor starters in a
potential group.
• The PM-D monitors the U1 (PWR) voltage supply for the electronics and the U2 (CON)
power supply for contactors. Power failures are displayed using LEDs and indicated via
bus if the group diagnostics are enabled.
Caution
Power modules can be neither inserted nor removed during operation.
View
Figure 7-1: PM-D power module
LEDs:
SF group error
PWR (power) (U1)
CON (contactor) (U2)
PM-D power module
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 7-3
7.1.1 Parameters
The following table indicates the parameter that can be set for the PM-D power
module.
Group diagnosis:
This parameter enables diagnosis messaging
(error types are listed in Section 4.8).
Note
The "Disable group diagnosis" parameter also suppresses the display of faults
on the SF-LED.
Parameters Action,
value range Factory setting Applicability
Group diagnosis • Disable
•Enable
Disable Module
Table 7-1: Parameters for the PM-D power module
PM-D power module
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
7-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
7.1.2 Technical specifications - PM-D
Dimensions and weight
Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm)
(incl. terminal module) 15 x 196.5 x 117.5
Weight (g) approx. 65
Voltages, currents, potentials
Rated control supply voltage Us20.4 to 28.8 V DC; 0 up to 60 °C
Rated operating current Ie10 A
Recommended upstream short-circuit
protection:
•Fuse
•Circuit breaker
gL/gG 10 A
10 A, trip characteristic B
Insulation between U1 and U2 tested
with
500 V
Supply of:
• Motor starters
• Motor starters for safety-integrated
systems
• Electronic modules
•Ex[i] modules
• Frequency converters
yes
no
no
no
yes
Power draw from the backplane bus ≤10 mA
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Interrupts None
Diagnostic functions:
• Group error/device fault
• Monitoring of the supply voltage for
electronic components U1 (PWR)
• Monitoring of supply voltage for con-
tactors U2 (CON)
• Diagnostic information readable
yes
red SF LED
green PWR LED
green CON LED
yes
Table 7-2: Technical specifications - PM-D
PM-D power module
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 7-5
7.1.3 Power supply for High Feature motor starter with order number suffix
-.AB4
Note
Motor starters; high feature with order number suffix -.AB4 that are not inte-
grated via GSD/GSDML into the ET200S station use extended start-up data
records
To ensure that the motor starters; high feature are automatically assigned the
extended start-up data records on the re-start of the ET200S station, the elec-
tronics power supply (U1 of the PM-D module) of the motor starter; high feature
are supplied from the same voltage source as the interface module (header
module).
If the electronics supply of the motor starters fails and reactivates during ongo-
ing operation of the header group, the motor starters1) do not receive any
extended startup data records.
In this case, the motor starter issues the following error after three minutes:
Parameterization error (F16).
If a common power supply with the header group is not possible, a re-parame-
terization is provided by the user program is carried out.
1) from an order number suffix: -.AB4
PM-D power module
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
7-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-1
Direct and soft starters 8
Fail-safe direct starter
Section Subject Page
8.1 Overview 8-2
8.2 DS1-x direct starter; standard 8-5
8.2.1 Features 8-5
8.2.2 Parameters 8-7
8.2.3 Technical specifications 8-8
8.3 DS1e-x direct starter; high feature F-DS1e-x fail-safe direct starter 8-11
8.3.1 Features 8-11
8.3.2 Additional features of the F-DS1e-x 8-14
8.3.3 Module replacement 8-19
8.3.4 Parameters 8-20
8.3.5 Technical specifications 8-23
8.4 DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature 8-27
8.4.1 Physical principles 8-27
8.4.2 Application and use 8-31
8.4.3 Features 8-32
8.4.4 Notes on configuration 8-39
8.4.5 Parameters 8-42
8.4.6 Technical specifications 8-45
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
8-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
8.1 Overview
Three versions of the ET 200S motor starters are available:
• Standard series (code: DS1-x)
• High feature series, characterized by properties that boost system availability
and improve diagnosis
(code for direct starters: DS1e-x, for direct soft starters: DSS1e-x).
A distinction is made between the following:
– If there is no communication interface at the front, the order number ends in: -.AA2
– If there is a communication interface at the front, the order number ends in: -.AA3 via
the 2DI COM control module for the "Motor Starter ES" software (from Version 2.0)
– If there is a communication interface at the front, the order number ends in: -.AA3
from revision level E02 and -.AA4 via the 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control module for
the ’Motor Starter ES’ software (from version 2.0)
– If there is a communication interface at the front, the order number ends in: -.AB4 via
the 2DI COM control module for the motor starter ES 2007 + SP4 software
• Fail-safe series that ensures safe shutdown of the motor starter after an
emergency stop command by means of the mechanically selected SG bus
(code: F-DS1e-x).
A distinction is made between the following:
– With front communication interface via the 2DI COM control module for the "Motor
Starter ES" software (from Version 2.0).
– With front communication interface from revision level E05 via the 2DI COM/-2DI LC
COM control module for the "Motor Starter ES" software (from Version 2.0)
All motor starters have full protection against short-circuit and overload.
Due to the integrated electronic overload protection, a cover of the power range up
to 16 A with only two device versions is possible with motor starter; high feature/
fail-safe. They also have more extensive diagnostics and additional parameters for
system control and monitoring.
The motor starter series with installation widths of 45/90 mm and 65/130 mm;
high feature can be used in conjunction with the ET 200S safety-integrated sys-
tem components for safety applications to PL e / SIL3.
The fail-safe motor starter series (F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x) in conjunction with
fail-safe power modules (PM-D PROFIsafe and PM-D F X1) is suitable for use in
safety applications up to SIL3 according to IEC 62061 / PL e according to DIN
EN ISO 13849-1.
Warning
If the circuit breaker or starter protection switch is switched on again after being
tripped as a result of an overload or a short circuit, and there is a pending On
signal for the contactor, the motor starts up.
Caution
Due to the operation of star-connected three-phase motors, high EMC interference may
occur. Interference above the IEC limit values can lead to an impairment of functions or
failure of the electronics. In case of high EMC interference, we recommend the use of
motors with EMC protection circuits. (Exception: electronic starters may not be operated
with a EMC protection circuit). The best filtering effect is achieved with three-phase RC
interference inversion modules. Varistor interference inversion modules should not be
used since they only insufficiently filter out fast transients.
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-3
The table below presents an overview of the properties of the direct and soft
starters.
Feature DS-x1 DS1e-x DSS1e-x
F-DS1e-x
Installation width [mm] 45 65
for power rating up to [kW] 5.5 7.5
Integrated switching devices for SIRIUS components of the
size
S00 S0
Short-circuit protection with 3RV circuit breaker with instan-
taneous overcurrent release X
Short-circuit protection with 3RV circuit breaker with
instantaneous overcurrent release X
Overload protection with thermal overload release integrated
into circuit breaker X
Programmable electronic overload protection X
Switching function mechanical electronic
Rated operating current 0.14 - 12 A 0.3 - 16 A
Rated operating voltage Ue
• IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1
•UL, CSA
400 V AC
600 V AC
480 V
600 V AC
Parameterizable no yes
Tripping class CLASS 10 55),10,155),
20
10A, 10
Asymmetry recognition yes
Residual current detection no yes
Parameterizable current limits no yes
Anti-blocking function with rapid shutdown no yes
Type of coordination (2 at 400 V) 2 (up
to 1.6 A)
21
Use up to SIL (IEC 62 061) SIL31) SIL3 1) SIL1
SIL2 3)
Up to performance level (DIN EN ISO 13849-1) PLe1) PLe 2) PLc
PLd 3)
Feedback contact for safety-integrated system with fail-
safe kit 1
integral
Compatible expansion modules (brake control modules) xB1 to xB6 xB1, xB3,
xB56), xB66)
Table 8-1: Overview of direct starters and soft starters
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
8-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Free inputs through 2DI COM control module no yes 3)
2DI LC COM control module usable? no yes 4)
"Motor Starter ES" usable? no yes 3)
Derating necessary at top end of performance range? yes yes 2) no
Diagnosis, fault types see Section 4.7
1) Only with failsafe kit and additional infeed contactor
2) With additional infeed contactor
3) From order number suffix -.AA3 and for F-DS1e-x; see Section 8.3.2
4) As of order number suffix -.AA3 and revision level E02, as well as for F-DS1e-x from revision level E05
5) From order number suffix -.AB4
6) Only in combination with a separately protected power supply of the brake
Feature DS-x1 DS1e-x DSS1e-x
F-DS1e-x
Table 8-1: Overview of direct starters and soft starters (Contd.)
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-5
8.2 DS1-x direct starter; standard
8.2.1 Features
ET 200S DS1-x ... direct starter; standard (see Figure 8-2)
• Are motor starters for a single direction of rotation that can be can be used in
the ET 200S distributed I/O device.
• Are suitable for switching and protecting three-phase loads up to 5.5 kW at
400 and 500 V AC
• Are available with setting ranges of 0.14 - 0.2 A to 9 - 12 A
• Are equipped with electromechanical SIRIUS switchgear
• The contactor coils are controlled directly via integrated outputs.
• The switching states of circuit breaker and contactor are indicated via inte-
grated inputs.
• Available diagnostic information of the direct starter:
– overload or short-circuit tripping/disconnection of the motor starter
– fault at the motor starter
• The circuit state and status are displayed via LEDs.
• Integrated disconnection functions via circuit breaker
• Upgradable with fail-safe kit 1 for safety system applications
• Have an expansion interface (DO 0.2) for driving an additional module (e.g.
brake control module xB1 to xB6)
• The inputs of the xB3, xB4 or xB6 brake control module (e.g. limit-position
switches) act directly on the contactor and brake drive circuit (for signal
response, see Section 12.3.3).
Important
A protection circuit for the contactor coils is already integrated in the motor
starter. Additional protection circuits connected to the contactor are not per-
missible.
Note
Input 1 (clockwise limit switch) has a direct effect on the contactor for the DS1-x
and on the activation of the brake control module.
Input 2 (counter-clockwise limit switch) only affects activation of the brake con-
trol module.
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
8-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
View
Figure 8-1: DS1-x direct starter; standard
Circuit diagram
Figure 8-2: Circuit diagram - DS1-x direct starter; standard
Toggle switch
Scale for set current
LEDs
Circuit breaker
C-STAT contactor status
SF group error
Warning
Additional protective circuit not
allowed.
Only for control unit
(see Section 4.3)
relevant for safety-
integrated system
Opening to test the
overload protection
Caution
Aperture only for 1-pole auxiliary
switch block
Channel for connecting
lead to auxiliary switch
block
2T1
4T2
6T3
1L1
3L2
5L3
K1
DI 0.1 Contactor on
DI 0.2 Circuit-breaker tripped
K1
DO 0.0 Motor on
DO 0.2 Brake (only for DS1-x)
DI 0.0 Readiness for operation
Logic
(e.g. brake control modules xB1 to xB6
drive for brake)
Output point to expansion module
(only for DS1-x)
Input 1 expansion module (only with DS1-x)
(e.g. xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control limit switch, clockwise rotation)
Input 2 expansion module (only with DS1-x)
(e.g. xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control limit switch, counterclockwise
rotation)
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-7
8.2.2 Parameters
The following table indicates the parameters that can be set for the direct
starter.
Group diagnosis:
This parameter enables diagnosis messaging
(error types are listed in ).
Note
The "Disable group diagnosis" parameter also suppresses the display of faults
on the SF-LED.
Parameters Action,
value range
Factory setting Applicability
Group diagnosis • Disable
•Enable
Disable Module
Response to CPU/
master STOP
• Disconnect
• Keep circuit
state
Disconnect Module
Table 8-2: Parameters for DS1-x direct starter; standard
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
8-8 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
8.2.3 Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm)
• Reversing starter incl. terminal module
• Height with PE/N block
• Depth with fail-safe kit (safety-integrated
system)
45 x 264 x 120
306
144.5
Weight
• Reversing starter incl. terminal module
• Direct starter incl. PE/N terminal block
1.0 kg
1.1 kg
Module-specific data
Assignment type Type 1 to Ie ≤12 A, IEC 60947-4-1,
DIN VDE 0660, Part 102
Type 2 to Ie ≤ 1.6 A
Pollution severity
•At 400 V
•At 500 V
3, IEC 60664 (IEC 61131)
2, IEC 60664 (IEC 61131)
Safety class I, DIN EN 61140 (VDE 140-1)
Degree of protection IP20, IEC 60529
Power loss Pv 1) at Ie≤ 1.25 A
1.6 to 6.3 A
8 to 12 A
approx. 9 W
approx. 10 W
approx. 11 W
Ambient temperature range
•Derating, see Section 3.4
• Order number suffix -.AB4 UL/CSA
(vertical installation on horizontal rails)
without DM-V15
with DM-V15
(horizontal installation on vertical rails)
without DM-V15
0°C to 60°C
60°C/14A
55°C/16A
60°C/15.2A
40°C/14A
Control circuit
Rated operating voltage for electronic compo-
nents: U1
Reverse polarity protection
24 VDC (20.4 to 28.8 VDC)
yes
Rated operating voltage for contactor: U2
Reverse polarity protection
24 VDC (20.4 to 28.8 VDC)
yes
power input
• From electronic component supply: U1
• From contactor supply: U2
• From the backplane bus
approx. 20 mA
approx. 100 mA
≤10 mA
Main circuit
Rated operating voltage Ue
• IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1
• Protective separation between main and
auxiliary circuits
400 V AC
400 V
UL, CSA 600 V AC
Rated insulation voltage Ui500 V AC
Rated impulse strength Uimp 6 kV
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz
1) For motor starter and terminal module as a function of rated operating current Ie (upper setting range).
Table 8-3: Technical specifications - DS1-x direct starter; standard
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-9
Technical specifications - circuit breaker, contactor
Circuit breaker
Tripping class Class 10
Max. rated operating current 12 A
Adjustment ranges
• Thermal overload release
• Instantaneous overcurrent release
0.14 - 0.2 A to 9 - 12 A
fixed setting at 12 x Ie
Minimum tripping current in the event of
phase failure (= 100 % current asymme-
try)
0.85 x Ie
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity to Ie
= 12 A 50 kA at 400 V
Mechanical life
Electrical life
≥ 100 000 switching cycles
100 000
contactor
Rated operational current Ie at 60°C
•AC-1
• AC-2, AC-3
-At 400 V
-At 500 V
• AC-4 at 400 V
12 A
12 A
9 A
4.1 A
Max. permissible output of the three-
phase induction motors at 500 V AC 5.5 kW
Positively driven operation - auxiliary con-
tacts, contactor
yes
Mechanical life
• contactor
• Contactor with safety functionality
Electrical life
B10
30 million switching cycles
10 million switching cycles
see Figure 8-3.
1,000,000 1)
Surge suppression
Operating times in the case of DC opera-
tion
(total break time =
contact parting time + arcing time)
• At 0.85 to 1.1 x Us
-Closing time
-Contact parting time
• Arcing time
Zener diodes integrated
25 to 100 ms
20 to 50 ms
10 to 15 ms
•At 1.0 x U
s
-Closing time
-Contact parting time
typ. 25 ms
typ. 20 ms
1) This information refers only to the mechanical switching element under its reference conditions.
Table 8-4: Technical specifications DS... - circuit breaker, contactor, auxiliary switch block
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
8-10 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Electrical life
Figure 8-3: Electrical service life, contactor
12
PN
10 20 30 40 50 60 80100 200 400
(A)
Ia
Ie(A)
(kW)
103
104
8
6
4
2
2
105
8
6
4
2
106
8
6
4
2
107
8
6
4
23456
9
45,5
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-11
8.3 DS1e-x direct starter; high feature
F-DS1e-x fail-safe direct starter
8.3.1 Features
ET 200S DS1e-x direct starter; high feature
ET 200S F-DS1e-x fail-safe direct starter
• Are motor starters for a single direction of rotation that can be can be used in
the ET 200S distributed I/O device.
• Are suitable for switching and protecting three-phase loads up to 7.5 kW at
400 and 500 V AC
• Are available in 3 setting ranges with 0.3 - 3 A, 2.4 - 8 A, 2.4 - 16 A
• fitted with electro-mechanical SIRIUS switchgear (power switch, contactor)
• Have parameterizable electronic overload protection
• Upper and lower current limits can be defined and monitored for system and
process supervision
• The motor starter can be parameterized for warning or shutdown as the
response to an overload event or if a current limit is violated
• The integral protective mechanism recognizes a blocked motor and triggers a
rapid shutdown
• Integrated residual current detection
• Integrated asymmetry detection
• The as-is current is measured and the information transmitted to analyzers
• The contactor coils are controlled directly via integrated outputs.
• The switching status of the power switch is registered by means of an auxil-
iary switch
• Detection of the circuit state of the contactor on the basis of current flow
evaluation
Detection of the circuit state in the case of the F-DS1e-x using an auxiliary
switch block as well
• Available diagnostic information of the direct starter (see Table 4-7)
• Circuit state and motor-starter status are indicated by LEDs
• Integrated disconnection functions via circuit breaker
• For DS1e-x:
auxiliary switch for ET 200S safety engineering (failsafe kit) already integrated
For F-DS1e-x:
Fail-safe partial shutdown integrated
• The motor starters can be expanded using front-mounted standard SIRIUS
accessories (e.g. auxiliary switch block, time relay) for contactor size S0
• Have an expansion interface (DO 0.2) at the side for driving an expansion
module (e.g. brake control module xB1 to xB6)
• "Response to circuit breaker off" parameterizable (from order number suffix -
.AA4)
• The 2 parameterizable inputs (DI 0.4 and DI 0.5, e.g. limit-position switches)
of the expansion interface (expansion module, e.g. brake control module xB3,
xB4, xB6) act directly on contactor and brake drive
• 2 additional parameterizable inputs (DI 0.6 and DI 0.7) are available through
the 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control module that can be plugged into the front
• Basic factory settings via the rotary switch of the power switch possible
(see Section 10.18)
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
8-12 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
• Communication interface at the front for DS1e-x and DSS1e-x with order
number suffix -.AA3 and for F-DS1e-x via the 2DI COM control module for the
"Motor Starter ES" software (from Version 2.0)
• With the 2DI LC COM control module for the "Manual Operation Local" mode
for DS1e-x and DSS1e-x with order number suffix: -.AA3 from revision level
E02 and for
F-DS1e-x from revision level E05.
• For DS1e-x, from order number suffix -.AB4:
-Quick stop
-Cold run
-Integrated log book functions with 3 device log books
-Has expanded parameter options
- PROFIenergy
- Comprehensive diagnostics via data records
- I&M data
More information can be found in Section 10
View of DS1e-x direct starter; high feature
Figure 8-4: DS1e-x direct starter; high feature
Rotary switch
LEDs
Circuit breaker
C-STAT contactor status
SF group error
DEVICE device status
Latch indicator
Slot for 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM con-
trol module with clear cover sealable
Aperture for standard SIRIUS
accessories
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-13
Circuit diagram of DS1e-x direct starter; high feature
Figure 8-5: Circuit diagram of DS1e-x direct starter; high feature
More detailed descriptions:
• Input signals, in section 4.9.2
• Output signals in section 4.9.2
• Motor current IAct in section 10.3
• Inputs/actions in section 10.11
• Emergency start in section 10.13
• Trip reset in section 10.14
1) Order number suffix -.AB4
DI 1.6 Manual operation local
2T1
4T2
6T3
DO 0.5
1L1
3L2
5L3
K1
Self-test1)
DI 1.0 - 1.5 Motor current Iact
DI 0.1 Motor ON/current flow
DI 0.2 Group error
DI 0.3 General warning
K1 DO 1.7 Lock quick stop1)
DI 0.4
DI 0.5
DO 0.4 Emergency start
Input 3 control module
DI 0.6
Input 4 control module
DI 0.7
DI 0.0 Ready from host/PLC
Logic
2DI COM/-2DI LC COM (IN 3)
2DI COM/-2DI LC COM (IN 4)
DO 0.3 Trip Reset
DO 0.0 Motor cw
DO 0.2 Brake
Input 1 expansion module
(e.g. xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control limit switch, clockwise rotation)
Input 2 expansion module
(e.g. xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control limit switch, counterclockwise
rotation)
Output to the expansion module
(e.g. xB1 to xB6 brake control,
brake actuation)
Auxiliary switch for
feedback loop in the
safety-integrated sys-
tem
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
8-14 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
8.3.2 Additional features of the F-DS1e-x
Additional features that only apply to the F-DS1e-x fail-safe direct starters are:
• 6 safety groups (SG1 to SG6) can be set using coding connectors in the termi-
nal module
• The safety groups are supplied via a fail-safe power module with overvoltage
protection (PM-D F PROFIsafe, PM-D F X1)
• 2 processors that monitor each other, for controlling the safety function:
Safe shutdown in the event of emergency stop via the mechanically selected
SG bus
• The motor starter is safely shut down if the two processors produce varying
results
• A shunt release for the power switch is integrated to ensure a safe shutdown
in the event of one of the contactors being welded. This feature can also be
used in non-fail-safe mode to ensure a shutdown in the event of a welded
contactor (see note)
• It is possible to test the shunt release/power switch via the bus (DO 0.5)
• Storage of the U1 operating voltage using a capacitor to ensure a safe shut-
down in the event of U1 failure
• Monitoring of the functioning of the capacitor for the U1
• Redundant configuration of the fail-safe components in the motor starter
• The fail-safe modules are identified by yellow labeling strips.
Note
A fail-safe motor starter can also be used in non-fail-safe mode with a PM-D
power module. To do this, the coding for the safety group in the terminal mod-
ule of the fail-safe motor starter must be set to SG3 and the U1 and U2 supply
voltages must have the same potential.
Safety note
When using expansion modules (brake modules xB1 to xB6, 2DI COM/-2DI LC
COM control module ), make sure that these modules are not fail-safe modules
with fail-safe technology.
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-15
Safety note
Only applies in fail-safe mode (fail-safe technology)
The F-DS1e-x can only be operated in the potential group of a PM-D F PRO-
FIsafe or PM-D F X1 that safely limits the voltage to within the SIMATIC range.
Safety note
Cyclic test of the F-DS1e-x
- Shunt release/circuit breaker
Starter protector must be in position "1"
Request self-test (DO 0.5) (signal-triggered)
Starter protector must move to "Trip" position
If the starter protector changes to the "Trip" position the test has been
successful
Turn starter protector to position "0"
Turn starter protector to position "1"
The test can also be carried out when the motor side switch is switched on.
After this test, the motor starter is automatically switched back on if a switching
command (D0.0 / D0.1) is pending.
Expansion module Operating mode of the F-Starter
PL according to
DIN EN ISO 13849-1
SIL according to IEC 62061
Non-fail-safe
mode
PLc/
SIL1/
PLd/
SIL2
PLe
/SIL3
xB1 X X X X
xB2 X X X X
xB3 X X 1) X 1)
xB4 X X 1) X 1)
xB5 X X X X
xB6 X X 1) X 1)
2DI COM control module
2DI LC COM control mod-
ule
XX
1) X 1) X 1)
1) No feedback to the fail-safe technology may occur through the inputs, i.e. cross-circuits to the sensor cables should be
eliminated (cross-circuit proof cable installation)
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
8-16 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Safety note
Only one SG bus can be selected in the terminal module for each motor starter.
Safety note
You must only use the F-DS1e-x motor starter to control motors that do not con-
stitute a danger to persons or to the environment if they suddenly shut down.
Important
After U1 has been applied, the F-DS1e-x requires approximately 30 s until the
internal self-test is completed. DI 0.0 ready is then set in the process mapping
via the host/PLC. Once the internal self-test is completed, the selected SG bus
is monitored.
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-17
View of the F-DS1e-x fail-safe direct starter
Figure 8-6: Fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter
Rotary switch
LEDs
Circuit breaker
C-STAT switching status
SF group error
DEVICE device status
Latch indicator
contactor
Safety group
SG1 to SG6
Slot for 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM
control module with clear cover
sealable
Aperture for standard SIRIUS
accessories
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
8-18 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Circuit diagram of the F-DS1e-x fail-safe direct starter
Figure 8-7: Circuit diagram of the fail-safe F-DS1e-x direct starter
More detailed descriptions:
• Input signals, in section 4.9.2
• Output signals in section 4.9.2
• Motor current IAct in section 10.3
• Inputs/actions in section 10.11
• Emergency start in section 10.13
• Trip reset in section 10.14
1) Order number suffix -.AB4
DI 1.6 Manual operation local
DO 0.5 Self-test
2T1
4T2
6T3
DO 0.3
1L1
3L2
5L3
K1
Trip Reset
DI 1.0 - 1.5 Motor current Iact
DI 0.1 Motor ON/current flow
DI 0.2 Group error
DI 0.3 General warning
K1
DO 0.4 Emergency start
DI 0.4
DI 0.5
DO 0.0 Motor cw
DO 0.2 Brake
Input 3 control module
DI 0.6
Input 4 control module
DI 0.7
DI 0.0 Ready from host/PLC
Logic
SG1 to SG6Mechanical selection
of the safety group
2DI COM/-2DI LC COM (IN 3)
2DI COM/-2DI LC COM (IN 4)
Input 1 expansion module
(e.g. xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control limit switch, clockwise
rotation)
Input 2 expansion module
(e.g. xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control limit switch,
counterclockwise rotation)
Output to the expansion module (e.g. xB1 to
xB6 brake control, brake actuation)
Auxiliary switch for circuit
state monitoring
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-19
8.3.3 Module replacement
If a module has to be replaced, an acceptance test is not necessary. With the
F-DS1e-x, however, it is necessary to repeat the safety function test (see cyclic
test).
Warning
If there is a pending ON signal for the contactor, the motor starts up automati-
cally.
This applies to an F-DS1e-x motor starter after the self-test if there is no emer-
gency stop present on the selected SG bus.
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
8-20 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
8.3.4 Parameters
A description of the parameters can be found in Section 10.
The table below lists the actions and value ranges that can be set with the vari-
ous parameters for the DS1e-x and F-DS1e-x direct starters.
Parameters Action,
value range
Factory setting
Rated operating current
• Range 1
• Range 2
• Range 3
(Increment 10 mA)
• 0.3 to 3 A
(0.05 to 1.1 kW)
• 2.4 to 8 A
(1.1 to 3 kW)
• 2.4 to 16 A
(1.1 to 7.5 kW)
•3 A
•8 A
•16 A
Load type 1, 2) • 3 - phase motor
• 1 - phase motor (only with electro-
mechanical starters)
3 - phase motor
Non-resetting on voltage failure 1,
2)
•no
•yes
yes
Prewarning limit value 1)
(Motor heating)
• 0 … 95 % Ie
• 0 = deactivated
(increment: 5 %)
0 = deactivated
Response to overload - thermal
motor model
• Shutdown without restart
• Shutdown with restart
• Warning
Shutdown without
restart
Tripping class • CLASS 5 (10a)1)
•CLASS 10
•CLASS 15
1)
• CLASS 20
CLASS 10
Recovery time 1, 2) • 1 … 30 min
(increment: 0.5 min)
1.5 m i n
Idle time
Reset the thermal overload model
through functional switching
• 0 ... 255 s
• 0 = deactivated
(increment: 1 s)
0 (deactivated)
Prewarning limit value 1)
(time-based triggering)
• 0 to 500 s
• 0 = deactivated
(increment: 1 s)
0 (deactivated)
Response to current limit violation • Warning
• Shutdown4) Warning
Lower current limit • 18.75 to 100 % 3)
(increment: 3.125 %)
18.75 %
Upper current limit • 50 … 150 % Ie 3)
• 50 … 400 % Ie 1)
(increment: 3.125 %)
112.5 %
1) from order number suffix: -.AB4 present, and can be changed
2) Up to order number suffix: -.AA4: value present, but cannot be changed (fixed on factory setting)
3) Of rated operational current
4) Possible with DS1e-x direct starter with order number suffix -.AA3, and with F-DS1e-x
Table 8-5: Parameters for DS1e-x direct starter; high feature and F-DS1e-x fail-safe direct starter
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-21
Blocking current 1,2) • 150 ... 1000 % Ie (DS1e-x, RS1e-x)
• 150 ... 800 % Ie (DSS1e-x) (incre-
ment: 50 %)
800 %
Blocking time 1, 2) •1 … 5 s
(increment: 0.5 s) 1 s
Response with power supply
switching element missing 1, 2) • Group error
• Group error only with
ON command 4, 1)
• Group warning1)
Group error
Response to residual current
detection • Warning
• Disconnect Disconnect
Response with power switch OFF • Group error
• Group error with ON command 5, 1)
• Group warning 1)
Group error
Asymmetry limit value 1, 2) • 30 … 60 % Ie
• 0 = deactivated
(increment 10 %)
30 %
Response to asymmetry • Warning
• Disconnect Disconnect
vInput signal extension 1) •0 … 200 ms
(increment: 10 ms) 0 ms
Input signal delay 1) • 10 … 80 ms
(increment: 10 ms) 10 ms
Input 1, 2 - signal level
(x-increment,
expansion module)
Input 3, 4 - signal level
2DI COM control module
2DI LC COM control module)
(see Section 10)
•NC
•NO NO
Input 1 to 4 - action
NO only
NO only
NO only
NO only
NO only
• No action
• Shutdown without restart
• Shutdown with restart
• Shutdown at limit position, clock-
wise rotation
• Shutdown at limit position, counter-
clockwise rotation
• Group warning 6)
• "Manual Operation Local" mode6)
• Quick stop1)
•Cold run
1)
• Emergency start 6)
• Motor-cw 6)
• Motor ccw 6)
• Trip reset 1)
No action
Inputs 1 to 4 signal 1) • non-retentive
• Retentive
non-retentive
Response to CPU/master STOP • Use dummy value
• Keep last value
Use dummy value =
disconnect
1) from order number suffix: -.AB4 present, and can be changed
2) Up to order number suffix: -.AA4: value present, but cannot be changed (fixed on factory setting)
4) Possible with DS1e-x direct starter with order number suffix -.AA3, and with F-DS1e-x
5) Possible from order number suffix -.AA4
6) Also possible with inputs 1 and 2 for DS1e-x, RS1e-x and DSS1e-x with order number suffix -.AA3, and with F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x
Parameters Action,
value range
Factory setting
Table 8-5: Parameters for DS1e-x direct starter; high feature and F-DS1e-x fail-safe direct starter (Contd.)
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
8-22 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Group diagnosis:
This parameter enables diagnosis messaging
(error types are listed in Section 4.7).
Note
The "Disable group diagnosis" parameter also suppresses the display of faults
on the SF-LED.
Replacement values 1) • Motor cw
• Motor ccw
(only with reversing starters)
• Brake actuation
•Trip Reset
• Emergency start
• Self-test
• Quick stop lock
No action
Wait for startup parameter - data
record 1) •no
•yes
no
Enable delay of the brake when
starting 1) • - 2.5 … 2.5 s
• (increment: 0.01 s)
0 s
Holding time of the brake when
stopping 1) • 0 … 25 s
• (increment: 0.01 s)
0 s
Group diagnosis • Disable
• Enable
Disable
Safe shutdown group 7) • Not assigned
•SG1 to SG6
Not assigned
1) from order number suffix: -.AB4 present, and can be changed
7) Only with F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x
Parameters Action,
value range
Factory setting
Table 8-5: Parameters for DS1e-x direct starter; high feature and F-DS1e-x fail-safe direct starter (Contd.)
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-23
8.3.5 Technical specifications
Direct starter DS1e-x F-DS1e-x
Dimensions and weight
Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm)
• Reversing starter incl. terminal module
• Height with PE/N block
• Depth with brake control module 2DI
65 x 290 x 150
332
173
Weight
• Reversing starter incl. terminal module
• Direct starter incl. PE/N terminal block
1.6 kg
1.7 kg
Ambient temperature range 0°C to 60°C
Module-specific data
Assignment type Type (up to Ie ≤ 16 A at
400 V)
2
Pollution severity
•At 400 V
•At 500 V
3, IEC 60664
(IEC 61131)
2, IEC 60664
(IEC 61131)
Safety class I, DIN EN 61140
(VDE 140-1)
Degree of protection IP20, IEC 60529
Power loss Pv 1) at Ie0.3 up to 3 A
2.4 to 8 A
2.4 to 16 A
approx. 9 W
approx. 10 W
approx. 18 W
Ambient temperature range
• For derating see Section 3.4
• Order number suffix -.AB4 UL/CSA
(vertical installation on horizontal rails)
without DM-V15
with DM-V15
(horizontal installation on vertical rails)
without DM-V15
0°C to 60°C
60°C/14A
55°C/16A
60°C/15.2A
40°C/16A
Maximum attainable safety classes:
•SIL
2) according to IEC 62061
•PL2) according to DIN EN ISO 13849)
34)
e4) 2
d
Table 8-6: Technical specifications - DS1e-x direct starter; high feature and F-DS1e-x fail-safe
direct starter
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
8-24 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Direct starter DS1e-x F-DS1e-x
Safety parameters:
• SFF (IEC 62061)
• DC (DIN EN ISO 13849)
• HFT (DIN EN / IEC 61508
•nOP (DIN EN ISO 13849)
•dOP (DIN EN ISO 13849)
•hOP (DIN EN ISO 13849)
•Low demand - PFD
AVG (10a)
Test interval 3 mos.
Test interval 6 mos.
• High demand/continuous mode - PFH
Test intervall 3 mos. 1/h
Test intervall 6 mos. 1/h
• Proof test interval T1years
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
99.64 %/
99.70 %
>99
0
1
365
24
3.5 x 10-5
8.0 x 10-5
8.1 x 10-10
1.8 x 10-9
20
• B10 1,000,0003)
Control circuit
Rated operating voltage for electronic com-
ponents: U1
24 VDC
(20.4 to 28.8 VDC) (21.6 to 26.4 VDC)
Reverse polarity protection yes
Rated operating voltage for contactor: U224 V DC (20.4 to 28.8 V DC) 5)
Reverse polarity protection yes
power input
• From electronic component supply: U1
• From contactor supply U2
Pick-up: (for 800 ms)
Hold-in:
• From SG1 to SG6
Pick-up: (for 200 ms)
Hold-in:
• Test function of the shunt release/
power switch (50 ms) from U1
approx. 40 mA approx. 100 mA
250 mA
max. 150 mA
approx. 250 mA
max. 55 mA
approx. 1.5 A6)
• From the backplane bus approx. 20 mA
Main circuit
Rated operating voltage Ue
• IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1
• Protective separation between main and
auxiliary circuits
400 V AC
400 V
UL, CSA 600 V AC
Rated insulation voltage Ui500 V AC
Rated impulse strength Uimp 6 kV
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz
1) For motor starter and terminal module as a function of rated operating current Ie (upper setting range).
2) Max. achievable values
3) This information refers only to the mechanical switching element under its reference conditions.
4) Only in conjunction with a PM-D F module and an external additional infeed contactor with feedback loop monitoring.
5) For motor starters with order number suffix -.AA3 from revision level E02, the frame potential for the contactor supply
U2 is connected to the frame potential of the electronics supply U1. Connect the frame potential of U1 and U2 to the
power module in order to prevent high compensating current.
6) In the event of simultaneous activation of the test function of several starters, the currents are cumulative.
Table 8-6: Technical specifications - DS1e-x direct starter; high feature and F-DS1e-x fail-safe
direct starter
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-25
Technical specifications - circuit breaker, contactor
Direct starter DS1e-x F-DS1e-x
Circuit breaker
Rated operating current 3/8/16 A
Instantaneous overcurrent release Fixed setting at 13 x Ie max
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity to
Ie = 16 A (motor starter) 50 kA at 400 V
Mechanical life
Electrical life
≥ 100,000 operating cycles
100,000 operating cycles
Contactor
Rated operational current Ie at 60°C
•AC-1
• AC-2, AC-3
-At 400 V
-At 500 V
• AC-4 at 400 V
16 A
16 A
11 A
9 A
Max. permissible output of the three-
phase induction motors at 500 V AC 7.5 kW
Positively driven operation - auxiliary con-
tacts, contactor
yes
Mechanical life
contactor
Electrical life
Switching frequency
10 million switching cycles
see Figure 8-8.
80/hr
Surge suppression Zener diodes integrated
Operating times in the case of DC opera-
tion
(total break time =
contact parting time + arcing time)
• At 0.85 to 1.1 x Us
-Closing time (ms)
-Contact parting time (ms)
• Arcing time (ms)
25 to 100 50 to 170
20 to 50 40 to 100
10 to 15 10 to 15
•At 1.0 x U
s
-Closing time (ms)
-Contact parting time (ms)
typ. 25 typ. 50
typ. 20 typ. 40
Table 8-7: Technical specifications of the DS1e-x and F-DS1e-x - power switch, contactor
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
8-26 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Electrical life
Figure 8-8: Electrical service life, contactor
12 16
PN
10 20 30 40 50 60 80100 200 400
(A)
Ia
Ie(A)
(kW)
103
104
8
6
4
2
2
105
8
6
4
2
106
8
6
4
2
107
8
6
4
12
3
456
8
1,1 37,5
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-27
8.4 DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature
The electrical features of the DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature are identi-
cal to those of the SIRIUS soft starter 3RW30. The same power electronics are
used.
8.4.1 Physical principles
Starting current
Three-phase asynchronous motors have a higher making current I(startup). This
inrush current can be between three and fifteen times as high as the rated oper-
ating current, depending on the type of motor. A figure between seven and
eight times the rated motor current can be postulated as typical.
Figure 8-9: Typical current and torque curve of a three-phase asynchronous motor
I
startup
I
0 (idle)
I
I
rated
nrated nsyn n
M
n
M
startup
M
dip
M
motor
M
pull-out
M
motor
M
rated
n
rated
n
syn
M
accel
M
load
M
load
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
8-28 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Reducing the starting current
There are various ways of reducing the starting current:
• by star delta starter
• by frequency converter
• by soft starter
Star delta starter
After a certain delay, the motor windings are switched over from a star to a delta
configuration. Motor current for star starting is only
about 1/3 of that required for delta starting (motor torque is also reduced to
approximately 1/3 of the delta torque).
Disadvantages:
• 6 motor cables are necessary
• Occurrence of switching surges (in the current and torque transients)
• Startup cannot be matched to the system environment
• Installation is relatively complicated and time-consuming
• Contactor switching calls for an extra time relay or PLC programming
• More space needed in the control cabinet
Figure 8-10: Current and torque curves for star-delta starting
I
IAd
IA*=
Starting current in d
Starting current
for
*/d start
nn
nsyn
*nrated
M
MAdMmotor atd
Mmotor at*
MA*
=1/3 MAd
Mload
nn
nsyn
*nrated
1/3 IA d
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-29
Soft starter
With a soft starter, motor voltage is increased from a selectable starting voltage
to the rated voltage by phase firing within a defined starting time. Motor current
is proportional to the motor voltage, so the starting current is reduced by the
factor of the defined starting voltage.
The illustration below shows how the DSS1e-x soft starter works:
Figure 8-11: Phase firing of the supply voltage by semiconductor elements in the DSS1e-x soft
starter
Example:
Starting voltage 50 % of Ue => starting current equals 50 % of the motor start-
ing current for direct-on-line starting.
A soft starter also reduces motor torque. This is the reason why a soft-started
motor does not jerk into action.
The relationship is as follows: motor torque is proportional to the square of
motor voltage.
UL1- L3
ϕ
M
3~
L2
L1
L3
α
α
α
α
G1
UL2- L3
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
8-30 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Example:
Starting voltage 50 % of Ue => starting torque 25 % of the starting torque for
direct-on-line starting.
Advantages:
• Less space needed in the control cabinet
• No protective circuitry (e.g. filter elements) needed for compliance with radio
interference suppression requirements
• Lower installation costs
• Straightforward system startup
• Only 3 motor feeder cables, half as many as are needed for a star delta
starter
• Local adjustments make the unit easy to configure in accordance with system
requirements.
Disadvantages:
• Long-term speed settings not possible.
• Lower torque at reduced voltage
Figure 8-12: Current and torque curves for a soft starter
n
nsyn
Mstartup
M
Mstartup
Mstartup
100 % Usystem
70 % Usystem
50 % Usystem
0.49 x
0.25 x
n
nsyn
Istartup
I
Istartup
0.7 x
Istartup
0.5 x
100 % Usystem
70 % Usystem
50 % Usystem
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-31
8.4.2 Application and use
Areas of application and criteria for selection
The ET 200S DSS1e-x soft starters are an alternative to star-delta starters and
frequency converters (for comparison and advantages, see Section 8.4.1).
The most important advantages are soft starting and soft rundown, interruption-
free switching without current spikes that could interfere with the supply sys-
tem, and the compact size.
Many drives that needed frequency converters in the past, can be changed to
soft-start operation with the DSS1e-x, if the applications do not call for varia-
tions in speed.
Applications
Typical applications include, for example:
Conveyor belts, conveyor systems:
• smooth starting
• smooth slowing,
Rotary pumps, piston-type pumps
• avoidance of pressure surges
• service life of the piping system is extended
Agitators, mixers:
• reduced starting current
Fans:
• less strain on gearing and drive belts
Drive for a motor with electromechanical brake
An electromechanical brake with infeed from the main voltage (L1/L2/L3) should
not be connected directly to the output of the soft starter. An internally pow-
ered electromechanical brake should be supplied via a separate contactor.
Important
Do not use a soft starter to supply an internally powered brake (xB2, xB4).
Brakes xB5 and xB6 must only be operated with externally supplied voltage (see
Section 12.3).
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
8-32 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
8.4.3 Features
ET 200S DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature
• Are motor starters for a single direction of rotation that can be can be used in
the ET 200S distributed I/O device.
• Are suitable for switching and protecting three-phase loads up to 7.5 kW at
400 V AC
• Are available in 3 setting ranges with 0.3 - 3 A, 2.4 - 8 A, 2.4 - 16 A
• Are equipped with electromechanical SIRIUS switchgear (circuit breaker) to
monitor short circuits and for line protection
• The 2-phase power electronics from the SIRIUS 3RW30 soft starter are inte-
grated
• When the motor starts the power thyristors of the soft starter are jumpered
by integrated relays in the current ranges 2.4 - 8 A and 2.4 - 16 A
• Have parameterizable electronic overload protection
• Upper and lower current limits can be defined and monitored for system and
process supervision
• The motor starter can be parameterized for warning or shutdown as the
response to an overload event or if a current limit is violated
• The integral protective mechanism recognizes a blocked motor and triggers a
rapid shutdown
• Integrated residual current detection
• Integrated asymmetry detection
• The as-is current is measured and the information transmitted to analyzers
• The soft starter is controlled directly via integrated outputs
• The switching status of the power switch is registered by means of an auxil-
iary switch
• The switching status of the soft starter is registered by means of current flow
analysis
• Local adjustments by potentiometers for
– starting time
– starting voltage
– Coasting down time
• Available diagnostic information of the soft starter (see Table 4-7)
• Circuit state and motor-starter status are indicated by LEDs
• Integrated disconnection functions via circuit breaker
• Have an expansion interface (DO 0.2) at the side for driving an expansion
module (e.g. brake control module xB1, 3)
• The 2 parameterizable inputs (DI 0.4 and DI 0.5, e.g. limit-position switches)
of the expansion interface (expansion module, e.g. brake control module xB3)
act directly on soft-starter and brake drive
• 2 additional parameterizable inputs (DI 0.6 and DI 0.7) are available through
the 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control module that can be plugged into the front
• With the 2DI LC COM control module for the "Manual Operation Local" mode
for DSS1e-x with order number suffix: -.AA3 from revision level E02.
• "Response to circuit breaker off" parameterizable
(from order number suffix -.AA4)
• For DSS1e-x, from order number suffix -.AB4:
-Quick stop
-Cold run
-Integrated log book functions with 3 device log books
-Has expanded parameter options
- PROFIenergy
- Comprehensive diagnostics via data records
- I&M data
More information can be found in Section 10
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-33
View
Figure 8-13: DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature
Coasting down time
starting voltage
starting time
Rotary switch Circuit breaker
Latch indicator
LEDs
C-STAT switching status
SF group error
DEVICE device status
Soft starter
Slot for 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM
control module
with clear cover
sealable
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
8-34 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Circuit diagram
Figure 8-14: Circuit diagram of DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature
More detailed descriptions:
• Input signals, in section 4.9.2
• Output signals in section 4.9.2
• Motor current IAct in section 10.3
• Inputs/actions in section 10.11
• Emergency start in section 10.13
• Trip reset in section 10.14
Caution
Phase L1 is not looped through the semiconductors in the DSS1e-x. Always
switch off the power switch before commencing work on the output.
1) Order number suffix -.AB4
DO 1.7 Lock quick stop1)
DO 0.5 Self-test1)
DI 1.6 Manual operation local
DO 0.0 Motor cw
2T1
4T2
6T3
DO 0.3
1L1
3L2
5L3
Trip Reset
DI 1.0 - 1.5 Motor current Iact
DI 0.1 Motor ON/current flow
DI 0.2 Group error
DI 0.3 General warning
Drive
DO 0.4 Emergency start
DI 0.4
DI 0.5
DI 1.7 Ramp operation
DO 0.2 Brake
Input 3 control module
DI 0.6
Input 4 control module
DI 0.7
DI 0.0 Ready from host/PLC
Logic
only on version
2.4 - 8 A
2.4 - 16 A
2DI COM/-2DI LC COM (IN 3)
2DI COM/-2DI LC COM (IN 4)
Input 1 expansion module
(e.g. xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control limit switch, clockwise rota-
Input 2 expansion module
(e.g. xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control limit switch, counter-
clockwise rotation)
Output to the expansion mod-
ule (e.g. xB1 to xB6 brake
control, brake actuation)
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-35
Settings
The devices can be set as follows (see Figure 8-13):
By means of 3 potentiometers for setting:
• Starting time in the range from 0 to 20 s
• Starting voltage in the range from approx. 30 to 100 % of rated voltage for
motor
• Coasting-down time in the range from 0 to 20 s
Soft starting function
Torque-reduced start for three-phase asynchronous motors:
Triggering is two-phase, which means that the current is kept low throughout
the run-up phase. Current peaks such as those that occur in a star-delta start at
the changeover from star to delta are prevented by continuous voltage manage-
ment.
Transient current peaks (inrush peaks) are automatically avoided in each switch-
on procedure by a special control function of the power semiconductors.
Soft coasting-down function
The integrated soft rundown function prevents the drive coming to an abrupt
halt when the motor is switched off.
Warning
The soft run down time set locally on the soft starter is also effective in control-
ling the brake or shutdown function via one of the parameterizable inputs (for
example, the 2DI COM control module or the xB1 to xB6 brake control module)
for an additional 1-2 seconds. This leads to a delay in an immediate standstill of
the motor following a shutdown function without motor brake.
For a shutdown function with motor brake, the soft run down and the delay time
thereof act against the braked motor.
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
8-36 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Time ramp
The illustration below shows the time ramp of the DSS1e-x for parameterized
ramp operation (DI 1.7 = 1):
Figure 8-15: Time ramp/timing diagram, DSS1e-x
Changing settings
The potentiometer settings are scanned before each switching operation ("ON"
or "OFF").
If, for example, the setting of the potentiometer for starting time is changed
while the motor is running up, the change does not come into effect until the
next start.
Starting voltage
The starting voltage should be set to a value at which the motor starts rapidly.
Ramp time (start time)
The ramp time should be set such that the motor can run up within the defined
time.
If the star time for star-delta starting is known, the ramp time can be set to this
value.
Coasting down time (stop time)
The "Coasting-down time" potentiometer is used to set the duration of the volt-
age ramp for coasting down. This parameter can be used to make motor run-
down longer than it would be if the motor were merely to coast to a stop.
The motor coasts to a stop on its own if this potentiometer is set to a value of 0.
Us
UN
U
tR on tR off t
DSS1e-x: time ramp
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-37
Cyclic duration factor CD
The cyclic duration factor CD in % is the ratio between load duration and free-
wheeling duration for loads that are switched frequently on and off.
This factor can be calculated with the aid of the formula below:
In this formula:
• CD cyclic duration factor [%]
•t
sstarting time [s]
•t
boperating time [s]
•t
pidle time [s]
The illustration below shows the procedure.
Figure 8-16: Cyclic duration factor CD
ED tstb
+
tstbtp
++
------------------------=
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
8-38 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Switching frequency
It is essential to comply with the maximum permissible switching frequency in
order to avoid exposing the devices to thermal overload. The "response to over-
load - thermal motor model" parameter has to be deactivated (shutdown without
restart). It is also necessary to deactivate the idle time for cooling in the thermal
motor model by selecting the default = 0 = deactivated (see Section 10.6, "Idle
time parameters").
The table below presents an overview of switching frequencies per hour in
accordance with the influencing factors.
3RK1301-0AB20-0AA2 (0.3 to 3 A)
CLASS 10A
Device orientation vertical horizontal
Ambient temperature 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 40 °C
Ie = 3 A, CD = 30 %, start 3 x Ie/2 s 240 200 160 160
Ie = 3 A, CD = 70%, start 3 x Ie/2 s 180 150 120 120
CLASS 10
Device orientation vertical horizontal
Ambient temperature 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 40 °C
Ie = 3 A, CD = 30 %, start 3 x Ie/4 s 120 100 80 80
Ie = 3 A, CD = 70%, start 3 x Ie/4 s 807060 60
3RK1301-0BB20-0AA2 (2.4 to 8 A)
CLASS 10A
Device orientation vertical horizontal
Ambient temperature 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 40 °C
Ie = 8 A, CD = 30 %, start 3 x Ie/2 s807060 60
Ie = 8 A, CD = 70%, start 3 x Ie/2 s 605040 40
3RK1301-0CB20-0AA2 (2.4 to 16 A)
CLASS 10A
Device orientation vertical horizontal
Ambient temperature 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 40 °C
Ie = 3 A, CD = 30 %, start 3 x Ie/2 s 240 200 160 160
Ie = 3 A, CD = 70%, start 3 x Ie/2 s 180 150 120 120
Ie = 8 A, CD = 30 %, start 3 x Ie/2 s807060 60
Ie = 8 A, CD = 70%, start 3 x Ie/2 s 605040 40
Ie = 16 A, CD = 30 %, start 3 x Ie/2 s 35 25 12 12
Ie = 16 A, CD = 70%, start 3 x Ie/2 s 25 14 6 6
Table 8-8: Switching frequency for DSS1e-x soft starter
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-39
8.4.4 Notes on configuration
In order for a motor to reach its rated speed, motor torque at any given time dur-
ing run-up must be greater than the torque needed by the load, as otherwise a
stable operating point would be reached before the motor achieved its rated
speed (the motor would "drag to a stop"). The difference between motor torque
and load torque is the accelerating torque that is responsible for the increase in
the speed of the drive. The lower the accelerating torque, the longer is the time
the motor needs to run up to its operating speed.
Starting torque
Reducing the terminal voltage of a three-phase asynchronous motor reduces
the motor's starting current and the starting torque.
Current is directly proportional to voltage, whereas voltage is proportional to the
square root of motor torque.
Example:
Motor = 5.5 kW, rated current = 11.4 A, starting current = 6.3 x rated current,
motor torque = 36 Nm, starting torque = 2.4 x rated torque
Settings for the soft starter: starting voltage 50% of rated voltage for motor
The reductions are thus as follows:
• Starting current is reduced to half the starting current for a direct start: 50 %
of (6.3 x 11.4 A) = 36 A
• Starting torque is reduced to 0.5 x 0.5 = 25 % of the starting torque for a
direct start: 25% of 2.4 x 36 Nm = 21.6 Nm
Notes
On account of the ratio between starting voltage and torque, it is important to
ensure that starting voltage is not too low. This applies particularly in the case
of a pronounced pull-up torque, the lowest motor torque that occurs during run-
up to rated speed.
If the current through the soft starter exceeds five times the current setting,
there is an immediate shutdown. This can happen during the starting and run-
down phases in particular. If this happens you should increase the starting time
or the coasting down time, as applicable, and also reduce the starting voltage, if
necessary.
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
8-40 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Figure 8-17: Load and motor torques and motor terminal voltage for operation with soft starter
Criteria for selection
Note
For the ET 200S DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature, the corresponding soft
starter must be selected according to the rated current of the motor (rated cur-
rent of the soft starter must be ≥ rated current of the motor).
The 3 potentiometers on the starter are used for setting the starting voltage,
the starting time, and the coasting-down time.
The soft starter is correctly set when the motor starts smoothly and runs up rap-
idly to its rated speed.
The ramp time can be set to any value up to 20 seconds.
Ue
t
tR
US
U
M
Mstartup
Mmotor
Mload
n
MMotor with
SIRIUS soft starter
MB
MB = accelerating torque
of the motor
Mstartup
with SIRIUS soft
starter
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-41
Starting time
In order to obtain optimum operating conditions for the DSS1e-x soft starter, the
the starting time should be set approx. 1 s longer than the resultant motor run-
up time, in order to ensure that the internal jumpering contacts do not have to
carry the starting current. This protects the internal jumpering contacts and
increases their service life. Longer starting times increase the thermal load on
the devices and the motor unnecessarily and lead to a reduction in the permissi-
ble switching frequency.
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
8-42 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
8.4.5 Parameters
Parameter assignment
Define the parameters for the IM 151 interface module with the STEP 7 param-
eterization software or COM PROFIBUS. To do this, you need the
"SIEM806A.GSD" or "SIEM806B.GSD" device master file (see Section 6.1 in the
"SIMATIC ET 200S Distributed I/O System" manual).
Parameters
A description of the parameters can be found in Section 10.
The table below lists the actions and value ranges that can be set with the vari-
ous parameters for the DSS1e-x soft starter.
Parameters Action,
value range
Factory setting
Rated operating current
• Range 1
• Range 2
• Range 3
(Increment 10 mA)
• 0.3 to 3 A
(0.05 to 1.1 kW)
• 2.4 to 8 A
(1.1 to 3 kW)
• 2.4 to 16 A
(1.1 to 7.5 kW)
•3 A
•8 A
•16 A
Non-resetting on voltage failure 1,
2) •no
•yes
yes
Prewarning limit value 1)
(Motor heating)
• 0 … 95 % Ie
• 0 = deactivated
(increment: 5 %)
0 = deactivated
Response to overload - thermal
motor model
• Shutdown without restart
• Shutdown with restart
• Warning
Shutdown without
restart
Tripping class • CLASS 5 (10A)
•CLASS 10
only at 0.3 -3 A
CLASS 5 (10A)
Recovery time 1, 2) • 1 … 30 min
(increment: 0.5 min)
1.5 m i n
Idle time
Reset the thermal overload model
through functional switching
• 0 ... 255 s
• 0 = deactivated
(increment: 1 s)
0 (deactivated)
Prewarning limit value 1)
(time-based triggering)
• 0 ... 500 s
• 0 = deactivated
(increment: 1 s)
0 (deactivated)
Response to current limit violation • Warning
• Disconnect
Warning
Lower current limit • 18.75 ... 100 % 3)
(increment: 3.125 %)
18.75 %
Upper current limit • 50 … 150 % Ie 3)
• 50 … 400 % Ie 1)
(increment: 3.125 %)
112.5 %
1) from order number suffix: -.AB4 present, and can be changed
2) Up to order number suffix: -.AA4: value present, but cannot be changed (fixed on factory setting)
3) Of rated operational current
Table 8-9: Parameters for the DS1e-x direct starter; high feature
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-43
Blocking current 1,2) • 150 ... 1000 % Ie (DS1e-x, RS1e-x)
• 150 ... 800 % Ie (DSS1e-x) (incre-
ment: 50 %)
800 %
Blocking time 1, 2) •1 … 5 s
Increment: 0.5 s)
1 s
Response with power supply
switching element missing 1, 2) • Group error
• Group error only with
ON command 4, 1)
• Group warning1)
Group error
Response to residual current
detection
• Warning
• Disconnect
Disconnect
Response with power switch OFF • Group error
• Group error with ON command 5, 1)
• Group warning 1)
Group error
Asymmetry limit value 1, 2) • 30 … 60 % Ie
• 0 = deactivated
(Increment 10 %)
30 %
Response to asymmetry • Warning
• Disconnect
Disconnect
Input signal extension 1) •0 … 200 ms
(increment: 10 ms)
0 ms
Input signal delay 1) • 10 … 80 ms
(increment: 10 ms)
10 ms
Input 1, 2 - signal level
(x-increment,
expansion module)
Input 3, 4 - signal level
2DI COM control module
2DI LC COM control module)
(see Section 10)
•NC
•NO
NO
Input 1 to 4 - action
NO only
NO only
NO only
NO only
NO only
• No action
• Shutdown without restart
• Shutdown with restart
• Shutdown at limit position, clock-
wise rotation
• Shutdown at limit position, counter-
clockwise rotation
• General warning
• Manual operation local
• Quick stop1)
•Cold run
1)
• Emergency start
• Motor cw
• Motor ccw
• Trip reset 1)
No action
1) from order number suffix: -.AB4 present, and can be changed
2) Up to order number suffix: -.AA4: value present, but cannot be changed (fixed on factory setting)
5) Possible from order number suffix -.AA4
Parameters Action,
value range
Factory setting
Table 8-9: Parameters for the DS1e-x direct starter; high feature (Contd.)
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
8-44 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Group diagnosis:
This parameter enables diagnosis messaging
(error types are listed in Section 4.7).
Note
The "Disable group diagnosis" parameter also suppresses the display of faults
on the SF-LED.
Inputs 1 to 4 signal 1) • non-retentive
• Retentive
non-retentive
Response to CPU/master STOP • Use dummy value
• Keep last value
Use dummy value =
disconnect
Replacement values 1) • Motor cw
• Motor ccw
(only with reversing starters)
• Brake actuation
•Trip Reset
• Emergency start
• Self-test
• Quick stop lock
No action
Wait for startup parameter - data
record 1) •no
•yes
no
Enable delay of the brake when
starting 1) • -2.5 … 2.5 s
• (increment: 0.01 s)
0 s
Holding time of the brake when
stopping 1) • 0 … 25 s
• (increment: 0.01 s)
0 s
Group diagnosis • Disable
• Enable
Disable
1) from order number suffix: -.AB4 present, and can be changed
Parameters Action,
value range
Factory setting
Table 8-9: Parameters for the DS1e-x direct starter; high feature (Contd.)
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 8-45
8.4.6 Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm)
• Reversing starter incl. terminal module
• Height with PE/N block
• Depth with 2DI COM control module
65 x 290 x 150
332
173
Weight
• Reversing starter incl. terminal module
• Direct starter incl. PE/N terminal block
1 kg
1.1 kg
Module-specific data
Assignment type Type 1 to Ie ≤16 A, IEC 60947-4-1,
DIN VDE 0660, Part 102
Pollution degree at 400 V 3, IEC 60664 (IEC 61131)
Safety class I, DIN EN 61140 (VDE 140-1)
Degree of protection IP20, IEC 60529
Power loss Pv 1) at Ie0.3 up to 3 A
2.4 to 8 A
2.4 to 16 A
Site altitude
approx. 12 W
approx. 9 W
approx. 16 W
see Figure 3-3.
Ambient temperature range
•Derating, see Section 3.4
• Order number suffix -.AB4 UL/CSA
(vertical installation on horizontal rails)
without DM-V15
with DM-V15
(horizontal installation on vertical rails)
without DM-V15
0°C to 60°C
60°C/14A
55°C/16A
60°C/15.2A
40°C/14A
Control circuit
Rated operating voltage for electronic compo-
nents: U1
Reverse polarity protection
24 VDC (20.4 to 28.8 VDC)
yes
Rated operating voltage for contactor: U2
Reverse polarity protection
DC 24 V (DC 20.4 to 28.8 V at 0 to
60° C) 2)
yes
power input
• From electronic component supply: U1
• From soft-starter supply U2
• From the backplane bus
approx. 40 mA
approx. 30 mA
approx. 30 mA
Main circuit
Rated operating voltage Ue
IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1 480 V AC
UL, CSA 480 V AC
Rated insulation voltage Ui500 V AC
Rated impulse strength Uimp 6 kV
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz
1) For motor starter and terminal module as a function of rated operating current Ie (upper setting range).
2) For motor starters with order number suffix -.AA3 from revision level E02 and order number suffix -.AA4, the frame poten-
tial of the contactor supply U2 is connected to the frame potential of the electronics supply U1. Connect the frame poten-
tial of U1 and U2 to the power module in order to prevent high compensating current.
Table 8-10: Technical specifications - DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature
Direct and soft starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
8-46 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Technical specifications - circuit breaker, soft-starter
Circuit breaker
Rated operating current 3/8/16 A
Instantaneous overcurrent release Fixed setting at 13 x Ie max
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity to
Ie = 16 A (motor starter) 50 kA at 400 V
Mechanical life
Electrical life
≥ 100,000 operating cycles
100,000 operating cycles
Soft starter
Rated operational current Ie at 60°C
•AC-53a
•AC-53b
3 A
8/16 A
Max. permissible output of the three-
phase induction motors at 400 V AC 7.5 kW
Table 8-11: Technical specifications on DSS1e-x - power switch, soft starter
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 9-1
Reversing starters 9
Fail-safe reversing starter
Section Subject Page
9.1 Overview 9-2
9.2 RS1-x reversing starter; standard 9-4
9.2.1 Features 9-4
9.2.2 Parameters 9-6
9.2.3 Technical specifications 9-7
9.3 RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature F-RS1e-x fail-safe reversing
starter
9-10
9.3.1 Features 9-10
9.3.2 Additional features of the F-RS1e-x 9-13
9.3.3 Module replacement 9-18
9.3.4 Parameters 9-19
9.3.5 Technical specifications 9-22
Reversing starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
9-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
9.1 Overview
Three versions of the ET 200S motor starters are available:
• Standard series (code: RS-x 1)
• High feature series, characterized by properties that boost system availability
and improve diagnosis
(code: RS1e-x).
A distinction is made between the following:
– If there is no communication interface at the front, the order number ends in: -.AA2
– If there is a communication interface at the front, the order number ends in: -.AA3 via
the 2DI COM control module for the "Motor Starter ES" software (from Version 2.0)
– If there is a communication interface at the front, the order number ends in: -.AA3
from revision level E02 via the 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control module for the "Motor
Starter ES" software (from Version 2.0)
• Fail-safe series that ensures safe shutdown of the motor starter after an
emergency stop command by means of the mechanically selected SG bus
(code: F-RS1e-x).
A distinction is made between the following:
– With front communication interface via the 2DI COM control module for the "Motor
Starter ES" software (from Version 2.0).
– With front communication interface from revision level E05 via the 2DI COM/-2DI
LC COM control module for the "Motor Starter ES" software (from Version 2.0)
All motor starters have full protection against short-circuit and overload.
Due to the integrated electronic overload protection, a cover of the power range
up to 16 A with only two device versions is possible with motor starter; high
feature/fail-safe. They also have more extensive diagnostics and additional
parameters for system control and monitoring.
The motor starter series with installation widths of 45/90 mm and 65/130 mm;
high feature can be used in conjunction with the ET 200S safety-integrated sys-
tem components for safety applications to PL e.
The fail-safe motor starter series (F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x) in conjunction with
fail-safe power modules (PM-D PROFIsafe and PM-D F X1) is suitable for use in
safety applications up to PL e / SIL3.
Warning
If the circuit breaker or starter protection switch is switched on again after being
tripped as a result of an overload or a short circuit, and there is a pending On
signal for the contactor, the motor starts up.
Caution
Due to the operation of star-connected three-phase motors (especially
if <1 kW), high EMC interference may occur. Interference above the IEC limit
values can lead to an impairment of functions or failure of the electronics. In
case of high EMC interference, we recommend the use of motors with EMC
protection circuits. (Exception: electronic starters may not be operated with a
EMC protection circuit). The best filtering effect is achieved with three-phase
RC interference inversion modules. Varistor interference inversion modules
should not be used since they only insufficiently filter out fast transients.
Reversing starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 9-3
The table below presents an overview of the properties of the reversing start-
ers.
Feature RS-x1 RS1e-x
F-RS1e-x
Installation width [mm] 90 130
for power rating up to [kW] 5.5 7.5
Integrated switching devices for SIRIUS components of the size S00 S0
Short-circuit protection with 3RV circuit breaker with instantaneous over-
current release
X
Short-circuit protection with 3RV circuit breaker with instantaneous
overcurrent release
X
Overload protection with thermal overload release integrated into circuit
breaker
X
Programmable electronic overload protection X
Switching function mechanical
Rated operating current 0.14 - 12 A 0.3 - 16 A
Rated operating voltage 400 V
Parameterizable no yes
Tripping class CLASS 10 10, 20
Asymmetry recognition yes
Residual current detection no yes
Parameterizable current limits no yes
Anti-blocking function with rapid shutdown no yes
Type of coordination (2 at 400 V) 2 (up
to 1.6 A)
2
Use up to SIL (IEC 62 061) SIL31) SIL3 1)
SIL2 3)
Up to performance level (DIN EN ISO 13849-1) PLe1) PLe 2)
PLd 3)
Extra safety auxiliary switch with fail-
safe kit 2
integral
Compatible expansion modules (brake control modules) xB1 to 6
Free inputs through 2DI COM control module no yes 3)
2DI LC COM control module usable? no yes 4)
"Motor Starter ES" usable? no yes 3)
Derating necessary at top end of performance range? yes yes 2)
Diagnosis, fault types see Section 4.7
1) Only with failsafe kit and additional infeed contactor
2) With additional infeed contactor
3) As of order number suffix -.AA3 and for F-RS1e-x
4) As of order number suffix -.AA3 and revision level E02, as well as for F-RS1e-x from revision level E05
Table 9-1: Overview of reversing starters
Reversing starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
9-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
9.2 RS1-x reversing starter; standard
9.2.1 Features
ET 200S RS1-x ... reversing starter; standard (see Figure 9-2)
• Are motor starters for two directions of rotation that can be can be used in
the ET 200S distributed I/O device.
• Are suitable for switching and protecting three-phase loads up to 5.5 kW at
400 and 500 VAC
• Are available with setting ranges of 0.14 - 0.2 A to 9 - 12 A
• Are equipped with electromechanical SIRIUS switchgear
• The contactor coils are controlled directly via integrated outputs.
• The switching states of circuit breaker and contactor are indicated via inte-
grated inputs.
• Available diagnostic information of the reversing starter:
– overload or short-circuit tripping/disconnection of the motor starter
– fault at the motor starter
• The circuit state and status are displayed via LEDs.
• Mechanical locking of clockwise/counterclockwise rotation
• Integrated disconnection functions via circuit breaker
• Upgradable with fail-safe kit 2 for safety system applications
• Have an expansion interface (DO 0.2) for driving an additional module (e.g.
brake control module xB1 to xB6)
In the case of the xB3 and xB4 only the brake function is supported; the
inputs have no effect.
• The inputs of the xB3, xB4 or xB6 brake control module (e.g. limit-position
switches) act directly on the contactor and brake drive circuit (for signal
response, see Section 12.3.4).
Important
A protection circuit for the contactor coils is already integrated in the motor
starter. Additional protection circuits connected to the contactor are not per-
missible.
Important
When switching over from clockwise rotation to counterclockwise rotation and
vice versa, a switch-over interval of >200 ms must be observed.
Please take into account this idle time in your user program.
Note
Input 1 (clockwise limit switch) has a direct effect on the contactor for clockwise
rotation of the RS1-x and on the activation of the brake control module.
Input 2 (counter-clockwise limit switch) has a direct effect on the contactor for
counter-clockwise rotation of the RS1-x and on the activation of the brake con-
trol module.
Reversing starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 9-5
View
Figure 9-1: RS1-x reversing starter; standard
Circuit diagram
Figure 9-2: Circuit diagram for RS1-x reversing starter; standard
Toggle switch
Scale for set current
LEDs
C-STAT contactor status
SF group error
Warning
Additional protective circuit not
allowed.
Only for control unit
(see Section 4.3)
Opening to test the overload
protection
relevant for
safety-inte-
grated system
Channel for connecting lead
to auxiliary switch block
Caution
Apertures only for 1-pole auxil-
iary switch block
Circuit breaker
DO 0.1 Motor ccwf
2T1
4T2
6T3
1L1
3L2
5L3
DI 0.1 Contactor on
DI 0.2 Circuit-breaker tripped
K1
DO 0.0 Motor cw
DO 0.2 Brake (only for RS1-x)
DI 0.0 Readiness for operation
Logic
K2
K2 K1
Output to the expansion module (only with
RS1-x) (e.g. xB1 to xB6 brake control, brake
actuation)
Input 1 expansion module (only with RS1-x)
(e.g. xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control limit switch, clockwise
rotation)
Input 2 expansion module (only with RS1-x)
(e.g. xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control limit switch, counterclock-
wise rotation)
Reversing starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
9-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
9.2.2 Parameters
The following table indicates the parameters that can be set for the reversing
starter.
Group diagnosis:
This parameter enables diagnosis messaging
(error types are listed in Section 4.7).
Note
The "Disable group diagnosis" parameter also suppresses the display of faults
on the SF-LED.
Parameters Action,
value range
Factory setting Applicability
Group diagnosis • Disable
•Enable
Disable Module
Response to CPU/
master STOP
• Disconnect
• Keep circuit
state
Disconnect Module
Table 9-2: Parameters for RS1-x reversing starter; standard
Reversing starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 9-7
9.2.3 Technical specifications
Dimensions and weight
Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm)
• Reversing starter incl. terminal module
• Height with PE/N block
• Depth with fail-safe kit (safety-integrated
system)
90 x 264 x 120
306
144.5
Weight
• Reversing starter incl. terminal module
• Reversing starter incl. PE/N terminal block
1.6 kg
1.8 kg
Module-specific data
Assignment type Type 1 to Ie ≤12 A, IEC 60947-4-1,
DIN VDE 0660, Part 102
Type 2 to Ie ≤ 1.6 A
Pollution severity
•At 400 V
•At 500 V
3, IEC 60664 (IEC 61131)
2, IEC 60664 (IEC 61131)
Safety class I, DIN EN 61140 (VDE 140-1)
Degree of protection IP20, IEC 60529
Power loss Pv 1) at Ie≤ 1. 25 A
1.6 to 6.3 A
8 to 12 A
approx. 9 W
approx. 10 W
approx. 11 W
Control circuit
Rated operating voltage for electronic compo-
nents: U1
Reverse polarity protection
24 VDC (20.4 to 28.8 VDC)
yes
Rated operating voltage for contactor: U2
Reverse polarity protection
24 VDC (20.4 to 28.8 VDC)
yes
power input
• From electronic component supply: U1
• From contactor supply: U2
• From the backplane bus
approx. 20 mA
approx. 100 mA
≤10 mA
Main circuit
Rated operating voltage Ue
• IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1
• Protective separation between main and
auxiliary circuits
•UL, CSA
400 V AC
400 V
600 V AC
Rated insulation voltage Ui500 V AC
Rated impulse strength Uimp 6 kV
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz
1) For motor starter and terminal module as a function of rated operating current Ie (upper setting range).
Table 9-3: Technical specifications - RS1-x reversing starter; standard
Reversing starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
9-8 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Technical specifications - circuit breaker, contactor
Circuit breaker
Tripping class Class 10
Max. rated operating current 12 A
Adjustment ranges
• Thermal overload release
• Instantaneous overcurrent release
0.14 - 0.2 A to 9 - 12 A
fixed setting at 12 x Ie
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity to Ie
= 12 A 50 kA at 400 V
Mechanical life
Electrical life
≥ 100 000 switching cycles
100 000
contactor
Rated operational current Ie at 60°C
•AC-1
• AC-2, AC-3
-At 400 V
-At 500 V
• AC-4 at 400 V
12 A
12 A
9 A
4.1 A
Max. permissible output of the three-
phase induction motors at 500 VAC 5.5 kW
Positively driven operation - auxiliary con-
tacts, contactor
yes
Mechanical life
• contactor
• Contactor with safety functionality
Electrical life
B10
30 million switching cycles
10 million switching cycles
see Figure 9-3.
1,000,000 1)
Surge suppression
Operating times in the case of DC opera-
tion
(total break time =
contact parting time + arcing time)
• At 0.85 to 1.1 x Us
-Closing time
-Contact parting time
• Arcing time
Zener diodes integrated
25 to 100 ms
20 to 50 ms
10 to 15 ms
•At 1.0 x U
s
-Closing time
-Contact parting time
typ. 25 ms
typ. 30 ms
1) This information refers only to the mechanical switching element under its reference conditions.
Table 9-4: Technical specifications RS... - circuit breaker, contactor, auxiliary switch block
Reversing starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 9-9
Electrical life
Figure 9-3: Electrical service life, contactor
12
PN
10 20 30 40 50 60 80100 200 400
(A)
Ia
Ie(A)
(kW)
103
104
8
6
4
2
2
105
8
6
4
2
106
8
6
4
2
107
8
6
4
23456
9
45,5
Reversing starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
9-10 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
9.3 RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature
F-RS1e-x fail-safe reversing starter
9.3.1 Features
ET 200S RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature
ET 200S F-RS1e-x fail-safe reversing starter
• Are motor starters for two directions of rotation that can be can be used in
the ET 200S distributed I/O device.
• Are suitable for switching and protecting three-phase loads up to 7.5 kW at
400 and 500 VAC
• Are available in 3 setting ranges with 0.3 - 3 A, 2.4 - 8 A, 2.4 - 16 A
• fitted with electro-mechanical SIRIUS switchgear (power switch, contactor)
• Have parameterizable electronic overload protection
• Upper and lower current limits can be defined and monitored for system and
process supervision
• The motor starter can be parameterized for warning or shutdown as the
response to an overload event or if a current limit is violated
• The integral protective mechanism recognizes a blocked motor and triggers a
rapid shutdown
• Integrated residual current detection
• Integrated asymmetry detection
• The as-is current is measured and the information transmitted to analyzers
• The contactor coils are controlled directly via integrated outputs.
• The switching status of the power switch is registered by means of an auxil-
iary switch
• Detection of the circuit state of the contactor on the basis of current flow
evaluation
Detection of the circuit state in the F-RS1e-x using an auxiliary switch block as
well
• Available diagnostic information of the direct starter (see Table 4-7)
• Circuit state and motor-starter status are indicated by LEDs
• Mechanical locking of clockwise/counterclockwise rotation
• Integrated disconnection functions via circuit breaker
• For RS1e-x:
auxiliary switch for ET 200S safety engineering (failsafe kit) already integrated
For F-RS1e-x:
Fail-safe partial shutdown integrated
• The motor starters can be expanded with front-mounted standard SIRIUS
accessories (e.g. auxiliary switch, time relay) for contactor size S0
• Have an expansion interface (DO 0.2) at the side for driving an expansion
module (e.g. brake control module xB1 to xB6)
• Response to circuit breaker OFF parameterizable
(from order number suffixes -.AA4 and -.AB4)
• The 2 parameterizable inputs (DI 0.4 and DI 0.5, e.g. limit-position switches)
of the expansion interface (expansion module, e.g. brake control module xB3,
xB4, xB6) act directly on contactor and brake drive
• 2 additional parameterizable inputs (DI 0.6 and DI 0.7) are available through
the 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control module that can be plugged into the front
• Basic factory settings via the rotary switch of the power switch possible
(see Section 10.18)
Reversing starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 9-11
• Communication interface at the front for the RS1e-x with order numbers end-
ing in: -.AA3 and for F-RS1e-x via the 2DI COM control module for the "Motor
Starter ES" software (from Version 2.0)
• With the 2DI LC COM control module for the "Manual Operation Local" mode
for RS1e-x with order number suffix: -.AA3 from revision level E02 and for F-
RS1e-x from revision level E05.
With RS1e-x from order number suffix -.AB4:
• Quick stop
• Cold run
• Integrated log book functions with 3 device log books
• Has expanded parameter options
• PROFIenergy
• Comprehensive diagnostics via data records
•I&M data
More information can be found in Section 10
View of RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature
Figure 9-4: RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature
Rotary switch
Latch indicator
LEDs
SF group error
DEVICE device status
Circuit
breaker
C-STAT contactor status
Slot for 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM
control module with clear cover
sealable
Aperture for standard SIRIUS
accessories
Reversing starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
9-12 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Circuit diagram of RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature
Figure 9-5: Circuit diagram of RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature
More detailed descriptions:
• Input signals, in section 4.9.2
• Output signals in section 4.9.2
• Motor current IAct in section 10.3
• Inputs/actions in section 10.11
• Emergency start in section 10.13
• Trip reset in section 10.14
1) Order number suffix -.AB4
DO 1.7 Lock quick stop1)
DO 0.5 Self-test 1)
DI 1.6 Manual operation local
DO 0.1 Motor ccw
2T1
4T2
6T3
DO 0.3
1L1
3L2
5L3
K1
Trip Reset
DI 1. 0 - 1.5 Motor current Iact
DI 0.1 Motor ON/current flow
DI 0.2 Group error
DI 0.3 General warning
K1
DO 0.4 Emergency start
DI 0.4
DI 0.5
DO 0.0 Motor cw
DO 0.2 Brake
Input 3 control module
DI 0.6
Input 4 control module
DI 0.7
DI 0.0 Ready from host/PLC
Logic
K2
K2
2DI COM/-2DI LC COM (IN3)
2DI COM/-2DI LC COM (IN4)
Input 1 expansion module
(e.g. xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control limit switch, clockwise
rotation)
Input 2 expansion module
(e.g. xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control limit switch, counter-
clockwise rotation)
Output to the expansion module
(e.g. xB1 to xB6 brake control, brake
actuation)
Auxiliary switch for feed-
back loop in the safety-
integrated system
Reversing starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 9-13
9.3.2 Additional features of the F-RS1e-x
Additional features that only apply to the fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing start-
ers are:
• 6 safety groups (SG1 to SG6) can be set using coding connectors in the termi-
nal module
• The safety groups are supplied via a fail-safe power module with overvoltage
protection (PM-D F PROFIsafe, PM-D F X1)
• 2 processors that monitor each other, for controlling the safety function:
Safe shutdown in the event of emergency stop via the mechanically selected
SG bus
• The motor starter is safely shut down if the two processors produce varying
results
• A shunt release for the power switch is integrated to ensure a safe shutdown
in the event of one of the contactors being welded. This feature can also be
used in non-fail-safe mode to ensure a shutdown in the event of a welded
contactor (see note)
• It is possible to test the shunt release/power switch via the bus (DO 0.5)
• Storage of the U1 operating voltage using a capacitor to ensure a safe shut-
down in the event of U1 failure
• Monitoring of the functioning of the capacitor for the U1
• Redundant configuration of the fail-safe components in the motor starter
• The fail-safe modules are identified by yellow labeling strips.
Note
A fail-safe motor starter can also be used in non-fail-safe mode with a PM-D
power module. To do this, the coding for the safety group in the terminal mod-
ule of the fail-safe motor starter must be set to SG3 and the U1 and U2 supply
voltages must have the same potential.
Safety note
When using expansion modules (brake modules xB1 to xB6, 2DI COM/-2DI LC
COM control module ), make sure that these modules are not fail-safe modules
with fail-safe technology.
Reversing starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
9-14 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Safety note
Only applies in fail-safe mode (fail-safe technology)
The F-RS1e-x can only be operated in the potential group of a PM-D F PROFIsafe
or PM-D F X1 that safely limits the voltage to within the SIMATIC range.
Safety note
Cyclic test of the F-RS1e-x
- Shunt release/circuit breaker
Request self-test (DO 0.5)
Circuit breaker must be in "Trip" position
Turn circuit breaker to position "0"
Circuit breaker must remain in position "0" by itself
Turn circuit breaker to position "1"
Circuit breaker must remain in position "1" by itself
- Contactor
Execute ON/OFF cycle with the emergency stop command using the mechan-
ically selected
SG bus. Carry out test for clockwise rotation
(DO 0.0 - motor cw - must be "1" for this purpose), then carry out test
for counter-clockwise rotation (DO 0.1 - motor ccw must be "1" for this pur-
pose).
The tests should be carried out on commissioning and then at least every 3-6
months (intermittent operation).
Expansion module Operating mode
PL according to
DIN EN ISO 13849-1
SIL according to IEC 62 061
Non-fail-safe
mode
PLc/
SIL1/
PLd/
SIL2
PLe
/SIL3
xB1 X XXX
xB2 X XXX
xB3 X X 1) X 1)
xB4 X X 1) X 1)
xB5 X XXX
xB6 X X 1) X 1)
2DI COM control module
2DI LC COM control mod-
ule
XX
1) X 1) X 1)
1) No feedback to the fail-safe technology may occur through the inputs, i.e. cross-circuits to the sensor cables should be
eliminated (cross-circuit proof cable installation)
Reversing starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 9-15
Safety note
Only one SG bus can be selected in the terminal module for each motor starter.
Safety note
You must only use the F-RS1e-x motor starter to control motors that do not con-
stitute a danger to persons or to the environment if they suddenly shut down.
Important
After U1 has been applied, the F-RS1e-x requires approximately 30 s until the
internal self-test is completed. DI 0.0 ready is then set in the process mapping
via the host/PLC. Once the internal self-test is completed, the selected SG bus
is monitored.
Reversing starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
9-16 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
View of the F-RS1e-x fail-safe reversing starter
Figure 9-6: Fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starter
Rotary switch
Latch indicator
LEDs
C-STAT contactor status
SF group error
DEVICE device status
Safety group
SG1 to SG6
Circuit breaker
Slot for 2DI COM/-2DI LC
COM control module with
clear cover sealable
Aperture for standard
SIRIUS accessories
Reversing starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 9-17
Circuit diagram of the F-RS1e-x fail-safe reversing starter
Figure 9-7: Circuit diagram of the fail-safe F-RS1e-x reversing starter
More detailed descriptions:
• Input signals, in section 4.9.2
• Output signals in section 4.9.2
• Motor current IAct in section 10.3
• Inputs/actions in section 10.11
• Emergency start in section 10.13
• Trip reset in section 10.14
DI 1.6 Manual operation local
K1 K2
DO 0.5 Self-test
DO 0.1 Motor ccw
2T1
4T2
6T3
DO 0.3
1L1
3L2
5L3
K1
Trip Reset
DI 1. 0 - 1.5 Motor current Iact
DI 0.1 Motor ON/current flow
DI 0.2 Group error
DI 0.3 General warning
DO 0.4 Emergency start
DI 0.4
DI 0.5
DO 0.0 Motor cw
DO 0.2 Brake
Input 3 control module
DI 0.6
Input 4 control module
DI 0.7
DI 0.0 Ready from host/PLC
Logic
K2
SG1 to SG6
2DI COM/-2DI LC COM (IN 3)
2DI COM/-2DI LC COM (IN 4)
Mechanical selection of shutdown
group
Input 1 expansion module
(e.g. xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control limit switch, clockwise
rotation)
Input 2 expansion module
(e.g. xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control limit switch, counterclock-
wise rotation)
Output to the expansion module
(e.g. xB1 to xB6 brake control, brake
actuation)
Auxiliary switch for cir-
cuit state monitoring
Reversing starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
9-18 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
9.3.3 Module replacement
If a module has to be replaced, an acceptance test is not necessary. With the
F-RS1e-x, however, it is necessary to repeat the safety function test (see cyclic
test).
Warning
If there is a pending ON signal for the contactor, the motor starts up automati-
cally.
This applies to an F-RS1e-x motor starter after the self-test if there is no emer-
gency stop present on the selected SG bus.
Reversing starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 9-19
9.3.4 Parameters
A description of the parameters can be found in Section 10.
The table below lists the actions and value ranges that can be set with the vari-
ous parameters for the RS1e-x and F-RS1e-x reversing starters.
Parameters Action,
value range
Factory setting
Rated operating current
• Range 1
• Range 2
• Range 3
(Increment 10 mA)
• 0.3 to 3 A
(0.05 to 1.1 kW)
• 2.4 to 8 A
(1.1 to 3 kW)
• 2.4 to 16 A
(1.1 to 7.5 kW)
•3 A
•8 A
•16 A
Load type 1,2) • 3 - phase motor
• 1 - phase motor (only with electro-
mechanical starters)
3 - phase motor
Non-resetting on voltage failure 1,
2) •no
•yes
yes
Prewarning limit value 1)
(Motor heating)
• 0 … 95 % Ie
• 0 = deactivated
(increment: 5 %)
0 = deactivated
Response to overload - thermal
motor model
• Shutdown without restart
• Shutdown with restart
• Warning
Shutdown without
restart
Tripping class • CLASS 5 (10a) 1)
•CLASS 10
•CLASS 15 1)
• CLASS 20
CLASS 10
Recovery time 1, 2) • 1 … 30 min
(increment: 0.5 min)
1.5 m i n
Idle time
Reset the thermal overload model
through functional switching
• 0 ... 255 s
• 0 = deactivated
(increment: 1 s)
0 (deactivated)
Prewarning limit value 1)
(time-based triggering)
• 0 ... 500 s
• 0 = deactivated
(increment: 1 s)
0 (deactivated)
Response to current limit violation • Warning
• Disconnect
Warning
Lower current limit • 18.75 to 100 % 3)
(increment: 3.125 %)
18.75 %
Upper current limit • 50 … 150 % Ie 3)
• 50 … 400 % Ie 1)
(increment: 3.125 %)
112.5 %
1) from order number suffix: -.AB4 present, and can be changed
2) Up to order number suffix: -.AA4: value present, but cannot be changed (fixed on factory setting)
3) Of rated operational current
Table 9-5: Parameters for RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature and F-RS1e-x fail-safe reversing starter
Reversing starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
9-20 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Blocking current 1,2) • 150 ... 1000 % Ie (DS1e-x, RS1e-x)
• 150 ... 800 % Ie (DSS1e-x) (incre-
ment: 50 %)
800 %
Blocking time 1, 2 •1 … 5 s
(increment: 0.5 s)
1 s
Response with power supply
switching element missing 1, 2) • Group error
• Group error only with
ON command 4, 1)
• Group warning1)
Group error
Response to residual current
detection
• Warning
• Disconnect
Disconnect
Response with power switch OFF • Group error
• Group error with ON command 5, 1)
• Group warning 1)
Group error
Asymmetry limit value 1, 2) • 30 … 60 % Ie
• 0 = deactivated
Increment: 10 %
30 %
Response to asymmetry • Warning
• Disconnect
Disconnect
Lock time 1,2)
(only with RS1e-x)
• 0 ... 60 s
(increment: 1 s)
Note:
Lock time = 0 means a min. time of
approx. 150 ms for safety reasons.
0 s
Input signal extension 1) •0 … 200 ms
(increment: 10 ms)
0 ms
Input signal delay 1) • 10 … 80 ms
(increment: 10 ms)
10 ms
Input 1, 2 - signal level
(x-increment,
expansion module)
Input 3, 4 - signal level
2DI COM control module
2DI LC COM control module)
(see Section 10)
•NC
•NO
NO
1) from order number suffix: -.AB4 present, and can be changed
2) Up to order number suffix: -.AA4: value present, but cannot be changed (fixed on factory setting)
5) Possible from order number suffix -.AA4
Parameters Action,
value range
Factory setting
Table 9-5: Parameters for RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature and F-RS1e-x fail-safe reversing starter (Contd.)
Reversing starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 9-21
Group diagnosis:
This parameter enables diagnosis messaging
(error types are listed in Section 4.7).
Note
The "Disable group diagnosis" parameter also suppresses the display of faults
on the SF-LED.
Input 1 to 4 - action
NO only
NO only
NO only
NO only
NO only
• No action
• Shutdown without restart
• Shutdown with restart
• Shutdown at limit position, clock-
wise rotation
• Shutdown at limit position, counter-
clockwise rotation
• General warning
• Manual operation local
• Quick stop1)
•Cold run
1)
• Emergency start
• Motor cw
• Motor-ccw )
• Trip reset 1)
No action
Inputs 1 to 4 signal 1) • non-retentive
• Retentive
non-retentive
Response to CPU/master STOP • Use dummy value
• Keep last value
Use dummy value =
disconnect
Replacement values 1) • Motor cw
• Motor ccw
(only with reversing starters)
• Brake actuation
•Trip Reset
• Emergency start
• Self-test
• Quick stop lock
No action
Wait for startup parameter - data
record 1) •no
•yes
no
Enable delay of the brake when
starting 1) • - 2.5 … 2.5 s
• (increment: 0.01 s)
0 s
Holding time of the brake when
stopping 1) • 0 … 25 s
• (increment: 0.01 s)
0 s
Group diagnosis • Disable
• Enable
Disable
Safe shutdown group 7) • Not assigned
•SG1 to SG6
Not assigned
1) from order number suffix: -.AB4 present, and can be changed
7) Only with F-DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x
Parameters Action,
value range
Factory setting
Table 9-5: Parameters for RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature and F-RS1e-x fail-safe reversing starter (Contd.)
Reversing starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
9-22 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
9.3.5 Technical specifications
Reversing starters RS1e-x F-RS1e-x
Dimensions and weight
Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm)
• Reversing starter incl. terminal module
• Height with PE/N block
• Depth with 2DI COM control module
130 x 290 x 150
332
173
Weight
• Reversing starter incl. terminal module
• Reversing starter incl. PE/N terminal
block
2.2 kg
2.3 kg
Module-specific data
Assignment type Type
(up to Ie ≤16 A at 400 V)
2
Pollution severity
• At 400 V
•
• At 500 V
3, IEC 60664
(IEC 61131)
2, IEC 60664
(IEC 61131)
Safety class I, DIN EN 61140
(VDE 140-1)
Degree of protection IP20, IEC 60529
Power loss Pv 1) at Ie0.3 up to 3 A
2.4 to 8 A
2.4 to 16 A
approx. 9 W
approx. 10 W
approx. 18 W
Ambient temperature range
• For derating see Section 3.4
• Order number suffix -.AB4 UL/CSA
(vertical installation on horizontal rails)
without DM-V15
with DM-V15
(horizontal installation on vertical rails)
without DM-V15
0°C to 60°C
60°C/14A
55°C/16A
60°C/15.2A
40°C/16A
Maximum attainable safety classes: 3)
• IEC 61508 SIL1)
•PL2)
•Cat.2) (DIN EN ISO 13849)
–
–
–
3
e
4
Table 9-6: Technical specifications - RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature and F-RS1e-x fail-safe
reversing starter
Reversing starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 9-23
Reversing starters RS1e-x F-RS1e-x
Safety parameters:
• SFF (DIN EN / IEC 61508)
• DC (DIN EN ISO 13849)
• HFT (DIN EN / IEC 61508
•nOP (DIN EN ISO 13849)
•dOP (DIN EN ISO 13849)
•hOP (DIN EN ISO 13849)
• Low demand PFDAVG (10a)
Test interval 3 months
Test interval 6 months
• High demand/continuous mode
PFH
Test interval 3 months 1/hr
Test interval 6 months 1/hr
• Proof test interval years
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
99.64 %/
99.70 %
>99
1
1
365
24
3.5 x 10-5
8.0 x 10-5
8.1 x 10-10
1.8 x 10-9
20
• B10 1,000,0003)
1) For motor starter and terminal module as a function of rated operating current Ie (upper setting range).
2) With safety-integrated system (see Section 11)
3) This information refers only to the mechanical switching element under its reference conditions.
Table 9-6: Technical specifications - RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature and F-RS1e-x fail-safe
reversing starter (Contd.)
Reversing starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
9-24 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Reversing starters RS1e-x F-RS1e-x
Control circuit
Rated operating voltage for
electronic components U1
24 VDC
(20.4 to 28.8 VDC) (21.6 to 26.4 VDC)
Reverse polarity protection yes
Rated operating voltage for contactor: U2DC 24 V (DC 20.4 to 28.8 V) 1)
Reverse polarity protection yes
power input
• From electronic component supply: U1
• From contactor supply U2
Pick-up: (for 800 ms)
Hold-in:
•From SG1 to SG6
Pick-up: (for 200 ms)
Hold-in:
• Test function of the shunt release/power
switch (50 ms) from U1
approx. 40 mA approx. 100 mA
250 mA
max. 150 mA
approx. 250 mA
approx. 55 mA
approx. 1.5 A2)
• From the backplane bus approx. 30 mA
Main circuit
Rated operating voltage Ue
• IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1
• Protective separation between main and
auxiliary circuits
•UL, CSA
500 V AC
400 V
600 V AC
Rated insulation voltage Ui500 V AC
Rated impulse strength Uimp 6 kV
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz
1) For motor starters with order number suffix -.AA3 from revision level E02, the frame potential of the contactor supply U2 is
connected with the frame potential of the electronics supply U1. Connect the frame potential of U1 and U2 to the power
module in order to prevent high compensating current.
2) In the event of simultaneous activation of the test function of several starters, the currents are cumulative! This current
also flows if the supply voltage U1 recovers.
Table 9-6: Technical specifications - RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature and F-RS1e-x fail-safe
reversing starter (Contd.)
Reversing starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 9-25
Technical specifications - circuit breaker, contactor
Reversing starters RS1e-x F-RS1e-x
Circuit breaker
Rated operating current 3/8/16 A
Instantaneous overcurrent release Fixed setting at 13 x Ie max
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity to
Ie = 16 A (motor starter) 50 kA at 400 V
Mechanical life
Electrical life
≥ 100,000 operating cycles
100,000 operating cycles
contactor
Rated operational current Ie at 60°C
•AC-1
• AC-2, AC-3
-At 400 V
-At 500 V
• AC-4 at 400 V
16 A
16 A
11 A
9 A
Max. permissible output of the three-
phase induction motors at 500 VAC 7.5 kW
Positively driven operation - auxiliary con-
tacts, contactor
yes
Mechanical life
contactor
Electrical life
Switching frequency
10 million switching cycles
see Figure 9-8.
80/hr
Surge suppression Zener diodes integrated
Operating times in the case of DC opera-
tion
(total break time =
contact parting time + arcing time)
• At 0.85 to 1.1 x Us
-Closing time (ms)
-Contact parting time (ms)
• Arcing time (ms)
25 to 100 50 to 170
20 to 50 40 to 100
10 to 15 10 to 15
•At 1.0 x U
s
-Closing time (ms)
-Contact parting time (ms)
typ. 25 typ. 50
typ. 20 typ. 40
Table 9-7: Technical specifications of the RS1e-x, F-RS1e-x - power switch, contactor
Reversing starters
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
9-26 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Electrical life
Figure 9-8: Electrical service life, contactor
12 16
PN
10 20 30 40 50 60 80100 200 400
(A)
Ia
Ie(A)
(kW)
103
104
8
6
4
2
2
105
8
6
4
2
106
8
6
4
2
107
8
6
4
12
3
456
8
1,1 37,5
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-1
Functions 10
Section Subject Page
10.1 Functions - Overview 10-3
10.2 Introduction 10-5
10.3 Basic function / basic parameters 10-6
10.3.1 Rated operating current 10-6
10.3.2 Load type 10-7
10.3.3 Non-resetting on voltage failure 10-8
10.3.4 Behavior with supply voltage switching element missing 10-8
10.4 Motor control 10-9
10.4.1 Electronic / mechanical switch technology 10-9
10.4.2 Reversing starter control function 10-10
10.5 Brake output (actuation via expansion modules) 10-11
10.6 Thermal motor model - motor protection 10-13
10.7 System monitoring 10-18
10.7.1 Current limits 10-18
10.7.2 Asymmetry monitoring 10-22
10.7.3 Shortcircuit protection (power switch / repair switch) 10-23
10.8 Field bus interface 10-25
10.8.1 Response to CPU/master STOP 10-25
10.8.2 Group diagnosis 10-26
10.8.3 Wait for startup parameter data records (from order number suffix
-.AB4)
10-26
10.9 Communication 10-27
10.9.1 General 10-27
10.9.2 Commands 10-30
10.9.3 Plausibility check of data 10-31
10.9.4 Output of messages 10-32
10.9.5 Local device interface 10-33
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
10-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
10.10 PROFIenergy 10-34
10.10.1 What is PROFIenergy 10-34
10.10.2 PROFIenergy (version V1.0) in the ET 200S motor starter 1) 10-34
10.11 Inputs 10-38
10.12 Cold run 10-47
10.13 Emergency start 10-48
10.14 Trip Reset 10-49
10.15 Self-test 10-50
10.16 Maintenance 10-52
10.17 Log book 10-53
10.18 Factory setting 10-54
Section Subject Page
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-3
10.1 Functions - Overview
This section describes all parameters of the motor starters; high feature/fail-safe
modules. A distinction is drawn between the permanently set values (fixed val-
ues) and the parameters that can be changed by the user.
ET200S
DS1e-x, RS1e-x, DSS1e-x, F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x
to -.AA4
with F-starters
from -.AB4
Load type (Page 10-7):
• 3-phase
•1-phase

Non-resetting on voltage failure (can be changed) (Page 10-8)
Response with "supply voltage switching element missing" adjust-
able (Page 10-8)
Field bus interface (Page 10-9):
• Dummy values
• Wait for start-up parameter data records

Reversing starter (Page 10-10)
• Interlock time adjustable

Brake output (only with the corresponding expansion module (xB1
to xB6) appropriate)
(Page 10-11)
• Setting the enable delay of the brake
• Setting the holding time of the brake

Motor protection (Page 10-13):
• Response to overload - (thermal motor model)
• Recovery time (adjustable)
• Prewarning limit value motor heating
• Prewarning limit value time trigger reserves
• Idle time
Plant monitoring (Page 10-18):
• Response to residual current detection
• Response to current limit violation
• Set current limit values (upper/lower)
• Variable blocking time
• Variable blocking current
• Non-symmetrical limit values (variable)
• Response to asymmetry
Table 10-1: Overview of the device functions
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
10-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Inputs (only in combination with expansion module xB1 to xB6
and/or 2 DI COM/2 DI LC COM)
(Page 10-38)
• Input signal extension
• Input signal delay
• Retentive
Input actions:
• Shutdown without restart
• Shutdown with restart
• Shutdown at limit position, clockwise rotation
• Shutdown at limit position, counterclockwise rotation
• General warning
• Manual operation local
• Emergency start
• Motor cw
• Motor ccw
• Quick stop
•Cold run
•Trip Reset
Circuit breaker (Page 10-23):
• Behavior with circuit breaker OFF variable 1) 1)
Maintenance (Page 10-52)
Communication (Page 10-27)
Emergency start (Page 10-48)
Trip reset (Page 10-49)
Self-test (Page 10-50)
Cold run (Page 10-47)
Log book (Page 10-53)
Factory settings (Page 10-54)
PROFIenergy (Page 10-34)
1) from order number suffix: -.AA4 (group error/group error only with ON command)
ET200S
DS1e-x, RS1e-x, DSS1e-x, F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x
to -.AA4
with F-starters
from -.AB4
Table 10-1: Overview of the device functions (Contd.)
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-5
10.2 Introduction
Device function
This section describes the device functions. All device functions have inputs,
e.g. device parameters and outputs, e.g. messages.
The following scheme shows the principle of the device function:
Figure 10-1: Principle of device function.
Further details on the device parameters and their alteration options can be
found in the Parameterization section.
Intrinsic device protection
The motor starter protects itself against destruction thanks to the thermal
motor model. If the self-protection is triggered,
- the motor and the brake output are shut down immediately,
- the message "Switching element overload" is generated.
It is not possible to switch on using "Emergency start".
Currents
Note
All currents (e.g. blocking current, current limit values) are percentage current
values relative to the rated operating current that is set on the device
(e.g. Ie= 2 A corresponds to 100 %).
Inputs
Device parameters
Commands
Protection
Device function
Outputs
Measurements
Messages
Actions
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
10-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
10.3 Basic function / basic parameters
Basic parameters are "central" parameters required by several device functions.
10.3.1 Rated operating current
Here you specify the rated operating current that uninterrupted can result in the
branch (switchgear and motor). This is normally the nominal current of the
motor. The setting range depends on the performance class of the motor
starter ET200S HF / F - starter (0.3 ... 3.0 A, 2.4 ... 8 A and 2.4 ... 16 A).
Notice
The rated operating current is an important central parameter.
The rated operating current must always be set so that the motor protection is
ensured via the thermal motor model.
Actual motor current
The present current in the starter is returned for analysis by the process image.
Current is measured for all 3 phases and the highest value is obtained. The 6-bit
value returned in the process specifies the motor current ratio Iact / Irated
(Irated = parameterized rated operating current).
The value is shown with one place to the left of the decimal point (DI 1.5) and
five places after the decimal point (DI 1.0 to DI 1.4). The maximum possible
ratio of Iact / Irated is therefore 1.96875 (approx. 197 %).
Resolution is 1/32 per bit (3.125 %).
Table 10-2: Actual motor current
DI 1.5 DI 1.4 DI 1. 3 DI 1. 2 DI 1.1 DI 1.0
202-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5
1 0.5 0.25 0.125 0.0625 0.03125 Total=1.96875
000000 Iact = 0
100000Iact = Irated x 1
101100
Iact = Irated x 1.375
111111
Iact = Irated x 1.96875
Iact = rated operating current Irated x value (DI 1.0 to DI 1.5)
Irated = rated motor current
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-7
Default setting
The motor starter's rated operational current is set ex-works to the maximum value. This
means that the motor can be tested without connection to the field bus and the starter does
not trip. Correct motor protection might not necessarily be ensured under certain circum-
stances during this time.
In the GSD file the rated operational current is preset to the minimum value for safety rea-
sons. This value has to be parameterized as part of the configuration procedure. If it is not
parameterized the motor starter could trip on account of an overload when the motor is
started for the first time.
Settings
Note
The setting range depends on the device type!
10.3.2 Load type
Here you enter whether the motor starter is to protect a 1-phase or 3-phase
consumer.
• With a 1-phase load, the asymmetry detection is deactivated!
With all mechanically switched motor starters, the 1-phase load can be con-
nected between any two phases.
• With a 3-phase load, the asymmetry detection is activated! The three phase
currents are compared with one another.
Note
The load type is only relevant to mechanical motor starters. Only 3-phase load
types are permitted for connection to electronic starters.
Caution
It is not possible to connect multiple motors to a motor starter as otherwise the
motor protection cannot be ensured.
Settings
Device parameters Default setting Adjustment range
Rated operating current In the motor starter: maximum value
In GSD / motor starter ES: minimal
value
• 0.3 A ... 3.0 A
• 2.4 A ... 8.0 A
• 2.4 A ... 16.0 A
Increment: 10 mA
Table 10-3: Actual motor current settings
Device parameters Default setting Adjustment
range
Load type 3-phase • 3-phase
• 1-phase
Table 10-4: Load type settings
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
10-8 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
10.3.3 Non-resetting on voltage failure
These device parameters are used to determine whether the overload message
is to be retained if the electronic voltage fails:
•Overload
• No overload
Settings
10.3.4 Behavior with supply voltage switching element missing
This parameter is used to determine which message the motor starter outputs
when the supply voltage of the switching elements and the output fails.
Note
Supply voltage of the switching elements
The supply voltage of the switching elements (24 V) must be supplied via the
voltage supply U2 (PM-D: A1+ / A2-).
Settings
Device parameters Default setting Adjustment
range
Non-resetting on voltage
failure
yes • yes
•no
Table 10-5: Non-resetting on voltage failure settings
Device parameters Default setting Adjustment range
Behavior with supply volt-
age switching element
missing
Group error • Group error
• Group error only for
ON command
• General warning
Table 10-6: Settings
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-9
10.4 Motor control
10.4.1 Electronic / mechanical switch technology
Electronic switch technology
The motor starter controls the 2-phase motors with thyristors. Phase L1 is not
switched but is instead looped via the integrated repair switch from 400 V
energy connection on the motor connection
Danger
Dangerous voltage.
Risk of death or serious injury
When a supply voltage is applied to the 400 V energy connection on the motor
starter, dangerous voltage can occur at the motor starter output even without a
starting command.
In the event of work on the feeder, this must be isolated via the repair switch.
Mechanical switching technology
The motor starter controls the 3-phase motors with contactors.
Switching element defective
In the event of a defective switching element (contactor welded / connected
through thyristor), the motor starter is no longer able to switch off the motor.
Note
If necessary, evaluate the "Switching element defective" message and switch
the branch through a previous switching element accordingly.
Messages and actions
Message Actions
Switching element defective Disconnect
Switching element shortcircuited
(e.g. contactor welded, power semiconduc-
tor connected through)
Disconnect
Switching element overload (e.g. power
semiconductor too hot)
Disconnect
Motor cw —
Motor ccw (only with reversing starters) —
Electronics power supply too low —
Switching element power supply missing —
Start-ready for motor on —
Table 10-7: Messages and actions for switching technology
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
10-10 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
10.4.2 Reversing starter control function
Description
This control function can be used by the motor starter to control the motor rota-
tion directions. An internal logic prevents both rotation directions being acti-
vated at the same time.
The time-delayed switchover from one rotation direction to the other direction is
realized by the interlock time. This function is only relevant to reversing start-
ers.
Interlock time
The interlock time effects the time-delayed switchover of the rotation direction.
Within the interlock time, the centrifugal mass of a drive should come to a
standstill before the next switching command can be executed.
Caution
An interlock time set to 0 is set internally to 150 ms for safety reasons.
Settings
Messages and actions
Device parameters Default setting Adjustment range
Interlock time 0 0 ... 60 s
Increment: 1 s
Table 10-8: Replacement value settings
Message Action
Motor ccw —
Interlock active —
Table 10-9: Messages and actions for reversing starter control function
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-11
10.5 Brake output (actuation via expansion modules)
Description
A mechanical disc brake or spring action brake fitted onto the motor brakes the
motor. The brake is controlled via the brake output.
ET200S motor starters provide the option of switching the brake on a motor
separately via external expansion modules (xB1 to xB6). This electronic output
can be controlled independently of the switching status of the contactors / thy-
ristors and thus from the motor status via the motor starter process image.
Enable delay of the brake when starting
Note
Only effective with a simultaneous ON switching command for brake and motor.
Positive time specifications: Delayed switching on of the brake output (brake
venting) in relation to the motor.
Negative time specifications: Delayed switching on of the motor in relation to
the brake output (brake venting)1).
In reversing mode, the enabling delay only starts after the interlock time
elapses.
Holding time of the brake when stopping
Note
Only effective with a simultaneous OFF switching command for brake and
motor.
These device parameters effect a delayed shutdown1) of the brake output in
relation to the motor. It also has an effect if the PLC fails.
In reversing mode, the holding time and interlock time run simultaneously.
Switching on in the opposite direction of rotation is only possible after the inter-
lock time has elapsed. It is possible to switch on in the same rotation direction
straight away as here the interlock time is aborted.
Priorities regulation
"Enable delay of the brake when starting" has priority over "Holding time of the
brake when stopping". An elapsed holding time is aborted when the enable
delay is re-started. (Via ON switching command for brake and motor)
1) can only be realized with a separate externally-supplied brake.
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
10-12 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Settings
Messages and actions
Caution
Negative enable delay and/or active holding time can only be realized with a sep-
arate, externally supplied brake.
Device parameters Default setting Adjustment range
Enable delay of the brake when
starting
0 s - 2.5 ... + 2.5 s
Increment: 0.01 s
Holding time of the brake when
stopping
0 s 0 ... + 25 s
Increment: 0.01 s
Table 10-10: Brake output settings
Message Action
Brake output active —
Table 10-11: Messages and actions for brake output
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-13
10.6 Thermal motor model - motor protection
Description
An approximation of the heating status of the motor is calculated from the mea-
sured motor currents and the device parameters "Rated operational current" and
"enable class". The data that indicates whether the motor is overloaded or work-
ing within its normal operating range is derived from this temperature.
Response to overload - thermal motor model
This device parameters is used to determine how the motor starter reacts to
overload:
• Shutdown without restart (AUTO RESET = off)
• Following an overload, the shutdown command can only be reset after the
motor model falls below the release threshold and a subsequent reset com-
mand (trip reset).
• Shutdown with restart (AUTO RESET = on)
Warning
If "shut down with restart" is activated, the motor will start automatically.
Risk of death, serious injury or damage to property
In the event of a 'switch on' command to be dealt with, the motor starter will
switch on automatically after the recovery time has elapsed. (Autoreset)
Ensure that no dangerous status conditions can occur.
• Warning
Caution
If the thermal motor model exceeds the limit value of 178 % for the intrinsic
protection of the motor starter, a shutdown command is generated by the
motor starter itself independently of the "Response on overload - thermal motor
model" parameterization.
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
10-14 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Tripping class
The tripping class (CLASS) defines the maximum time to disengagement within
which a protective device must trip from cold at 7.2 times the setting current
(motor protection to IEC 60947). The tripping characteristics plot time to disen-
gagement as a function of operating current.
Figure 10-2: Tripping class
Note
The options for the tripping classes depend on the motor starter and on the cur-
rent range
The following tripping classes can be parameterized:
Motor starters CLASS
F-DS1e -x
F-RS1e-x 10/20
DS1e-x
RS1e-x
5(10a)1) / 10 / 151) / 20
DSS1e-x:
0.3 ... 3 A
2.4 ... 8 A
2.4 ... 16 A
5(10a) / 10
5(10a)
5(10a)
1) from an order number suffix: -.AB4


[Ie
tA
V
V
[Ie
tA






















CLASS20 CLASS20
CLASS5 CLASS5
Min.
Min.
3-pole symmetrical load 2-pole load
(failure of a phase or
current asymmetry > 40 %)
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-15
Recovery time
Recovery time is the time defined for cooling after which a reset is possible fol-
lowing an overload trip.
During the recovery time, any trip reset signals present remain ineffective.
The recovery time after overload tripping is at least 1 minute. The recovery time
can be parameterized and can be changed between 60 seconds and 1800 sec-
onds. Power failures during this time extend the time specifications accordingly
when the basic "Non-resetting on voltage failure" parameter is active.
Prewarning limit value motor heating
The motor starter also has the function of a prewarning, i.e. the motor starter
warns if the motor heating limit is exceeded. This parameter can be used to
specify a percentage motor heating process as a prewarning limit.
This function is deactivated with a motor heating prewarning limit of 0 %.
Prewarning limit value time-based trigger reserve
This parameter can be used to specify a time as a prewarning limit. The motor
starter warns against an impending overload shutdown within the parameter-
ized time if the current operating conditions are observed. This function is deac-
tivated with a time-based trigger reserve of 0 s.
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
10-16 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Idle time
Idle time is a time defined for cooling process following operational shutdown,
in other words not after overload trips.
After this time elapses, the thermal memory of the motor starter is cleared. A
cold start is possible.
This permits higher switching frequencies if the drive is of the correct size, with-
out the motor model trigger limit being exceeded.
Caution
Higher switching frequencies result in greater motor heating. If the motor size
(heat class) is not modified, motor protection can no longer be guaranteed.
The diagram below shows the cooling response with and without pause time:
Figure 10-3: Idle time
The idle time can be set to a value in the range between 0 and 255 seconds.
Note
Motor heating
- Motor heating > 50 %: After the pause time, the storage value
of the motor model is reduced to 50 %.
- Motor heating < 50 %: After the pause time, the storage value
of the motor model is reduced to 0 %!
Without
Tripping limit
On
t
t
t
υ
υ
Overload tripping
Motor
Off
No
Tripping limit
Idle time Idle time
Overload tripping
Idle time
With
Idle time
Motor heating
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-17
Settings
Messages and actions
Device parameters Default setting Adjustment range
Response to overload -
thermal motor model
Shutdown without
restart
• Shutdown without restart
• Shutdown with restart
•Warning
Trigger class:
DS1e-x / RS1e-x CLASS 10 CLASS 5 (10a) 1)
CLASS 10
CLASS 15 1)
CLASS 20
FDS1e-x / FRS1e-x CLASS 10 CLASS 10
CLASS 20
DSS1e-x
0.3 ... 3 A
2.4 ... 8 A
2.4 ... 16 A
CLASS 5 (10a)
CLASS 5 (10a)
CLASS 5 (10a)
CLASS 10
CLASS 5 (10a)
Recovery time 90 s 60 ... 1800 s
Increment: 30 s
Prewarning limit value
motor heating
0 % (= deactivated) 0 ... 95 %
Increment: 5 %
Prewarning limit value time-
based trigger reserve
0 s (= deactivated) 0 ... 500 s
Increment: 1 s
Idle time 0 s (= deactivated) 0 ... 255 s
Increment: 1 s
1) from an order number suffix: -.AB4
Table 10-12: Thermal motor model settings
Message Action
Thermal motor model deactivated —
Thermal motor model - overload
Overload shutdown Shutdown (overload present)
Pause time active
Cooldown time active
Advance warning limit - time-based
trigger reserve not reached
Advance warning limit - motor heating
exceeded
Table 10-13: Messages and actions for brake output
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
10-18 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
10.7 System monitoring
10.7.1 Current limits
Description
The motor current and the current limits can be used to derive information on a
number of system states:
Response to residual current detection
The residual current detection is activated when the motor current falls below
18.75 % of the set rated operating current in all 3 phases.
This device parameter (from order number suffix -.AA3, and on the F-DS1-e-x and
RS1e-x) is used to determine how the motor starter should respond to residual
current detection:
• Warning
• Disconnect
Note
When switching on the motor, the zero current detection is suppressed for
approx. 1 second!
Response to current limit violation
This device parameters is used to determine how the motor starter reacts to
current limit violation:
• Warning
• Disconnect
System state Current value Protection by:
Motor becomes more inert, for exam-
ple on account of damaged bearings
Motor becomes freer, for example
because the processing material in the
system has been used up.
Current is higher
or
lower than usual
Current limits
Motor is blocked! Very high current
flowing
Blocking protection
Motor running at no-load, e.g. due to
system damage!
Very low level of
current flowing (<
18.75 % of Ie)
Residual current
detection
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-19
Upper/lower current limit
You can enter an upper and /or lower current limit value.
Example:
• Substance for mixing too thick, i.e. current overshoots the upper current limit.
• No-load operation, because drive belt broken, i.e. current undershoots the
lower current limit.
Notice
The current limits are only active – for startup monitoring – after the CLASS time
has elapsed, e.g. after 10 seconds for CLASS 10.
For DSS1e-x:
The current limits are only active for startup monitoring after the ramp time and
the CLASS time have elapsed.
The motor starter can be parameterized for warning or shutdown as the
response to violation of the current limits.
Note
The current limits can also be deactivated.
Blocking time
The blocking time is the time in which a motor blocking must be present without
shutdown. The motor starter shuts down if the blockage is still present after
the blocking time expires.
Blocking current monitoring
The blocking current specifies how much current the motor (at nominal voltage)
consumes when the axis is blocked.
If the motor current exceeds the parameterized value for the blocking current,
the motor starter detects a blocking. The blocking time monitoring is started
from the point when the value is exceeded. If the blocking current flows for lon-
ger than the parameterized blocking time, the motor starter generates the shut-
down command itself.
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
10-20 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Blocking protection principle during acceleration
The principle on which anti-blocking protection is based during acceleration, i.e.
the interaction of blocking current and blocking time is illustrated below:
Figure 10-4: Blocking protection principle during acceleration
Blocking protection principle after acceleration
After acceleration, the blocking protection behaves as follows in continuous
operation:
• The blocking time is reduced to 1 s regardless of the parameterized value.
• The blocking current is monitored to max. 400 %.
With a parameterized blocking current < 400 %, the parameter value is valid.
• If the blocking protection engages, a shutdown command is generated by the
motor starter itself.
• The messages "Motor blocking shutdown" and "Group error" are generated.
• The slave pointer "Number of motor overload trips" is increased by 1.
W
W
Stalled rotor
Stalled rotor
Blocking
Blocking
Case 1: Motor continues to operate
Case 2: Motor is shut down
Blocking cancelled within blocking
time
Blocking still present after the block-
ing time elapses
Motor continues to operate
Motor is shut down
Blocking
current
Blocking
current
Motor cur-
rent
Motor cur-
rent
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-21
Settings
Messages and actions
Device parameters Default setting Adjustment range
Response to residual current
detection
Disconnect • Warning
• Disconnect
Response to current limit viola-
tion
Warning • Warning
• Disconnect
Lower current limit 18.75 % • 18.75 ... 100 % of Ie
• 0 % (= deactivated)
Increment: 3.125 %
Upper current limit 112.5 % • 50 ... 4001) % of Ie
• 0 % (= deactivated)
Increment: 3.125 %
Blocking current 800 % • 150 ... 1000 % of Ie
• 150 ... 800 % of Ie
(DSS1e-x)
Increment: 50 %
Blocking time 1 s • 1 ... 5 s
Increment: 0.5 s
1) for -xAAx: 150%
Table 10-14: Current limit value settings
Message Action
Ie limit value exceeded —
Ie limit value not reached —
Ie limit value shutdown Shutdown (limit value violation present)
Residual current detected —
Zero current shutdown Shutdown (zero current detection)
Motor blocking shutdown Shutdown (blocking protection)
Table 10-15: Messages and actions for current limit values
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
10-22 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
10.7.2 Asymmetry monitoring
Description
Higher asymmetric current consumption is the reaction of a three-phase asyn-
chronous motor to slight asymmetry in the supply voltage. This causes an
increase in temperature in the stator and rotor windings. In this case, the motor
starter protects the motor against overload via a shutdown.
Note
When switching on the motor, the asymmetry evaluation is suppressed for
approx. 0.5 s!
Asymmetrical limit value
The asymmetry limit is a percentage by which motor current can vary in the indi-
vidual phases.
Asymmetry occurs when the difference between the smallest and largest
phase current is greater than the parameterized asymmetry limit.
The reference value for the evaluation is the maximum phase current in one of
the 3 phases.
Response to asymmetry
This device parameters is used to determine how the motor starter reacts to
asymmetry:
• Warning
• Disconnect
Settings
Messages and actions
Device parameters Default setting Adjustment range
Response to asymmetry Disconnect • Warning
• Disconnect
Asymmetry limit values 30 % • 30 ... 60 %
• 0 = deactivated
Increment: 10 %
Table 10-16: Asymmetry monitoring settings
Message Action
Asymmetry detected —
Asymmetry shutdown Shutdown (asymmetry present)
Table 10-17: Messages and actions for asymmetry monitoring
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-23
10.7.3 Shortcircuit protection (power switch / repair switch)
Description
The motor starter is fitted with an integrated power switch as shortcircuit pro-
tection to ensure the safety of the system and prevent personal injury. Monitor-
ing is carried out on both a shortcircuit between a phase and earth (= earth pro-
tection), as well as between two phases.
Properties of the power switch
The power switch / repair switch is designed for the following individual func-
tions:
• Disconnection of the series-connected starter and consumer from the mains
supply
• Start lockout via a padlock on the rotary element
• Shortcircuit protection for series-connected consumers with power switch
• Reset with reactivation
• Restore basic factory settings, see Basic factory settings
Response with power switch OFF:
The device parameters are used to determine how the motor starter responds
to a shortcircuit or manual shutdown of the power switch:
• Group error
• Group error only for ON command
• General warning
Settings
Note
Can only be parameterized with order number suffixes -.AA4 / -.AB4, not with -
.AA3 (fixed to group error only with ON command)
Device parameters Default setting Adjustment range
Response with power
switch OFF
—
-.AA2
-.AA3 with version E01
Group error —
-.AA3 with version E02 Group error only
for ON command
—
-.AA4 Group error • Group error
• Group error only for ON com-
mand
-.AB4 Group error • Group error
• Group error only for ON com-
mand
• General warning
Table 10-18: Settings for response with power switch OFF
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
10-24 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Messages and actions
Message Action
Circuit-breaker tripped —
Table 10-19: Messages and actions for plug monitoring
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-25
10.8 Field bus interface
10.8.1 Response to CPU/master STOP
This device parameter is used to determine how the motor starter should
respond to a CPU/master STOP:
• Keep last value
• Use dummy value
Caution
This is only relevant in Automatic operating mode.
Dummy values
In the event of a bus failure or CPU / master STOP, an appropriate dummy pro-
cess image of the motor starter outputs is controlled.
Note
This device parameter is only relevant if you have set the parameters "Response
with CPU / master STOP" "Connect dummy value".
Note
Motor cw and motor ccw cannot be set simultaneously.
The dummy value can be switched individually for the following parameters:
• Motor cw
• Motor ccw (only with reversing starters)
• Brake actuation
•Trip Reset
• Emergency start
• Self-test
• Quick stop lock
Note
With dummy value "Motor cw" or "Motor ccw" set, the connected motor is
switched on if the bus fails or with CPU/master STOP.
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
10-26 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Settings
Messages and actions
10.8.2 Group diagnosis
This parameter is used to determine whether the diagnostics are to be enabled
or locked via the field bus interface. If the parameter for the group diagnostics
is set to "lock", no error messages will then be issued.
Settings
Wait for start-up parameter data records
10.8.3 Wait for startup parameter data records (from order number suffix -.AB4)
This bit is set with a DPV1 configuration via STEP 7 directly by the object man-
ager. The motor starter uses this to detect whether or not a data record transfer
is carried out. The motor starter startup process is stopped until the data trans-
fer is complete.
Device parameters Default setting Adjustment range
Response to CPU/master STOP Use dummy value • Use dummy value
• Keep last value
Replacement value 0 7 x (0 or 1)
Table 10-20: Replacement value settings
Message Action
CPU/master STOP —
Bus fault —
Table 10-21: Messages and actions
Device parameters Default setting Adjustment range
Group diagnosis Disable • Disable
• Enable
Table 10-22: Group diagnostics settings
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-27
10.9 Communication
10.9.1 General
Description
The communication is a higher level function consisting of multiple sub-func-
tions:
• Operating type monitoring
• Rear wall bus integration
• Commands
• Plausibility check of data
• Output of messages
Data channels
ET 200S motor starters have 3 different data channels:
• Local serial device interface via the expansion module
2 DI COM LC (see Section 4.4 and Section 4.5)
• mt control local control point in "Manual local" operating mode
– Input action of the digital inputs 1)
(via xB3, xB4, xB6 brake expansion module and / or 2DI Com / 2DI LC COM
control module)
• Via the rear wall bus connection
The control via the corresponding data channel depends on the operating mode.
Operating modes
The following operating modes are differentiated with increasing priority:
• "Automatic" operating mode (lowest priority)
The motor starter can only be controlled with PLC via field bus.
• "Manual bus" operating mode
The motor starter can only be controlled with B&B (e.g. PC) via field bus.
• "Manual local" operating mode
Motor starter can be controlled with.
– On-site control point on digital inputs
("Motor cw", "Motor ccw")
Requirement: "Manual local" operating mode set
– B&B device (e.g. PC, hand-held controller) via the local device interface
(maximum priority)
Notice
A higher priority operating mode can take master control away from a lower pri-
ority operating mode at any time by a command or input action in "manual" oper-
ating mode, but the reverse is not possible.
A lower priority operating mode can only regain master control if the higher pri-
ority operating mode returns master control via the "automatic" operating mode
command or by switching off the input action in "manual local" operating mode,
with the motor switched off.
1) via xB3, xB4, xB6 brake expansion module or/and 2DI COM/2DI LC COM control module
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
10-28 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Using the following signaling bits in diagnostics data record DS92, it is possible
to uniquely detect which control source currently has control priority:
• "Automatic" operating mode
• "Manual bus" operating mode
• "Manual local" operating mode
• Input control
• Lost connection in "Manual" operating mode
Connection monitoring
The connection monitoring is active in the "Manual bus" and "Manual local" oper-
ating modes. A write data record must be sent within 5 seconds. Otherwise
the motor starter switches off with the message "Connection lost in manual
operating mode".
If you do not want to send any commands or control commands, you can send
an empty data record, for example.
Use an empty data record 93 "command" for this purpose. Here, only the coordi-
nation is filled out as appropriate and the commands filled with "0".
Set manual local operating mode for a local control point on the digital inputs
The operating mode can be set as follows:
• Using a B&B device (e.g. PC) via the local device interface.
Parameterize the input n-action "Motor cw" and "Motor ccw". Then remove
the B&B device to activate the control via the digital inputs. The "Control
input" signaling bit is set in the process.
• With a digital input on which you connect a switch for switchover to the "Man-
ual local" operating mode
This digital input then needs to be parameterized using the n -action "Manual
local" input.
Automatic Manual Master control goes
to
Manual bus Manual operation local
Automatic
operating
mode
Manual bus
operating
mode
Manual local
operating
mode
Control
input
Lost connec-
tion in "Man-
ual" operating
mode
0 0 1 0 0 PC via device interface
00101none
0 0 1 1 0 Digital input
01000PC via field bus
01001none
10000Control (PLC)
Table 10-23: Control priority of operating modes
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-29
Relationships between the operating modes with different control tasks
The table below shows the relationships between the operating modes with dif-
ferent control tasks:
Control task Control via Automatic
operating
mode
Manual bus
operating
mode
Manual local
operating
mode
Control PLC X
PC / PG X
Device inter-
face
X
Parameterize PLC X
PC / PG X X
Device inter-
face
XXX
Commands PLC X1)
PC / PG X X
Device inter-
face
XXX
Diagnostics,
measure-
ments, statis-
tics read
PLC XXX
PC / PGXXX
Device inter-
face
XXX
X = function permitted
1) except basic factory setting and restart
Table 10-24: Control priority of operating modes
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
10-30 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
10.9.2 Commands
Commands and their meaning
The commands can be used to get the motor starter to complete certain
actions. For example, the following commands can be sent to the motor starter
using the Motor Starter ES configuration software:
Command Meaning
Trip Reset • Reset and acknowledgement of error
messages
• Delete signaling bits if there are no
error messages
• No effect
Emergency start ON Switch on emergency start device func-
tion
Emergency start OFF Switch off emergency start device func-
tion
Automatic operating mode Control via PLC;
cyclical and acyclical bus channel (C1)
Manual operating mode • Control via PC; acyclical bus channel
(C2)
• Control via device interface
Factory setting All parameters have basic factory setting
again except for the communication
parameters. Only possible in manual
operating mode!
Clear slave pointer Clear the "preventative diagnostics" sta-
tistics data
Re-start Motor starter runs a restart (same action
as Power OFF / ON). Only possible in
manual operating mode!
Parameterization lock CPU / Master OFF Motor starter accepts parameterization
via master (PLC)
Parameterization lock CPU / Master ON Motor starter ignores parameterization
via master (PLC)
Clear log book trips Clear log book with recorded causes of
error.
Clear log book events Clear log book with recorded warning
messages and specific actions.
Cold run ON Permits the activation of the switching
contacts without main energy
Cold run OFF Switches the "cold run" function off
Clear maintenance timer Clears the timer for the maintenance
function
Table 10-25: Commands and their meaning
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-31
10.9.3 Plausibility check of data
Description
The motor starter checks all incoming parameters for validity and plausibility.
For incorrect parameters
• during a startup (after power ON), the messages "Group error" and "Incorrect
parameter value" are set.
Motor and brake output remain switched off.
• in ongoing operation, the messages "Incorrect parameter value" or "Parame-
terization in ON status not permitted" are set. "Group error" is not set.
Motor and brake output are not switched off.
Note
The current valid parameter values are retained.
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
10-32 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
10.9.4 Output of messages
Message Meaning
General messages
Ready (automatic) Device can be actuated via BUS
(e.g. PLC).
Group error At least 1 error is set.
General warning At least 1 warning exists.
Group prewarning At least 1 prewarning exists.
Process image error Process image of the outputs contains
nonallowable bit combination, e.g. motor
cw and motor ccw set simultaneously.
Field bus connection
Bus fault Response monitoring for field bus inter-
face elapsed.
CPU/master STOP PLC program no longer being processed
Acknowledgment
Trip reset completed Trip teset accepted, i.e. error has been
acknowledged.
Trip reset not possible Unable to acknowledge error as the rea-
son for the shutdown is still present.
Operating type monitoring
Automatic operating mode Automatic (PLC control)
Manual operating mode - bus Manual operation via field bus
(B&B control)
Manual operation local Manual local operation:
• Manual operation via Motor Starter
ES
• B&B control
• Input control
Lost connection in manual operating
mode
During manual operation, the associated
communication connection was inter-
rupted for longer than 5 seconds.
Table 10-26: Maintenance messages and actions
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-33
10.9.5 Local device interface
Description
The device interface on the 2DI COM / 2 DI LC COM (see Section 4.4 and 4.5)
can be used to connect the motor starter to a PC or a hand-held device (order
no. 3RK1922-3BA00; RS232 interface cable: 6ED1057-1AA00-0BA0). This con-
trol source has the highest priority level.
Parameter assignment
Parameterization active Yes / no
Incorrect parameter value1) Parameter not correct
Parameter change in ON status not per-
missible 1) Attempted parameter change not permis-
sible when the motor is running.
Faulty parameter number1) Specifies the first unaccepted parameter
(object number of the parameter).
Parameterization lock CPU / Master
active
Motor starter ignores parameters from
the PLC, but informs the PLC that param-
eters are OK.
No external startup arameter er hold After Power ON or a restart of the motor
starter, new parameters are received by
the PLC.
Statistics data
Slave point cleared1) Statistics data for preventative diagnos-
tics have been cleared.
1) Signaling bits that can be cleared with trip reset
Message Meaning
Table 10-26: Maintenance messages and actions
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
10-34 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
10.10 PROFIenergy
10.10.1 What is PROFIenergy
PROFIenergy (PE)
PROFIenergy (PE) supports the following two functions:
• PE_power saving function
supports the targeted shutdown of consumers during pause times.
• PE_measurement function
Power management is a suitable tool for securing the reduction in energy
consumption and thus the energy costs systematically and in the long-term in
the company. The aim of power management is to optimize the use of
energy in a company - from purchasing energy to consuming energy - both in
terms of financial and green aspects. The PE_measurement function sup-
plies the measurements required for optimization.
10.10.2 PROFIenergy (version V1.0) in the ET 200S motor starter 1)
The ET200S motor starter supports the "PE_power saving function" and
"PE_measurement function" for the motor current. These are referred to as
commands as they trigger responses in the ET200S motor starter.
In addition, the ET200S motor starter delivers other what are known as services
that provide information on the status of the motor starter, as defined for
PROFenergy. These can then be evaluated and processed in the application pro-
gram.
Commands
1) from order number suffix: -.AB4
Control commands
Start_Pause The starter changes to energy-saving mode.
End_Pause The starter changes back to operating mode.
Status commands
PE_Identify Delivers a list with the supported PROFIenergy com-
mands / functions.
PEM_Status Delivers the status of the current PE mode.
Query_Modes
List_Energy_Saving_Modes Delivers a list of supported power-saving modes.
Get_Mode Delivers the paramter values with which the PE_en-
ergy saving function works.
Query_Measurement
Get_Measurement_List Delivers a list with the supported PE_Measurement
Get_Measurement_Values Delivers the supported PE_measurements
Table 10-27: Messages and actions
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-35
For data transfer, a distinction is made between two different status conditions
with the ET 200S motor starter:
toff Time_to_Pause time required by the device to change
to energy-saving mode.
toff_min Time_min_length_of_stay Minl time for which the device is to be
kept or remain in energy-saving mode.
ton Time_to_operate Time that the device requires to
change to operating mode.
tPause_min Time_min_Pause Time compared to tPause (sent to the
motor starter together with the
"Start_Pause" command);
if tPause ≥ tPause_min, then the device
changes into energy-saving mode.
PE_Mode_ID = 255 Operating mode
PE_Mode_ID = 01 Energy-saving mode
W
W3DXVHBPLQ
WRII WRIIBPLQ WRQ
6WDUWB3DXVH! (QGB3DXVH!
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
10-36 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
"PE_measurement function" command
For efficient energy management, energy measurements must be provided.
Different measurements are available for selection by the PROFIenergy specifi-
cations, to which a measurement ID is assigned. With the ET 200S motor
starter, the instantaneous measurements of the phase current and mean value
of the phase currents are supported.
The measurements are uniquely identified using IDs. Measurement IDs 7, 8, 9
and 33 are supported:
• ID = 7: Instantaneous value of phase current a (L1)
• ID = 8: Instantaneous value of phase current b (L2)
• ID = 9: Instantaneous value of phase current c (L3)
• ID = 33: Mean value of the three phase currents (a+b+c) / 3
The current values are sent under the following accuracy specifications:
• Accuracy Domain (unsigned8) = 0x01 → percent of full-scale reading
• Accuracy Class (unsigned8) = 0x11 → 3 %
• Range (Float32) = Ie_max (fixed value parameter)
This means that the measurements with an accuracy of 3 % relative to the max-
imum adjustable rated operating current Ie is sent.
Local LED display on the ET 200S motor starter
The "Energy-saving mode active" status is displayed via the flashing device LED
(flashing sequence: 0.25 s on / 1.75 s off → unique flashing rhythm for energy-
saving mode).
Note
An error present is not acknowledged by changing to energy-saving mode, i.e.
the error present is stored internally and can be exported. After exiting energy-
saving mode, the error must be rectified and acknowledged.
The status displays for the bus and the supply voltages and the SF-LED are not
affected by the active energy-saving mode.
Response of the starter on activating energy-saving mode:
Motor shutdown via suppression (masked) of the PAA bits Motor cw, Motor
ccw, BRAKE). The other PAA bits (e.g. trip reset) are still active.
Interactions with the different operating modes
• PE is only effective in automatic mode
• manual operation is not affected by PE; → switching over to manual operation
is still possible which means the motor can be controlled manually.
• Cyclical and acyclical data transfer (PAE, data records, diagnostics, alarms,
etc.) to and from the motor starter are still possible.
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-37
Requirements for the starter to go to energy-saving mode (min. pause time,...)
The change to energy saving mode "Pause" is only effective if the sent pause
time is greater than the device-specific minimum pause time. i.e. a change is
only implemented if the pause is longer than the motor starter needs to switch
off the main power for the motor.
With a soft starter, a parameterized slow-down ramp of the device-specific min-
imum pause time needs to be added.
The change to energy-saving mode is logged in the "Events" log book.
Entry: "Energy-saving mode active" In Motor Starter ES diagnostics tool, the
change is entered into the log book in energy-saving mode with the event ID
1520.
Requirements for the "PROFIenergy" function
The following requirements need to be met for an ET 200S PROFINET to com-
municate via the PNO profile PROFIenergy:
• ET 200S Profinet header group with PROFIenergy support
• ET 200S high feature motor starter from order number suffix .-AB4
How do I use PROFIenergy in the ET 200S system
SIEMENS offers two functional modules for the use of PROFIenergy:
• PE_START_END (FB815) supports switching to energy-saving mode
• PE_CMD (FB816) supports the export of measurements and switching to
energy-saving mode
These can be purchased online at the following link:
Example application for PROFIenergy. See Service & Support on the internet
• http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/41986454
• http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/66829209
More information
PROFIenergy: See PROFINET system description
• http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
10-38 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
10.11 Inputs
Description
With the "Inputs" device function, the motor starter can execute various actions
that you can parameterize. The signals at the digital inputs are evaluated for this
purpose. Inputs 1 and 2 (DI 0.4, DI 0.5) are actuated via the expansion interface
for expansion modules (e.g. brake control module xB3, xB4, xB6). Inputs 3 and
4 (DI 0.6, DI 0.7) can be used directly via the control module (2DI COM / 2DI LC
COM (See Section 4.4 and 4.5) with switching elements or sensors (PNP).
The signal status conditions are sent in parallel via the process image.
The input actions of the individual digital inputs affect the motor starter func-
tions independently from one another (= OR operand)
Input signal extension
A short input signal can be extended using this parameter in comparison to the
actual input signal present. This makes it possible to ensure a reliable transfer
(compensation of bus transfer times and processing time in the control).
Input signal delay
For interference immunity reasons, a debounce time can be set for the inputs.
n signal input
This device parameter is used to specify whether or not the input level of the
digital inputs is to be saved.
• Retentive, i.e. self-holding operation (edge evaluation)
The action can be deactivated again due to another event despite an input sig-
nal being present.
• Non-retentive, i.e. inching operation (level evaluation)
This input action is active for as long as the input is activated.
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-39
n level input
This device parameter is used to specify the input logic:
•NC
•NO
Caution
With "n action input": "Emergency start", "Motor cw", "Motor ccw", "Cold run" and
"Trip reset", "n level input" can only be parameterized as a normally open con-
tact!
Notice
When "n level input" of normally closed contacts are parameterized to normally
open and the associated "n action input" is parameterized to "Shutdown without
restart" then, when the input is open, the "Input shutdown" signaling bit is set
and shut down accordingly due to the input delay!
Notice
With the input voltage present (input active), a 1 is sent to the control, regard-
less of the "n level input" parameter, see figure "Overview of the input parame-
ters"
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
10-40 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
n action input
A variety of actions can be triggered by an input signal. You can parameterize
the actions below, depending on "n level input", "n signal input" and "Operating
mode".
Notice
When "n signal input" = retentive and "n action input" = Motor cw / ccw, at least
one input with input action "Shutdown..." or "Quick stop" always needs to be
parameterized.
If this rule is not observed, the parameters of the motor starter and correspond-
ing diagnostics report will be rejected!
Input, n action level signal Operating
mode
Description
No action NO /
NC
n.ret /
ret
all No direct action at the motor starter. Evaluation
and processing by the process image are possi-
ble.
Shutdown with-
out restart
NO /
NC
n.ret / - all • Results in the shutdown of motor and brake.
• Acknowledgment necessary after the cause
of the shutdown has been rectified (input sta-
tus).
Shutdown with
re-start
(autoreset)
NO /
NC
n.ret / - all • Results in the shutdown of motor and brake.
• Automatic acknowledgment after the cause of
the shutdown has been rectified (input sta-
tus).
Shutdown at
limit position,
clockwise rota-
tion
NO /
NC
n.ret / - all • Motor and brake output are shut down irre-
spective of the direction of rotation.
• Re-start of the brake output is possible after
clearing the control commands"Brake" and
"Motor cw / ccw".
• Shutdown at limit position, clockwise rota-
tion Motor switch-on is possible only with the
counter-command "motor ccw".
• Shutdown at limit position, counterclockwise
rotation Motor switch-on is possible only with
the counter-command "motor cw".
Shutdown end
position ccw
(RS1-x only)
NO /
NC
n.ret / - all
General warning NO /
NC
n.ret /
ret
all • The "General Warning" message is issued.
• The motor starter and the brake output are
not shut down!
sp: The input action responds to the active edge
of the input signal. Deactivation with active input
signal present is therefore possible.
Action is deactivated with trip reset.
Table 10-28: Description of actions
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-41
Manual opera-
tion local
NO /
NC
n.ret / - all • Control only possible via "Input n - action:
Motor cw and motor ccw" (see below) possi-
ble!
• Control via field bus ("Automatic" operating
mode) not possible!
• The automatic mode is only possible again
once the manual local operation mode is can-
celed and "Input n action": "Motor cw" or
"Motor ccw" is not active.
Emergency start NO / - n.ret / - all • Switches the motor on with ON switching
command present despite an internal trip
command being present.
• When an ON switching command is present
for the brake output, also switches this output
on.
• Intrinsic protection of the motor starter
remains active and protects the device
against being destroyed
• Permissible only as NO contact.
Motor cw NO / - n.ret /
ret
Manual
operation
local
• The motor starter must be in the "Manual
local" operating mode for these actions.
• The device parameters of the brake process
are evaluated
• "Motor cw": switches motor and brake output
on and off together (clockwise rotation).
• "Motor ccw": switches motor and brake out-
put on and off together (counter-clockwise
rotation).
• Permissible only as NO contact.
sp: The input action is triggered provided that the
active level of the input signal is present.
The input trigger is cleared by the input action
"Quick stop" or group error.
Motor ccw
(RS1e-x only)
NO / - n.ret /
ret
Manual
operation
local
Quick stop NO /
NC
n.ret /
ret
all • Motor and brake output are switched off with-
out a group error.
• "Quick stop" has priority over "Motor cw" and
"Motor ccw"
sp: The input action responds to the active edge
of the input signal. Deactivation is therefore pos-
sible with the active input signal present.
The input trigger is cleared by removing the con-
trol commands "Motor cw" and "Motor ccw"
- With control via input actions Motor cw / ccw,
the quick stop function is always evaluated for
retentive independent of the parameterization.
Trip Reset NO /
NC
n.ret / - all • "Trip reset" is triggered once
• Only possible as NO contact.
Input, n action level signal Operating
mode
Description
Table 10-28: Description of actions (Contd.)
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
10-42 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Cold run NO / - n.ret / - all • Permits switch-on without main power. If the
main power is still on (current is flowing), an
internal shutdown command is generated.
NO: Normally open contact
NC: Normally closed contact
sp: retentive
n.sp: non-retentive (activation and deactivation of the input action follows the status of the input signal (= inching mode))
Input, n action level signal Operating
mode
Description
Table 10-28: Description of actions (Contd.)
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-43
Quick stop
• Motor and brake output are switched off without a group error.
• "Quick stop" has priority over "Motor cw" and "Motor ccw"
• The input action responds to the active edge of the input signal.
Deactivation with static "Quick stop" input signal present is therefore possi-
ble.
• The input trigger is cleared by removing the "Motor cw" and "Motor ccw" con-
trol commands or via "Lock quick stop" (in the
process image).
Example 1:
Input 1–signal = retentive / edge-triggered

Motor is switched on by "Motor cw".

Motor is switched on by "Motor cw", then switched off by the rising edge at
the digital input 1 (parameterized to input action 1 = quick stop). The quick
stop function is reset by removing the "Motor cw" command.

Motor is switched on by "Motor cw", then switched off by the rising edge at
the digital input 1. The quick stop function is reset by setting "Lock quick stop"
and the motor runs "clockwise" again until the "Motor cw" command is
cleared.

Motor is switched on by "Motor cw", then switched off by the rising edge at
the digital input 1. The quick stop function is reset by setting "Lock quick stop"
and the motor runs "clockwise" again until the "Motor cw" command is
cleared. Although digital input 1(DI2) remains statically activated, the motor
continues to run and is only reset when the "Motor cw" command is cleared.
Reason: The input action is edge triggered.

Motor is switched on by "Motor cw" and continues to run, uninterrupted, as
"Lock quick stop" permanently overrides the edges of the digital input 1 (DI2)
signal.
DO 0.0 motor cw
DI 0.4 input 1
Quick stop function
DO 1.7 Lock quick stop
Motor


Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
10-44 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Example 2:
Input 1–signal = non-retentive

Motor is switched on and off by "Motor cw".

Motor is switched on by "Motor cw", then switched off by the level at the
digital input 1 (parameterized with input action 1 = quick stop). The quick stop
function is reset by "Lock quick stop".
Motor is switched on again, as "Motor cw" is still active.

Motor is switched off by the level at digital input 1. The quick stop function is
reset by setting "Lock quick stop" and, as the "Motor cw" level is still present,
the motor runs "clockwise" again until the "Motor cw" command is cleared.

Motor is switched on by "Motor cw", then switched off by the rising edge at
the digital input 1. As long as the "Quick stop" function is activated, the motor
remains switched off and starts running again when "Quick stop" is cleared,
until "Motor cw" is switched off.
DO 0.0 motor cw
DI 0.4 input 1
Quick stop function
DO 1.7 Lock quick stop
Motor

Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-45
Settings
Device parameters Default setting Adjustment range
Input signal extension 0 ms • 0 ... 200 ms
Increment: 10 ms
Input signal delay 10 ms • 10 ... 80 ms
Increment: 10 ms
Input 1 - level NO • NC
•NO
Input 2 - level
Input 3 - level
Input 4 - level
Input 1 - action No action • No action
• Shutdown without restart
• Shutdown with restart
• Shutdown at limit position,
clockwise rotation
• Shutdown end position ccw
(RS1e-x only)
• General warning
• Manual operation local
• Emergency start
• Motor cw
• Motor ccw ( RS1e-x only)
• Quick stop
•Trip Reset
•Cold run
Input 2 - action
Input 3 - action
Input 4 - action
Input 1 - signal non-retentive • Retentive
• non-retentive
Input 2 - signal
Input 3 - signal
Input 4 - signal
Table 10-29: Input settings
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
10-46 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Messages and actions
Message Action
Input 1 —
Input 2 —
Input 3 —
Input 4 —
Input tripping Shutdown
(must be acknowledged with trip reset)
Shutdown input - clockwise end position Shutdown
(must be acknowledged with counter-
command)
Shutdown input - counterclockwise end
position
Input control —
Warning input —
Sensor supply overload Shutdown
(must be acknowledged with trip reset)
Quick stop active Shutdown without group error
Table 10-30: Messages and actions for inputs
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-47
10.12 Cold run
Description
This function allows the motor starter to be switched on without main power.
The motor starter responds as if the main power is present on the system. For
example, this means that during the commissioning phase, the corresponding
control commands are accepted by the control and the corresponding mes-
sages are delivered.
Note
If the main power is still on (current is flowing), an internal shutdown command
is generated.
The "cold run" function can be activated as follows:
• "Cold run" input action
• Commands: Cold run ON/OFF
With the "cold run" function is active, the motor switches off if
• a current flow is detected
• a main power flow present is detected.
Messages and actions
Message Actions
Cold run active
Cold run shutdown Disconnect
Table 10-31: Messages and actions for cold run
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
10-48 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
10.13 Emergency start
Description
Emergency start enables a restart despite an internal shutdown command.
Emergency start is possible when
• On switching command present for the motor. The motor is switched on
even if the reason for the shutdown persists. With end position shutdown,
the motor starts in the opposite direction.
• On switching command present for brake output. The output is switched on
("Enable delay of brake when starting" parameter is taken into account).
Emergency start is not possible when
• OFF switching command present
• Device error present
Signaling bit: "Error during self-test", "Switching element faulty"
• Intrinsic safety function of the motor starter has been triggered
Signaling bit: "Overload switching element"
• Switched / unswitched DC24V-S / DC24V-NS supply voltage missing
Signaling bit: "Power supply switching element missing"
"Electronics power supply too low"
• Blocking protection has triggered
Signaling bit: "Motor blocking shutdown"
• Process image error present
Signaling bit: "Process image error"
The "Emergency start" function can be activated as follows:
• "Emergency start" input action
• Commands: Emergency start ON/OFF
Messages and actions
Message Description
Emergency start active Present when the emergency start is
active, even when the motor and brake
output are switched off.
Table 10-32: Messages and actions for emergency start
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-49
10.14 Trip Reset
Trip Reset acknowledges all the currently pending acknowledgable errors in the
starter. An error can be acknowledged if it has been eliminated or no longer
exists.
The Trip Reset can be triggered by:
• Remote reset via PLC (PAA DO 0.3 trip reset)
• Remote reset via input action (if parameterized)
• Local reset via device interface (hand-held device or ES tool)
(only applies for starters from an order number suffix: -.AA3/-.AB4 and for all
fail-safe motor starters)
• Power-on reset (switch off and reactivate the 24V-NS DC) only with non-reset
on voltage failure deactivated (can be parameterized).
• Reset via power switch / repair switch
To do this, switch the power switch from 0 to 1.
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
10-50 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
10.15 Self-test
Description
There are 3 self-test types:
• Self-test at start up:
This is automatically activated when switching on or initializing the device!
• Self-test in operation:
The motor starter monitors certain device components cyclically and signals
the errors present.
• Self-test on request
The self-test can be started via the process image (DO 0.5).
Test stages
The self-test consists of 3 test stages. The test stages are run depending on
the signal duration of the test command:
Self-test error
In the event of an error, the "DEVICE" LED is on in red. The error can only be
acknowledged when switched on again. If the error is still present, the self-test
will still run with an error when switched on. The motor starter must be
replaced!
Test stage Signal dura-
tion Test scope Description
1 < 3 s LED test All LEDs are switched on for 2 sec-
onds!
• Check by user, no signaling bit
2 2 to 5s HW test The motor starter hardware is tested;
current measurement with display on
LED "device":
• Current flowing: flashes red
• Current not flowing: flickers red
• Check by user, no signaling bit
31) >5 s Shutdown Switching elements are switched off.
1) This test stage is only run in the manual operating mode
Table 10-33: Messages and actions for plug monitoring
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-51
Messages and actions
Note
Certain device components are continually monitored internally by the motor
starter and the result is signalled with the self-test messages. The "Error on
self-test" message can also occur in the event of an error with the internal mon-
itoring, without the self-test having been activated.
Message Actions
Self-test active —
Self-test ok —
Error during self-test —
Table 10-34: Messages and actions for self-test
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
10-52 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
10.16 Maintenance
Description
Maintenance functions are required to prevent wear-related failures of equip-
ment and systems. This increases the availability of the system. The optimal
use is that the motor starter promptly signals the intrinsic possible failure or a
failure of the motor in stages. This makes regular checking by maintenance per-
sonnel as to whether or not maintenance is required unnecessary.
Note
The maintenance timer only increases when the motor is running.
Device parameters
Two maintenance timers are available that permit indirect detection of wear
across the operating time. The maintenace timer are special operating hours
counters that can be both deleted and parameterized using warning limit values.
Maintenance timer warning limit value 1
First warning. Maintenance requirements signalled.
Maintenance timer warning limit value 2
Second warning. Maintenance request is signalled.
Settings
Messages and actions
Device parameters Default setting Adjustment range
Maintenance timer-Warning limit
value_1
946.080.000
(30 years)
• 0 … 4.294.967.295 s
Increment: 1 s
Maintenance timer-Warning limit
value_2
946.080.000
(30 years)
• 0 … 4.294.967.295 s
Increment: 1 s
Table 10-35: Maintenance settings
Message Action
Maintenance required Group prewarning
Maintenance request General warning
Maintenance timer limit value_1
exceeded
—
Maintenance timer limit value_2
exceeded
—
Table 10-36: Maintenance messages and actions
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-53
10.17 Log book
Description
The log book lists trips, device errors and events in chronological order, adds a
time stamp and thus creates a protocol. This protocol is stored internally. This
allows the causes to be evaluated later on.
Log books
There are 3 different log books that can be read as a data record:
• Log book trips
• Log book events
• Log book device errors
The current value for "Operating hours – device" is entered as a time stamp.
The object numbers of the respective messages can be found in the relevant
data record.
The last 21 entries are stored in the log books. The entries can be read out with
the relevant data record.
The log book is designed as a circular buffer. Over 21 entries, the oldest entry is
overwritten.
Log book trips
All group errors are recorded in "Log book - trips". This involves entering the
object numbers for the actual causes of error, e.g. "switching element overload".
Note that "Log book – trips" is cleared using the command "Clear log book –
trips"
Log book events
All warnings, and certain actions, are entered in "Log book - events".
Please note the following points:
• "Incoming" and "outgoing" events are entered.
"Incoming" means: The event is occurring.
"Outgoing" means: The event is acknowledged.
Entries are differentiated in the data record by sign:
(+: incoming, –: outgoing).
• "Log book – events" is cleared using the command "Clear log book – events".
Log book device errors
All device errors that occur are recorded in the "Log book – device errors".
Note that "Log book – device errors" cannot be cleared.
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
10-54 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
10.18 Factory setting
We recommend you use the factory setting (default setting) in the following
instances:
• Incorrect parameter assignment
• If ET 200S motor starters that have already been parameterized are to be
used in other systems.
Note
If you do not, in certain circumstances some operating mechanisms may start
up due to the existing parameter assignment.
You can reset parameterized motor starters to their factory setting without any
additional tools.
A parameter assignment block set by the "Motor Starter ES" parameterization
software is removed in the process.
You can find the parameters for the factory setting in the sections below:
• DS1e-x, F-DS1e-x in Section 8.3.4
• DSS1e-x in Section 8.4.5
• RS1e-x, F-RS1e-x in Section 9.3.4
Motor starter variants
The following motor starters can be reset:
• Motor starter; high feature in versions
- DS1e-x
- DSS1e-x
- RS1e-x
with the order number suffix -.AA3
• Variants of fail-safe motor starters
- F-DS1e-x
- F-RS1e-x
Restore factory settings
The factory setting can be established as follows:
• The "Basic factory settings" command (via data record 93 or Motor Starter
ES).
This is only possible if the "Manual" operating mode is set and the switching
elements are switched off.
• Using the power switch
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 10-55
Procedure
To reset the factory setting, proceed as follows:
1.
Warning
Connect the motor starter on an appropriate terminal module so that a con-
nected drive cannot start up as a result of the unknown parameter assignment
of the motor starter.
Do not use a terminal module which has an expansion module (brake module
xB3, xB4, xB6 with inputs) located directly to the right of it.
A 2DI-COM/-2DI LC COM control module may not be connected on this motor
starter.
When connecting the motor starter on the terminal module, pay attention to the
mechanical coding.
2. For this procedure outside of a plant, lay voltage U1 via a power module. It is
not necessary for the supply to come via the field bus and the power bus.
3. Turn the knob of the power switch within the specified time window of 2 to 4
seconds to ON and OFF, as illustrated in the timing diagram below, and check
the LEDs on the motor starter.
Figure 10-5: Factory setting
The initialization sequence prevents the factory setting being reset inadver-
tently.
The factory setting is initialized at the beginning of the start sequence. The
LEDs indicate the following behavior:
•SF off
•C-STAT off
• DEVICE flashes red
Once the factory setting has been restored, the LEDs respond as follows for 5
seconds:
•SF off
•C-STAT off
• DEVICE flickers red
Functions
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
10-56 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 11-1
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S
Local Solution 11
Section Subject Page
11.1 Features 11-3
11.2 Terminal modules TM-PF30 S47 and TM-X15 S27-01 11-6
11.2.1 Assignment of the terminal modules 11-6
11.2.2 Features 11-7
11.2.3 Models 11-7
11.2.4 View of the TM-PF30 S47 terminal modules 11-8
11.2.5 Terminal assignments 11-9
11.2.6 Technical specifications of the TM-PF30 S47 terminal modules 11-11
11.2.7 TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module 11-12
11.3 Power modules PM-D F1 through F5 11-15
11.3.1 Parameters 11-17
11.3.2 Electrical configuration 11-18
11.3.3 Technical specifications - PM-D F1 to F5 11-21
11.4 PM-X connection module 11-23
11.5 ET 200S with "local" safety-integrated system 11-24
11.6 Safety-integrated system configurations 11-28
11.6.1 Safety circuit with safety-integrated system combination 11-28
11.6.2 Two safety circuits with safety-integrated system combinations 11-31
11.6.3 Two cascaded safety circuits with safety-integrated system
combinations (potential group, potential subgroup)
11-33
11.6.4 Safety circuit with an external safety-integrated system
combination 3TK2824
11-37
11.6.5 Safety circuit with an external safety-integrated system
combination 3TK2823
11-39
11.6.6 Emergency stop combined with protective door 11-41
11.6.7 Emergency stop circuit with cascaded time delay PL d or PL e 11-43
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
11-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
11.6.8 One emergency stop circuit for two or more ET 200S rails 11-45
11.6.9 Potential-free connection between an ET 200S safety circuit and
autonomous safety circuits
11-47
11.6.10 DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature to PL e 11-49
11.6.11 ET 200S safety-integrated system with AS-i Safety at work 11-51
Section Subject Page
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So-
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 11 -3
11.1 Features
The "Safety local" safety engineering integrated into the ET200S system makes
it possible to carry out the emergency stop and protective door functions locally,
i.e. without remote PLC, using motor starters in an ET200S substation
A safety function can be divided into the subsystems Detect – Evaluate –
Respond.
In the ET200S system, the subfunctions are carried out as follows:
Detect – sensors that are connected to a PM-D F module, e.g. emergency stop
command device
Evaluate – corresponds to the PM-D F module which reads the sensors, moni-
tors the switching status of the actuators and switches the enabling circuit
depending on the internal status of the module.
Respond – ensures the motor is shut down by means of protective separation of
the power supply
• The emergency stop and protective door monitoring safety functions can be
carried out on one or two channels.
• Attainable values according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1: PLc - PLe or SIL 1 - SIL 3
according to IEC 62061.
• The attainable value depends on the system architecture and the diagnostic
coverage.
System architecture means single-channel or dual-channel sensor and actuator
technology
• In the standard motor starter with an installation width of 65/90 mm, feed-
back loop monitoring – which oversees the switching status of the actuators
(motor starters) – is carried out using failsafe kit 1 or 2.
• Feedback loop monitoring is already integrated into the high feature motor
starter with an installation width of 65/90 mm.
The lack of feedback loop monitoring (lack of diagnostic coverage in the actuator
circuit) in the high feature direct soft starter means that this can only be used to
max. PLc according to ISO 13849-1 or SIL 1 according to IEC 62061.
Example: ET 200S "Safety local" configuration with standard starter
The diagram below shows the complete safety sequence.
It illustrates a dual-channel architecture in the sensor and actuator circuit. The
sensor must be connected to the PM-D F module via two channels for this pur-
pose. Redundant disconnection is effected by an infeed contactor connected to
the PM-X module.
The feedback loop is carried to the PM-D F by the failsafe kits and a forced aux-
iliary contact of the infeed contactor which is wired to the PM-X module.
This configuration enables an emergency stop safety function in line with PLe
(ISO 13849-1) or SIL 3 (IEC 62061).
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
11-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
.
Figure 11-1: Design of the EMERGENCY STOP application to PLe in accordance with DIN EN ISO 13849-1 or SIL3 in
accordance with IEC 62061
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So-
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 11 -5
Figure 11-2: Wiring diagram for the EMERGENCY STOP application to PLe in accordance with
DIN EN ISO 13849-1 or SIL3 in accordance with IEC 62061
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
11-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
11.2 Terminal modules TM-PF30 S47 and TM-X15 S27-01
11.2.1 Assignment of the terminal modules
Terminal modules are needed for wiring the PM-D F1 through 5 power modules
and the PM-X connection module of the safety-integrated system.
The following table shows which power modules you can use with the various
terminal modules.
You can find information on the terminal modules in the following sections:
•Section 6 for the PM-D power module and all motor starters
• Expansion modules, such as the brake control module, in Section 12
• Fail-safe modules in Section 13.
Color coding labels
1. You can apply the color coding labels in the opening provided next to the ter-
minal directly from the strip.
2. Push the color coding labels onto the terminal module with your finger.
Looping the potentials through
Terminals 1/8, 2/9, 4/11, etc. are bridged in the terminal module and can be used
to loop the potentials through (through-connection terminals).
Power mod-
ules
Terminal modules for safety-integrated system
TM-PF30 S47 TM-X15
S27-01
-B0 1) -B1 2) -C0 1) -C1 3) -D0
PM-D F1 X X
PM-D F2 X X
PM-D F3 X X
PM-D F4 X X
PM-D F5 X
PM-X X
1) For suitable power module in subordinate, cascaded safety groups (potential subgroup).
2) For suitable power module in higher-order or standalone safety group (potential group).
3) For expansion with suitable power module in separate ET 200S stations (potential subgroup).
Table 11-1: Assignment of the terminal modules for the modules of the safety-integrated system
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So-
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 11 -7
11.2.2 Features
The following features apply only for the TM-PF30 S47 terminal modules
• TM-PF30 S47-B terminal modules for PM-D F1/F2 power modules
• TM-PF30 S47-C terminal modules for PM-D F3/F4 power modules
• TM-PF30 S47-D0 terminal modules for PM-D F5 power modules
• The terminal module consists of a support and a terminal block.
• Connection by screw-type terminals
• Start of a group of motor starters with safety-integrated system
(also see Section 11.6)
• Prewiring possible
• AUX1 cable fed through without terminals
11.2.3 Models
There are two TM-PF30 S47-B terminal-module models:
• TM-PF30 S47-B0 (can be used to the right of a B0, B1, C1)
Terminal module for potential subgroup,
sensor connection; e.g. emergency stop, protective door
(for function, see Section 11.6.3 and 11.6.6).
• TM-PF30 S47-B1 (required at the beginning of a potential group)
Terminal module for potential group,
with infeed U1, U2, sensor connection,
with terminating cover
(for function, see Section 11.6.1 through 11.6.3 and 11.6.6 through 11.6.10).
There are two TM-PF30 S47-C terminal module models:
• TM-PF30 S47-C0 (can be used to right of a B0, B1, C1)
Terminal module for potential subgroup, infeed U2
(for function, see Section 11.6.7).
• TM-PF30 S47-C1 (can be used to continue a potential group in a new row)
Terminal module for potential group, infeed U1, U2,
with terminating cover
(for function, see Section 11.6.8).
The TM-PF30 S47-D0 terminal module is suitable for:
• Connection of up to 4 external potential-free safety circuits
(for function, see Section 11.6.9).
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
11-8 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
11.2.4 View of the TM-PF30 S47 terminal modules
Figure 11-3: View of the TM-PF30 S47 terminal modules
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So-
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 11 -9
11.2.5 Terminal assignments
TM-PF30 S47-B0
TM-PF30 S47-B1
Te rm i -
nal
Meaning View Termi-
nal
Meaning
1/8 — Not used 17/24 Throughfeed
terminal,
potential-free
2/9 — Not used 22 ON ON button
3/10 — Not used 23 ON
4/11 — Not used 25 Ch 1 Channel 1 for
EMERGENCY
STOP or protec-
tive door
5/12 — Not used 26 Ch 1
6/13 OUT+ Drive for other safety
integrated devices with
24 VDC / 50 mA
27 Ch 2 Channel 2 for
EMERGENCY
STOP or protec-
tive door
7/14 OUT- 28 Ch 2
-AUX1 Fed through without ter-
minals
Table 11-2: Terminal assignment of the TM-PF30 S47-B0 terminal module
Te rm i -
nal
Meaning View Termi-
nal
Meaning
1/8 L+ U1: Supply voltage for
electronic components
URATED = 24 VDC
17/24 Throughfeed
terminal,
potential-free
2/9 M22 ON ON button
3/10 — Not used 23 ON
4/11 A1+ U2: Contactor supply
URATED = 24 V DC
25 Ch 1 Channel 1 for
EMERGENCY
STOP or protec-
tive door
5/12 A2- 26 Ch 1
6/13 OUT+ Drive for other safety
integrated devices with
24 VDC / 50 mA
27 Ch 2 Channel 2 for
EMERGENCY
STOP or protec-
tive door
7/14 OUT- 28 Ch 2
-AUX1 Fed through without ter-
minals
Table 11-3: Terminal assignment of the TM-PF30 S47-B1 terminal module
1
3
6
74
1
1
7
2
2
2
3
2
4
2
2
2
2
5
6
7
8
1
3
6
74
1
1
7
2
2
2
3
2
4
2
2
2
2
5
6
7
8
1
2
5
1
1
4
92
81
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
11-10 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
TM-PF30 S47-C0
TM-PF30 S47-C1
Terminal Meaning View Terminal Meaning
1/8 — Not used 17/24 — Not used
2/9 — Not used 22 — Not used
3/10 — Not used 23 — Not used
4/11 A1+ U2: Contactor supply
URATED = 24 V DC
25 — Not used
5/12 A2- 26 —
6/13 OUT+ Drive for other safety
integrated devices with
24 VDC / 50 mA
27 —
7/14 OUT- 28 —
-AUX1 Fed through without
terminals
Table 11-4: Terminal assignment of the TM-PF30 S47-C0 terminal module
Terminal Meaning View Terminal Meaning
1/8 L+ U1: Supply voltage for
electronic components
URATED = 24 VDC
17/24 — Not used
2/9 M22
23
RF1
RF2
Feedback loop
3/10 — Not used 25 — Not used
4/11 A1+ U2: Contactor supply
URATED = 24 V DC
26 —
5/12 A2- 27 IN+ Drive from PM-D F1
to 4 OUT+
6/13 OUT+ Drive for other safety
integrated devices with
24 VDC / 50 mA
28 IN- Drive from PM-
D F1 to 4 OUT-
7/14 OUT-
-AUX1 Fed through without ter-
minals
Table 11-5: Terminal assignment of the TM-PF30 S47-C1 terminal module
1
3
6
74
1
1
1
4
52
1
1
3
6
74
1
2
2
2
3
2
2
7
8
1
2
5
1
1
4
92
81
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So-
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 11-11
TM-PF30 S47-D0
11.2.6 Technical specifications of the TM-PF30 S47 terminal modules
Terminal Meaning View Terminal Meaning
1/8 — Not used 15/22 — Not used
2/9 — Not used 16/23 — Not used
3/10 — Not used 17/24 — Not used
4/11 OUT 1.1 Enabling circuit 1 18/25 OUT 3.1 Enabling circuit 3
5/12 OUT 1.2 19/26 OUT 3.2
6/13 OUT 2.1 Enabling circuit 2 20/27 OUT 4.1 Enabling circuit 4
7/14 OUT 2.2 21/28 OUT 4.2
-AUX1 Fed through with-
out terminals
Table 11-6: Terminal assignment of the TM-PF30 S47-D0 terminal module
Dimensions and weight
Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) 30 x 196.5 x 102
Depth with power module (mm) 117.5
Weight (g) approx. 350
Insulation voltages and rated currents
Insulation voltage 500 V
Rated operating voltage 24 VDC
Rated operating current 10 A
Conductor cross-sections
Single-core (mm2) 1 x (0.14 to 2.5)
Finely stranded with wire end ferrule
(mm2)
1 x (0.14 to 1.5) to IEC 60947
AWG cables,
single- or multi-core 1 x (18 to 22)
Wiring
Tool required Standard screwdriver, size 1
Tightening torque (Nm) 0.4 to 0.7
Table 11-7: Technical specifications of the TM-PF30 S47 terminal modules
1
3
6
74
1
1
1
4
52
1
2
7
8
2
6
2
5
2
2
0
1
2
9
1
8
1
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
11-12 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
11.2.7 TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module
Features
• TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module for PM-X connection module
• The terminal module consists of a support and a terminal block.
• Termination of a group of motor starters with safety-integrated system for
connection of an external infeed contactor with auxiliary contact and
switched supply voltage (also see Section 11.6.1)
• Connection of a group of motor starters with safety-integrated system to an
external safety combination; only in conjunction with TM-P15 S27-01
(also see Section 11.6.5)
• Connection by screw-type terminals
• Prewiring possible
• AUX1 cable fed through without terminals
Models
For the two applications above, only one version is required.
View of TM-X15 S27-01
Figure 11-4: TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So-
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 11-13
Terminal assignment
The following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the TM-X15 S27-01
terminal module for the PM-X connection module.
Color coding labels
1. You can apply the color coding labels in the opening provided next to the ter-
minal directly from the strip.
2. Push the color coding labels onto the terminal module with your finger.
Important
If there is no infeed contactor connected to the PM-X connection module,
jumper the feedback loop with terminals 1 and 2.
View Terminal Meaning
1
2
RF1
RF2
Connection of the auxiliary switch to
infeed contactor for monitoring the switch
position (RF = feedback loop)
6AUX2 Connect to A1+ of the infeed contactor
7
—
AUX3
AUX1
Connect to A2- of the infeed contactor
Fed through without terminals
Table 11-8: Terminal assignment of the TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module for the PM-X connection module
6
7
1
2
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
11-14 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Technical specifications - TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module
Dimensions and weight
Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) 15 x 102 x 196.5
Depth with connection module (mm) 117.5
Weight (g) approx. 175
Insulation voltages and rated currents
Insulation voltage 500 V
Rated operating voltage 24 VDC
Rated operating current 10 A
Conductor cross-sections
Single-core (mm2) 1 x (0.14 to 2.5)
Finely stranded with wire end ferrule
(mm2)
1 x (0.14 to 1.5) to IEC 60947
AWG cables,
single- or multi-core 1 x (18 to 22)
Wiring
Tool required Standard screwdriver, size 1
Tightening torque (Nm) 0.4 to 0.7
Table 11-9: Technical specifications - TM-X15 S27-01
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So-
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 11-15
11.3 Power modules PM-D F1 through F5
Features
Feature PM-D F
12345
Basic units are X X
Basic unit required for X X X
Suitable for applications up to SIL (IEC 62061) 3 3 2 3 3
Suitable for applications up to PL (DIN EN ISO 13849-1) e e d e e
Emergency stop circuit with monitored start. X
Guard door circuit with automatic start. X
Expansion with delay from 0.5 to 30 s (steplessly adjustable).
Cover for time setting takes a lead seal.
X
For integrating other ET 200S rails into an emergency stop circuit. X X
2-channel sensor polling. X X
All inputs cross-circuit-proof. X X
Two enabling circuits as normally-open contacts (for shutting down the motor
starters).
XXXX
Four enabling circuits as normally-open contacts (potential-free, for any use). X
One output for driving plug-in devices (max. 50 mA). X X X X
Each time the emergency stop device runs an emergency stop cycle, the switch-
ing elements of the motor starters are checked to ensure that they open and
close correctly.
XXX
Each time the guard door is actuated, the switching elements of the motor start-
ers are checked to ensure that they open and close correctly.
X
A short-circuit in the sensor circuit triggers the internal electronic fuse. The
device is again fully operational as soon as the short-circuit has been rectified.
XX
Welded contacts in the respective release circuits are detected and prevent the
device from restarting.
XX
Welded contacts in the respective circuits are detected and prevent the PM-D
F1/F2 basic device from restarting.
XXX
Two redundant internal safety relays protect the contactor supply U2 (CON). X X X X
Plug-in for TM-PF30 S47-B0 and ...-B1. X X
Plug-in for TM-PF30 S47-C0 and ...-C1. X X
Plug-in for TM-PF30 S47-D0 X
The power module conducts the voltages for supplying the electronic compo-
nents to the voltage buses of the terminal modules. It does this for all the motor
starters in a potential group.
XXXX
Monitoring of the U1 (PWR) and U2 (CON) voltages (U2 not in the case of PM-
D F5). Voltage failures are displayed and reported.
XXXXX
Table 11-10: Features of the safety-integrated system of PM-D F1 to F5 power modules
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
11-16 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Caution
Power modules may not be inserted or removed during operation.
Only potential-free contacts may be connected to:
- the ON-circuit (terminals 22/23)
- the sensor circuits (terminals 25/26 and 27/28)
- the feedback loop.
Views
Figure 11-5: Views of the safety-integrated system of PM-D F1 to F5 power modules
LEDs:
SF group error
PWR (power) (U1)
CON (contactor) (U2)
STAT status indicator
PM-D F1, F2, F4 power modules PM-D F3 power module
LEDs:
SF group error
PWR (power) (U1)
CON (contactor) (U2)
STAT status indicator
Delay 0.5 to 30 s
PM-D F5 power module
LEDs:
SF group error
PWR (power) (U1)
STAT status indicator for safety relay
PM-D F
SF
PWR
CON
STAT
PM-D F5
SF
PWR
STAT
3RK1903-1BF00
6
0,5
12 24
30s
PM-D F3
SF
PWR
CON
STAT
3RK1903-1BD00
for safety relay
for safety relay
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So-
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 11-17
Mechanical coding of the modules
When the module is first inserted, the terminal module is mechanically coded
(two coding elements) to ensure that, in the event of a fault, it can only be
replaced by a module with identical functions.
Note the configured structure when installing and identify the terminal modules
with the labelling strips.
11.3.1 Parameters
The following table indicates the bus parameter that can be set for the PM-D F1
to F5 power modules.
Group diagnosis:
This parameter enables diagnosis messaging
(error types are listed in Section 4.7).
Note
The "Disable group diagnosis" parameter also suppresses the display of faults
on the SF-LED.
Process and diagnostic interrupts
None
Parameters Action,
value range
Factory setting Applicability
Group diagnosis • Disable
•Enable
Disable Module
Table 11-11: Parameters for the safety-integrated system of PM-D F1 to 5 power modules
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
11-18 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
11.3.2 Electrical configuration
Block circuit diagram of the PM-D F1, F2
The circuit diagram below shows the basic configuration of the safety-
integrated system of the power modules:
• PM-D F1, emergency stop with monitored start.
• PM-D F2, protective door with automatic start.
Figure 11-6: Basic circuit diagram of the safety-integrated system of the PM-D F1, F2 power
modules with TM-PF30 S47-B1
Explanation
OUT +/- is a safe output for driving other safety-integrated devices
(e. g. PM-D F3, F4).
The procedure for commissioning is as follows:
• Connect the supply voltage U1 to the L+ and M terminals.
• Connect the supply voltage U2 to the A1+ and A2- terminals.
•PM-D F1:
The emergency stop circuits connected to the CH1 and CH2 terminals must
be closed.
•PM-D F2:
For automatic start operation, the terminals 22-23 (ON) must be bridged.
The protective door connections to the CH1 and CH2 terminals must be
closed.
The system starts up:
•PM-D F1:
As soon as the ON button at the ON terminals is activated.
Emergency stop circuits and ON button are monitored during operation for
crossover. Permanent jumpering of the ON terminals is not permissible.
•PM-D F2:
As soon as the ON terminals are closed.
The protective door connections are monitored for crossover during opera-
tion.
During the cascading of several safety modules, the overall reaction time of the
individual components should be added!
ON ON CH1 CH1 CH2 CH2
ET 200S
Bus
ϑ
L+
M
A1+
OUT +
A2-OUT -
ϑ
VA2- VA2+ AUX2 AUX3
1/8 22 23 25 26 27 28 4/11
2/9 7/14 5/12 6/13
RF
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So-
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 11-19
Block circuit diagram of the PM-D F3, F4
The following circuit diagram shows the basic configuration of the safety-inte-
grated system of the PM-D F3, F4 power modules.
Figure 11-7: Basic circuit diagram of the safety-integrated system of the PM-D F3, F4 power mod-
ules with TM-PF30 S47-C1 or C0
Explanation
IN +/- is the input for safe driving by a primary safety-integrated device (e. g.
PM-D F1 to F4).
OUT +/- is a safe output for driving other safety-integrated devices
(e. g. PM-D F3, F4).
The procedure for commissioning is as follows:
• Connect the supply voltage U1 to the L+ and M terminals 1).
• Connect the supply voltage U2 to the A1+ and A2- terminals.
• The PM-D F3/F4 power module must be integrated via the RF1 and RF2 ter-
minals into the feedback loop of the PM-D F1/F2 basic device 1).
• Connect the drive of the primary safety-integrated device (e.g. PM-D F1 to
F4) to the IN+/- terminals 1).
1) Applicable to TM-PF30 S47-C1 only.
PM-D F3 only:
• The PM-D F3 power module shuts down when the preset time has elapsed.
During the cascading of several safety modules, the overall reaction time of the
individual components should be added!
IN+
1
) IN-
1
)
ET 200S
Bus
L+
1
)
M
1
)
A1+
OUT +
A2-
OUT -
ϑ
RF
1
)
RF
1
)
VA2- VA2+ AUX2AUX3 RF
1/8 27 28 4/11 7/14 22
236/135/122/9
RF
RF
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
11-20 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Block circuit diagram for PM-D F5
The following circuit diagram shows the basic configuration of the safety-inte-
grated system of the PM-D F5 power module.
.
Figure 11-8: Block circuit diagram of the safety-integrated system of the PM-D F5 power module
Explanation
The ET 200S expansion module PM-D F5 can be used only in conjunction with a
PM-D F1 to 4. The PM-D F5 can be installed at any position between a
PM-D F1 to F4 and the associated PM-X.
The procedure for commissioning is as follows:
• The U1 and U2 supply voltages are carried by the internal wiring.
• Connect the potential-free enabling circuits to the OUT 1.1 - OUT 4.2 termi-
nals.
• The PM-D F5 power module is integrated via the internal wiring into the feed-
back circuit of the PM-D F1, F2 basic device.
A1+ A2-
ET 200S
Bus
L+
M
OUT
1.1
RF
RF
OUT
2.1
OUT
3.1
OUT
4.1
OUT
1.2
OUT
2.2
OUT
3.2
OUT
4.2
4/
11
6/
13
18/
25
20/
27
5/
12
7/
14
19/
26
21/
28
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So-
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 11-21
11.3.3 Technical specifications - PM-D F1 to F5
Dimensions and weight
Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm)
(incl. terminal module) 30 x 196.5 x 117.5
Weight (g) approx. 190
Module-specific data
Mechanical life
Electrical life
10 x 106 switching cycles
> 200,000 switching cycles at Ie
Ambient temperature 0 to 60 °C
Degree of protection IP20
Utilization category DC-13
Control times
• Minimum command duration, PM-D F1, F2
• Switch-on delay, PM-D F3 to 5
•Recovery time
- PM-D F1, F2
- PM-D F3 to 5
• Returning time:
- PM-D F1, F2, F4
- PM-D F5
- PM-D F3
Setting accuracy
200 ms
< 150 ms
< 1 s
< 50 ms
30 ms
15 ms
0.5 to 30 s (steplessly adjustable)
≤±15 % referenced to full-scale value
Voltages, currents, potentials
Control circuit U1 (PWR):
Rated control supply voltage Us
Working range DC up to 60°C
Power consumption
24 VDC
0.85 ... 1.2 x Us
2.4 W
Recommended short-circuit protection (gG)gL 2 A
Loadability of OUT+/- 24 VDC / < 50 mA (PTC fuse)
Switched auxiliary circuit U2 (CON) for PM-D F1 up to 4 or potential-free release circuits for
PM-D F5:
Rated control supply voltage Us
Working range DC up to 60°C
Rated operating current Ie
•13 to 24 VDC
Thermal continuous current Ith
24 VDC
0.85 ... 1.2 x Us
4 A 3 A, PM-D F5
5 A 3 A, PM-D F5
Recommended short-circuit protection for enabling cir-
cuits
Cartridge fuses:
NH type 3NA, DIAZED type 5SB
NEOZED type 5SE
Operating class (gG) gL 6 A
Supply of:
• Motor starters
• Electronic modules
•Ex[i] modules
yes
no
no
power input
From the backplane bus ≤10 mA
Connection
Cable length
for emergency stop and ON buttons
Conductor cross-section
max. 1000 m
2 x 1.5 mm2
Standards, approbations
BG
UL, CSA certification
yes
yes
Table 11-12: Technical specifications - PM-D F1 to 5
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
11-22 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Maximum attainable safety classes:
PM-D F 1 PM-D F 2 PM-D F 3 PM-D F 4 PM-D F 5
3RK1903-
1BA00
3RK1903-1BB00 3RK1903-
1BD00
3RK1903-1BC00 3RK1903-1BE00
SIL1) 33233
PL1) eedee
DIN EN / IEC 61508
PFHD 8.7 x 10-9 9.0 x 10-9 1.3 x 10-9 9.0 x 10-9 9.0 x 10-9
PFD( 1.6 x 10-5 1. 7 x 10 -5 2.4 x 10-6 1. 7 x 10 -5 1. 7 x 10-5
T120 20 20 20 20
HFT 11111
SFF > 99 > 99 > 99 > 99 > 99
DIN EN ISO 13849
DC > 99 > 99 > 99 > 99 > 99
Cat.1) 44344
nOP 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000
dOP 365 365 365 365 365
hOP 24 24 24 24 24
1) Max. achievable values
B10 DC13
24 V
DC13
24 V
DC13
24 V
DC13
24 V
DC13
24 V
IN
0.5 IN
0.25 IN
600.000
2.700.000
5.000.000
600.000
2.700.000
5.000.000
600.000
2.500.000
5.000.000
600.000
2.500.000
5.000.000
1.000.000
3.000.000
7.000.000
Table 11-13: Maximum attainable safety classes:
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So-
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 11-23
11.4 PM-X connection module
Features
• For connecting an external infeed contactor or other external actuators.
• For integrating into external safety circuits
View of PM-X
Figure 11-9: PM-X connection module
Technical specifications - PM-X connection module
Important
If there is no infeed contactor connected to the PM-X connection module,
jumper the feedback loop with terminals 1 and 2.
Dimensions and weight
Overall W x H x D (mm)
including terminal module 15 x 196.5 x 117.5
Weight (g) approx. 130
Voltages, currents, potentials
For information on the switched auxiliary circuit U2 at terminals 6 and 7 of the TM-
X15 S27-01, see PM-D F1 to F5.
Power draw from the backplane bus ≤10 mA
Table 11-14: Technical specifications - PM-X
LED:
SF group error
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
11-24 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
11.5 ET 200S with "local" safety-integrated system
Monitoring motor starters
The switching status of the switching elements in the motor starter is moni-
tored in that the series-connected positively driven NC contacts of the feedback
loop are connected by the terminal modules.
Figure 11-10: Circuit diagram for emergency stop circuit safety-integrated system
In order to continue using the standard and high feature motor starters, the ET
200S motor starters must be retrofitted with safety engineering.
DS1e-x and RS1e-x motor starters; high feature with installation widths of
65/130 mm already have integrated feedback loop monitoring.
Fail-safe kit 1 and 2 for standard motor starter
To ensure diagnostics for motor starters, a fail-safe kit must be used.
There are two fail-safe kits available and the components of both are listed
below:
• Fail-safe kit 1 for DS1-x direct starter; standard:
– An auxiliary switch block
– A contact holder with a connecting lead for the direct starter
– A contact carrier with two contacts for the terminal module (for infeed contactor)
– A contact carrier with three contacts for the terminal module (for feedback loop)
• Fail-safe kit 2 for RS1-x reversing starter; standard:
– Two auxiliary switch blocks
– A contact holder with a connecting lead for the reversing starter
– Two contact carriers with two contacts for the terminal module (for infeed contac-
tor)
– Two contact carriers with three contacts for the terminal module (for feedback loop)
– A connecting lead
PM-X K0
K3
K1 K2
PM-X
K0
K1 K2 K3
M M M
Q1 Q2 Q3
25
26
27
28
22
23
PM-X
L+ 1/8
M 2/9
U1
A2- 5/12
U2 A1+ 4/11
K0 K1 K2 K3
DS DS DS
2 RF2
1 RF1
AUX3 7 AUX2 6
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So-
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 11-25
Installing and wiring fail-safe kit 1
To prepare the feedback loop for the emergency stop circuit, proceed as follows
for a DS1-x direct starter; standard:
1. Insert the contact carrier for the feedback loop (3 contacts) offset slightly to
the right into the top opening in the terminal module and then slide it to the
left.
2. Seat the contact carrier for the infeed contactor (2 contacts) in the bottom
opening of the terminal module .
3. Plug the contact holder with the connecting lead into the rear of the direct
starter.
4. Route the connecting lead to the front of the direct starter as shown in the
illustration.
5. Insert the auxiliary switch block into the appropriate opening in the direct
starter.
6. Connect the connecting lead to the auxiliary switch block.
Safety notice
Make sure the auxiliary switch block properly locks into place!
Table 11-15: Installing and wiring fail-safe kit 1 - direct starter; standard
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
11-26 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Installing and wiring fail-safe kit 2
To prepare the feedback loop for the emergency stop circuit, proceed as follows
for a RS1-x reversing starter; standard:
Drawing Procedure
1Starting at the left, insert the two contact
carriers with two contacts for the infeed
contactor into the two bottom openings
of the terminal module and make sure
they are correctly latched.
2
3
Insert a light gray contact carrier with
three contacts into the top left opening
and a dark gray contact carrier with
three contacts into the top right opening
of the terminal module and make sure
they are correctly latched.
4Plug the contact holders with the con-
necting leads into the left opening in the
rear of the reversing starter.
Route the connecting leads through the
channel to the front of the reversing
starter.
Table 11-16: Installing and wiring fail-safe kit 2 - reversing starter; standard
11
2
3
4
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So-
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 11-27
Safety notice
Make sure the auxiliary switch blocks properly lock into place!
5Plug the two auxiliary switch blocks into
the appropriate openings in the reversing
starter.
6Connect the connecting leads to the aux-
iliary switch blocks.
7Connect the auxiliary switch blocks by
means of the connecting lead.
Drawing Procedure
Table 11-16: Installing and wiring fail-safe kit 2 - reversing starter; standard (Contd.)
5
6
7
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
11-28 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
11.6 Safety-integrated system configurations
In the following configurations, motor starters; standard with 45/90 mm installa-
tion widths have been used. These examples can also be used for motor start-
ers; high feature with installation widths of 65/130 mm.
Motor starters; high feature/fail-safe with installation widths of 65/130 mm are
already fitted with the fail-safe kit for the safety-integrated system. Fail-safe kits
ensure the closing operation of the feedback loop and hence error discovery in
the motor starter and the external infeed contactor.
Caution
Derating (see Section 3.4) is not taken into account in these configurations.
Safety note
The following applications are used only as a suggestion of typical circuit dia-
grams.
No liability will be accepted for the proper functioning, compliance with certifi-
cation requirements, or compatibility of the examples. Use at your own risk.
Caution
Due to the operation of star-connected three-phase motors, high EMC interfer-
ence may occur. Interference above the IEC limit values can lead to an impair-
ment of functions or failure of the electronics. In case of high EMC interfer-
ence, we recommend the use of motors with EMC protection circuits. (Excep-
tion: soft starters may not be operated with a EMC protection circuit).
11.6.1 Safety circuit with safety-integrated system combination
Explanation: It is possible to mix motor starters with and without safety engi-
neering in a substation.
To achieve SIL3 / PLe, an infeed adapter is required as a secondary shutdown
path, the auxiliary contact of which must be included in the feedback loop and
connected to the PM-X module.
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So-
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 11-29
Figure 11-11: Safety circuit with safety-integrated system combination
The components required to set up this example are as follows:
(parts list for safety local motor starter configuration only)
PM-D
TM-P15 S27-01
RSDS DS
A2 A3A1 A4
PM-D
F1
Fail-safe
IM
151
PLC
Master
Profibus-DP
PM-X
TM-PF30 S47-B1
TM-X15 S27-01
RSDS DS
Fail-safe kit 2
A5 A6 A7 A9A8
without safety-integrated system with safety engineering to SIL1 / PLc
without safety-
with safety engineering to SIL3 / PLe
1
8
L+
U1 2
9
M
11
4
A1+
U2 5
12
A2-
6
13
7
14
27
25
26
28
OUT+
OUT-
22
23
13
ON
14
EMERGENCY STOP
11
12
21
22
A5 A9
24
17
1
8
L+
U1 2
9
M
11
4
A1+
U2 5
12
A2-
6
13
7
14
AUX2
AUX3
A1
6
7
1
2
21
K1
22
K1
A1
A2
RF1
AUX2
AUX3
RF2
Q1
K1
Terminating
module
Terminating
cover
Power
switch
Infeed
contactor
No. Order number Description
1 3RK1903-1BA00 PM-D F1
1 3RK1903-1AA00 TM-PF30 S47-B1
1 3RK1903-1CB00 PM-X
1 3RK1903-1AB00 TM-X15 S27-01
1 3RT1035-1BB40 Infeed protection for maximum complement 40 A only for
SIL3 / PLe
1 3RH1921-1DA11 Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor
1 3RA1931-1BA00 DC connection module
1 3RV1031-4HA10 Power switch as line protection at maximum complement 40 A
2 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS xx in accordance with current rating
1 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed
1 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31 with power bus throughfeed
2 3RK1903-1CA00 Fail-safe kit 1
1 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA2 RS xx in accordance with current rating
1 3RK1903-0AC10 TM-RS90 S31 with power bus throughfeed
1 3RK1903-1CA01 Fail-safe kit 2
PM-D
Module
PM-D F1
PM-X
Module Module
with safety engineering to SIL3 / PLe
Motor starter configuration
Motor starter configuration
Infeed adapter
K1
integrated system
kit 1
Fail-safe
kit 1
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
11-30 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Figure 11-11: (Cont.) Safety circuit with safety-integrated system combination of PM-D F1, failsafe kits and standard
motor starter
This circuit type fulfills the requirements up to SIL3 (IEC 62061) / PLe (DIN ISO
13849-1).
M
3~
M
3~
2T1
4T2
6T3
A8
2T1
4T2
6T3
A7
Q1
K1
1L1
3L2
5L3
2T1
4T2
6T3
M
3~
A6
N
PE
N
PE
N
PE
21
22
Fail-safe Fail-safe kit 2
AA A
A
E
A
= integrated input for programming
= integrated output for programming
= line for external wiring
M
3~
M
3~
2T1
4T2
6T3
A4
2T1
4T2
6T3
A3
1L1 400V AC
1L2
1L3
1L1
3L2
5L3
2T1
4T2
6T3
M
3~
N
PE
A2
AA A
A
without safety-integrated system with safety engineering to SIL3 / PLe
E
Fault
E
E
E
Fault E
E
E
Fault
E
E
E
Fault
E
E
E
Fault
E
EE
E
Fault
E
Infeed adapter to SIL3 / PLe
Note: to SIL1 / PLc
this adapter can be omitted
kit 1 Fail-safe
kit 1
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So-
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 11-31
11.6.2 Two safety circuits with safety-integrated system
combinations
Figure 11-12: Two safety circuits with safety-integrated system combinations
PM-D
F1
IM
151
PLC
Master
Profibus-DP
PM-X
TM-PF30 S47-B1
TM-X15 S27-01
DS DS
A5 A6 A7 A8
Group 1 Group 2
PM-D
F1
Fail-safe
PM-X
TM-PF30 S47-B1
TM-X15 S27-01
DS DS
A1 A2 A3 A4
The components required to set up this example are as follows:
1
8
L+
U1 2
9
M
11
4
A1+
U2 5
12
A2-
6
13
7
14
27
25
26
28
OUT+
OUT-
22
23
13
ON
14
EMERGENCY STOP
11
12
21
22
A1
24
17
1
8
L+
U1 2
9
M
11
4
A1+
U2 5
12
A2-
6
13
7
14
27
25
26
28
OUT+
OUT-
22
23
13
ON
14
EMERGENCY STOP
11
12
21
22
A5
24
17
Group 1 Group 2
A8
6
7
1
2
21
K2
22
K2
A1
A2
RF1
AUX2
AUX3
RF2
A4
6
7
1
2
21
K1
22
K1
A1
A2
RF1
AUX2
AUX3
RF2
Q2Q1
K1
Power
switch
Infeed
contactor
Power
switch
Te rm i n a t i n g
cover
Terminating
module
No. Order number Description
3/4
2 3RK1903-1BA00 PM-D F1
2 3RK1903-1AA00 TM-PF30 S47-B1
2 3RK1903-1CB00 PM-X
2 3RK1903-1AB00 TM-X15 S27-01
2 3RT1035-1BB40 Infeed protection for maximum complement 40 A
2 3RH1921-1DA11 Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor
2 3RA1931-1BA00 DC connection module
2 3RV1031-4HA10 Power switch as line protection with
maximum complement 40 A
4 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS xx in accordance with current
rating
2 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed
2 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31 with power bus throughfeed
4 3RK1903-1CA00 Fail-safe kit 1
PM-D F1 PM-X PM-D F2 PM-X
Module Module Module Module
Safety group 2
to SIL1 / PLc
Safety group 1
to SIL3 / PLe
Short circuit
protection
Gr. 2
Infeed
adapter
Gr. 1
kit 1kit 1
Fail-safe
kit 1
Fail-safe
kit 1
Fail-safe
kit 1
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
11-32 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Figure 11-12: (Cont.) Two safety circuits with safety-integrated system combinations
This circuit type fulfills the requirements up to SIL3 / PLe in safety group 1 and
the requirement according to SIL1 / PLc in safety group 2.
The emergency stop circuits are mutually independent:
• Emergency stop circuit 1 switches only group 1.
• Emergency stop circuit 2 switches only group 2.
The second shutdown path is omitted for SIL1 / PLc.
The failsafe kit achieves an increase in diagnostic coverage (diagnostic coverage
level DC).
M
3~
2T1
4T2
6T3
A3
Q1
K1
1L1 400V AC
1L2
1L3
1L1
3L2
5L3
2T1
4T2
6T3
M
3~
N
PE
A2
21
22
Fail-safe
A A
M
3~
2T1
4T2
6T3
A7
Q2
2T1
4T2
6T3
M
3~
A6
N
PE
N
PE
A A
E
A
= integrated input for programming
= integrated output for programming
= line for external wiring
Group 1 Group 2
E
Fault E
E
E
Fault E
E
E
Fault E
E
E
Fault E
E
Safety group 2
to SIL1 / PLc
Safety group 1
to SIL3 / PLe
kit 1 Fail-safe
kit 1 Fail-safe
kit 1 Fail-safe
kit 1
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So-
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 11-33
11.6.3 Two cascaded safety circuits with safety-integrated system
combinations (potential group, potential subgroup)
Figure 11-13: Two cascaded safety circuits with safety-integrated system combinations
PM-D
F1
IM
151
PLC
Master
Profibus-DP
PM-X
TM-PF30 S47-B0
TM-X15 S27-01
DS DS
A5 A6 A7 A8
Group 1
Group 1.1
PM-D
F1
Fail-safe
PM-X
TM-PF30 S47-B1
TM-X15 S27-01
DS DS
A1 A2 A3 A4
Q1
K1
Q2
K2
K3
3TK2841
K4
3TK2830
Power
switch
Infeed
contactor
Power
switch
Infeed
contactor
Terminating
cover
Terminating
module
kit 1
Fail-safe
kit 1
Fail-safe
kit 1
Fail-safe
kit 1
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
11-34 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Figure 11-13: (Cont.) Two cascaded safety circuits with safety-integrated system combinations
Group 1
Group 1.1
A4
6
7
1
2
21
K1
22
K1
A1
A2
RF1
AUX2
AUX3
RF2
1
8
L+
U1 2
9
M
11
4
A1+
U2 5
12
A2-
6
13
7
14
27
25
26
28
OUT+
OUT-
22
23
13
ON
14
EMERGENCY STOP 1
11
12
21
22
A1
24
17
6
13
7
14
25
27
26
28
OUT+
OUT-
22
23
A5 A8
24
17
6
7
1
2
21
K2
22
K2
A1
A2
RF1
AUX2
AUX3
RF2
11
12
21
22
A1
A2
13 14
K4
23 24
33 34
43 44
51 52
A1
A2
1
K3
Y11
Y21
Y22 Y34
Y12 Y35
14
24
Y32
EMERGENCY
13
ON1.1
14
1.1
EMERGENCY STOP 1.1
EMERGENCY STOP 1
1
8
L+
U1 2
9
M
PM-D F1
Module
PM-X
Module
3TK2841
Module
3TK2830
Module
PM-D F1
Module
PM-X
Module
Group 1.1Group 1
EMERGENCY STOP signal group 1.1
STOP
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So-
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 11-35
Figure 11-13: (Cont.) Two cascaded safety circuits with safety-integrated system combinations
E
A
= integrated input for programming
= integrated output for programming
= line for external wiring
Group 1
Group 1.1
M
3~
2T1
4T2
6T3
A3
Q1
K1
1L1 400V AC
1L2
1L3
1L1
3L2
5L3
2T1
4T2
6T3
M
3~
N
PE
A2
21
22
Fail-safe
A A
M
3~
2T1
4T2
6T3
A7
Q2
K2
1L1
3L2
5L3
2T1
4T2
6T3
M
3~
A6
N
PE
N
PE
21
22
A A
E
Fault E
E
E
Fault E
E
E
Fault E
E
E
Fault E
E
The components required to set up this example are as follows:
No. Order number Description
3/4
2 3RK1903-1BA00 PM-D F1
1 3RK1903-1AA10 TM-PF30 S47-B0
1 3RK1903-1AA00 TM-PF30 S47-B1
2 3RK1903-1CB00 PM-X
2 3RK1903-1AB00 TM-X15 S27-01
2 3RT1035-1BB40 Infeed protection for maximum complement 40 A
2 3RH1921-1DA11 Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor
2 3RA1931-1BA00 DC connection module
2 3RV1031-4HA10 Power switch as line protection with
maximum complement 40 A
4 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS xx in accordance with current
rating
2 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed
2 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31 with power bus throughfeed
4 3RK1903-1CA00 Fail-safe kit 1
1 3TK2830-1CB30 Expansion module
1 3TK2841-1BB40 Safety switchgear
EMERGENCY STOP 1
EMERGENCY STOP 1.1
kit 1
Fail-safe
kit 1
Fail-safe
kit 1
Fail-safe
kit 1
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
11-36 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
To implement the cascade, the second PM-D F1 power module is plugged into
the TM-PF30 S47-B0 terminal module. Child potential groups are also wired
with a SIRIUS safety switchgear 3TK2841 and an expansion device 3TK2830.
Both additional devices are supplied from the U2 auxiliary voltage.
The circuits have to be cascaded if you use two emergency stop circuits which
respond in the manner described below:
Function:
The emergency stop 1 (potential group) switches ALL motor starters (group
shutdown).
The emergency stop 1.1 switches only motor starters A6/A7 (subgroup)
Description of group 1:
Operating "emergency stop 1" switches the PM-D F1 (A1) of motor starters A2
and A3. The safety switching device 3TK2841 (K3 via input 1) is also actuated.
This in turn controls the expansion module 3TK2830 (K4 via A1). The potential-
free contacts of module K4 activate the PM-D F module of group 1.1 (A5). This
switches off motor starters A6 and A7.
Description of group 1.1 only:
Operating the "emergency stop 1.1" command device shuts down the electronic
enabling circuit of K3 (terminal 14) and thus deenergizes the expansion module
K4 (terminal A1). As a result, the potential-free enabling circuits are opened and
the inputs to the PM-D F1 module (A5) are disconnected => emergency stop
group 1.1
Reclosing group 1:
by operating the ON 1 button, the PM-D F1 module (A1) is reclosed. Safety
switching device 3TK2841 (module K3) is supplied with voltage permanently via
terminal A1.
As safety switching device 3TK2841 is wired to "automatic start" via terminal
Y32, the electronic output from K3 (terminal 14) is set as soon as the cascade
input of module K3 is active again.
The reclosing conditions for the PM-D F1 module (A5) are thus met. After
acknowledgment at the ON 1.1 command device, the system is once more
ready.
Reclosing group 1.1
Precondition: EMERGENCY STOP 1.1 unlocked and only group 1.1 safety-inte-
grated system has been shut down.
After acknowledgment at the ON 1.1 command device, the PM-D F1 module is
released.
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So-
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 11-37
11.6.4 Safety circuit with an external safety-integrated system combination
3TK2824
Figure 11-14: Safety circuit with an external safety-integrated system combination 3TK2824 PL c
Fail-safe
IM
151
PLC
Master
Profibus-DP
PM-X
TM-X15 S27-01
RSDS DS
Fail-safe kit 2
A3 A4 A6A5
PM-X
TM-X15 S27-01
PM-D
TM-P15 S27-01
A1 A2 K1
3TK2824
A1
L+
U1
A2
M
13
A1+
U2 23
A2-
Y1
Y2
14
24
EMERGENCY STOP
11
12
K1 A2
1
8
L+
U1 2
9
M
11
4
A1+
U2
5
12
A2-
6
13
7
14
AUX2
AUX3
A1
6
7
1
2
RF1
AUX2
AUX3
13
ON
14
The components required to set up this example are as follows:
A6
6
7
1
2
RF1
AUX2
AUX3
RF2
RF2
PL c Order number Description
13RK1903-0BA00 PM-D
1 3RK1903-0AA00 TM-P15 S27-01
23RK1903-1CB00 PM-X
2 3RK1903-1AB00 TM-X15 S27-01
2 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS xx in accordance with current
rating
1 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed
1 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31 with power bus throughfeed
2 3RK1903-1CA00 Fail-safe kit 1
1 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA2 RS xx in accordance with current
rating
1 3RK1903-0AC10 TM-RS90 S31 with power bus throughfeed
1 3RK1903-1CA01 Fail-safe kit 2
1 3TK2824-xCB30 External safety combination
x in accordance with the connection
1) In this typical circuit diagram, PL c according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 can only be met
if a warning is issued automatically when the actuator fails or the machine control system
initiates a safe status condition. Otherwise a second disconnection path is required.
Terminating
cover
Terminating
module
kit 1
Fail-safe
kit 1
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
11-38 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Figure 11-14: (Cont.) Safety circuit with an external safety-integrated system combination 3TK2824
This configuration integrates ET 200S components into external safety con-
cepts. This circuit satisfies the requirements of PL c and employs a safety com-
bination.
The monitored motor starters connect to the right of the load feeders.
Important
Please observe the current carrying capacity of the 3TK2824!
M
3~
M
3~
2T1
4T2
6T3
A5
2T1
4T2
6T3
A4
1L1 400V AC
1L2
1L3
1L1
3L2
5L3
2T1
4T2
6T3
M
3~
N
PE
A3
N
PE
N
PE
N
PE
Fail-safe
AA A
A
E
A
= integrated input for programming
= integrated output for programming
= line for external wiring
E
Fault E
E
E
Fault E
E
E
Fault E
E
kit 1 Fail-safe
kit 1 Fail-safe
kit 2
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So-
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 11-39
11.6.5 Safety circuit with an external safety-integrated system combination
3TK2823
Figure 11-15: Safety circuit with an external safety-integrated system combination 3TK2823 PL e
Fail-safe
IM
151
PLC
Master
Profibus-DP
PM-X
TM-X15 S27-01
RSDS DS
Fail-safe kit 2
A3 A4 A6A5
PM-X
TM-X15 S27-01
PM-D
TM-P15 S27-01
A1 A2 K2
3TK2823
A1
L+
U1 A2
M
13
A1+
U2 23
A2-
Y33
Y34
Y11
Y21
Y22
Y12
14
24
EMERGENCY STOP
11
12
21
22
K2 A2
1
8
L+
U1 2
9
M
11
4
A1+
U2
5
12
A2-
6
13
7
14
AUX2
AUX3
A1
6
7
1
2
RF1
AUX2
AUX3
13
ON
14
The components required to set up this example are as follows:
A6
6
7
1
2
21
K1
22
K1
A1
A2
RF1
AUX2
AUX3
RF2
RF2
Q1
K1
PL Order number Description
bc
1) d/e
1 1 1 3RK1903-0BA00 PM-D
1 1 1 3RK1903-0AA00 TM-P15 S27-01
2 2 3RK1903-1CB00 PM-X
22) 2 3RK1903-1AB00 TM-X15 S27-01
1 3RT1035-1BB40 Infeed protection for maximum complement 40 A
1 3RH1921-1DA11 Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor
1 3RA1931-1BA00 DC connection module
1 3RV1031-4HA10 Power switch as line protection with
maximum complement 40 A
2 2 2 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS xx in accordance with current
rating
1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed
1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31 with power bus throughfeed
2 2 3RK1903-1CA00 Fail-safe kit 1
1 1 1 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA2 RS xx in accordance with current rat-
ing
1 1 1 3RK1903-1AC10 TM-RS90 S31 with power bus throughfeed
1 1 3RK1903-1CA01 Fail-safe kit 2
1 3TK2823-xCB30 External safety combination
x in accordance with the connection
1) In this typical circuit diagram, PL c according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 can only be met
if a warning is issued automatically when the actuator fails or the machine control system
initiates a safe status condition. Otherwise a second disconnection path is required.
2) With module A6, jumper between terminals 1,2.
Power
switch
Infeed
contactor
Terminating
cover
Terminating
module
kit 1
Fail-safe
kit 1
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
11-40 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Figure 11-15: (Cont.) Safety circuit with an external safety-integrated system combination 3TK2823 PL e
This configuration integrates ET 200S components into external safety con-
cepts. This circuit satisfies the requirements up to PL e and employs a safety
combination.
The monitored motor starters connect to the right of the load feeders.
Important
Please observe the current carrying capacity of the 3TK2823!
M
3~
M
3~
2T1
4T2
6T3
A5
2T1
4T2
6T3
A4
Q1
K1
1L1 400V AC
1L2
1L3
1L1
3L2
5L3
2T1
4T2
6T3
M
3~
N
PE
A3
N
PE
N
PE
N
PE
21
22
Fail-safe
AA A
A
E
A
= integrated input for programming
= integrated output for programming
= line for external wiring
E
E
Fault E
E
E
Fault E
E
E
Fault E
kit 1
Fail-safe
kit 1
Fail-safe
kit 2
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So-
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 11-41
11.6.6 Emergency stop combined with protective door
Figure 11-16: Emergency stop combined with protective door
PM-D
F1
Fail-safe
IM
151
PLC
Master
Profibus-DP
PM-X
TM-PF30 S47-B1
TM-X15 S27-01
RSDS DS
Fail-safe kit 2
A1 A4 A5 A7A6
PM-X
TM-X15 S27-01
A2
PM-D
F2
TM-PF30 S47-B0
A3
Guard door
Q1
K1
K2
3TK2841
K3
3TK2830
1
8
L+
U1 2
9
M
11
4
A1+
U2 5
12
A2-
6
13
7
14
27
25
26
28
OUT+
OUT-
22
23
13
ON
14
EMERGENCY STOP
11
12
21
22
A1 A2
24
17
6
7
1
2
RF1
AUX2
AUX3
6
13
7
14
25
27
26
28
OUT+
OUT-
22
23
A3 A7
24
17
6
7
1
2
21
K1
22
K1
A1
A2
RF1
AUX2
AUX3
RF2RF2
11
12
21
22
A1
A2
13 14
K3
23 24
33 34
43 44
51 52
A1
A2
1
K2
Y11
Y21
Y22 Y34
Y12 Y35
14
24
Y32
Power
switch
Infeed
contactor
Terminating
cover
Terminating
module
kit 1
Fail-safe
kit 1
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
11-42 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Figure 11-16: (Cont.) Emergency stop combined with protective door
This configuration combines emergency stop and protective door monitoring up
to PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1.
PL Order number Description
bc
1) d/e
12) 3RK1903-0BA00 PM-D
1 3RK1903-0AA00 TM-P15 S27-01
1 1 3RK1903-1BA00 PM-D F1
1 1 3RK1903-1AA00 TM-PF30 S47-B1
1 1 3RK1903-1BB00 PM-D F2
1 1 3RK1903-1AA10 TM-PF30 S47-B0
2 2 3RK1903-1CB00 PM-X
23) 23) 3RK1903-1AB00 TM-X15 S27-01
1 3RT1035-1BB40 Infeed protection for maximum complement 40 A
1 3RH1921-1DA11 Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor
1 3RA1931-1BA00 DC connection module
1 3RV1031-4HA10 Power switch as line protection with
maximum complement 40 A
2 2 2 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS xx in accordance with current
rating
1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed
1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31 with power bus throughfeed
2 2 3RK1903-1CA00 Fail-safe kit 1
1 1 1 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA2 RS xx in accordance with current rat-
ing
1 1 1 3RK1903-0AC10 TM-RS90 S31 with power bus throughfeed
1 1 3RK1903-1CA01 Fail-safe kit 2
1 1 1 3SBx x Personnel safety switch xx design
1 1 3TK2830-1CB30 Expansion module
1 1 3TK2841-1BB40 Safety switchgear
1
)
In this typical circuit diagram, PL c according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 can only be met
if a warning is issued automatically when the actuator fails or the machine control system
initiates a safe status condition. Otherwise a second disconnection path is required.
2)
Emergency stop and protective door contacts looped in line for supply voltage U2 (A1+, A2-).
3)
Caution
With the PM-X connection module to which no infeed contactor is connected, the feedback loop should be
jumpered with terminals 1 and 2.
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So-
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 11-43
11.6.7 Emergency stop circuit with cascaded time delay
PL d or PL e
Figure 11-17: Emergency stop circuit with cascaded time delay PL d or PL e
PM-D
F3
IM
151
PLC
Master
Profibus-DP
PM-X
TM-PF30 S47-C0
TM-X15 S27-01
DS DS
A5 A6 A7 A8
PL e PL d
PM-D
F1
Fail-safe
PM-X
TM-PF30 S47-B1
TM-X15 S27-01
DS DS
A1 A2 A3 A4
STOP Cat. 1STOP Cat. 0
EMERGENCY STOP 1
1
8
L+
U1 2
9
M
11
4
A1+
U2 5
12
A2-
6
13
7
14
27
25
26
28
OUT+
OUT-
22
23
13
ON
14
EMERGENCY STOP
11
12
21
22
A1
24
17
11
4
A1+
U2 5
12
A2-
6
13
7
14
OUT+
OUT-
A5
PL e PL d
STOP Cat. 1STOP Cat. 0
EMERGENCY STOP 1
A8
6
7
1
2
21
K1
22
K2
A1
A2
RF1
AUX2
AUX3
RF2
A4
6
7
1
2
21
K2
22
K1
A1
A2
RF1
AUX2
AUX3
RF2
Q1
K1
Q2
K2
Power
switch
Infeed
contactor
Power
switch
Infeed
contactor
Terminating
cover
Terminating
module
kit 1
Fail-safe
kit 1
Fail-safe
kit 1
Fail-safe
kit 1
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
11-44 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Figure 11-17: (Cont.) Emergency stop circuit with cascaded time delay PL d or PL e
This configuration combines instantaneous (STOP category 0) and delayed
(STOP category 1) shutdown. This configuration consists of 2 potential or load
groups.
Important
The maximum attainable with delayed shutdown is PL d according to to
DIN EN ISO 13849-1.
PL Order number Description
bc
1) d/e
22) 3RK1903-0BA00 PM-D
2 3RK1903-0AA00 TM-P15 S27-01
1 1 3RK1903-1BA00 PM-D F1
1 1 3RK1903-1AA00 TM-PF30 S47-B1
3) 1 1 3RK1903-1BD00 PM-D F3
1 1 3RK1903-1AC10 TM-PF30 S47-C0
1 2 3RK1903-1CB00 PM-X
14) 25) 3RK1903-1AB00 TM-X15 S27-01
2 3RT1035-1BB40 Infeed protection for maximum complement 40
A
2 3RH1921-1DA11 Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor
2 3RA1931-1BA00 DC connection module
2 3RV1031-4HA10 Power switch as line protection with
maximum complement 40 A
4 4 4 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS xx in accordance with current rating
2 2 2 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32
with power bus infeed
2 2 2 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31
with power bus throughfeed
4 4 3RK1903-1CA00 Fail-safe kit 1
1) In this typical circuit diagram, PL c according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 can only be met
if a warning is issued automatically when the actuator fails or the machine control system initiates
a safe status condition. Otherwise a second disconnection path is required.
2) Emergency stop looped in line for supply voltage U2 (A1+, A2-).
3) Time delay with standard time relay.
4) Caution
Module A4 is not required. With PM-X connection module (A8 module) should be bridged with ter-
minals 1 and 2.
5) Attention
For the PM-X connection module with module designation A4, terminals 1
and 2 must not be bridged.
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So-
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 11-45
11.6.8 One emergency stop circuit for two or more ET 200S rails
Figure 11-18: One emergency stop circuit for two or more ET 200S rails
PM-D
F4
IM
151
PLC
Master
Profibus-DP
PM-X
TM-PF30 S47-C1
TM-X15 S27-01
DS DS
A5 A6 A7 A8
PM-D
F1
Fail-safe
PM-X
TM-PF30 S47-B1
TM-X15 S27-01
DS DS
A1 A2 A3 A4
EMERGENCY STOP 1
IM
151
Profibus-DP
1
8
L+
U1 2
9
M
11
4
A1+
U2 5
12
A2-
6
13
7
14
27
25
26
28
OUT+
OUT-
22
23 13
ON
14
EMERGENCY STOP
11
12
21
22
A1
24
17
EMERGENCY STOP 1
1
8
L+
U1 2
9
M
11
4
A1+
U2 5
12
A2-
6
13
7
14
27
28
OUT+
OUT-
22
23
RF1
IN+
A5
IN-
1
8
L+
U1 2
9
M
11
4
A1+
U2 5
12
A2-
6
13
7
14
27
28
OUT+
OUT-
22
23
RF1
IN+
IN-
additional ET 200S rails
6
7
1
2
21
K
22
K
A1
A2
RF1
AUX2
AUX3
RF2
A8
6
7
1
2
21
K2
22
K2
A1
A2
RF1
AUX2
AUX3
RF2
A4
6
7
1
2
21
K1
22
K1
A1
A2
RF1
AUX2
AUX3
RF2
Q1
K1
Q2
K2
RF2RF2
Power
switch
Infeed
contactor
Power
switch
Infeed
contactor
Te rm i n a t i n g
cover
Terminating
module
Terminating
module
Terminating
cover
kit 1
Fail-safe
kit 1
Fail-safe
kit 1
Fail-safe
kit 1
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
11-46 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Figure 11-18: (Cont.) One emergency stop circuit for two or more ET 200S rails
This configuration incorporates additional ET 200S rails into an emergency stop
circuit for PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1.
PL Order number Description
bc
1) d/e
12) 3RK1903-0BA00 PM-D
1 3RK1903-0AA00 TM-P15 S27-01
1 1 3RK1903-1BA00 PM-D F1
1 1 3RK1903-1AA00 TM-PF30 S47-B1
1 1 3RK1903-1BC00 PM-D F4
1 1 3RK1903-1AC00 TM-PF30 S47-C1
2 2 3RK1903-1CB00 PM-X
23) 2 3RK1903-1AB00 TM-X15 S27-01
2 3RT1035-1BB40 Infeed protection for maximum complement 40
A
2 3RH1921-1DA11 Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor
2 3RA1931-1BA00 DC connection module
2 3RV1031-4HA10 Power switch as line protection with
maximum complement 40 A
4 4 4 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS xx in accordance with current rating
2 2 2 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32
with power bus infeed
2 2 2 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31
with power bus throughfeed
4 4 3RK1903-1CA00 Fail-safe kit 1
1) In this typical circuit diagram, PL c according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 can only be met
if a warning is issued automatically when the actuator fails or the machine control system initiates
a safe status condition. Otherwise a second disconnection path is required.
2) Emergency stop looped in line for supply voltage U2 (A1+, A2-).
3) Caution
With the PM-X connection module to which no infeed contactor is connected, the
feedback loop should be jumpered with terminals 1 and 2.
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So-
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 11-47
11.6.9 Potential-free connection between an ET 200S safety circuit and auton-
omous safety circuits
Figure 11-19: Potential-free connection between an ET 200S safety circuit and autonomous safety circuits
Q1
K1
A5
6
7
1
2
21
K1
22
K1
A1
A2
RF1
AUX2
AUX3
RF2
PM-D
F1
Fail-safe
PM-X
TM-PF30 S47-B1
TM-X15 S27-01
DS DS
A1 A3 A4 A5
PM-D
F5
TM-PF30 S47-D0
A2
IM
151
PLC
Master
Profibus-DP
K2
3TK2822
18 19
20 21
67
5
28
26
14
4
12
11
13
25
27
1.1
2.1
3.1
4.1
1.2
2.2
3.2
4.2
A2
OUT 1
OUT 2
OUT 3
OUT 4
A1
A2
13
23
Y33
Y34
Y11
Y21
Y22
Y12
14
24
EMERGENCY STOP
11
12
21
22
K2 13
ON
14
1
8
L+
U1 2
9
M
11
4
A1+
U2 5
12
A2-
6
13
7
14
27
25
26
28
OUT+
OUT-
22
23
13
ON
14
EMERGENCY STOP
11
12
21
22
A1
24
17
Power
switch
Infeed
contactor
Terminating
cover
Terminating
module
kit 1
Fail-safe
kit 1
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
11-48 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Figure 11-19: (Cont.) Potential-free connection between an ET 200S safety circuit and autonomous safety circuits
This configuration shows how external safety components can be incorporated
into the ET 200S safety concept.
Note
4 potential-free contacts are available on each PM-D F5.
Several PM-D F5s can be plugged in.
PL Order number Description
bc
1) d/e
22) 3RK1903-0BA00 PM-D
2 3RK1903-0AA00 TM-P15 S27-01
1 1 3RK1903-1BA00 PM-D F1
1 1 3RK1903-1AA00 TM-PF30 S47-B1
1 1 3RK1903-1BE00 PM-D F5
1 1 3RK1903-1AD10 TM-PF30 S47-D0
1 1 3RK1903-1CB00 PM-X
13) 1 3RK1903-1AB00 TM-X15 S27-01
1 1 3TK2822-xCB30 External safety combination
x in accordance with the connection
1 3RT1035-1BB40 Infeed protection for maximum complement 40
A
1 3RH1921-1DA11 Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor
1 3RA1931-1BA00 DC connection module
1 3RV1031-4HA10 Power switch as line protection with
maximum complement 40 A
2 2 2 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS xx in accordance with current rating
1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32
with power bus infeed
1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31
with power bus throughfeed
2 2 3RK1903-1CA00 Fail-safe kit 1
1) In this typical circuit diagram, PL c according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 can only be met
if a warning is issued automatically when the actuator fails or the machine control system initiates
a safe status condition. Otherwise a second disconnection path is required.
2) Emergency stop looped in line for supply voltage U2 (A1+, A2-).
3) With jumper between terminals 1 and 2.
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So-
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 11-49
11.6.10 DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature to PL e
Figure 11-20: DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature to PL e
K2
PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1
1
8
L+
U1 2
9
M
11
4
A1+
U2 5
12
A2-
6
13
7
14
27
25
26
28
OUT+
OUT-
22
23
13
ON
14
EMERGENCY STOP
11
12
21
22
A1 A4
24
17
6
7
1
2
21
K1
22
K1
A1
A2
RF1
AUX2
AUX3
21
K2
22
RF2
Q1
K1
PM-D
F1
IM
151
PLC
Master
Profibus-DP
PM-X
TM-PF30 S47-B1
TM-X15 S27-01
A1 A2 A3 A4
PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1
A5
DS1e-x DSS1e-x
RS1e-x
K2
A1
A2
For the DSS1e-x
(A5)
Power
switch
Infeed
contactor Motor con-
tactor
Terminating
cover
Terminating
module
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
11-50 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Figure 11-20: (Cont.) DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature to PL e
This configuration shows how to incorporate a DSS1e-x direct soft starter
up to PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1.
PL Order number Description
bc
1) d/e
12) 3RK1903-0BA00 PM-D
1 3RK1903-0AA00 TM-P15 S27-01
1 1 3RK1903-1BA00 PM-D F1
1 1 3RK1903-1AA00 TM-PF30 S47-B1
1 1 3RK1903-1CB00 PM-X
1 1 3RK1903-1AB00 TM-X15 S27-01
1 3RT1044-1BB40 Infeed protection for maximum complement 40 A
1 3RH1921-1DA11 Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor
1 3RA1941-1BA00 DC connection module
1 3RV1041-4HA10 Power switch as line protection with
maximum complement 40 A
1 1 1 3RK1301-0xB10-0AA2 DS1e-x x in accordance with current range
1 1 1 3RK1903-0AK00 TM-DS65 S32 with power bus infeed
1 1 1 3RK1301-0xB10-1AA2 RS1e-x x in accordance with current rating
1 1 1 3RK1903-0AL10 TM-RS130 S31 with power bus throughfeed
1 1 1 3RK1301-0xB20-0AA2 DSS1e-x x in accordance with current rating
1 1 1 3RK1903-0AK10 TM-DS65 S31 with power bus throughfeed
1 1 3RK1903-0AE00 15 mm jumper module
1 1 3RT1034-1BB44 Motor contactor
1 1 Auxiliary for motor protection
(if required)
1) In this typical circuit diagram, PL c according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 can only be met if a warning is
issued automatically when the actuator fails or the machine control system initiates a safe status con-
dition. Otherwise a second disconnection path is required.
2) Emergency stop looped in line for supply voltage U2 (A1+, A2-).
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local So-
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 11-51
11.6.11 ET 200S safety-integrated system with AS-i Safety at work
Figure 11-21: ET 200S safety-integrated system with AS-i Safety at work
PL Order number Description
bc
1) d/e
1 1 1 3RK1903-0BA00 PM-D
1 1 1 3RK1903-0AA00 TM-P15 S27-01
2 2 3RK1903-1CB00 PM-X
22) 2 3RK1903-1AB00 TM-X15 S27-01
1 3RT1035-1BB40 Infeed protection for maximum complement 40 A
1 3RH1921-1DA11 Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor
1 3RA1931-1BA00 DC connection module
1 3RV1031-4HA10 Power switch as line protection with
maximum complement 40 A
2 2 2 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS xx in accordance with current
rating
1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed
1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB10 TM-DS45 S31 with power bus throughfeed
2 2 3RK1903-1CA00 Fail-safe kit 1
1 1 1 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA2
RS xx in accordance with current rating
1 1 1 3RK1903-0AC10 TM-RS90 S31 with power bus throughfeed
1 1 3RK1903-1CA01 Fail-safe kit 2
1 1 1 3RK1105-1AE04-0CA0 AS-I Safety Monitor
1
)
In this typical circuit diagram, PL c according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 can only be met if a warning is
issued automatically when the actuator fails or the machine control system initiates a safe status condi-
tion. Otherwise a second disconnection path is required.
2)
With module A6, jumper between terminals 1 and 2.
Safety Motorstarter ET 200S Local Solution
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
11-52 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Figure 11-21: (Cont.) ET 200S safety-integrated system with AS-i Safety at work
This configuration shows how ET 200S components are incorporated into the
AS-i Safety at work concept. This circuit satisfies the requirements up to PL e
and employs an AS-i Safety Monitor.
It combines the advantages of AS-i Safety at work on the sensor side with the
advantages of the ET 200S safety-integrated system on the actuator side in a
way that makes best use of both.
Important
Observe the current carrying capacity of the AS-i Safety Monitor 3RK1105!
M
3~
M
3~
2T1
4T2
6T3
A5
2T1
4T2
6T3
A4
Q1
K1
1L1 400V AC
1L2
1L3
1L1
3L2
5L3
2T1
4T2
6T3
M
3~
N
PE
A3
N
PE
N
PE
N
PE
21
22
Fail-safe
AA A
A
E
A
= integrated input for programming
= integrated output for programming
= line for external wiring
E
E
Fault E
E
E
Fault E
E
E
Fault E
kit 1
Fail-safe
kit 1
Fail-safe
kit 2
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 12-1
Expansion modules 12
Section Subject Page
12.1 Overview of expansion modules 12-2
12.2 Terminal modules TM-xB15 S24-01 and TM-xB215 S24-01 12-3
12.2.1 Assignment of the terminal modules 12-3
12.3 Brake control modules 12-4
12.3.1 Description 12-4
12.3.2 Terminal modules TM-xB15 S24-01 and TM-xB215 S24-01 12-12
12.3.3 Signal response of xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control module and DS1-x,
DS1e-x, and F-DS1e-x motor starters
12-14
12.3.4 Signal response of the xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control module and
RS1-x, RS1e-x, F-RS1e-x motor starters
12-16
12.3.5 Externally powered brake xB1, xB3 12-18
12.3.6 Internally powered brake xB2 and xB4 12-21
12.3.7 Brake xB5, xB6 12-25
12.3.8 Installation 12-30
12.3.9 Removing the brake control module 12-32
Expansion modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
12-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
12.1 Overview of expansion modules
Expansion modules can be operated only in conjunction with direct, reversing or
soft starters of the following types:
•DS-x1
• DS1e-x
•F-DS1e-x
• DSS1e-x
•RS-x1
• RS1e-x
• F-RS1e-x
The table below lists the expansion modules currently available, complete with
their functions:
Description Function
Brake control mod-
ules
xB1 for 24 VDC/4 A brake (externally powered)
xB2 for 500 VDC/0.7 A brake (internally powered)
xB5 for brake AC 400 V/0.5 A
xB3 for brake DC 24 V/4 A (externally supplied)
also with 2 inputs 1)
(non-retentive2) / retentive3)) with diagnostics
xB4 for brake DC 500 V/0.7 A (internally supplied)
also with 2 inputs 1)
(non-retentive2) / retentive3)) with diagnostics
xB6 for brake AC 400 V/0.5 A
also with 2 inputs 1)
(non-retentive2) / retentive3))
1) Only in conjunction with DS1-x, DS1e-x, F-DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, RS1-x, RS1e-x, and F-RS1e-x
2) up to order number suffix: -.AA4
3) from order number suffix: -.AB4
Table 12-1: Overview of expansion modules
Expansion modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 12-3
12.2 Terminal modules TM-xB15 S24-01 and TM-xB215 S24-01
12.2.1 Assignment of the terminal modules
The terminal modules are necessary for the wiring of the brake control modules
xB1 to 6.
The following table shows which brake control modules you can use with the
various terminal modules.
You can find information on the terminal modules in the following sections:
•Section 6 for the PM-D power module and all motor starters
• Safety-integrated systems in Section 11
• Fail-safe modules in Section 13
Expansion modules Terminal modules
TM-xB15
S24-01
TM-xB215
S24-01
3RK1903 -0AG00 -0AG01
Brake control module xB1 X
Brake control module xB2 X
Brake control module xB3 X
Brake control module xB4 X
Brake control module xB5 X
Brake control module xB6 X
Table 12-2: Assignment of the terminal modules for expansion modules
Expansion modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
12-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
12.3 Brake control modules
12.3.1 Description
The brake control modules (xB1 to xB6) control the integrated DC spring-loaded
brake of a three-phase motor. The brake is actuated by a solenoid which holds
the brake in the off position when energized. When the circuit is deenergized
the solenoid drops out and the brake is applied by spring force, blocking the
motor.
Another possible application is the integration of external actuators such as DC
valves. This applies particularly when the actuators are functionally dependent
on the motor.
The brake control module installs on the right beside the motor starter in ques-
tion. The terminal module of the brake control module connects the brake con-
trol module to the motor starter.
The brake control module is an add-on component for ET 200S motor starters
(MS) with an expansion interface (DS1-x, DS1e-x, F-DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, RS1-x,
RS1e-x, and F-RS1e-x).
Note
The brake control modules can be used only with ET 200S motor starters with
an expansion interface (DS1-x, DS1e-x, F-DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, RS1-x, RS1e-x,
and F-RS1e-x).
Caution
The DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature may not be used for internally pow-
ered brakes (xB2, xB4). Brakes xB5 and xB6 must only be used if the 400 V AC
power supply is provided separately. (see Section 12.3.7)
Safety note
The brake control modules (xB1 to xB6) can only be used in conjunction with F-
DS1e-x and F-RS1e-x depending on the performance level (see Section 8.3 and
9.3).
Caution
For xB3, xB4, xB6:
When connecting the U1 electronic power supply which supplies the brake, a
high signal from the brake inputs may be present on an active header group for
approx. 5 ms.
Expansion modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 12-5
Modules and components
The brake control consists of the following modules:
• TM-xB15 S24-01 terminal module for xB1, xB2, xB5
• TM-xB215 S24-01 terminal module for xB3, xB4, xB6
• Brake control module (xB1 to xB6)
The components of the brake control module are illustrated below.
Figure 12-1: Brake control
Expansion modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
12-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Electronic switch
The brake control module has a single-pole electronic switch for driving a
DC/AC1) spring-loaded brake integrated into an electric motor.
Drive
The brake control module is driven via the ET 200S bus and its motor starter.
The output (DO 0.2) required for driving the brake comes from the motor starter.
Important
If a brake is not driven via output DO 0.2 of the motor starter, the motor starts
up with the brake applied and the circuit breaker/thermal motor model can be
tripped.
Latch for mechanical locking
The brake control module is accommodated in a housing 15 mm wide. The link
on the left-hand side of the brake control module (see Figure 12-1) ensures that
the brake control module can be plugged in or pulled only when its motor starter
has been pulled. This excludes the possibility of hot removal or insertion.
Coding
There is a coding element on the housing of the brake control module. This is a
mechanical means of differentiating between different modules.
1) Depending on the motor and the brake module
Expansion modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 12-7
Indicators
The brake control module comprises
• A red LED for SF, group error (xB3, xB4, xB6),
• Two green LEDs as indicators for inputs 1 and 2 (xB3, xB4, xB6)
Input 1, terminals 1 and 2, limit switch for clockwise rotation,
Input 2, terminals 5 and 6, limit switch for counterclockwise rotation,
• A yellow LED which indicates the status for output DO 0.2 of the motor
starter.
The LED is on when output DO 0.2 of the motor signal is carrying a 1 signal.
This means the electronic switch is closed and the brake is released.
For the diagnostics of xB3 and xB4, see Section 4.8.12.
Note
For xB1, xB2:
A response of the overload or short-circuit protection is not indicated if the
instantaneous signal state of the LED for output DO 0.2 is not changed as a
result.
For xB3, xB4:
The signal state of the inputs is indicated, and a response of the overload or
short-circuit protection is also indicated.
Caution
For xB3, xB4, xB6:
When connecting the U1 electronic power supply which supplies the brake, a
high signal from the brake inputs may be present on an active header group for
approx. 5 ms.
Expansion modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
12-8 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
View
Figure 12-2: Brake control modules xB1 to 6
xB1 xB2
LED: STAT
xB3 xB4
LED: SF
LED: Inputs 1, 2
xB5 xB6
xB5
DC400V/0.5A
xB6
DC400V/0.5A
xB2
DC500V/0.7A
xB3
DC24V/4A
xB1
DC24V/4A
xB4
DC500V/0.7A
3RK1903-
0CF00
3RK1903-
0CC00 3RK1903-
0CE00
3RK1903-
0CJ00
3RK1903-
0CB00
3RK1903-
0CK00
STAT
Expansion modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 12-9
Common and distinguishing features of the brake control modules
Features xB
123456
For externally powered mechanical DC spring-loaded brake X X
For mechanical AC spring-loaded brake X X
For 24 VDC/4 A X X
Supply from a separate 24 VDC auxiliary voltage X X
Brake can be released when the motor is switched off
(so that the motor can be turned by hand)
XX
For internally powered mechanical DC spring-loaded brake. 1) XX
For 500 VDC/0.7 A X X
for AC 400 V/0.5 A XX
Supply from a rectified voltage tapped from the electric motor X X
Once the motor has been switched off, the brake can no longer be
released
XX
Configurable X X X
Parameterizable X X X
Diagnostics capability X X
2 inputs
(functional scope depends on the associated motor starter)
XX X
Circuit status of the inputs shown by LEDs X X X
Circuit status of the inputs can be analyzed by PLC X X X
Diagnosis overload X X
1) Brake control modules xB2 and xB4 can also be used with an external rectifier (in the control cabinet) for an externally
powered mechanical DC spring-loaded brake.
Table 12-3: Features of the brake control modules
Expansion modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
12-10 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Parameters
The following table indicates the parameters that can be set for the xB3 and xB4
brake control modules.
Group diagnosis:
This parameter enables diagnosis messaging
(error types are listed in Section 4.7).
Note
The "Disable group diagnosis" parameter also suppresses the display of faults
on the SF-LED.
Note
The xB1 and xB2 modules are purely passive from the point of view of the
IM 151 and require no parameterization.
Parameterization of the inputs for xB3, xB4, xB6
(Only applies if high feature/failsafe motor starters are used).
The inputs of the xB3, xB4, xB6 and expansion modules can be parameterized
independently of each other for various actions via their respective motor start-
ers. Parameterization is described in:
•8.3.4 for direct starter; high feature/failsafe
•8.4.5 for direct soft starter; high feature
•9.3.4 for reversing starter; high feature/failsafe
Parameters Action,
value range
Factory setting Applicability
Diagnostics of
brake overload
• Disable
•Enable
Disable Module
Table 12-4: Parameters for brake control modules xB3, xB4
Expansion modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 12-11
Configuration with brake control module
Caution
See information on derating in Section 3.4.
The diagram below shows the layout of motor starters and brake control mod-
ules with the layout of a DM-V15 spacer module (only with standard motor start-
ers with 45/90 mm installation width):
Figure 12-3: Configuration with brake control module and spacing module
1) Only in combination with a separately protected power supply of the brake
PM-D
IM 151
DM-V15
RS1-x
xB1 ... 4
xB1 ... 4
DS1-xDS1-x
xB1, 3
RS1e-x
DS1e-x DSS1e-x
Expansion modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
12-12 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
12.3.2 Terminal modules TM-xB15 S24-01 and TM-xB215 S24-01
Features
• The terminal module consists of a support and a
terminal block.
• Terminal module TM-xB15 S24-01 for xB1, xB2
or xB5 brake control module
• Terminal module TM-xB215 S24-01 for xB3, xB4
or xB6 brake control module
• Connection by screw-type terminal
• AUX1 cable fed through without terminals
Terminal assignment
The following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the TM-xB15 S24-01
and TM-xB215 S24-01 terminal modules:
View Terminal Description Basic circuit diagram
1Input 1 L+ TM-xB215 S24-01 only
2Input 1
3Not used
5Input 2 L+
6Input 2
7Not used
4 Wiring options
8
Table 12-5: Terminal assignment of the TM-xB15 S24-01, TM-xB215 S24-01 terminal module
Support
Terminal block
48
TM-xB15 S24-01
48
26
15
TM-xB215 S24-01
RS-x1 xB3, xB4
K1
2
5
6
1
U1
Input 2
Input 1
Limit switch
cw rotation
Limit switch
ccw rotation
K2
Logic
Logic
Logic
RS1e-x xB6
=
~
M
4
8
+
-
=
~
M
4
8
+
-
P-switching
M-switching
Motor with brake Brake control
Motor with brake Brake control
Expansion modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 12-13
Technical specifications - TM-xB15 S24-01, TM-xB215 S24-01
Dimensions and weight
Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) 15 x 196.5 x 95
Depth with brake control module (mm) 117.5
Weight (g) approx. 120
Rated currents
Inputs (terminals 1 and 2, 5, and 6) - TM-xB215 S24-01 only
Brake control (terminals 4 and 8)
Conductor cross-sections
Single-core (mm2) 1 x (0.14 to 2.5) to IEC 60947
1 x 2.5
Finely stranded with wire end ferrule
(mm2)
1 x (0.14 to 1.5) to IEC 60947
AWG cables,
single- or multi-core 1 x (18 to 22)
Wiring
Tool required Standard screwdriver, size 1
Tightening torque (Nm) 0.4 to 0.7
Table 12-6: Technical specifications - TM-xB15 S24-01, TM-xB215 S24-01
Expansion modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
12-14 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
12.3.3 Signal response of xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control module and DS1-x, DS1e-x,
and F-DS1e-x motor starters
The diagram below illustrates the dependencies between the individual signals
DS1-x, DS1e-x, F-DS1e-x: Control (process image outputs) - PLC action
DO 0.0 (motor ON)
DO 0.2 (brake released)
DS1-x, DS1e-x, F-DS1e-x: Check (process image inputs) - PLC evaluation
DI 0.1 (contactor on)
xB3, xB4, xB6
Limit switch, cw rotation
Limit switch, ccw rotation
xB3, xB4, xB6: Check (process image inputs) - PLC evaluation
DI 0.0 (limit switch, cw rotation)
DI 0.1 (limit switch, ccw rotation)
xB3, xB4, xB6: Diagnostics
LED, switching output
LED, limit switch cw rotation
LED, limit switch ccw rotation
Original drive signal overridden / rendered ineffective by limit switch
Table 12-7: Signal response of xB3 and xB4 brake control modules and DS1-x, DS1e-x, and F-DS1e-x motor starters
braked
13
2Limit switch open
Rectification of fault
4
8
7
5
69
From this point, manual movement of the
drive is possible from the limit switch posi-
tion
Expansion modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 12-15
Explanation of the individual actions
1 Brake is released (DO 0.2) and motor (DO 0.0) is switched on by the application
program in the PLC.
PLC's switch-on command is drive signal for the contactor (DO 0.0).
Command to release the brake effects drive of brake enabling signal (DO 0.2).
2 Limit position is passed, so the limit switch for clockwise rotation opens (occur-
rence of fault).
When the limit switch opens the direct (no PLC intervention) result is discontin-
uation of the contactor drive signal and cancellation of brake enabling signal.
The PLC's driver signals for the currently active contactor and the brake
enabling signal become ineffective (overridden by limit switch).
The motor contactor and the brake driver signal of the DS1-x are switched off.
3 The application program in the PLC cancels the switch-on command (DO 0.0)
and optionally the brake enabling signal (DO 0.2).
4 Release the brake (DO 0.2) with the user program in the PLC. It is only possi-
ble to withdraw from the limit switch by hand with externally supplied
brakes.
5 Rectification of fault. Limit switch closes.
6 Limit switch for counterclockwise rotation is overshot. Brake enabling signal is
canceled.
7 PLC cancels brake enabling signal
8 See step 1
9 The limit switch for counterclockwise rotation recloses.
Expansion modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
12-16 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
12.3.4 Signal response of the xB3, xB4, xB6 brake control module and RS1-x,
RS1e-x, F-RS1e-x motor starters
The diagram below illustrates the dependencies between the individual signals
RS1-x, RS1e-x, F-RS1e-x: Control (process image outputs) - PLC action
DO 0.0 (cw rotation)
DO 0.1 (ccw rotation)
DO 0.2 (brake released)
RS1-x, RS1e-x, F-RS1e-x: Check (process image inputs) - PLC evaluation
DI 0.1 (contactor on)
xB3, xB4, xB6
Limit switch, cw rotation
Limit switch, ccw rotation
xB3, xB4, xB6: Check (process image inputs) - PLC evaluation
DI 0.0 (limit switch, cw rotation)
DI 0.1 (limit switch, ccw rotation)
xB3, xB4, xB6: Diagnostics
LED, switching output
LED, limit switch cw rotation
LED, limit switch ccw rotation
Original drive signal overridden / rendered ineffective by limit switch
Table 12-8: Signal response of xB3 and xB4 brake control modules and RS1-x, RS1e-x, and F-RS1e-x motor starters
braked
13- Drive for brake is again possible
2Limit switch open
Rectification of fault, e.g. by reversal of direction
4
5
Expansion modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 12-17
Explanation of the individual actions
1 The brake (DO 0.2) is released and the motor is activated (DO 0.0: clockwise
rotation) by the user program of the PLC.
PLC's switch-on command is drive signal for the contactor (DO 0.0).
Command to release the brake effects drive of brake enabling signal (DO 0.2).
2 Limit position is passed, so the limit switch for clockwise rotation opens (occur-
rence of fault).
When the limit switch opens the direct (no PLC intervention) result is discontin-
uation of the contactor drive signal.
The PLC's driver signal for the currently active contactor becomes ineffective
(overridden by limit switch).
The motor contactor (DO 0.0: clockwise rotation) of the RS1-x is deactivated.
3 The application program in the PLC cancels the switch-on command (DO 0.0)
and optionally the brake enabling signal (DO 0.2).
4 The brake (DO 0.2) is released and the direction of rotation is changed due to
the activation of the motor (DO 0.1: counterclockwise rotation) by the user pro-
gram of the PLC.
5 The limit switch for clockwise rotation recloses.
Expansion modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
12-18 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
12.3.5 Externally powered brake xB1, xB3
For the actuation of an externally powered brake, the xB1 or xB3 brake control
module is required.
Features of externally powered brake:
• Brake is released when voltage is applied.
• Brake can be released when the motor is switched off
(so that the motor can be turned by hand).
• The brake control module is a single-pole breaker in the brake's circuit.
• External 24 VDC supply required.
• Maximum switching current is 4 A.
Circuit diagram
The figure below shows, by way of example, the circuit diagram of an externally
powered DC spring-loaded brake (P-switching) with motor starter (DS1-x, DS1e-
x, F-DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, RS1-x, RS1e-x, and F-RS1e-x) and brake control module
(xB1, xB3).
Figure 12-4: Sketched circuit diagram of externally powered brake
DS-x1
DO2
24 V DC
Safe isolation
ET 200S bus
Motor starters
M
L+
Circuit diagram
RS-x1 xB3
K1
2
5
6
1
U1
Input 2
Input 1
Limit switch
cw rotation
Limit switch
ccw rotation
K2
Logic
Logic
Logic
IN1
IN2
DO2
Logic
K1
Logic
Inputs
500 V
M
4
8
(xB3 only)
xB1
xB3
DO0 DO0
DO1
DS(S)1e-x RS1e-x
F-DS1e-x F-RS1e-x
Power bus
Motor with inte-
grated DC spring-
loaded brake
Electronic switch
Expansion modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 12-19
Technical specifications for xB1 and xB3
Module-specific data
Ambient temperature operation
storage
0 to 60 °C
-40 to 80 °C
Degree of protection IP20, IEC 60529
Inputs (terminals 2 and 6) - xB3 only (non-retentive)
Input characteristic curve to IEC 1131 Type 1
Low input current Iin <1.5 mA
High input current Iin >5 mA
Max. input current max. 8 to 10 mA
Input delay tin
(underline default value)
0.1 / 0.5 / 3 / 15 ms
Sensor supply (terminals 1 and 5) short-circuit-proof and overload proof
Operating voltage range
(referenced to U1-)
20.4 to 28.8 VDC
Current limitation in the event of a
short-circuit
to U1-
approx. 1 A
Isolation
Between drive and brake circuit
Surge withstand capability
500 V AC
8 kV
Switching element of the brake control module (terminals 4 and 8)
Rated operating voltage 24 VDC
Peak voltage (periodic) <35 VDC
Continuous current 1)
Switch-on current at t <120 ms
Switch-off current DC 13, at 24 V
(with ext. induction protection)
Off-state current
≤4 A
≤8 A
≤4 A
<10 mA
Voltage drop at Iload <4 A <0.3 V
Permissible power of brake at 24 V ≤95 W
Indication by LED (yellow)
- Motor braked Brake active
- Motor unbraked Brake released
LED off
(switch open) DO 0.2 = 0
LED on
(switch closed) DO 0.2 = 1
Error message if brake not driven no
Table 12-9: Technical specifications, brake control module xB1, xB3
Expansion modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
12-20 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Protective measures
Overload protection 2)
Short-circuit protection 2)
(according to EN 60947-5-1 with 24 V/
1 kA)
Integrated current limitation
yes
Reverse polarity protection 3) no
Induction protection Internal Protective diode
External protection circuit
for inductive load 4)≤ 40 W
> 40 W
Recommended
Required
In case of a single high-energy pulse (surge) at the digital inputs according to
IEC 61000-4-5, lightning protection elements (e.g. those manufactured by Dehn:
DCO RK D 5 24 order number: 919986) are recommended (see the DP master man-
ual and the description of the SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS networks).
1) Note information on derating in Section 3.4 for installation
2)
Electronic shutdown (cannot be reactivated until output DO 0.2 of the motor starter has been switched off)
3) If polarity is reversed current flows (via protective diode parallel to switching element), the brake is released and over-
load and short-circuit protection have no effect.
4) Circuit with RC element, protective diode or varistor
Table 12-9: Technical specifications, brake control module xB1, xB3 (Contd.)
Expansion modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 12-21
12.3.6 Internally powered brake xB2 and xB4
For the actuation of an internally powered brake, the xB2 or xB4 brake control
module is required.
The brake control module is for electric motors connecting to three-phase sup-
plies with a rated voltage of 230/400 V to max. 290/500 V.
Features of internally powered brake:
• Brake is released when voltage is applied.
• Once the motor has been switched off, the brake can no longer be released.
• The brake control module is a single-pole breaker in the brake's circuit.
• The brake receives a rectified supply tapped from the motor's terminal board.
• Maximum switching current is 0.7 A.
Warning
The brake control module does not isolate the brake circuit from the power sup-
ply.
For a motor starter with low setting range, the additional asymmetrical loads on
the overcurrent tripping system caused by the brake must also be taken into
account.
Soft starters may not be used in connection with internally powered brakes.
Expansion modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
12-22 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Circuit diagram
The diagram below shows an internally powered DC spring-loaded brake with
motor starter (DS1-x, DS1e-x, F-DS1e-x, RS1-x, RS1e-x, and F-RS1e-x) and brake
control module (xB2, xB4).
Figure 12-5: Sketched circuit diagram of internally powered brake
=
~
M
+
-
Circuit diagram
DS-x1
DO2
Safe isolation
ET 200S bus
Motor starters
RS-x1 xB4
K1
2
5
6
1
U1
Input 2
Input 1
Limit switch
cw rotation
Limit switch
ccw rotation
K2
Logic
Logic
Logic
IN1
IN2
DO2
Logic
K1
Logic
Inputs
500 V
8
4
(xB4 only)
xB2
xB4
DO0 DO0
DO1
DS1e-x RS1e-x
F-DS1e-x F-RS1e-x
Power bus
Motor with inte-
grated DC spring-
loaded brake
Electronic switch
Expansion modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 12-23
Technical specifications for xB2 and xB4
Module-specific data
Ambient temperature operation
storage
0 to 60 °C
-40 to 80 °C
Degree of protection IP20, IEC 60529
Inputs (terminals 2 and 6) - xB4 only (non-retentive)
Input characteristic curve to IEC 1131 Type 1
Low input current Iin <1.5 mA
High input current Iin >5 mA
Max. input current max. 8 to 10 mA
Input delay tin
(underline default value)
0.1 / 0.5 / 3 / 15 ms
Sensor supply (terminals 1 and 5) short-circuit-proof and overload proof
Operating voltage range
(referenced to U1-)
20.4 to 28.8 VDC
Current limitation in the event of a
short-circuit
to U1-
approx. 1 A
Isolation
Between drive and brake circuit
Surge withstand capability
500 V AC
8 kV
Switching element of the brake control module (terminals 4 - 8)
Rated operating voltage 500 VDC
Peak voltage (periodic) <710 Vs
Continuous current 1)
Switch-on currentat t <120 ms
Switch-off current DC 13, at 220 Veff 2)
(with ext. induction protection)
Residual current
≤0.7 A
≤5 A
≤0.7 A
<1 mA
Voltage drop at Iload <0.7 A <1.4 V
Approved brakes (examples) with
half-wave rectification for
230 V AC equals 100 Veff, T <40 °C
400 V AC equals 170 Veff
500 V AC equals 220 Veff
≤70 W
≤100 W
≤135 W
Indication by LED (yellow)
- Motor braked Brake active
- Motor unbraked Brake released
LED off
(switch open) DO 0.2 = 0
LED on
(switch closed) DO 0.2 = 1
Error message if brake not driven no
Table 12-10: Technical specifications, brake control module xB2, xB4
Expansion modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
12-24 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Protective measures
Overload protection 3)
Short-circuit protection 3)
(according to EN 60947-5-1 with
230 V/1 kA)
Integrated current limitation
yes
Reverse polarity protection 4) no
Induction protection Internal Varistor
External protection circuit
for inductive load 5)≤ 40 W
> 40 W
Recommended
Required
In case of a single high-energy pulse (surge) at the digital inputs according to IEC
61000-4-5, lightning protection elements (e.g. those manufactured by Dehn: DCO
RK D 5 24 order number: 919986) are recommended (see the DP master manual
and the description of the SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS networks).
1) Note information on derating in Section 3.4 for installation
2) Half-wave rectification for a 500 V AC supply
3)
Electronic shutdown (cannot be reactivated until output DO 0.2 of the motor starter has been switched off)
4) Module maps short-circuit without current limitation, the brake is released and overload and short-circuit protection
have no effect.
5) Circuit with RC element or protective diode at the brake coil or varistor at brake rectifier
Table 12-10: Technical specifications, brake control module xB2, xB4 (Contd.)
Expansion modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 12-25
12.3.7 Brake xB5, xB6
For the actuation of a brake, the xB5 or xB6 brake control module is required.
The brake control module is for electric motors connecting to three-phase sup-
plies with a rated voltage of 230/400 V to max. V.
Features of externally powered brake:
• The brake is powered either by the outgoing motor side via two phases (inter-
nally powered) or separately2) (externally powered) via the 400 V AC power
supply.
• Brake is released when voltage is applied.
• With an externally powered brake, this can also be triggered if the motor is
switched off (for moving the motor by hand) 1).
• The brake control module is a single-pole breaker in the brake's circuit.
• Maximum switching current is 0.5 A.
Warning
The brake control module does not isolate the brake circuit from the power sup-
ply.
For a separate brake supply system, care should be taken to protect the cable
and device/motor brake appropriately using a fuse.
For a motor starter with low setting range, the additional asymmetrical loads on
the overcurrent tripping system caused by the brake (for internally powered
brakes) must also be taken into account.
Soft starters may not be used in connection with internally powered brakes.
1) Assuming there is a separate 2) power supply to the brake
2) Line protection and a device contactor must be fitted accordingly.
Expansion modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
12-26 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Circuit diagram
Figure 12-6 shows the circuit diagram for an spring-loaded brake with motor
starter internally powered via the motor output (DS1-x, DS1e-x, F-DS1e-x, RS1-x,
RS1e-x, F-RS1e-x) and brake control module (xB5, xB6). In Figure 12-7, this
brake is powered separately (external power supply.
Circuit diagram
Figure 12-6: Circuit diagram for brake powered internally via the motor output
M
M otor m it integr iert er
AC - Fe d er kr af tb re m s e
DS1-x
DS1e-x
F-DS1e-x
Logik
DO0
K1
Logik
RS1-x
RS1e-x
F-RS1e-x
Logik
DO0
K1
Logik
K2
DO1
Logik
Motorstarter
ET200S Bus
Energiebus
xB5
xB6
IN1
IN2
U1 Ei ngang 1
Endschal ter
Rechtslauf
Eingang 2
Endschalter
Linkslauf
Eingänge
(n ur x B 6)
Sicher e Trennung
400 V
Motor with integrated
AC spring-loaded brake
Input 2
Limit switch
ccw rotation
Input 1
Limit switch
cw rotation
Motor starters
Power bus
Inputs
(xB6 only)
Safe isolation
400 V
Logic
Logic
LogicLogic
Logic
ET200S bus
Expansion modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 12-27
Circuit diagram
Figure 12-7: Circuit diagram for brake powered via separate external supply
M
Motor mi t integrierter
AC - Federkraftbremse
DS1-x
DS1e-x
F-DS1e-x
Logik
DO0
K1
Logik
RS1-x
RS1e-x
F-RS1e-x
Logik
DO0
K1
Logik
K2
DO1
Logik
Motor starter
ET200S Bus
Energiebus
xB5
xB6
IN 1
IN2
U1 Eing ang 1
Endschalter
Rec htslauf
Eingang 2
Endschalter
Link sl auf
E i ngän ge
(n ur xB 6)
separat e abgesi c herte Spannung
AC 400 V~
Sich ere T renn ung
400 V
Motor with integrated
AC spring-loaded brake
Input 2
Limit switch
ccw rotation
Input 1
Limit switch
cw rotation
Motor starters
Power bus
Inputs
(xB6 only)
Safe isolation
400 V
Logic
Logic
Logic
Logic
Logic
Separate saved voltage
400 V AC
ET200S bus
Expansion modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
12-28 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Technical specifications for xB5, xB6
Module-specific data
Ambient temperature operation
storage
0 to 60 °C
-40 to 80 °C
Degree of protection IP20, IEC 60529
Inputs (terminals 2 and 6) - xB6 only
Input characteristic curve to IEC 1131 Type 1
Low input current Iin <1.5 mA
High input current Iin >5 mA
Max. input current max. 8 to 10 mA
Input delay
(underline default value)
tin 0.1 / 0.5 / 3 / 15 ms
Sensor supply (terminals 1 and 5) short-circuit-proof and overload proof
Operating voltage range
(referenced to U1-)
20.4 to 28.8 VDC
Current limitation in the event of a
short-circuit
to U1-
approx. 1 A
Isolation
Between drive and brake circuit
Surge withstand capability
400 V AC
4 kV
Switching element of the brake control module (terminals 4 - 8)
Brake design 400 V AC
Rated operating voltage 400 V AC
Continuous current ≤ 0.5 A
Voltage drop with continuous current 7 V
Switch-on current with t < 120 ms < 5 A
Switching capacity according to
IEC60947-5-1
- AC 15, at 400 V AC
0.4 A
Signaling via LED (yellow)
Motor braked, brake active LED off
(switch open) DO 0.2 = 0
Motor unbraked, brake tripped LED on
(switch closed) DO 0.2 = 1
Error message if brake not driven no
Table 12-11: Technical specifications for xB5, xB6 brake control module
Expansion modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 12-29
Protective measures
Shortcircuit protection, yes 1 A slow-blow fuse
Surge suppression integrated varistors
External protection circuit
for inductive load 1)≤ 40 W
> 40 W
Recommended
Required
In case of a single high-energy pulse (surge) at the digital inputs according to IEC
61000-4-5, lightning protection elements (e.g. those manufactured by Dehn: DCO
RK D 5 24 order number: 919986) are recommended (see the DP master manual
and the description of the SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS networks).
1) Circuit with RC element or protective diode at the brake coil or varistor at brake rectifier
Table 12-11: Technical specifications for xB5, xB6 brake control module (Contd.)
Expansion modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
12-30 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
12.3.8 Installation
Installing terminal module for brake control module
Drawing Procedure
1Hang the terminal module on the upper rail.
2Tilt the terminal module backwards into the
lower rail until you hear it engage.
3Push the terminal to the left with both hands
towards the module you have already installed,
keeping it straight, until you can hear it engage
with the adjacent module.
Table 12-12: Installing terminal module for brake control module
Expansion modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 12-31
Connecting the brake control module
Requirement
The terminal module for the brake
module must be installed.
Mechanical coding
When the brake control modules are
plugged in, the terminal modules are
mechanically coded to ensure that, in
the event of a fault, they can only be
replaced by brake control modules
with identical functions.
You must therefore bear the config-
ured layout in mind when you insert
the modules.
If necessary, code elements can be
removed from the terminal module
using a 3 mm screwdriver.
Figure 12-8: Mechanical coding of terminal mod-
ules
Note
If a brand-new brake control module is plugged into a terminal module that is
already coded, the part of the code element for the terminal module must be
removed from the brake control module beforehand.
Code elements
Terminal module
Brake control module
Expansion modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
12-32 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Connecting the brake control module
Connecting the motor starter
Requirement
The brake control module (xB1 to 4) has to be connected before the motor
starter (DS1-x, F-DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, RS1-x, and F-RS1e-x) is connected.
12.3.9 Removing the brake control module
The brake control module can be removed only when its motor starter has been
removed.
For the removal of the motor starters, see Section 3.7.
Drawing Procedure
4Insert the brake control module onto the
installed and prewired terminal module as
shown in the drawing.
Brake control modules can only be connected
to the correct terminal modules regardless of
the code element.
Table 12-13: Connecting the brake control module
Drawing Procedure
5Insert the motor starter onto the installed and
prewired terminal module as shown in the
drawing.
For the procedure, see Section 3.7.
Table 12-14: Connecting the motor starter
xB1 to 4
TM-xB15 S24-01
TM-xB215 S24-01
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 13-1
Fail-safe modules 13
Section Subject Page
13.1 General description 13-2
13.1.1 Overview 13-3
13.2 Terminal modules TM-PFX30 S47 and TM-FCM30-S47M30-S47 13-4
13.2.1 Assignment of the terminal modules 13-4
13.2.2 TM-PFX30 S47 terminal modules for PM-D F X1 power/expansion
module
13-5
13.2.3 Terminal module TM-FCM30-S47 for the F-CM contact replicator 13-7
13.3 PM-D F X1 power/expansion module 13-9
13.3.1 Parameters 13-10
13.3.2 Electrical configuration 13-11
13.3.3 Technical specifications - PM-D F X1 13-14
13.4 F-CM contact replicator 13-16
13.4.1 Parameters 13-17
13.4.2 Electrical configuration 13-18
13.4.3 Technical specifications - F-CM 13-21
13.5 Examples with fail-safe modules 13-23
13.5.1 Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and 4 emergency stop circuits 13-24
13.5.2 Example with the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and external
safety combinations
13-26
13.5.3 Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and several stations 13-28
13.5.4 Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and contact replicator 13-30
13.5.5 Example with PM-D F X1 power module and contact replicator 13-32
13.5.6 ET 200S fail-safe motor starter with AS-i Safety at work 13-34
13.5.7 Example with the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and external
safety combinations
13-36
13.5.8 ET 200S fail-safe motor starters and PM-D F X1 with central safety
PLC
13-38
13.5.9 Distributed selective detection of safety signals 13-40
Fail-safe modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
13-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
13.1 General description
Safety note
Fail-safe modules cannot be used in conjunction with the safety-integrated
system.
Fail-safe means: the F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x, and F-CM interrupt the main conduct-
ing path/enabling circuits if an emergency stop is requested via the mechani-
cally selected SG bus. A device error is detected and the safe state is estab-
lished.
ET 200S Motor Starter Safety - Local Solution
The ET 200S Motor Starter Safety - Local Solution is preferably used for locally
limited safety applications from the viewpoint of the safety-integrated system.
The ET 200S Motor Starter Safety - Local Solution always consists of PM-D F1
through 5 power modules, the standard or high feature motor starters, and a
PM-X connection module.
For the configuration of this safety solution, the PM-D F1 through 5 power mod-
ules are used. These modules monitor the U1 (PWR) and U2 (CON) voltages
(U2 not in the case of PM-D F5). They contain the complete function of a safety
relay. The power module conducts the voltages for the electronic supply via the
terminal modules to the motor starters of a potential group.
The standard or high feature motor starter can be used to configure a safety
solution of this kind to SIL3 in accordance with IEC 62061 / PL e in accordance
with DIN EN ISO 13849-1.
Every standard motor starter must be equipped with a fail-safe kit (F-kit) for
monitoring the switching status. In the case of the high feature motor starter,
the fail-safe kit has already been integrated.
Fail-Safe Motor Starters
The fail-safe motor starters (TÜV-certified, self-monitored, and with internally
redundant deactivation) are always used in conjunction with a fail-safe
power/expansion module PM-D F X1/power module PM-D F PROFIsafe. In con-
trast to the power modules of the ET 200S Motor Starter Safety - Local Solution,
these power modules actuate the SG1 through 6 safety groups.
The fail-safe motor starters evaluate the SG1 through 6 safety groups located in
the terminal modules.
While the PM-D F X1 is switched using external safety switchgear (AS-i Safety
Monitor or the 3TK28 safety switchgear), the PM-D F PROFIsafe is switched
using a parent fail-safe control system (F-PLC).
Fail-safe modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 13-3
13.1.1 Overview
The table below lists the fail-safe modules currently available together with the
corresponding functions:
Description Function
Power/expansion
module
PM-D F X1 ... supplies external safety devices
... loops the 6 SG buses and U1 and M through
contact replicator F-CM ... used in conjunction with a fail-safe power
module PM-D F PROFIsafe or PM-D F X1
... makes 4 floating relay contacts available
Power module PM-D F
PROFIsafe
See the "ET 200S Distributed I/O Device for
Fail-Safe Modules" manual
Fail-safe direct start-
ers
F-DS1e-x see Section 8.3.
Fail-safe reversing
starters
F-RS1e-x see Section 9.3.
Table 13-1: Overview of the fail-safe modules
Fail-safe modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
13-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
13.2 Terminal modules TM-PFX30 S47 and TM-FCM30-S47
13.2.1 Assignment of the terminal modules
Terminal modules are required for wiring the PM-D F X1 fail-safe power/expan-
sion module and the F-CM contact replicator.
The following table shows which fail-safe modules you can use with the various
terminal modules.
You can find information on the terminal modules in the following sections:
•Section 6 for the PM-D power module and all motor starters
• Safety-integrated systems in Section 11
• Expansion modules such as the brake control module, in Section 12.
Fail-safe modules Terminal modules
TM-PFX30
S47-G1
TM-FCM30
S47
TM-PFX30
S47-G0
3RK1903 -3AE00
-3AE10
-3AB10
PM-D F X1 power/expansion module X
F-CM contact replicator X
Table 13-2: Assignment of the terminal modules for fail-safe modules
Fail-safe modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 13-5
13.2.2 TM-PFX30 S47 terminal modules for PM-D F X1 power/expansion module
Features
• The terminal modules consist of a
support and a terminal block.
• TM-PFX30 S47-G0 terminal module
with infeed from the left to forward U1 and
M as well as SG1 to SG6.
• TM-PFX30 S47-G1 terminal module
without infeed from the left in order to start
a new group.
• Connection by screw-type terminal.
• Prewiring of the terminal module.
• AUX1 cable fed through without terminals.
• The fail-safe modules are identified by yel-
low labeling strips.
Color coding labels
1. You can apply the color coding labels in the opening provided next to the ter-
minal directly from the strip.
2. Push the color coding labels onto the terminal module with your finger.
Looping the potentials through
Terminals 1/8, 2/9, 6/13, 7/14, 15/22, 16/23, 18/25, 19/26, 20/27, and 21/28 are
bridged in the terminal module and can be used to loop the potentials through.
Support
Terminal block
Fail-safe modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
13-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Terminal assignment
The following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the
TM-PFX30 S47-G0/G1 terminal modules:
Technical specifications - TM-PFX30 S47
Te rm i -
nal
Meaning View Termi-
nal
Meaning
1/8 +
IN/OU
T
U1: Fused 24 VDC limited
to SIMATIC range
15/22 SG1
2/9 M
IN/OU
T
16/23 SG2
3/10 —- Not used 17/24 — Not used
4/11 — Not used 18/25 SG3
5/12 — Not used 19/26 SG4
6/13 L+ Uin: For connecting an
external power supply
unit
24 VDC SELV/PELV
20/27 SG5
7/14 M21/28 SG6
—AUX1 Fed through without ter-
minals
Table 13-3: Terminal assignment of the TM-PFX30 S47-G0/G1 terminal modules for the PM-D F X1 power module
Dimensions and weight
Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) 30 x 196.5 x 102
Depth with power module (mm) 117.5
Weight (g) approx. 375
Insulation voltages and rated currents
Insulation voltage 500 V
Rated operating voltage 24 VDC
Rated operating current 10 A
Conductor cross-sections
Single-core (mm2) 1 x (0.14 to 2.5) to IEC 60947
1 x 2.5
Finely stranded with wire end ferrule
(mm2)
1 x (0.14 to 1.5) to IEC 60947
AWG cables,
single- or multi-core 1 x (18 to 22)
Wiring
Tool required Standard screwdriver, size 1
Tightening torque (Nm) 0.4 to 0.7
Table 13-4: Technical specifications - TM-PFX30 S47
1
3
6
74
1
2
2
2
3
2
2
2
2
5
6
7
8
81
29
1
5
1
6
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
Fail-safe modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 13-7
13.2.3 Terminal module TM-FCM30-S47 for the F-CM contact replicator
Features
• The terminal module consists of a
support and a terminal block
• TM-PFX30 S47 terminal module
with throughfeed
for the F-CM contact replicator
• Connection by screw-type terminal
• Prewiring of the terminal module
• AUX1 cable fed through without terminals
• SG bus selection using the wire jumper pro-
vided
• The fail-safe modules are identified by yel-
low labeling strips.
Color coding labels
1. You can apply the color coding labels in the opening provided next to the ter-
minal directly from the strip.
2. Push the color coding labels onto the terminal module with your finger.
Terminal assignment
The following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the TM-FCM30-S47
terminal module:
Te rm i -
nal
Meaning View Termi-
nal
Meaning
1--8 SG1 15 OUT 1.1
2--9 SG2 16 OUT 1.2
3/10 — Not used 17-21,
24
— Not used
4--11 SG3 22 OUT 2.1
5--12 SG4 23 OUT 2.2
6--13 SG5 25 OUT 3.1
7--14 SG6 Jumped in the factory 26 OUT 3.2
—AUX1 Fed through without ter-
minals
27 OUT 4.1
28 OUT 4.2
Table 13-5: Terminal assignment of the TM-FCM30-S47 terminal modules for the F-CM contact replicator
Support
Terminal block
1
3
6
74
1
2
2
2
3
2
2
2
2
5
6
7
8
81
29
1
5
1
6
1
1
4
52
1
Fail-safe modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
13-8 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Technical specifications - TM-FCM30-S47
Safety note
Only one SG bus can be selected.
Dimensions and weight
Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm) 30 x 196.5 x 102
Depth with power module (mm) 117.5
Weight (g) approx. 375
Insulation voltages and rated currents
Insulation voltage 500 V
Rated operating voltage 24 VDC
Rated operating current 10 A
Conductor cross-sections
Single-core (mm2) 1 x (0.14 to 2.5) to IEC 60947
1 x 2.5
Finely stranded with wire end ferrule
(mm2)
1 x (0.14 to 1.5) to IEC 60947
AWG cables,
single- or multi-core 1 x (18 to 22)
Wiring
Tool required Standard screwdriver, size 1
Tightening torque (Nm) 0.4 to 0.7
Table 13-6: Technical specifications - TM-FCM30-S47
Fail-safe modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 13-9
13.3 PM-D F X1 power/expansion module
Features
• A new fail-safe potential group begins with the power/expansion module
together with the associated terminal module. The fail-safe motor starters/
F-CM contact replicators of a fail-safe potential group are connected to the
right of the power/expansion module.
• The PM-D F X1 has redundant overvoltage protection that trips the internal
fuse just outside the upper SIMATIC voltage limit, thus ensuring that the
entire system downstream is deenergized.
• The PM-D F X1 conducts the fused voltage (U1) for the supply to the elec-
tronic components and the safety groups SG1 to SG6 to the potential buses
of the terminal modules for all the fail-safe motor starters and F-CM contact
replicators of a fail-safe potential group.
• External safety devices can be supplied with a fused voltage U1 from the
PM-D F X1. This ensures that overvoltage cannot occur in the system (there
must be no disturbances).
• Switching through the 6 safety groups SG1 to SG6 as well as from U1 and M.
• The state of safety groups SG1 to SG6 is indicated by an LED.
• Transfer of diagnostic messages to the coordinating controller.
• The PM-D F X1 with a terminal module is a forwarding node. The fail-safe
potential group can be switched to an additional ET 200S row.
• The fail-safe modules are identified by yellow labeling strips.
Caution
Power/expansion modules must not be either inserted or removed during opera-
tion.
View
Figure 13-1: PM-D F X1 power/expansion module
LEDs:
SF group error
PWR (power) (U1)
SG1 to SG6 (safety group 1 to 6)
Fail-safe modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
13-10 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
13.3.1 Parameters
The following table describes the parameters that can be set for the PM-D F X1
power/expansion module.
Group diagnosis:
This parameter enables diagnosis messaging
(error types are listed in Section 4.7).
Note
The "Disable group diagnosis" parameter also suppresses the display of faults
on the SF-LED.
Parameters Action,
value range
Factory setting Applicability
Group diagnosis • Disable
•Enable
Disable Module
Table 13-7: Parameters for the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module
Fail-safe modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 13-11
13.3.2 Electrical configuration
Block circuit diagram for the PM-D F X1
Figure 13-2: Block circuit diagram for the PM-D F X1
Explanation
The PM-D F X1 is inserted at the start of a potential group or a new row (TM-
PFX30 S47-G1) or is inserted to loop through a potential group (TM-PFX30 S47-
G0).
You can connect voltage (Uin) to the PM-D F X1 at terminals 6/13 and 7/14.
You can feed a fused voltage of 24 VDC (U1) in and out at terminals 1/8 and 2/9.
Safety groups SG1 to SG6 can be fed in and out at terminals 15/22, 16/23,
18/25, 19/26, 20/27, and 21/28.
The PM-D F X1 module consists of the following system components:
• System components not related to safety:
- Bus connection with communication
- Diagnostic messages via the bus
- Display of switching and error states
• Safety-related system components:
- Monitoring of the U1 voltage for overvoltage
- Disconnection of the U1 voltage in the event of overvoltage (<100 ms)
15/22
SG1 SG2
16/23
SG3
18/25
ET 200S
Bus
DC 24 V M
7/14
L+
6/13
+ IN/OUT
1/8 2/9
- IN/OUT
19/26 20/27 21/28
SG4 SG5 SG6
SF
PWR
Fail-safe modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
13-12 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Laying regulations for lines
Safety note
The user must ensure that a cross-circuit between the individual safety groups
SG1 to SG6 or U1 and Uin or other cables cannot occur by complying with the
correct cable-laying rules.
Safety regulations
Safety note
If the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module is supplied via Uin, a PELV power
pack must be used that will output max. 60 VDC in the event of a fault.
For surge stability, an external protective circuit (surge filter) is required
between the load voltage supply (power pack) and the load voltage input (Uin) of
the terminal module. e.g. Blitzductor VT (order no. 918 402 from Dehn + Söhne)
Safety note
When PM-D F X1, PM-D F PROFIsafe, F-CM, F-DS1e-x, and F-RS1e-x are part of
a single potential group, they must be in the same switch cabinet. Cables for
SG1 to SG6, U1, Uin can only be laid in this switch cabinet.
Fail-safe modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 13-13
Safety note
If external safety devices (non-ET 200S, e.g. 3TK28, AS-i Safety Monitor) are
connected to the PM-D F X1, ensure that they have no effect on the potential
group, even in the event of a fault.
The external safety devices then switch U1+ (terminal 1/8) to the SG rails (emer-
gency stop signal).
An appropriate safety device should be chosen, depending on the performance
level required.
Please ensure you comply with the regulations for each safety device.
Module replacement
If a PM-D F X1 module has to be replaced, an acceptance test is not necessary.
Fail-safe modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
13-14 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
13.3.3 Technical specifications - PM-D F X1
Dimensions and weight
Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm)
(incl. terminal module) 30 x 196.5 x 117.5
Weight (g) approx. 100
Module-specific data
Ambient temperature (°C) 0 to 60
Degree of protection IP20
Maximum attainable safety classes:
• IEC 61508 SIL1)
•PL
•Cat. (DIN EN ISO 13849)
• HFT (DIN EN / IEC 61508
•nOP (DIN EN ISO 13849)
•dOP (DIN EN ISO 13849)
•hOP (DIN EN ISO 13849)
3
e
4
1
20000
365
24
Safety parameters:
•Low demand PFD
AVG (10a)
Test interval 3 mos.
• High demand/continuous mode
PFH
Test inter val 3 mos 1/h
• Proof test interval years
2.5 x 10-6
5.7 x 10-11
20
Table 13-8: Technical specifications - PM-D F X1
Fail-safe modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 13-15
Voltages, currents, potentials
Rated control supply voltage Us21.6 to 26.4 VDC up to 60 °C
Rated operating current Ie
• Internal protection through fusing
6 A
7 A (quick-response)
Recommended upstream short-circuit pro-
tection:
• Fuse gL/gG 6.3 A 1)
Supply of:
• Fail-safe motor starters
• Motor starters for safety-integrated sys-
tems
• Electronic modules
•Ex[i] modules
yes
no
no
no
Current consumption:
• From the backplane bus
•From U
1
•From SGx
≤10 mA
≤35 mA
≤15 mA
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Interrupts None
Diagnostic functions:
• Group error/device fault
• Monitoring of the supply voltage for elec-
tronic components U1 (PWR)
• Monitoring of the 6 safety groups
• Diagnostic information readable
yes
red SF LED
green PWR LED
Green LED SG1 to SG6
yes
Standards, approbations
TÜV
UL, CSA certification
yes
yes
1) The fuse must be selected such that the connected power supply unit can provide the required current to interrupt it.
Table 13-8: Technical specifications - PM-D F X1 (Contd.)
Fail-safe modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
13-16 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
13.4 F-CM contact replicator
Features
• The F-CM contact replicator closes its enabling circuits unless there is an
emergency stop on the selected SG bus.
• Redundant circuit design with two output relays with positively driven con-
tacts.
• Can be set to safety group SG1 to SG6 (default setting = SG6).
• Four separate floating enabling circuits as normally open contacts.
• At each on/off cycle of the contact replicator, the switching elements of the F-
CM are checked to ensure that they open and close correctly.
• Welded contacts in any enabling circuits are detected by the F-CM when the
enabling circuits are opened, and a reboot of the device is avoided by the pos-
itively driven operation of the contacts.
• Transfer of diagnostic messages to the coordinating controller.
• The fail-safe modules are identified by yellow labeling strips.
Caution
Contact replicators cannot be either inserted or removed during
operation.
View
Figure 13-3: F-CM contact replicator
LEDs:
SF group error
PWR (power) (U1)
STAT (status)
STAT
PWR
SF
3RK1903-3CA00
Fail-safe modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 13-17
13.4.1 Parameters
The following table indicates the parameter that can be set for the F-CM contact
replicator.
Group diagnosis:
This parameter enables diagnosis messaging
(error types are listed in Section 4.7).
Note
The "Disable group diagnosis" parameter also suppresses the display of faults
on the SF-LED.
Parameters Action,
value range
Factory setting Applicability
Group diagnosis • Disable
•Enable
Disable Module
Table 13-9: Parameters for the F-CM contact replicator
Fail-safe modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
13-18 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
13.4.2 Electrical configuration
Block diagram for the F-CM
Figure 13-4: Block diagram for the F-CM
Explanation
The F-CM contact replicator consists of the following system components:
• Non-safety-related system components:
- Bus connection with communication
- Diagnostic message via the bus
- Display of switching and error states
- Connection logic
• Safety-related system components:
- Disconnection of the enabling circuits if there is no voltage on the selected
SG bus
- Mutual interlocking of the positively driven relays
- Prevention of reclosing if there is an error in the enabling circuit
ET 200S
Bus
OUT
OUT
4.1
27
28
4.2
2.1
22
23
2.2
15
1.1
16
1.2
25
3.1
26
3.2
K1 K2
SG1 SG2 SG3
SG4 SG5 SG6
1829411
512613714 M
SF
U1
Fail-safe modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 13-19
The F-CM contact replicator can be inserted anywhere in the corresponding
potential group to the right of a fail-safe power module.
Use the wire jumper to set the desired safety group (SG1 to SG6) on the termi-
nal with the following terminals:
- 1/8 for SG1,
- 2/9 for SG2,
- 4/11 for SG3,
- 5/12 for SG4,
- 6/13 for SG5,
- 7/14 for SG6 The F-CM contact replicator is preset to safety group SG6 using
the wire jumper.
You can connect additional actuators or devices to the floating contacts with the
terminals OUT 1.1 - OUT 4.2.
Safety regulations
Safety note
Only one of the 6 SG buses can be selected with a jumper.
Safety note
Only applies in fail-safe mode (fail-safe technology)
The F-CM can only be operated in the potential group of a PM-D F PROFIsafe or
PM-D F X1 that safely limits the voltage to within the SIMATIC range.
Safety note
You must only use the F-CM contact replicator to control devices that do not
pose any direct danger to persons or the environment if suddenly disconnected.
Safety note
Cyclic test
The F-CM must be tested at commissioning and then at least every 3 to 6
months by means of an on/off cycle using the selected emergency stop bus.
Fail-safe modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
13-20 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Safety note
The enabling circuits must be appropriately protected against overloading (with
fuses, for example; see Section 13.4.3).
Please note:
If the enabling circuits are integrated into the sensor circuits of an external
safety device, overload protection might not be necessary if there is protection
in the sensor circuits of the external safety device. For more information, con-
sult the operating instructions of the external safety device.
Safety note
The F-CM is designed in such a way that in the event of an emergency stop it is
safely shut down by the selected SG bus.
In the event of a fault, a defined switch on cannot be guaranteed.
Safety note
Make sure that any potential that builds up between the control circuit of the F-
CM (U1/SGx/M) and the main conducting paths (OUT) is not greater than the
safe, functional extra-low voltage.
This can be achieved, for example, by using suitable grounding measures.
Module replacement
If you replace an F-CM module, an acceptance test is not necessary but the F-
CM must be tested (see cyclic test).
Fail-safe modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 13-21
13.4.3 Technical specifications - F-CM
Dimensions and weight
Installation dimensions W x H x D (mm)
(incl. terminal module) 30 x 196.5 x 117.5
Weight (g) approx. 190
Module-specific data
Mechanical life
Electrical life
10 x 106 switching cycles
> 200,000 switching cycles at Ie
Ambient temperature 0 to 60 °C
Degree of protection IP20
Utilization category DC-13
Control times
• On-delay
• Release time
< 80 ms (typ. 50 ms)
< 60 ms (typ. 35 ms)
Maximum attainable safety classes:
• IEC 61508 SIL
•PL
•Cat. (DIN EN ISO 13849)
3
e
4
Safety parameters:
• SFF (DIN EN / IEC 61508)
• DC (DIN EN ISO 13849)
• HFT (DIN EN / IEC 61508
•nOP (DIN EN ISO 13849)
•dOP (DIN EN ISO 13849)
•hOP (DIN EN ISO 13849)
•Low demand PFD
AVG (10a)
Test interval 3 months
Test interval 6 months
• High demand/continuous mode
PFH
Test interval 3 months 1/hr
Test interval 6 months 1/hr
• Proof test interval years
99.77 %
>99
1
1
365
24
1.8 x 10-5
3.0 x 10-5
4.0 x 10-10
6.9 x 10-10
20
•B10
D
IN
0.5 IN
0.25 IN
90.000
200.000
300.000
Table 13-10: Technical specifications - F-CM
Fail-safe modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
13-22 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Voltages, currents, potentials
Control circuit U1 (PWR):
Rated control supply voltage Us
Power consumption
21.6 to 26.4 VDC up to 60 °C
1.8 W
Floating enabling circuits
Rated operating current Ie
13 to 24 VDC
Thermal continuous current Ith
2 A
4 A
Recommended short-circuit protection
for enabling circuits
• Fuse gL/gG 6.3 A
Current consumption:
• From the backplane bus
•From U
1
•From SGx
≤10 mA
≤15 mA
≤70 mA
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Interrupts None
Diagnostic functions:
• Group error/device fault
• Monitoring of the supply voltage for elec-
tronic components U1 (PWR)
• Monitoring of the circuit state of the
enabling circuit
• Diagnostic information readable
yes
red SF LED
green PWR LED
green/red LED STAT
yes
Standards, approbations
TÜV
UL, CSA certification
yes
yes
Table 13-10: Technical specifications - F-CM (Contd.)
Fail-safe modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 13-23
13.5 Examples with fail-safe modules
Safety note
The following applications are used only as a suggestion of typical circuit dia-
grams.
No liability will be accepted for the proper functioning, compliance with certifi-
cation requirements, or compatibility of the examples. Use at your own risk.
Safety note
For PL d or PL e or SIL 2 or 3, a PELV power supply unit that provides a maxi-
mum output voltage of 60 VDC (secure functional extra-low voltage) in the
event of a fault must be used for U1 ext.
Caution
Due to the operation of star-connected three-phase motors, high EMC interfer-
ence may occur. Interference above the IEC limit values can lead to an impair-
ment of functions or failure of the electronics. In case of high EMC interfer-
ence, we recommend the use of motors with EMC protection circuits.
(Exception: soft starters may not be operated with a EMC protection circuit).
Safe functional extra-low voltage
Warning
The fail-safe modules must be operated with safe functional extra-low voltage.
That means that these modules may only be operated with maximum voltage of
60 V in the event of an error.
All system components that can deliver electrical energy in any form must fulfill
these conditions.
Every other electrical circuit (DC 24 V) utilized in the system must have a safe,
functional extra-low voltage. Please observe the appropriate data sheets or
contact the manufacturer.
Warning
All voltage sources, e.g. electronics power supply, external load power supply,
or bus power supply, must be electrically isolated from one another externally.
This is necessary so that even at low potential differentials no additive voltage
which could exceed the 60 V develops from the individual voltage sources.
Please observe the ET 200S installation guidelines to ensure that the electrical
isolation is sufficient in regard to the electrical wiring's cross-section.
Fail-safe modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
13-24 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
13.5.1 Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and 4 emergency stop circuits
Figure 13-5: Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and 4 emergency stop circuits up to PL e / SIL3
PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1
PM-D F
PROFI
IM
151-1
PLC
Master
Profibus-DP
TM-PF30 S47-F1
A2 A4 A5 A6
PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1
A7
F-DS1e-x F-DS1e-xF-RS1e-x
HF
S7-300F
safe
EM 4/8
F-DI
TM-E30 S44-A0
A3
24 VDC
F-DS1e-x
= SG2 = SG1 = SG6 = SG2
PM-E
TM-P15 S23-A0
A1
27
20
L+
U1 ext. 21
28
M
A3
2, 4, 6, 8
1
5
A2
3
7
10, 12, 14, 16
9
13
11
15
Vs1
DI1
DI3
Vs2
DI5
DI7
DI2
DI0
DI4
DI6
4 emergency stop circuits
for SG1 to SG6
6
2
L+
U1 ext. 3
7
M
A1
4
8
AUX1
2L+
1L+
L+
U2 ext. 1M
2M
M
A0
A0
Terminating
cover
Terminating
module
Fail-safe modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 13-25
Figure 13-5: (cont.) Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and 4 emergency stop circuits up to PL e / SIL3
This example illustrates the configuration with fail-safe motor starters and the
safety group set accordingly. The motor starters can be arranged in any order.
They are supplied by a PM-D F PROFIsafe 1) power module. The emergency
stop switches are connected to a fail-safe digital input module 1) supplied by a
separate PM-E power module.
The example shows the circuit for PL e / SIL3.
You can use your user program to determine which emergency stop switch
affects which safety group(s).
1) See the 'ET 200S Distributed I/O Device for Fail-Safe Modules' manual.
Fail-safe modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
13-26 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
13.5.2 Example with the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and external
safety combinations
Figure 13-6: Example with the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and external safety combinations
Safety note
A fuse for K1/K2 enabling circuits is not necessary here because the internal
fuse of the PM-D F X1 is sufficient in this instance. If other external safety
combinations are used, it might be necessary to add a fuse to the enabling cir-
cuits to prevent the occurrence of the common mode fault of contact welding of
the enabling circuits.
PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1
PM-D
F X1
IM
151-1
PLC
Master
Profibus-DP
TM-PF30 S47-G1
A2 A3 A4
PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1
A5
F-DS1e-x F-DS1e-xF-RS1e-x
S7-300
A1
F-DS1e-x
= SG2 = SG1 = SG1 = SG2
K1
3TK2822
A1
A2
13
23
Y33
Y34
Y11
Y21
Y22
Y12
14
24
K1 13
ON
14
EMERGENCY STOP
11
12
21
22
1
8
2
9
13
6
L+
U1 ext. 7
14
M
15
22
16
23
A1
18
25
19
26
20
27
21
28
SG1
SG2
SG3
SG4
SG5
SG6
A1
A2
13
23
Y33
Y34
Y11
Y21
Y22
Y12
14
24
K2 13
ON
14
EMERGENCY STOP
11
12
21
22
K2
3TK2822
2L+
1L+
L+
U2 ext. 1M
2M
M
A0
A0
L+
U2 ext.
M
L+
U2 ext.
M
Make sure the wiring is
cross-proof!
Terminating
cover
Terminating
module
Fail-safe modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 13-27
Figure 13-6: (cont.) Example with the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and external safety combinations
This example illustrates the configuration with fail-safe motor starters and the
safety group set accordingly. The motor starters can be arranged in any order.
The motor starter is supplied by a PM-D F X1 power/expansion module. The
emergency stop buttons are connected to external safety combinations that
switch the U1 voltage to the SG buses.
The example shows the circuit for PL e.
Fail-safe modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
13-28 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
13.5.3 Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and several stations
Figure 13-7: Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and several substations up to PL e / SIL3
PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1
PM-D F
PROFI
IM
151-1
PLC
Master
Profibus-DP
TM-PF30 S47-F1
A2 A5
PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1
F-DS1e-x
HF
S7-300F
safe
EM 4/8
F-DI
TM-E30 S44-A0
A3
24 VDC
= SG2
PM-E
TM-P15 S23-A0
A1
PM-D
F X1
TM-PF30 S47-G0
A4 A6
F-DS1e-x
= SG6
A8
F-DS1e-x
= SG3
PM-D
F X1
TM-PF30 S47-G1
A7 A9
F-DS1e-x
= SG2
IM
151-1
Profibus-DP
27
20
L+
U1 ext. 21
28
M
A3
2, 4, 6, 8
1
5
A2
3
7
10, 12, 14, 16
9
13
11
15
Vs1
DI1
DI3
Vs2
DI5
DI7
DI2
DI0
DI4
DI6
4 emergency stop circuits
for SG1 to SG6
6
2
L+
U1 ext. 3
7
M
A1
4
8
AUX1
1
8
2
9
13
6
7
14
15
22
16
23
A4
18
25
19
26
20
27
21
28
1
8
2
9
13
6
7
14
15
22
16
23
A7
18
25
19
26
20
27
21
28
SG1 to SG6
2L+
1L+
L+
U2 ext. 1M
2M
M
A0-0
2L+
1L+
L+
U2 ext. 1M
2M
M
A0
A0 A0-0
Terminating
cover
Terminating
module
Terminating
module
Terminating
cover
Fail-safe modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 13-29
Figure 13-7: (cont.) Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and several substations up to PL e / SIL3
This example illustrates the configuration with fail-safe motor starters and the
safety group set accordingly. The motor starters can be arranged in any order.
They are supplied by a PM-D F PROFIsafe 1) power module. The emergency
stop switches are connected to a fail-safe digital input module 1) supplied by a
separate PM-E power module.
Additional ET 200S buses are also supplied by a PM-D F X1.
The example shows the circuit for PL e / SIL3.
You can use your user program to determine which emergency stop switch
affects which safety group(s).
1) See the 'ET 200S Distributed I/O Device for Fail-Safe Modules' manual.
Fail-safe modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
13-30 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
13.5.4 Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and contact replicator
Figure 13-8: Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and contact replicator up to PL e / SIL3
PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1
PM-D F
PROFI
IM
151-1
PLC
Master
Profibus-DP
TM-PF30 S47-F1
A2 A5 A6 A7
PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1
A8
F-DS1e-x F-DS1e-xF-RS1e-x
HF
S7-300F
safe
EM 4/8
F-DI
TM-E30 S44-A0
A3
24 VDC
F-DS1e-x
= SG2 = SG1 = SG6 = SG2
PM-E
TM-P15 S23-A0
A1
F-CM
TM-FCM30 S47-E0
A4
27
20
L+
U1 ext. 21
28
M
A3
2, 4, 6, 8
1
5
A2
3
7
10, 12, 14, 16
9
13
11
15
Vs1
DI1
DI3
Vs2
DI5
DI7
DI2
DI0
DI4
DI6
4 emergency stop circuits
for SG1 to SG6
6
2
L+
U1 ext. 3
7
M
A1
4
8
AUX1
1
8
2
9
22
15
1.1
OUT 25
27
2.1
5
12
6
13
A4
7
14
16
23
26
28
SG4
SG5
SG6
SG1
SG2
SG3
4
11
OUT
1. 2
2.2
3.1 3.2
4.1 4.2
2L+
1L+
L+
U2 ext. 1M
2M
M
A0
A0
Terminating
cover
Terminating
module
Fail-safe modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 13-31
Figure 13-8: (cont.) Example with PM-D F PROFIsafe and contact replicator up to PL e / SIL3
Based on the example in 11.4.1, a contact replicator is added to this example in
order to achieve fail-safe disconnection of additional enabling circuits. You can
determine which safety group (SG) controls the contact replicator using the wire
jumper.
Safety note
Only one of the 6 SG buses can be selected with a jumper on the F-CM.
Fail-safe modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
13-32 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
13.5.5 Example with PM-D F X1 power module and contact replicator
Figure 13-9: Example with PM-D F X1 power module and contact replicator up to PL e
K1
3TK2822
K2
3TK2822
PM-D
F X1
IM
151-1
PLC
Master
Profibus-DP
TM-PF30 S47-G1
A3 A4 A5
PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1
A6
F-DS1e-x F-DS1e-xF-RS1e-x
S7-300
A1
F-DS1e-x
= SG2 = SG1 = SG1 = SG2
F-CM
TM-FCM30 S47-E0
A2
1
8
2
9
22
15
1.1
OUT 25
27
2.1
5
12
6
13
A2
7
14
16
23
26
28
SG4
SG5
SG6
SG1
SG2
SG3
4
11
OUT
1. 2
2.2
3.1 3.2
4.1 4.2
PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1
A1
A2
13
23
Y33
Y34
Y11
Y21
Y22
Y12
14
24
K1 13
ON
14
EMERGENCY STOP
11
12
21
22
1
8
2
9
13
6
L+
U1 ext. 7
14
M
15
22
16
23
A1
18
25
19
26
20
27
21
28
SG1
SG2
SG3
SG4
SG5
SG6
A1
A2
13
23
Y33
Y34
Y11
Y21
Y22
Y12
14
24
K2 13
ON
14
EMERGENCY STOP
11
12
21
22
2L+
1L+
L+
U2 ext. 1M
2M
M
A0 L+
U2 ext.
M
L+
U2 ext.
M
A0
Make sure the wiring
is cross-proof!
Terminating
cover
Terminating
module
Fail-safe modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 13-33
Figure 13-9: (cont.) Example with PM-D F X1 power module and contact replicator up to PL e
Based on the example in 11.4.2, a contact replicator is added to this example in
order to achieve fail-safe disconnection of additional enabling circuits. You can
use the wire jumper to set which of the two safety groups (SG1 or SG 2),
switched via the external safety combinations, controls the contact replicator.
Safety note
Only one of the 6 SG buses can be selected with a jumper on the F-CM.
Fail-safe modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
13-34 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
13.5.6 ET 200S fail-safe motor starter with AS-i Safety at work
Figure 13-10: Example with PM-D F X1 power module and AS-i Safety at work up to PL e / SIL3
Fail-safe modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 13-35
Figure 13-10: (cont.) Example with PM-D F X1 power module and AS-i Safety at work up to PL e / SIL3
This configuration integrates an AS-i safety monitor in an ET 200S system. The
configuration satisfies the requirements of all categories up to category 4/SIL3.
It combines the advantages of AS-i Safety at work on the sensor side with the
advantages of ET 200S on the actuator side in a way that makes best use of
both.
Safety note
To prevent a common mode fault (contact welding of the enabling circuits)
occurring with the AS-i safety monitor, add a 4 A MT fuse.
PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1
1L1 400V AC
1L2
1L3
1L1
3L2
5L3
2T1
4T2
6T3
M
3~
N
PE
A2
N
PE
A
E
Fault
U
M
3~
2T1
4T2
6T3
A3
N
PE
A A
E
Fault
U
M
3~
2T1
4T2
6T3
A4
N
PE
A
E
Fault
U
M
3~
2T1
4T2
6T3
A5
N
PE
A
E
Fault
U
E
A
= integrated input for programming
= integrated output for programming
= line for external wiring
The components required to set up this example are as follows:
PL Order number Description
up to e
1 3RK1 903-3DA00 PM-D F X1
1 3RK1 903-3AE00 TM-PFX30 S47-G1
1 3RK1 105-1BE04-0CA0 AS-I Safety Monitor
3 3RK1 301-0xB13-0AA2 F-DS1e-x x in accordance with current
range
1 3RK1 903-3AC00 TM-FDS65 S32with power bus infeed
2 3RK1 903-3AC10 TM-FDS65 S31with power bus throughfeed
1 3RK1 301-0xB13-1AA2 F-RS1e-x x in accordance with current rating
1 3RK1 903-3AD10 TM-RS130 S31 with power bus throughfeed
Fail-safe modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
13-36 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
13.5.7 Example with the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and external
safety combinations
Figure 13-11: Example with the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and external safety combinations up to PL e /
SIL3
A0
PM-D
F X1
IM
151-1
PLC
Master
Profibus-DP
TM-PF30 S47-G1
A2 A3 A4
PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1
F-DS1e-x F-DS1e-x
F-RS1e-x
S7-300
A1
= SG2 = SG1 = SG6
K1
3TK2841
K2
3TK2842
PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1
2L+
1L+
L+
U2 ext. 1M
2M
M
A0 1
8
2
9
13
6
L+
U1 ext. 7
14
M
15
22
16
23
A1
18
25
19
26
20
27
21
28
SG1
SG2
SG3
SG4
SG5
SG6
A1
A2
Y32
Y34
Y11
Y21
Y22
Y12
14
24
K1 13
ON
14
EMERGENCY STOP
11
12
21
22
1
Y35
A1
A2
Y32
Y34
Y11
Y21
Y22
Y12
14
28
K2 13
ON
14
EMERGENCY STOP
11
12
21
22
1
Y35
Make sure the wiring is cross-proof!
Terminating
cover
Terminating
module
Fail-safe modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 13-37
Figure 13-11: (cont.) Example with the PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and external safety combinations up to
PL e / SIL3
Note
The external safety combinations are also supplied by the PM-D F X1
power/expansion module.
Fail-safe modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
13-38 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
13.5.8 ET 200S fail-safe motor starters and PM-D F X1 with central safety PLC
Figure 13-12: ET 200S fail-safe motor starters and PM-D F X1 with central safety PLC
A0
PM-D
F X1
IM
151-1
PLC
Master
Profibus-DP
TM-PF30 S47-G1
A5A2 A3 A4
PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1
F-DS1e-x F-DS1e-xF-RS1e-x
S7-300
A1
= SG2 = SG1 = SG6
F-DI ET 200M
F-DO ET 200M
PLC
Master
S7-300F
DP coupler
PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1
2L+
1L+
L+
U2 ext. 1M
2M
M
A0 A5
1
8
2
9
13
6
L+
U1 ext. 7
14
M
15
22
16
23
A1
18
25
19
26
20
27
21
28
SG1
SG2
SG3
SG4
SG5
SG6
3
4
6
7
9
10
12
13
15
16
23
24
26
27
29
30
32
33
35
36
1L+
1M 2M
2L+ 3M
3L+
21 22 17 18 19 20 37 38 39 40
Terminating
cover
Terminating
module
Fail-safe modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 13-39
Figure 13-12: (cont.) ET 200S fail-safe motor starters and PM-D F X1 with central safety PLC
This example illustrates a configuration with a central safety PLC with local safe
inputs and safe outputs that shut down the motor starters safely. The link from
the safe inputs to the safe outputs is implemented in the user program on the
safety PLC.
The standard PLC is responsible for operational switching and motor control and
is thus not burdened with lengthy calculations of fail-safe links.
See also the S7-300 Programmable Controller, Fail-Safe Signal Modules manual.
Fail-safe modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
13-40 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
13.5.9 Distributed selective detection of safety signals
Figure 13-13: Distributed selective detection of safety signals
A0
PM-D F
PROFI
IM
151-1
PLC
Master
Profibus-DP
TM-PF30 S47-F1
A2 A3 A4
PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1
F-DS1e-x F-DS1e-xF-RS1e-x
S7-300F
A1
= SG2 = SG1 = SG6
A5
IM
151-1
safe
+ PROFIsafe
frame
HF HF
EM 4/8
TM-E30 S44-A0
A7
F-DI
24 VDC
PM-E
TM-P15 S23-A0
A6
PL e according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1
27
20
L+
U1 ext. 21
28
M
A1
2, 4, 6, 8
1
5
A7
3
7
10, 12, 14, 16
9
13
11
15
Vs1
DI1
DI3
Vs2
DI5
DI7
DI2
DI0
DI4
DI6
4 emergency stop circu
for SG1 to SG6
6
2
L+
U1 ext. 3
7
M
A6
4
8
AUX1
2L+
1L+
L+
U2 ext. 1M
2M
M
A0
2L+
1L+
L+
U2 ext. 1M
2M
M
A5
Terminating
cover
Terminating
module
Terminating
module
Fail-safe modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 13-41
Figure 13-13: (cont.) Distributed selective detection of safety signals
This example describes the distributed selective detection of safety signals and
the selective safe shutdown of motor starters.
The motor starters can be arranged in any order. They are supplied by a PM-
D F PROFIsafe 1) power module. The emergency stop switches/position
switches/rope-operated switches are connected to a fail-safe digital input mod-
ule 1) supplied by a separate PM-E power module.
The example shows the circuit for PL e / SIL3.
The sensors (on the fail-safe digital input module) and the actuators (power
module PM-D F PROFIsafe, fail-safe motor starter) are in different ET 200S sta-
tions.
You can use your user program to determine which emergency stop switch
affects which safety group(s).
1) See the 'ET 200S Distributed I/O Device for Fail-Safe Modules' manual.
Fail-safe modules
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
13-42 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 A-1
Data formats and data records A
Section Subject Page
A.1 Data formats A-2
A.2 Error codes A-6
A.3 Data records A-9
A.4 DS68 - Read/write process output images A-11
A.5 DS69 - Read/write process input images A-12
A.6 DS72 Read log book - device errors A-13
A.7 DS73 Read log book - trips A-14
A.8 DS75 Read log book - events A-15
A.9 DS81 Read basic (factory) setting A-17
A.10 DS92 Read device diagnostics A-17
A.11 DS93 Write command A-20
A.12 DS94 Read measurements A-21
A.13 DS95 Read statistics A-22
A.14 DS96 Read slave pointer A-23
A.15 DS 100 Read device identification A-24
A.16 DS131 Read / write device parameters A-25
A.17 DS134 Read / write maintenance A-32
A.18 DS165 Read / write comment A-32
A.19 I&M data A-33
A.19.1 DS231 Read device identification A-33
A.19.2 DS232 Read / write equipment identifier A-34
A.19.3 DS233 Read / write installation A-34
A.19.4 DS234 Read / write description A-34
Data formats and data records
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
A-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
A.1 Data formats
Features
The motor starter obtains a variety of operating, diagnostic and statistics data.
Control data are sent to the motor starter.
Control data
Data sent to the motor starter, e.g. motor ccw switching command, trip reset,
etc.
Data format: Bit
Messages
Data sent from the motor starter and that display the current operating condi-
tion, e.g. motor ccw, etc.
Data format: Bit
Diagnostics
Data sent from the motor starter and that display the current operating condi-
tion, e.g. overload fault, etc.
Data format: Bit
Data formats and data records
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 A-3
Current values
Current values are coded in different current formats, in the 6 bit current format,
in the 8 bit current format and in the 9 bit current format:
Current values are
• Motor current Imax (6 bit current format)
• Phase currents IL1 max, IL2 max, IL3 max (8 bit current format)
• Last tripping current (9 bit current format)
• Maximum tripping current (9 bit current format)
%LW6WURPIRUPDW
%LW6WURPIRUPDW
%LW6WURPIRUPDW
%LW
 ฬELV
 ฬELV
 ฬELV



    
8-bit current format
9-bit current format
6-bit current format
Data formats and data records
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
A-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Statistics data on device service life
• Operating hours
The motor starter records 2 operating hour values:
– The operating hours of the motor.
This indicates how long the motor was switched on.
– The operating hours of the equipment (motor starter).
This indicates how long the DC24V-NS supply voltage of the motor starter
was switched on.
• Number of overload trips
The motor starter counts the number of overload trips in the range from 0 to
65.535.
• Number of motor cw / ccw starts
The motor starter counts the number of starts in the range from 0 to
16,777,215.
Example: If the current in the main circuit is flowing after the "Motor ON"
command, the value is increased by 1.
• Motor current Imax.
The motor starter measures the current in all 3 phases and displays the cur-
rent of the highest loaded phas in percent [%] of the current set Ie.
Datenformat: 1 byte, 8 bit current format
Example: Current set Ie = 10 A
Motor current displayed 110 %
then corresponds to 10 A x 1.1 = 11 A
All 3 phase currents are available in data record 94
• Last tripping current
The motor starter measures the current in all 3 phases and displays the cur-
rent flowing at the time of tripping in the maximum loaded phase in percent
[%] of the current set Ie and in amperes [A]
Datenformat: 2 byte, 9 bit current format
Example: Current set Ie = 10 A
Motor current displayed 455 % then corresponds to 10 A x 4.55 = 45.5 A
Data formats and data records
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 A-5
Statistics data for slave pointer
Slave points are used for preventative diagnostics:
The maximum measurement is stored on the device.
The higher level PLC can obtain the measurement at any time.
The higher-level PLC can reset the measurement at any time.
The data below are available as slave pointer:
• Number of motor overload trips
• Operating hours motor current = 18 ... 49.9 % of Ie
• Operating hours motor current = 50 ... 89.9 % of Ie
• Operating hours motor current = 90 ... 119.9 % of Ie
• Operating hours motor current = 120 ... 1000 % of Ie
• Maximum trip current IA max (%)
• Maximum trip current IA max (eff)
• Phase current IL1 max to IL3 max. Maximum phase current as a percentage [%]
of current setting Ie and in amperes [A].
Data format: Each 1 byte, 8 bit current format.
The maximum phase current measured is saved per phase.
Data formats and data records
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
A-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
A.2 Error codes
Error codes with negative data record acknowledgement
Description
When a data record is rejected, an error code is sent with the negative acknowl-
edgement, both via the device interface and via the bus interface. This provides
information on the reason for the negative acknowledgement.
The error codes conform to the PROFIBUS-DPV1 standard assuming they apply
to the motor starter.
Evaluation via local device interface with Motor Starter ES
The error codes are evaluated by the Motor Starter ES parameterization and
diagnostics software and displayed in plain text.
More information on this can be found in the Motor Starter ES online help sys-
tem.
Evaluation via field bus
The error codes are sent in the field bus response telegram.
Data formats and data records
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 A-7
Error codes
The following error codes are generated by the motor starter:
Byte error
codes Error message Cause
high low
00 H 00
HNo faults —
Communication interface
80 HA1 HNegative acknowledgement with "Write
data record"
• Data record only readable
80 H A2
HProtocol error • Layer 2 (field bus)
• Device interface
• Incorred coordination
80 HA9 HFunction not supported • DPV1 service does not
support read / write data
record
80 H B5
HPROFIenergy data record read without
prior writing
• Invalid status
80 H CF
HIncorrect data record • Incorrect coordination with
list parameterization via
DS128
• Incorrect data record
sequence with list parame-
terization via DS128
Access to technology
80 H B0
HUnknown data record number (DS-Nr) • DS no. in motor starter not
known
80 H B1
HIncorrect data record length during writ-
ing
• DS length and specified DS
length do not match
80 H B2
HIncorrect slot number • Slot not 1 or 4
80 H B4
HIncorrect data record length during read-
ing
•DS length ≠ specified DS
length
Ask for DS with correct
length
80 H B6
HCommunication partner has declined the
data transfer
• Incorrect operating mode
(automatic, manual bus,
manual local)
• Data record is only read-
able
• Parameter change in ON
status not permissible
80 H B8
HInvalid parameter • Invalid parameter value
Data formats and data records
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
A-8 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Device resources
80 H C2
HTemporary resource lack in device • No free reception buffer
• Data record currently
being updated
• Data record job cur-
rently active on another
interface
Byte error
codes Error message Cause
high low
Data formats and data records
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 A-9
A.3 Data records
Writing / reading of data records with STEP 7
Note
Data sets can only be used for motor starters with article numbers
3RK1301-xxxxx-xAB4!
You can access the motor starter data records from the user program.
• Writing data records:
S7-DPV1 Master: By calling the SFB 53 "WR_REC" or SFC 58
S7-Master: By calling the SFC 58
• Reading data records:
S7-DPV1 Master: By calling the SFB 52 "RD_REC" or SFC 59
S7-Master: By calling the SFC 59
Note
SFC 58 and 59 cannot be used with PROFINET. These modules only function
with PROFIBUS.
For PROFINET, modules SFB 52 and 53 should be used. These also function
with PROFIBUS.
More information
Other information on the SFBs can be found
• in the reference manual "System software for S7-300 / 400, system and stan-
dard functions"
• in the STEP 7 online help
Data formats and data records
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
A-10 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Byte layouts
If data that are longer than a byte are stored, the bytes have the following lay-
outs ("big endian"):
%\WH$QRUGQXQJ 'DWHQW\S
%\WH +LJK%\WH
%\WH /RZ%\WH
%\WH +LJK%\WH
%\WH /RZ%\WH
%\WH +LJK%\WH
%\WH /RZ%\WH
%\WH
%\WH
%\WH
%\WH
+LJK:RUG
/RZ:RUG
:RUG
%\WH
'RXEOH:RUG
Data type
Byte layout
Double-word
Word
Byte
Data formats and data records
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 A-11
A.4 DS68 - Read/write process output images
Note
Note that data record 68 in automatic operating mode is overwritten by the
cyclical process image!
Byte Meaning
Header
0 Coordination 0x21 writing via C1 channel (PLC)
1Reserved
2Reserved
3Reserved
Process output images
4 Process data DO 0.0 to DO 0.7, bottom table
5 Process data DO 1.0 to DO 1.7, bottom table
6Reserved
7Reserved
Byte.
bit
Coding Process
data
Meaning Relevant
for
4.0 1 = active DO 0.0 Motor cw all
4.1 DO 0.1 Motor ccw RS1e-x
4.2 DO 0.2 Brake actuation all 1)
4.3 DO 0.3 Trip Reset all
4.4 DO 0.4 Emergency start all
4.5 DO 0.5 Self-test all
4.6 DO 0.6 ——
4.7 DO 0.7 ——
5.0 1 = active DO 1.0 ——
5.1 DO 1.1 ——
5.2 DO 1.2 ——
5.3 DO 1.3 ——
5.4 DO 1.4 ——
5.5 DO 1.5 ——
5.6 DO 1.6 ——
5.7 DO 1.7 Quick stop lock all 3)
1) Only relevant in conjunction with a brake xB1 to xB6
3) Only in conjunction with 2DI COM/2DI LC COM control module (optional)
Data formats and data records
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
A-12 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
A.5 DS69 - Read/write process input images
Byte Meaning
Process input images
0 Process data DI 0.0 to DI 0.7, bottom table
1 Process data DI 1.0 to DI 1.7, bottom table
2Reserved
3Reserved
Byte.
bit
Coding Process
data
Meaning Relevant
for
0.0 1 = active DI 0.0 Ready (automatic) all
0.1 DI 0.1 Motor on all
0.2 DI 0.2 Group error all
0.3 DI 0.3 General warning all
0.4 DI 0.4 Input 1 all 1)
0.5 DI 0.5 Input 2 all 1)
0.6 DI 0.6 Input 3 all 3)
0.7 DI 0.7 Input 4 all 3)
1.0 1 = active DI 1.0 Actual motor current Iact [%] bit 0 all
1.1 DI 1.1 Actual motor current Iact [%] bit 1 all
1.2 DI 1.2 Actual motor current Iact [%] bit 2 all
1.3 DI 1.3 Actual motor current Iact [%] bit 3 all
1.4 DI 1.4 Actual motor current Iact [%] bit 4 all
1.5 DI 1.5 Actual motor current Iact [%] bit 5 all
1.6 DI 1.6 Manual operation local all 3)
1.7 DI 1.7 Ramp operation DSS1e-x
1) Only relevant in conjunction with a brake xB6
3) Only in conjunction with 2DI COM/2DI LC COM control module (optional)
Data formats and data records
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 A-13
A.6 DS72 Read log book - device errors
This data record can take up to 21 inputs. When all positions have been
described, the oldest entry is overwritten.
Note
The most recent entry is entered at the first position in the data record. The
remaining entries are moved downwards one entry.
The following object numbers are supported:
Byte Coding Meaning Value range Increment
Net data (= technology data)
Entry 1 (= latest entry)
0 ... 3 Unsign. 32 Operating hours device 0 ... 4,294,967,295 1 s
4 ... 5 Unsign. 16 Object number 0 ... 32,767 1
Entry 2
6 ... 9 Unsign. 32 Operating hours device 0 ... 4,294,967,295 1 s
10 ... 11 Unsign. 16 Object number 0 ... 32,767 1
...
...
Entry 21
120 ... 123 Unsign. 32 Operating hours device 0 ... 4,294,967,295 1 s
124 ... 125 Unsign. 16 Object number 0 ... 32,767 1
Object no. Device error - Messages
453 Interface for current detection faulty
456 EEPROM: Memory faulty
457 EEPROM: CRC error "Fixed value parameter"
458 EEPROM: CRC error "Device parameter"
460 EEPROM: contains invalid data!
461 EEPROM: Value for "Parameterization lock CPU / master" invalid
462 EEPROM: Pointer for device parameter memory invalid
308 Switching element defective
1414 Switching element shortcircuited
Data formats and data records
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
A-14 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
A.7 DS73 Read log book - trips
This data record can take up to 21 inputs. When all positions have been
described, the oldest entry is overwritten.
Note
The most recent entry is entered at the first position in the data record. The
remaining entries are moved downwards one entry.
The following object numbers are supported:
Byte Coding Meaning Value range Increment
Net data (= technology data)
Entry 1 (= latest entry)
0 ... 3 Unsign. 32 Operating hours device 0 ... 4,294,967,295 1 s
4 ... 5 Unsign. 16 Object number 0 ... 32,767 1
Entry 2
6 ... 9 Unsign. 32 Operating hours device 0 ... 4,294,967,295 1 s
10 ... 11 Unsign. 16 Object number 0 ... 32,767 1
...
...
Entry 21
120 ... 123 Unsign. 32 Operating hours device 0 ... 4,294,967,295 1 s
124 ... 125 Unsign. 16 Object number 0 ... 32,767 1
Object no. Trips - Messages
309 Overload switching element
317 Electronics power supply too low
318 Switching element power supply missing
327 Thermal motor model overload
333 Circuit-breaker tripped
334 Ie limit value exceeded
335 Ie limit value not reached
338 Zero current shutdown
341 Asymmetry shutdown
348 Input tripping
354 Sensor supply overload
355 Process image error
365 Invalid parameter value
381 Error during self-test (= device error)
1406 Cold run shutdown
1201 Blocking protection triggered during startup
1202 Blocking protection triggered during operation
Data formats and data records
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 A-15
A.8 DS75 Read log book - events
This data record can take up to 21 inputs. When all positions have been
described, the oldest entry is overwritten.
Note
The most recent entry is entered at the first position in the data record. The
remaining entries are moved downwards one entry.
Byte Coding Meaning Value range Increment
Net data (= technology data)
Entry 1 (= latest entry)
0 ... 3 Unsign. 32 Operating hours device 0 ... 4,294,967,295 1 s
4 ... 5 Unsign. 16 Object number ± 0 ... 32,767 1
Entry 2
6 ... 9 Unsign. 32 Operating hours device 0 ... 4,294,967,295 1 s
10 ... 11 Unsign. 16 Object number ± 0 ... 32,767 1
...
...
Entry 21
120 ... 123 Unsign. 32 Operating hours device 0 ... 4,294,967,295 1 s
124 ... 125 Unsign. 16 Object number ± 0 ... 32,767 1
Data formats and data records
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
A-16 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
The following object numbers are supported:
Object no. Event - Messages
Advance warnings
1419 ± prewarning limit - time-based trigger reserve not reached
1420 ± prewarning limit - motor heating exceeded
1457 ± maintenance required
Warnings
327 ± Thermal motor model overload
333 ± Power switch triggered
334 ± Ie limit value not reached
335 ± Ie limit value exceeded
337 ± Zero curernt detected
340 ± Asymmetry detected
351 ± Warning input
318 ± Switching element power supply missing
1458 ± Maintenance required
Actions
310 ± Emergency start active
357 Automatic operating mode
358 Manual operating mode - bus
1443 Manual bus - PC controlling
359 Manual operation local
1444 Manual local - input controlling
1446 Manual local - PC controlling
360 ± Lost connection in manual operating mode
363 Slave pointer deleted
365 Invalid parameter value
366 Parameter change in ON status not permissible
368 ± Parameterization lock CPU/Master active
369 Factory setting restored
1302 Log book - trips cleared
1303 Log book - events cleared
1520 ± Energy-saving mode active
±: Event is entered as an "incoming" (+) and "outgoing" (-) event, other messages are only
entered as "incoming" messages
Data formats and data records
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 A-17
A.9 DS81 Read basic (factory) setting
In layout and content, data record 81 matches data record 131. Data record 81
provides the default values for all parameters of DS131.
A.10 DS92 Read device diagnostics
Byte.bit Coding Meaning Relevant (X) for
DS1e-x /
RS1e-x
DSS1e-x
0.0 1 = active Ready (automatic) XX
0.1 Motor cw XX
0.2 Motor ccw only RS1e-x —
0.3 Overload switching element XX
0.4 Switching element defective XX
0.5 Emergency start active XX
0.6 Group error XX
0.7 General warning XX
1.0 1 = active Switching element power sup-
ply missing XX
1.2 Interlock active only RS1e-x —
1.3 Startup active —X
1.4 Run-down active —X
1.5 Brake output active XX
2.3 1 = active Thermal motor model overload XX
2.4 Overload shutdown XX
2.5 Pause time active XX
2.6 Cooldown time active XX
3.2 1 = active Circuit-breaker
tripped XX
3.7 Input control XX
4.0 Asymmetry detected XX
4.1 Asymmetry shutdown XX
4.2 Ie limit value
exceeded XX
4.3 Ie limit value
not reached XX
4.4 Ie limit value shutdown XX
4.5 Residual current detected XX
4.6 Zero current shutdown XX
4.7 Motor blocking
shutdown XX
5.0 1 = active Input 1 XX
5.1 Input 2 XX
5.2 Input 3 XX
5.3 Input 4 XX
Data formats and data records
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
A-18 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Byte.bit Coding Meaning Relevant (X) for
DS1e-x /
RS1e-x
DSS1e-x
5.4 1 = active Input tripping XX
5.5 Shutdown input at limit posi-
tion, clockwise rotation XX
5.6 Warning input XX
5.7 Shutdown input at limit posi-
tion, counterclockwise rotation XX
6.3 1 = active Sensor supply overload XX
6.4 Trip reset completed XX
6.5 Trip reset not possible XX
6.6 Slave pointer deleted XX
6.7 Electronics power supply too
low XX
7.0 1 = active Bus fault XX
7.1 CPU/master STOP XX
7.2 Automatic operating mode XX
7.3 Manual bus operating mode
(remote control) XX
7.4 Manual local operating mode
(local control) XX
7.6 Lost connection in manual
operating mode XX
7.7 Process image error XX
8.0 1 = active Parameterization active XX
8.1 Invalid parameter value XX
8.2 Parameter change in ON sta-
tus not permissible XX
8.3 Parameterization lock CPU /
Master active XX
8.4 No external startup arameter
er hold XX
9.0 1 = active Self-test active XX
9.1 Self-test ok XX
9.2 Error during self-test XX
9.3 Factory setting restored XX
10 Object no. (low byte) (= incor-
rect parameter name) XX
11 0x00 Object no. (high byte) XX
18.0 1 = active BO output active XX
Data formats and data records
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 A-19
Byte.bit Coding Meaning Relevant (X) for
DS1e-x /
RS1e-x
DSS1e-x
Switching / controlling
19.1 1 = active Start-ready for motor on XX
19.2 Switching element shortcir-
cuited XX
Communication
22.0 1 = active Automatic operating mode
(redundant to bits 7.2) XX
22.1 Manual bus operating mode
(redundant to bits 7.3) XX
22.2 Manual bus - PC controlling XX
22.3 Manual local operating mode
(redundant to bits 7.4) XX
22.4 Manual local - input controlling XX
22.6 Manual local - PC controlling XX
Advance warnings
24.0 1 = active Group prewarning XX
24.2 Advance warning limit - time-
based trigger reserve not
reached
XX
24.3 Advance warning limit - motor
heating exceeded XX
Maintenance
26.0 1 = active Maintenance required XX
26.1 Maintenance request XX
27.0 1 = active Maintenance timer limit val-
ue_1 exceeded XX
27.1 Maintenance timer limit val-
ue_2 exceeded XX
Data formats and data records
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
A-20 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
A.11 DS93 Write command
Structure of the command data record:
Write command
Byte Meaning Note
Command data record
Header
0 Coordination 0x21 writing via C1 channel (PLC)
1Reserved
2Reserved
3Reserved
Command
4 No. of commands Value range 1 ... 5
Number of subsequent valid commands
5 Command 1 coding, see table below
6 Command 2 optional (coding, see table below)
7 Command 3 optional (coding, see table below)
8 Command 4 optional (coding, see table below)
9 Command 5 optional (coding, see table below)
Object
no.
Coding Command Meaning
1-byte commands
0 0 Reserved no function
703 1 Trip Reset Reset and acknowledgement of error messages
713 2 Emergency start ON —
714 3 Emergency start OFF —
709 4 Automatic
operating mode
Transfer to automatic operating mode
(control via DP master)
710
711
712
5 Operating mode
- Manual
- Bus
- On-site
Transfer to manual operating mode. In the process, the
motor starter switches over in manual bus operating
mode or manual local operating mode, depending on the
interface via which the command is received.
701 6 Factory setting Restore factory setting of the parameters from DS131.
(Only possible in "Manual" operating mode.)
704 7 Clear slave pointer The measurements for preventative diagnostics are
cleared (= 0).
702 9 Re-start Trigger re-start (as after mains ON), e. g. nach re-assign-
ment of the station address. (Only possible in "Manual"
operating mode.)
707 10 Parameterization lock
CPU / Master ON
No parameterization possible via parameterizing master,
or its parameters will be ignored
708 11 Parameterization lock
CPU / Master OFF
Parameterization possible via parameterizing master
Data formats and data records
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 A-21
A.12 DS94 Read measurements
Object
no.
Coding Command Meaning
1-byte commands
705 13 Clear log book trips Clear log book with recorded causes of error.
706 14 Clear log book events Clear log book with recorded warning messages and
specific actions.
717 15 Cold run ON Permits the activation of the switching contacts without
main energy
718 16 Cold run OFF Switches the "cold run" function off
719 17 Clear maintenance
timer
Clears the timer for the maintenance function
18 ... 255 Reserved
Byte.
bit
Meaning Value range /
[coding]
Incre-
ment
Relevant
for
Measurements (= volatile!)
0 Phase current IL1(%) 0 ... 797 % 3.125 % all
1 Phase current IL2(%) 0 ... 797 % 3.125 % all
2 Phase current IL3(%) 0 ... 797 % 3.125 % all
4 ... 5 Remaining cool-
down time of the
motor
0 ... 30 min 100 ms all
6.0 ... 6 Motor heating 0 ... 200 % / [0 ... 100] 2 % all
6.7 Asymmetry [0]: No asymmetry
[1]: Asymmetry (≥ 40 %)
—all
7 Value for
asymmetry
0 ... 100 % / [0 ... 100] 1 % all
28 ... 31 Phase current
IL1(eff)
0 ... 20 A 0.01 A all
32 ... 35 Phase current
IL2(eff)
0 ... 20 A 0.01 A all
36 ... 39 Phase current
IL3(eff)
0 ... 20 A] 0.01 A all
46 ... 47 Time-based trigger-
ing of the thermal
motor model
0 ... 6.500 s 0.1 s all
Data formats and data records
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
A-22 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
A.13 DS95 Read statistics
Byte Meaning Value range /
[coding]
Incre-
ment
Rele-
vant for
0 Motor current Imax 0 ... 797 % 3.125 % all
1 Reserved — — —
2 ... 3 Last trigger current 0 ... 1000 % 3.125 % all
4 ... 7 Operating hours device 0 ... 4,294,967,295 1 s all
8 ... 11 No. of starts, motor cw 0 ... 4,294,967,295 1 all
12 ... 15 No. of starts, motor
ccw
0 ... 4,294,967,295 1 only RS1e-
x
16 ... 17 Number of overload
trips
0 ... 65535 1 all
20 ... 23 Motor current Imax(eff) 0 ... 20 A 0.01 A all
24 ... 27 Last trip current IA(eff) 0 ... 20 A 0.01 A all
28 ... 31 Operating hours -
motor
0 ... 4,294,967,295 1 s all
32 ... 35 Operating hours -
motor current =
18 ... 49.9 % x Iemax
0 ... 4,294,967,295 1 s all
36 ... 39 Operating hours -
motor current =
50 ... 89.9% x Iemax
0 ... 4,294,967,295 1 s all
40 ... 43 Operating hours -
motor current =
90 ... 119.9 % x Iemax
0 ... 4,294,967,295 1 s all
44 ... 47 Operating hours -
motor current =
120 ... 1000% x Iemax
0 ... 4,294,967,295 1 s all
50 ... 51 Number of switching
element overload trips
0 ... 65,535 1 all
54 ... 55 No. of short-circuit trips 0 ... 65,535 1 all
56 ... 59 No. of stops with
mechanical braking
0 ... 4,294,967,295 1 all
80 ... 83 No. of starts output BO 0 ... 4,294,967,295 1 all
84 ... 87 Maintenance timer 0...4.294.967.295 s 1 s all
Operating hours
The motor starter records 2 operating hours values:
The operating hours of the motor indicate how long the switching elements and therefore the
motor were switched on.
The operating hours of the equipment (motor starter) indicate how long the DC24V-NS supply
voltage of the motor starter was switched on.
Data formats and data records
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 A-23
A.14 DS96 Read slave pointer
The slave pointers store the extreme values of individual measurements in the
time sequence. Slave pointers can be cleared or reset to "0" by the user using
the "Clear slave pointer" command.
Statistics data on preventative diagnostics (slave pointer)
Byte Slave pointer Value range /
[coding]
Incre-
ment
0 Reserved no function
1 Reserved no function
2 Reserved no function
3 Reserved no function
4 Phase current IL1 min(%) 0 ... 796.9 % 3.125 %
5 Phase current IL2 min(%) 0 ... 796.9 % 3.125 %
6 Phase current IL3 min(%) 0 ... 796.9 % 3.125 %
8 Phase current IL1 max(%) 0 ... 796.9 % 3.125 %
9 Phase current IL2 max(%) 0 ... 796.9 % 3.125 %
10 Phase current IL3 max(%) 0 ... 796.9 % 3.125 %
12 ... 13 Maximum trip current
IA max(%)
0 ... 1,000 % 3.125 %
14 ... 15 Number of motor overload
trips
0 ... 65,535 1
16 ... 19 Maximum trip current
IA max(eff)
± 0 ... 20 A 0.01 A
20 ... 23 Phase current IL1 min(eff) ± 0 ... 20 A 0.01 A
24 ... 27 Phase current IL2 min(eff) ± 0 ... 20 A 0.01 A
28 ... 31 Phase current IL3 min(eff) ± 0 ... 20 A 0.01 A
32 ... 35 Phase current IL1 max(eff) ± 0 ... 20 A 0.01 A
36 ... 39 Phase current IL2 max(eff) ± 0 ... 20 A 0.01 A
40 ... 43 Phase current IL3 max(eff) ± 0 ... 20 A 0.01 A
64 ... 67 Operating hours - motor cur-
rent = 18 ... 49.9 % x Ie
0 ... 4,294,967,295 1 s
68 ... 71 Operating hours - motor cur-
rent = 50 ... 89.9 % x Ie
0 ... 4,294,967,295 1 s
72 ... 75 Operating hours - motor cur-
rent = 50 ... 119.9 % x Ie
0 ... 4,294,967,295 1 s
76 ... 79 Operating hours - motor cur-
rent = 120 ... 1000 % x Ie
0 ... 4,294,967,295 1 s
Data formats and data records
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
A-24 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
A.15 DS 100 Read device identification
1) Time stamp: Time of the factory initialization with basic factory settings, see table below
Byte Length Value Meaning
Header
0 ... 3 4 0x00 Reserved
Device identification (TF)
4 ... 11 8 ... Time stamp1)
12 ... 31 20 Siemens AG Manufacturer
32 ... 55 24 — MLFB
56 1 0x01 Device range: load branch
57 1 0x01 Device sub-range: Motor starters
58 1 0x01
0x02
0x03
Device class: e. g. direct starter/reversing
starter/direct soft starter
59 1 0x48 System: PROFIBUS
60 1 0x4B Functional group
61 1 0x00 Reserved
62 ... 77 16 — Product code
78 ... 81 4 E ... Hardware verion
82 1 DS1e-x 0x01
RS1e-x 0x11
DSS1e-x 0x21
ID number (Byte0)
83 1 0x00 ID number (Byte1)
84 1 0x00 ID number (Byte2)
85 1 0x00 ID number (Byte3)
88 ... 95 8 ... Service number
96 ... 99 4 V ... Firmware version
Object name id_date
Object length 8 bytes
Bits87654321
Octet
12
15 214 213 212 211 210 29280 to 59 999 milliseconds
22
726252423222120
3resres2
524232221200 to 59 minutes
4SUresres2
4232221200 to 23 hours
SU: 0: Normal time, 1: Summer time
Day of the week Day of the month 1 to 7; 1 = Monday, 7= Sunday
52
2212024232221201 to 31
6resres2
524232221201 to 12 months
7res2
62524232221200 to 99 years; 0 = 2000
8 res res res res res res res res Reserved
Data formats and data records
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 A-25
A.16 DS131 Read / write device parameters
Complete data records can be exchanged with the system via the acyclical chan-
nel (PROFIBUS) and the NRT channel (PROFINET) during ongoing operation.
It is advisable that you first export data record 131 with the current parameters
from the motor starter, change the relevant parameters and then write them
back to the motor starter.
DS131 Byte Parameters Value range Incre-
ment
default Rele-
vant for
0 Coordination with startup parameterization:
0x20 writing via C1 channel (PLC)
with parameterization in operation:
0x21 writing via C1 channel (PLC)
1...3 Reserved not used [0]
4...7 Devicefunctions_2 Content MLFB-spe-
cific
8...11 Devicefunctions_1
14 and 15 Rated operating cur-
rent Ie A
0.15 ... 2.0 A
1.5 ... 12 A
10 mA 0.151) /
2.02)
1.51) /
12.02)
all
starters
16.0 Load type [0] 3-phase motor
[1] 1-phase motor
[0] DS1e-x
RS1e-x
16.1 Non-resetting on volt-
age failure
[0] No
[1] Yes
[1] all
starters
17 Prewarning limit value
- motor heating
0 ... 95%;
0 = deactivated
5% [0] all
starters
18 Response with over-
load
Thermal motor model
[0] shutdown without
re-start
[1] shutdown with re-
start
[2] Warning
[0] all
starters
19 Tripping class
(2 A, 12 A)
0] CLASS 10
[1] CLASS 20
[3] CLASS 5 (10a)
[4] CLASS 15
[15] CLASS OFF
5, (10a)
10,
15,
20
CLASS
OFF
[0] all
starters
20 Recovery time 1min … 30min 0.5min [3] all
starters
21 Idle time 0s ... 255s;
0 = deactivated
1s [0] all
starters
22 ... 23 Prewarning limit - time
trip reserve
0s ... 500s;
0 = deactivated
1s [0] all
starters
1) Configuring using GSD / HSP
2) Device factory setting
Data formats and data records
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
A-26 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
24.0 ... 24.1 Response on overload
- temperature sensor
[0] shutdown without
re-start
[1] shutdown with re-
start
[2] Warning
[0] all
starters
24.4 ... 24.6 Temperature sensor [0] deactivated
[1] thermoclick
[2] PTC type A
[0] all
starters
24.7 Temperature sensor
monitoring
[0] No
[1] Yes
[1] all
starters
28 Lower current limit [6-32]
18.75%...100%
[0] deactivated
3.125% 18.75% all
starters
29 Upper current limit [16-128] 50%...
400%
[0] deactivated
3.125 % 112.5% all
starters
30 Blocking current 150% ... 1000% 50% [16] all
starters
150%...800% DSS1e-x
32.0 ... 32.3 Blocking time 1s ... 5s 0.5s [2] all
starters
32.4 ... 32.5 Response with supply
voltage switching ele-
ments missing
[0] Group error
[1] Group error only
with ON command
[2] Group warning
[0] all
starters
32.6 Response to current
limit violation
[0] Warning
[1] Shutdown
[0] all
starters
32.7 Response to residual
current detection
[0] Warning
[1] Shutdown
[1] all
starters
33.0 ... 33.1 Response with power
switch OFF
[0] Group error
[1] Group error only
with ON command
[2] Group warning
[0] all
starters
34.0...2 Asymmetrical limit
value
30% ... 60%
[0] deactivated
10% [3] all
starters
34.6 Response to asymme-
try
[0] Warning
[1] Shutdown
[1] all
starters
36 Interlock time 0s - 60 s
Note:
Lock time = 0 means
a min. time of
approx. 150 ms for
safety reasons!
1s [0] RS1e-x
37 Input signal extension 0ms - 200ms 10ms [0] all
starters
38.0 ... 38.2 Input signal delay 10ms - 80ms 10ms 10ms all
starters
DS131 Byte Parameters Value range Incre-
ment
default Rele-
vant for
Data formats and data records
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 A-27
38.4 Input 1 - level [0] NC contact
[1] NO contact
— [1] all
starters
38.5 Input 2 - level [0] NC contact
[1] NO contact
— [1] all
starters
38.6 Input 3 - level [0] NC contact
[1] NO contact
— [1] all
starters
38.7 Input 4 - level [0] NC contact
[1] NO contact
all
starters
39.0 ... 39.3 Input 1 - action
NO contact / NC con-
tactr
NO contact / NC con-
tactr
NO contact / NC con-
tactr
NO contact / NC con-
tactr
NO contact / NC con-
tactr
NO contact / NC con-
tactr
NO
NO
NO
NO contact / NC con-
tactr
NO
NO
[0] no action
[1] Shutdown with-
out re-start
[2] Shutdown with
re-start
[3] Shutdown end
position clockwise
[4] Shutdown end
position counter-
clockwise
[5] Group warning
[6] Manual operation
local
[7] Emergency start
[8] Motor cw
[9] Motor ccw (with
RS only)
[11] Quick stop
[12] Trip reset
[13] Cold run
— [0] all
starters
39.4 ... 39.7 Input 2 - action
NO contact / NC con-
tactr
NO contact / NC con-
tactr
NO contact / NC con-
tactr
NO contact / NC con-
tactr
NO contact / NC con-
tactr
NO contact / NC con-
tactr
NO
NO
NO
NO contact / NC con-
tactr
NO
NO
[0] no action
[1] Shutdown with-
out re-start
[2] Shutdown with
re-start
[3] Shutdown end
position clockwise
[4] Shutdown end
position counter-
clockwise
[5] Group warning
[6] Manual operation
local
[7] Emergency start
[8] Motor cw
[9] Motor ccw (with
RS only)
[11] Quick stop
[12] Trip reset
[13] Cold run
— [0] all
starters
DS131 Byte Parameters Value range Incre-
ment
default Rele-
vant for
Data formats and data records
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
A-28 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
40.0 ... 40.3 Input 3 - action
NO contact / NC con-
tactr
NO contact / NC con-
tactr
NO contact / NC con-
tactr
NO contact / NC con-
tactr
NO contact / NC con-
tactr
NO contact / NC con-
tactr
NO
NO
NO
NO contact / NC con-
tactr
NO
NO
[0] no action
[1] Shutdown with-
out re-start
[2] Shutdown with
re-start
[3] Shutdown end
position clockwise
[4] Shutdown end
position counter-
clockwise
[5] Group warning
[6] Manual operation
local
[7] Emergency start
[8] Motor cw
[9] Motor ccw (with
RS only)
[11] Quick stop
[12] Trip reset
[13] Cold run
— [0] all
starters
40.4 ... 40.7 Input 4 - action
NO contact / NC con-
tactr
NO contact / NC con-
tactr
NO contact / NC con-
tactr
NO contact / NC con-
tactr
NO contact / NC con-
tactr
NO contact / NC con-
tactr
NO
NO
NO
NO contact / NC con-
tactr
NO
NO
[0] no action
[1] Shutdown with-
out re-start
[2] Shutdown with
re-start
[3] Shutdown end
position clockwise
[4] Shutdown end
position counter-
clockwise
[5] Group warning
[6] Manual operation
local
[7] Emergency start
[8] Motor cw
[9] Motor ccw (with
RS only)
[11] Quick stop
[12] Trip reset
[13] Cold run
— [1] all
starters
41.0 Input 1 - signal [0] non-retentive /
[1] retentive
[0] all
starters
41.1 Input 2 - signal [0] non-retentive /
[1] retentive
[0] all
starters
41.2 Input 3 - signal [0] non-retentive /
[1] retentive
[0] all
starters
41.3 Input 4 - signal [0] non-retentive /
[1] retentive
[0] all
starters
46 starting time 0 ... 30 s
[0] minimum ramp
(100 ms)
0.25 s 5s [20] DS1e-x
RS1e-x
DS131 Byte Parameters Value range Incre-
ment
default Rele-
vant for
Data formats and data records
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 A-29
47 Coasting down time 0 ... 30 s
[0] function
deactivated
0.25 s [0s] DS1e-x
RS1e-x
48 starting voltage 20 ... 100 % [4 ... 20] 5% [40%] DS1e-x
RS1e-x
49 Stop voltage 20 ... 90 % [4 ... 18] 5% [40%] DS1e-x
RS1e-x
50 Current limiting value 125 ... 600 %
Where Ie ≥ 9 A →
125 % ... 50 %
3.125% [600%] DS1e-x
RS1e-x
51.0 ... 51.3 Startup mode [0] direct
[1] voltage ramp
[4] current limit
[5] voltage ramp +
current limit
[0] DS1e-x
RS1e-x
51.4 ... 51.7 Ramp-down mode [0] free ramp-down
[1] voltage ramp
[0] DS1e-x
RS1e-x
52 ... 53 Replacement value → see POI [0] all
starters
56.6 Group diagnosis [0] lock
[1] enable
[0] all
starters
56.7 Response to CPU/
master STOP
[0] Switch replace-
ment value
[1] Retain last value
[0] all
starters
58 ... 59 Enable delay of the
brake when starting
- 2.5s...2.5s 0.01s 0s all
starters
60 ... 61 Holding time of the
brake when stopping
0...25s 0.01s 0s all
starters
73 reserved
(for input level)
93.0 ... 93.1 Output 1 - level [0]: not inverted
[1]: inverted
[2 ... 3]: Reserved
[0]
93.2 ... 93.3 Output 2 - level [0]: not inverted
[1]: inverted
[2 ... 3]: Reserved
[0]
94.0 ... 94.3 Output 1 - level [0]: steady
[1]: flashing
[6 ... 15]: Reserved
[0]
94.4 ... 94.7 Output 2 - level [0]: steady
[1]: flashing
[6 ... 15]: Reserved
[0]
DS131 Byte Parameters Value range Incre-
ment
default Rele-
vant for
Data formats and data records
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
A-30 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
96 Output 1 - action [00]: No action
[01]: Control source
POI DO 1.0
[02]: Control source
POI DO 1.1
[03]: Control source
POI DO 0.2
[06]: Control source
input 1
[07]: Control source
input 2
[08]: Control source
input 3
[09]: Control source
input 4
[10]: Ramping up
[11]: Operation /
jumper
[12]: Ramp-down
[13]: Duty cycle
(RUN)
[14]: Control com-
mand "motor ON"
(ON)
[17]: Brake output
[18]: Device ON
[30]: Group prewarn-
ing
[31]: General warning
[32]: Group error
[33]: Bus fault
[34]: Device fault
[35]: Maintenance
required
[36]: Maintenance
request
[38]: Start-ready for
motor on
[0] all
starters
all
starters
all
starters
all
starters
all
starters
all
starters
all
starters
all
starters
DS1e-x
RS1e-x
DS1e-x
RS1e-x
DS1e-x
RS1e-x
all
starters
all
starters
all
starters
all
starters
all
starters
all
starters
all
starters
all
starters
all
starters
all
starters
all
starters
all
starters
97 Output 2 - action [00]: No action
[01]: Control source
POI DO 1.0
[02]: Control source
POI DO 1.1
[03]: ...[38]: see byte
96
[0] all
starters
all
starters
all
starters
DS131 Byte Parameters Value range Incre-
ment
default Rele-
vant for
Data formats and data records
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 A-31
137.0 ... 137.3 Plug monitoring [0]: deactivated
[1]: supply-side
[0] all
starters
137.4 ... 137.7 Response to
plug removed
[0]: Group error
[1]: Group error only
for ON command
[2]: General warning
[0] all
starters
MLFB Device function_2 Device function_1
Byte
0
Byte
1
Byte
2
Byte
3
Byte
0
Byte
1
Byte
2
Byte
3
3RK1301-0AB10-0AB4 DS1e-x HF 0x05 0x03 0x00 0x00 0xD9 0xB8 0x08 0x4C
3RK1301-0AB10-1AB4 RS1e-x HF 0x05 0x03 0x00 0x00 0xD9 0xB9 0x08 0x4C
3RK1301-0AB20-0AB4 DSS1e-x HF 0x05 0x03 0x00 0x00 0xD9 0xB8 0x08 0x4C
3RK1301-0BB10-0AB4 DS1e-x HF 0x05 0x03 0x00 0x00 0xD9 0xB8 0x08 0x4C
3RK1301-0BB10-1AB4 RS1e-x HF 0x05 0x03 0x00 0x00 0xD9 0xB9 0x08 0x4C
3RK1301-0BB20-0AB4 DSS1e-x HF 0x05 0x03 0x00 0x00 0xD9 0xB8 0x08 0x4C
3RK1301-0CB10-0AB4 DS1e-x HF 0x05 0x03 0x00 0x00 0xD9 0xB8 0x08 0x4C
3RK1301-0CB10-1AB4 RS1e-x HF 0x05 0x03 0x00 0x00 0xD9 0xB9 0x08 0x4C
3RK1301-0CB20-0AB4 DSS1e-x HF 0x05 0x03 0x00 0x00 0xD9 0xB8 0x08 0x4C
DS131 Byte Parameters Value range Incre-
ment
default Rele-
vant for
Data formats and data records
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
A-32 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
A.17 DS134 Read / write maintenance
A.18 DS165 Read / write comment
Components in a system are assigned a unique identifier by the user during the
system configuration that provides information on the installation location and
the usage type. The individual components are then assigned the correspond-
ing identification sign local.
Byte Parameters Value range Incre-
ment
Factory set-
ting
Header
0 Coordination with startup parameterization:
0x20 writing via C1 channel (PLC)
with parameterization in operation:
0x21 writing via C1 channel (PLC)
1 ... 7 Reserved
User data
8 ... 11 Maintenance timer-Warn-
ing limit value_1
0 … 4.294.967.295 s 1 s 946.080.000
(30 years)
12 ... 15 Maintenance timer-Warn-
ing limit value_2
0 … 4.294.967.295 s 1 s 946.080.000
(30 years)
16 ... 27 Reserved
Byte Parameters Value range Incre-
ment
Factory set-
ting
Header
0 Coordination with startup parameterization:
0x20 writing via C1 channel (PLC)
with parameterization in operation:
0x21 writing via C1 channel (PLC)
1 ... 3 Reserved not used [0]
4 ... 199 ASCII
Data formats and data records
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 A-33
A.19 I&M data
The following I&M (Identification & Maintenance Function) data are supported
by all
ET200S1) motor starters:
1) from order number suffix: -.AB4
A.19.1 DS231 Read device identification
I&M 0
The following data are prepared in data record 231:
Number Name Note
I&M 0 Device identification Stored by the manufacturer
I&M 1 Equipment identification entered into the hardware config by the
user during the configuration process via
the device properties screen
I&M 2 Installation
I&M 3 Description
Byte Coding Meaning Note
I&M header
0 ... 9 0x00 Reserved = 0 —
I&M0 - data block 0
10 ... 11 0x002A MANUFACTURER_ID 42 = m anufacturer name SIE-
MENS
12 ... 31 ORDER_ID Order number (MLFB )
32 ... 47 SERIAL_NUMBER Serial number
48 ... 49 HARDWARE-REVISION Hardware revision status or
product version
50 ... 53 SOFTWARE_REVISION Firmware version
54 ... 55 0x0000 REV_COUNTER Not supported
56 ... 57 0x5E10 PROFILE_ID Device range: Motor starters
58 ... 59 DS1e-x 0x1011
RS1e-x 0x1012
DSS1e-x 0x1013
PROFILE_SPECIFIC_
TYPE
Addition to object "PRO-
FILE_ID"
60 ... 61 0x0101 IM_VERSION I&M version status
(01 01hex = version 1.1).
62 ... 63 0x000E IM_SUPPORTED supports I&M1, I&M2, I&M3
Data formats and data records
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
A-34 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
A.19.2 DS232 Read / write equipment identifier
I&M 1
The following data are saved in data record 232:
A.19.3 DS233 Read / write installation
I&M 2
The following data are saved in data record 233:
A.19.4 DS234 Read / write description
I&M 3
The following data are saved in data record 234:
Byte Coding Meaning Note
I&M header
0 ... 9 0x00 Reserved —
I&M - data block 1
10 ... 41 ASCII TAG-FUNCTION System identifier
fill unused positions with blank
(ASCII = 0x20)
42 ... 63 ASCII TAG-LOCATION Location identifier
fill unused positions with blank
(0x20)
Byte Coding Meaning Note
I&M header
0 ... 9 0x00 Reserved —
I&M - data block 2
10 ... 25 ASCII INSTALLATION_DATE Installation date
26 ... 63 0x00 Reserved —
Byte Coding Meaning Note
I&M header
0 ... 9 0x00 Reserved —
I&M - data block 3
10 ... 63 ASCII DESCRIPTOR custom additional information and
notes
fill unused positions with blank
(0x20)
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 B-1
Order numbers B
Section Subject Page
B.1 Motor starters B-2
B.1.1 ET 200S DS1-x direct starter; standard / ET 200S RS1-x reversing
starter; standard
B-2
B.1.2 ET 200S High Feature motor starters for Motor Starter ES B-3
B.1.3 ET 200S fail-safe motor starters with electronic overload
protection (F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x)
B-3
B.2 Components for ET 200S motor starters B-4
B.3 Components for the safety-integrated system (local safety) B-6
B.4 Components for expansion modules B-7
B.5 Fail-safe components (PM-D F PROFIsafe, PM-D F X1) B-7
B.6 Manuals for ET 200S distributed I/O system B-8
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
B-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
B.1 Motor starters
B.1.1 ET 200S DS1-x direct starter; standard /
ET 200S RS1-x reversing starter; standard
Adjustment range Order number
kW A Direct starter (DS1-x) Reversing starter (RS1-x)
< 0.06 0.14 - 0.20 3RK1301-0BB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-0BB00- 1AA2
0.06 0.18 - 0.25 3RK1301-0CB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-0CB00- 1AA2
0.09 0.22 - 0.32 3RK1301-0DB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-0DB00- 1AA2
0.10 0.28 - 0.40 3RK1301-0EB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-0EB00- 1AA2
0.12 0.35 - 0.50 3RK1301-0FB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-0FB00- 1AA2
0.18 0.45 - 0.63 3RK1301-0GB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-0GB00- 1AA2
0.21 0.55 - 0.80 3RK1301-0HB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-0HB00- 1AA2
0.25 0.70 - 1.00 3RK1301-0JB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-0JB00- 1AA2
0.37 0.90 - 1.25 3RK1301-0KB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-0KB00- 1AA2
0.55 1.10 - 1.60 3RK1301-1AB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-1AB00- 1AA2
0.75 1.40 - 2.00 3RK1301-1BB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-1BB00- 1AA2
0.90 1.80 - 2.50 3RK1301-1CB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-1CB00- 1AA2
1.10 2.20 - 3.20 3RK1301-1DB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-1DB00- 1AA2
1.50 2.80 - 4.00 3RK1301-1EB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-1EB00- 1AA2
1.90 3.50 - 5.00 3RK1301-1FB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-1FB00- 1AA2
2.20 4.50 - 6.30 3RK1301-1GB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-1GB00- 1AA2
3.00 5.50 - 8.0 3RK1301-1HB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-1HB00- 1AA2
4.00 7.00 - 10.0 3RK1301-1JB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-1JB00- 1AA2
5.50 9.00 - 12.0 3RK1301-1KB00- 0AA2 3RK1301-1KB00- 1AA2
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 B-3
B.1.2 ET 200S High Feature motor starters for Motor Starter ES
The following motor starters are suitable for the "Motor Starter ES" software as
of V2.0
B.1.3 ET 200S fail-safe motor starters with electronic overload protection
(F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x)
Suitable for the "Motor Starter ES" software
Adjustment range Order number
kW A Direct starter
(DS1e-x)
Direct soft starter
(DSS1e-x)
Reversing starter
(RS1e-x)
< 1.1 0.3 - 3 3RK1301-0AB10- 0AA3 3RK1301-0AB20- 0AA3 3RK1301-0AB10- 1AA3
3 2.4 - 8 3RK1301-0BB10- 0AA3 3RK1301-0BB20- 0AA3 3RK1301-0BB10- 1AA3
7.5 2.4 - 16 3RK1301-0CB10- 0AA3 3RK1301-0CB20- 0AA3 3RK1301-0CB10- 1AA3
New design with expanded parameterization
(see Section 10.6, 'Tripping class')
< 1.1 0.3 - 3 3RK1301-0AB10- 0AA4 3RK1301-0AB20- 0AA4 3RK1301-0AB10- 1AA4
3 2.4 - 8 3RK1301-0BB10- 0AA4 3RK1301-0BB20- 0AA4 3RK1301-0BB10- 1AA4
7.5 2.4 - 16 3RK1301-0CB10- 0AA4 3RK1301-0CB20- 0AA4 3RK1301-0CB10- 1AA4
New design with new functions and extended parameterizations and DPV1 functionality
(see Section 10.1, ’Functions - Overview’)
< 1.1 0.3 - 3 3RK1301-0AB10- 0AB4 3RK1301-0AB20- 0AB4 3RK1301-0AB10- 1AB4
3 2.4 - 8 3RK1301-0BB10- 0AB4 3RK1301-0BB20- 0AB4 3RK1301-0BB10- 1AB4
7.5 2.4 - 16 3RK1301-0CB10- 0AB4 3RK1301-0CB20- 0AB4 3RK1301-0CB10- 1AB4
Adjustment range Order number
kW A Fail-safe
direct starter
(F-DS1e-x)
Fail-safe
reversing starter
(F-RS1e-x)
< 1.1 0.3 - 3 3RK1301-0AB13- 0AA2 3RK1301-0AB13- 1AA2
3 2.4 - 8 3RK1301-0BB13- 0AA2 3RK1301-0BB13- 1AA2
7.5 2.4 - 16 3RK1301-0CB13- 0AA2 3RK1301-0CB13- 1AA2
New design with expanded parameterization
(see Section 10.6, 'Tripping class')
< 1.1 0.3 - 3 3RK1301-0AB13- 0AA4 3RK1301-0AB13- 1AA4
3 2.4 - 8 3RK1301-0BB13- 0AA43RK1301-0BB13- 1AA4
7.5 2.4 - 16 3RK1301-0CB13- 0AA4 3RK1301-0CB13- 1AA4
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
B-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
B.2 Components for ET 200S motor starters
Description Model Order number
Power module PM-D for direct and reversing starters 3RK1903-0BA00
Te r m i n a l
modules
TM-P15 S27-01 for the PM-D power module
with terminating cover
3RK1903-0AA00
TM-DS45-S32 for DS1-x, with power bus infeed, with
caps
3RK1903-0AB00
TM-DS45-S31 for DS1-x, with power bus throughfeed 3RK1903-0AB10
TM-RS90-S32 for RS1-x, with power bus infeed, with
caps
3RK1903-0AC00
TM-RS90-S31 for RS1-x, with power bus throughfeed 3RK1903-0AC10
TM-DS65-S32
-01 FS L
for DS1e-x and DSS1e-x, with power
bus infeed, with caps
3RK1903-0AK00
TM-DS65-S31
-01 S
for DS1e-x and DSS1e-x, with power
bus throughfeed
3RK1903-0AK10
TM-RS130-S32
-01 FS L
for RS1e-x, with power bus infeed,
with caps
3RK1903-0AL00
TM-RS130-S31
-01 S
for RS1e-x, with power bus through-
feed
3RK1903-0AL10
TM-FDS65-S32
-01 FS L
for F-DS1e-x, with power bus infeed,
with caps
3RK1903-3AC00
TM-FDS65-S31
-01 S
for F-DS1e-x, with power bus through-
feed
3RK1903-3AC10
TM-FRS130-S32
-01 FS L
for F-RS1e-x, with power bus infeed,
with caps
3RK1903-3AD00
TM-FRS130-S31
-01 S
for F-RS1e-x, with power bus through-
feed
3RK1903-3AD10
Spacing
module
DM-V15 for installing direct starters with derat-
ing
3RK1903-0CD00
Accessories Caps 3RK1903-0AF00
Terminal block
L1/L2/L3
30 mm, jumper module 3RK1903-0AF00
L1/L2/L3
terminal block
15 mm, jumper module 3RK1903-0AE00
PE/N termi-
nal block
45 mm, infeed module,
with caps
3RK1903-2AA00
PE/N termi-
nal block
45 mm, infeed and jumper module 3RK1903-2AA10
PE/N termi-
nal block
30 mm, jumper module 3RK1903-0AJ00
PE/N termi-
nal block
15 mm, jumper module 3RK1903-0AH00
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 B-5
Accessories PE/N terminal
block
M65-PEN-F
65 mm, infeed module,
with caps
3RK1903-2AC00
PE/N terminal
block
M65-PEN-S
65 mm, infeed and jumper module 3RK1903-2AC10
3-phase feed-in ter-
minal for S0
if necessary for power bus infeed for
wiring:
• solid or stranded:
2.5 to 25 mm2
• finely stranded with end sleeve:
2.5 to 25 mm2
• solid or stranded:
12 to 4 AWG
3RV1925-5AB
Control kit manual actuation for contactors
(only for DS1-x, RS1-x)
(5 pcs.)
3RK1903-0CA00
Control unit for direct drive of the contactor coils
of ET 200S devices
(only for DS1-x, RS1-x)
3RK1903-0CG00
Accessories 2DI COM
control module
digital 2DI COM input module for
local operation of the computer inter-
face
(only for DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, RS1e-x,
F-DS1e-x, and F-RS1e-x)
3RK1903-0CH10
2DI LC COM
control module
digital 2DI LC COM input module
with computer interface for manual
local operation
(only for DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, RS1e-x,
F-DS1e-x, and F-RS1e-x)
3RK1903-0CH20
LOGO! PC cable for the connection of the computer to
the 2DI COM/-2DI LC COM control
module
6ED1057-1AA00-0BA0
"Motor Starter ES"
diagnostics and
commissioning
tool
Software for diagnostics and commis-
sioning for motor starter
- Basic package, floating license
- Standard package, floating license
- Premium package, floating license
3ZS1310-
4
CC10-0YA5
3ZS1310-
5
CC10-0YA5
3ZS1310-
6
CC10-0YA5
Description Model Order number
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
B-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
B.3 Components for the safety-integrated system (local
safety)
Description Model Order number
Power
modules
PM-D F1 fail-safe, up to PL e
DIN EN ISO 13849-1 for emergency
stop
3RK1903-1BA00
PM-D F2 fail-safe, up to PL e,
DIN EN ISO 13849-1 for autostart for
protective door monitoring;
3RK1903-1BB00
PM-D F3 fail-safe, up to PL d,
DIN EN ISO 13849-1 for expansion, with
time delay of 0.5 to 30 s
3RK1903-1BD00
PM-D F4 fail-safe, up to PL e,
DIN EN ISO 13849-1 for expansion 3RK1903-1BC00
PM-D F5 contact replicator, up to PL e, DIN EN
ISO 13849-1 3RK1903-1BE00
Connection
module
PM-X connection unit for infeed contactor,
fail-safe up to PL e
(DIN EN ISO 13849-1)
3RK1903-1CB00
Te r m i n a l
modules
TM-PF30 S47-B1
for PM-D F1,2 for potential group,
infeed U1, U2, sensor connection
with terminating cover
3RK1903-1AA00
TM-PF30 S47-B0
for PM-D F1,2 for potential subgroup,
sensor connection 3RK1903-1AA10
TM-PF30 S47-C1
for PM-D F3,4 for potential group,
infeed U1, U2
with terminating cover
3RK1903-1AC00
TM-PF30 S47-C0
for PM-D F3,4 for potential subgroup,
infeed U2 3RK1903-1AC10
TM-PF30 S47-D0
for PM-D F5 for contact replicator 3RK1903-1AD10
TM-X15 S27-01 for PM-X connection module
connection unit for infeed contactor,
PL d and PL e (DIN EN ISO 13849-1)
3RK1903-1AB00
Fail-safe kit Fail-safe kit 1 for DS1-x direct starter,
up to Category 4 (DIN EN ISO 13849-1)
• 1 auxiliary switch block
• 1 contact holder with connecting
lead for direct starter
• 1 contact support for terminal
module (feedback loop)
• 1 contact support for terminal
module (infeed contactor)
3RK1903-1CA00
Fail-safe kit 2 for RS1-x reversing starter,
up to PL e, (DIN EN ISO 13849-1)
• 2 auxiliary switch blocks
• 1 contact holder with connecting
lead for reversing starter
• 1 light gray contact support for
terminal module (feedback loop)
• 1 dark gray contact support for ter-
minal module (feedback loop)
• 2 contact support for terminal
module (infeed contactor)
• 1 connecting lead
3RK1903-1CA01
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 B-7
B.4 Components for expansion modules
B.5 Fail-safe components
(PM-D F PROFIsafe, PM-D F X1)
Description Model Order number
Brake con-
trol modules
xB1
xB3
for brake 24 VDC/4 A
with 2 extra inputs
3RK1903-0CB00
3RK1903-0CE00
xB2
xB4
for brake 500 VDC/0.7 A
with 2 extra inputs
3RK1903-0CC00
3RK1903-0CF00
xB5
xB6
for 400 V AC / 0.5 A brake
also with 2 inputs
3RK1903-0CJ00
3RK1903-0CK00
Te r m i n a l
modules
TM-xB15 S24-01 for brake control modules xB1, xB2, xB5 3RK1903-0AG00
TM-xB215 S24-01 for brake control modules xB3, xB4, xB6 3RK1903-0AG01
Description Model Order number
Power module PM-D F
PROFIsafe
With overvoltage protection
With diagnostics
(for a description see the ET 200S
Distributed I/O Device for Fail-Safe
Modules manual)
3RK1903-3BA01
3RK1903-3BA02
Power/expan-
sion module
PM-D F X1 With overvoltage protection for the
infeed of external emergency stop
signals
3RK1903-3DA00
contact
replicator
F-CM With 4 safe, floating contacts 3RK1903-3CA00
Te r m i n a l
modules
TM-PF30 S47-F1
for PM-D F
PROFIsafe
For potential group,
with infeed U1, SG1 to SG6,
with terminating cover
(for a description see ET 200S Distrib-
uted I/O Device for Fail-Safe Modules)
3RK1903-3AA00
TM-PFX30 S47-G1
for PM-D F X1
for potential group,
without infeed from the ccw for
U1, SG1 to SG6
with terminating cover
3RK1903-3AE00
TM-PFX30 S47-G0
for PM-D F X1
for potential group,
with infeed from the ccw for
U1, SG1 to SG6,
3RK1903-3AE10
TM-FCM30 S47-E0
for F-CM
With throughfeed U1, SG1 to SG6, 3RK1903-3AB10
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
B-8 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
B.6 Manuals for ET 200S distributed I/O system
A table of contents for the individual manuals can be befound at the beginning
of this manual under "Important Information."
Description Order number
Documentation package for the ET 200S, consisting of
• Manuals, operating instructions, and product information for the
"SIMATIC ET 200S Distributed I/O Device"
•Manual
"SIMATIC ET 200S. Fail-safe motor starters: Safety-Integrated Sys-
tem
• System manual SIMATIC PROFINET System Description
• Programming Manual
"SIMATIC PROFINET IO. From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO"
Only available on the
Internet
Manual "SIMATIC ET 200S Interface Module IM 151-7 CPU" and the
S7-300 operation list
Only available on the
Internet
Manual SIMATIC ET 200S Process-Related Functions Only available on the
Internet
Operating instructions "SIMATIC ET 200S Positioning" Only available on the
Internet
Operating instructions "SIMATIC ET 200S Serial Interface Modules" Only available on the
Internet
Installation and operating manual
"SIMATIC ET 200S Distributed I/O Device for Fail-Safe Modules"
Only available on the
Internet
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 C-1
Dimensioned drawings C
Section Subject Page
C.1 Motor starters C-2
C.1.1 DS1-x direct starter; standard and TM-DS45 terminal module C-2
C.1.2 DS1e-x direct starter; high feature, DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high
feature and TM-DS65 terminal module; F-DS1e-x fail-safe direct starter
and TM-FDS65 terminal module
C-3
C.1.3 RS1-x reversing starter; standard and TM-RS90 terminal module C-4
C.1.4 RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature and TM-RS130 terminal module
F-RS1e-x fail-safe reversing starter and TM-FRS130 terminal module
C-5
C.2 Power modules, connection module C-6
C.2.1 PM-D power module and TM-P15 S27-01 terminal module C-6
C.2.2 Power modules PM-D F1 to 5 and terminal modules TM-PF30 S47-
B0/-B1/-C0/-C1/-D0; PM-D F PROFIsafe power module and TM-PF30
S47-F1 terminal module; PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and
terminal modules TM-PFX30 S47-G0/-G1; F-CM contact replicator and
TM-FCM30 S47-E0 terminal module
C-7
C.2.3 PM-X connection module and TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module C-8
C.3 DM-V15 spacing module C-8
C.4 Expansion modules C-9
C.4.1 Brake control module xB1 to 4 and terminal module TM-xB15 S24-01,
TM-xB215 S24-01
C-9
Dimensioned drawings
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
C-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
C.1 Motor starters
C.1.1 DS1-x direct starter; standard and TM-DS45 terminal module
DS-x1
TM-DS45
DS-x1
Rail
35 x 7.5/15 mm
Rail
35 x 7.5/15 mm
Space for
heat removal
Space for
heat removal
Connection zone
Dimensioned drawings
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 C-3
C.1.2 DS1e-x direct starter; high feature,
DSS1e-x direct soft starter; high feature and TM-DS65 terminal module;
F-DS1e-x fail-safe direct starter and TM-FDS65 terminal module
DS1e-x,
TM-DS65
DS1e-x,
Rail
35 x 7.5/15 mm
Rail
35 x 7.5/15 mm
Connection zone
Space for
heat removal
Space for
heat removal
DSS1e-x,
F-DS1e-x
DSS1e-x,
F-DS1e-x
TM-FDS65
Control module
2DI COM/
LOGO! PC cable
-2DI LC COM
Dimensioned drawings
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
C-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
C.1.3 RS1-x reversing starter; standard and TM-RS90 terminal module
TM-RS90
Rail
35 x 7.5/15 mm
Rail
35 x 7.5/15 mm
RS-x1
RS-x1
Dimensioned drawings
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 C-5
C.1.4 RS1e-x reversing starter; high feature and TM-RS130 terminal module
F-RS1e-x fail-safe reversing starter and TM-FRS130 terminal module
RS1e-x
TM-RS130
RS1e-x
Rail
35 x 7.5/15 mm
Rail
35 x 7.5/15 mm
Space for
heat removal
Space for
heat removal
Connection zone
F-RS1e-x
F-RS1e-x
TM-FRS130
Control module
2DI COM/
LOGO! PC cable
-2DI LC COM
Dimensioned drawings
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
C-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
C.2 Power modules, connection module
C.2.1 PM-D power module and TM-P15 S27-01 terminal module
Dimensioned drawings
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 C-7
C.2.2 Power modules PM-D F1 to 5 and
terminal modules TM-PF30 S47-B0/-B1/-C0/-C1/-D0;
PM-D F PROFIsafe power module and TM-PF30 S47-F1 terminal module;
PM-D F X1 power/expansion module and
terminal modules TM-PFX30 S47-G0/-G1;
F-CM contact replicator and TM-FCM30 S47-E0 terminal module
Dimensioned drawings
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
C-8 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
C.2.3 PM-X connection module and TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module
C.3 DM-V15 spacing module
Dimensioned drawings
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 C-9
C.4 Expansion modules
C.4.1 Brake control module xB1 to 4 and
terminal module TM-xB15 S24-01, TM-xB215 S24-01
3RK1903-
0CB00
Stat
34
X2
DC24V/ 4A
xB1
84
Dimensioned drawings
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
C-10 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 D-1
Applications D
Section Subject Page
D.1 Examples with brake control modules D-2
D.1.1 Example with 2 directions of rotation and limit-switch operation
without brake
D-2
D.1.2 Example with 2 directions of rotation, 2 speeds and 24 V brake
with external power supply
D-4
D.1.3 Example with 2 directions of rotation, 2 speeds and 400 V brake
with internal power supply
D-6
D.1.4 Example of lifting platform - up with motor, down with valve D-8
D.1.5 Example of lifting platform - up and down with brake motor D-10
D.2 Examples with reversible-pole motors D-12
D.2.1 Example with 2 directions of rotation and 2 speeds with one
Dahlander winding
D-12
D.2.2 Example with 2 directions of rotation and 3 speeds with 2
Dahlander windings
D-14
Applications
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
D-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Safety note
The following applications are used only as a suggestion of typical circuit dia-
grams.
No liability will be accepted for the proper functioning, compliance with certifi-
cation requirements, or compatibility of the examples. Use at your own risk.
Caution
Derating (see Section 3.4) is not taken into account in the following examples.
Caution
Due to the operation of star-connected three-phase motors, high EMC interfer-
ence may occur. Interference above the IEC limit values can lead to an impair-
ment of functions or failure of the electronics. In case of high EMC interfer-
ence, we recommend the use of motors with EMC protection circuits. (Excep-
tion: soft starters may not be operated with a EMC protection circuit).
D.1 Examples with brake control modules
D.1.1 Example with 2 directions of rotation and limit-switch operation without
brake
Figure D-1: Example with 2 directions of rotation and limit-switch operation without brake
Applications
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 D-3
Figure D-1: (cont.) Example with 2 directions of rotation and limit-switch operation without brake
Applications
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
D-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
D.1.2 Example with 2 directions of rotation, 2 speeds and 24 V brake with exter-
nal power supply
Figure D-2: Example with 2 directions of rotation, 2 speeds and 24 V brake with external power supply
Applications
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 D-5
Figure D-2: (cont.) Example with 2 directions of rotation, 2 speeds and 24 V brake with external power supply
Applications
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
D-6 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
D.1.3 Example with 2 directions of rotation, 2 speeds and 400 V brake with
internal power supply
Figure D-3: Example with 2 directions of rotation, 2 speeds and 400 V brake with internal power supply
Applications
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 D-7
Figure D-3: (cont.) Example with 2 directions of rotation, 2 speeds and 400 V brake with internal power supply
Applications
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
D-8 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
D.1.4 Example of lifting platform - up with motor, down with valve
Figure D-4: Example of lifting platform - up with motor, down with valve
Applications
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 D-9
The diagram below illustrates the dependencies between the individual signals
Figure D-4: (cont.) Example of lifting platform - up with motor, down with valve
DS1-x: Control (process image outputs) - PLC action
DO 0.0 (pump motor ON)
DO 0.2 (valve open)
DS1-x: Check (process image inputs) - PLC evaluation
DI 0.1 (contactor on)
xB3, xB4, xB6
Limit switch, top
Limit switch, bottom
xB3, xB4, xB6: Check (process image inputs) - PLC evaluation
DI 0.0 (limit switch, top)
DI 0.1 (limit sw., bottom)
xB3, xB4, xB6: Diagnostics
LED, switching output
LED, limit switch, top
LED, limit switch, bottom
Original drive signal overridden / rendered ineffective by limit switch
13
2
47
5
6
4
8
Lifting platform at top
Lifting platform at bottom
Applications
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
D-10 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
D.1.5 Example of lifting platform - up and down with brake motor
Figure D-5: Example of lifting platform - up and down with brake motor
Applications
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 D-11
Figure D-5: (cont.) Example of lifting platform - up and down with brake motor
At each limit position, the lifting platform is controlled by a BERO limit switch. If
a limit switch fails, the position switch acts directly on the RS1-x reversing
starter through the xB4 brake control module. The starter is switched off imme-
diately and the brake is activated. This rapid shutdown acts by bypassing the
PLC user program. With the position switch actuated, the starter can only be
switched on in the opposite direction by the PLC. The process image of the
inputs at the brake control module is also made available to the PLC. There, the
operation can be adapted to the situation.
Applications
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
D-12 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
D.2 Examples with reversible-pole motors
D.2.1 Example with 2 directions of rotation and 2 speeds with one Dahlander
winding
Figure D-6: Example with 2 directions of rotation and 2 speeds with one Dahlander winding
PL Order number Description
bc
1) d/e
12) 3RK1903-0BA00 PM-D
1 3RK1903-0AA00 TM-P15 S27-01
1 1 3RK1903-1BA00 PM-D F1
1 1 3RK1903-1AA00 TM-PF30 S47-B1
1 1 3RK1903-1CB00 PM-X
1 1 3RK1903-1AB00 TM-X15 S27-01
1 3RT1035-1BB40 Infeed protection for maximum complement 40 A
1 3RH1921-1DA11 Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor
1 3RA1931-1BA00 DC connection module
1 3RV1031-4HA10 Power switch as line protection with
maximum complement 40 A
1 1 1 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS1-x xx in accordance with the current
rating
1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed
1 1 3RK1903-1CA00 Fail-safe kit 1
2 2 2 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA2 RS1-x xx in accordance with the current
rating
1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-RS90 S32 with power bus infeed
1 1 1 3RK1903-0AC10 TM-RS90 S31 with power bus throughfeed
2 2 3RK1903-1CA01 Fail-safe kit 2
1) In this typical circuit diagram, PL caccording to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 can only be met if a warning is
issued automatically when the actuator fails or the machine control system initiates a safe status con-
dition. Otherwise a second disconnection path is required.
2) Emergency stop looped in line for supply voltage U2 (A1+ A2 )
Applications
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 D-13
Figure D-6: (cont.) Example with 2 directions of rotation and 2 speeds with one Dahlander winding
Warning
You must ensure that there is an appropriate, software-specific interlocking with
a sufficiently apportioned time delay between module A3 and A4.
Applications
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
D-14 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
D.2.2 Example with 2 directions of rotation and 3 speeds with 2 Dahlander
windings
Figure D-7: Example with 2 directions of rotation and 3 speeds with 2 Dahlander windings
PL Order number Description
bc
1) d/e
12) 3RK1903-0BA00 PM-D
1 3RK1903-0AA00 TM-P15 S27-01
1 1 3RK1903-1BA00 PM-D F1
1 1 3RK1903-1AA00 TM-PF30 S47-B1
1 1 3RK1903-1CB00 PM-X
1 1 3RK1903-1AB00 TM-X15 S27-01
1 3RT1035-1BB40 Infeed protection for maximum complement 40 A
1 3RH1921-1DA11 Auxiliary switch for infeed contactor
1 3RA1931-1BA00 DC connection module
1 3RV1031-4HA10 Power switch as line protection with
maximum complement 40 A
1 1 1 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA2 DS1-x xx in accordance with the current
rating
1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-DS45 S32 with power bus infeed
1 1 3RK1903-1CA00 Fail-safe kit 1
3 3 3 3RK1301-xxB00-1AA2 RS1-x xx in accordance with the current
rating
1 1 1 3RK1903-0AB00 TM-RS90 S32 with power bus infeed
2 2 2 3RK1903-0AC10 TM-RS90 S31 with power bus throughfeed
3 3 3RK1903-1CA01 Fail-safe kit 2
1) In this typical circuit diagram, PL c according to DIN EN ISO 13849-1 can only be met if a warning is
issued automatically when the actuator fails or the machine control system initiates a safe status con-
dition. Otherwise a second disconnection path is required.
2) Emergency stop looped in line for supply voltage U2 (A1+, A2-).
Applications
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 D-15
Figure D-7: (cont.) Example with 2 directions of rotation and 3 speeds with 2 Dahlander windings
Warning
You must ensure that there is an appropriate, software-specific interlocking with
a sufficiently apportioned time delay between module A4 and A5.
Applications
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
D-16 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Glossary-1
Glossary
2-channel (contactor control)
A two-channel contactor drive circuit is accessible when at least two release cir-
cuits are available and the primary current is disconnected redundantly.
2-channel (sensor)
The emergency stop switch is polled by means of two contacts, and the results
are sent separately to the evaluation unit.
AUX1
Freely usable potential line carried through all modules.
Only the PM-E modules have connecting terminals.
AUX2
Supply for infeed contactor, connect to A1+.
AUX3
Supply for infeed contactor, connect to A2-.
CON
See U2.
Direct starter
A direct starter is a −> motor starter for a single direction of rotation that
switches a motor on or off directly. It consists of a circuit breaker and a contac-
tor.
Glossary
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
Glossary-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Cross-circuit proof
In the event of a short circuit between the cables of the emergency stop button,
all the safety-related components of the ET 200S are switched off.
The operating status of the ET 200S cannot be restored until the problem
has been rectified.
Fail-safe systems
See fail-safe systems.
Fail-safe modules
ET 200S modules that can be used for safety-related operation in the ET 200S
distributed I/O device. These modules have integrated safety functions.
Fail-safe systems
Fail-safe systems are characterized by the fact that they remain in a safe state or
transfer directly into another safe state when certain failures occur.
Fail-safe motor starter
Fail-safe motor starters have the following characteristics:
• Device designations: F-DS1e-x, F-RS1e-x
• Usable up to 7.5 kW
• Installation width:65 mm for F-DS1e-x
130 mm for RS1e-x
Enabling circuit
A positively driven output with redundant, monitored normally open contacts
that drives other switchgear such as motor starters or infeed contactors.
Load group
A group of motor starters supplied by a single power bus infeed. A load group
can be within a → potential group or comprise parts of two potential groups.
PM-D F1
Emergency stop
button
Glossary
SIMATIC - ET 200S
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Glossary-3
Monitored start-up
At start-up, the emergency stop switch must always be closed first and the sup-
ply voltage switched on. Only then can the on switch be pressed. If the ON
switch is jumpered, the PM-D F1 evaluation unit detects an error, which is indi-
cated by a channel LED.
Motor starter; high feature
Motor starters; high feature have the following features:
• Device designations: DS1e-x, DSS1e-x, RS1e-x
• Usable up to 7.5 kW
• Installation width:65 mm for DS1e-x and DSS1e-x
130 mm for RS1e-x
Motor starter; standard
Motor starters; standard have the following features:
• Device designations: DS1-x, RS1-x
• Usable up to 5.5 kW
• Installation width:45 mm for DS1-x
90 mm for RS1-x
MS (motor starter)
Motor starter is the generic term for direct and reversing starters.
With motor starters the start-up and direction of rotation of a motor is deter-
mined.
OUT+/-
A positively driven output that drives other safety devices such as expansion
units (PM-D F4) or a time-delayed safety combination (PM-D F3).
PELV
Protective Extra-Low Voltage. A DIN VDE 0100 T410 protective measure against
accidental contact.
Potential group
A group of motor starters and/or electronic modules that are supplied by a sin-
gle power module.
Potential subgroup
A potential subgroup exists if the auxiliary voltage U2 can be partially switched
off within a potential group.
PROFIenergy
The PROFINET profile supports energy management systems in process plants
by exporting measurements or, for example, via short-term shutdown of the
overall plant in pause times via standardized PROFIenergy commands.ROFI
Glossary
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
Glossary-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
PWR
See U1
.
Redundancy
All the components required for a function are duplicated.
In order to achieve complete redundancy in the enabling circuits in the ET 200S,
two normally open contacts are connected in series in the PM-D F1 to 5 power
module. If there is a failure of a normally open contact - if it is welded, for
example - safe switching off is guaranteed.
Reversing starters
A reversing starter is a −> motor starter for two directions of rotation of a
motor. It consists of a circuit breaker and two contactors.
Feedback loop
The operation of the actuated contactors can be monitored by monitoring the
slave auxiliary contacts (normally closed contacts) of the motor starter from the
PM-D F1 to 5 power module. If a contactor is welded, the emergency stop seg-
ment can no longer be started.
SELV
Safety Extra Low Voltage. A circuit that is designed and protected in such a way
that when under normal conditions just one error occurs the following can be
ensured: The voltage between any two accessible parts, one of which can
either be a grounded or a conductive accessible part, does not exceed the
safety extra-low voltage and no overvoltage is produced that is greater than the
safety extra-low voltage.
SGx
SG stands for safety group. Six safety groups (SG1 to SG6) can be encoded
using the corresponding terminal module of the motor starters.
U1(PWR) supply voltage for electronics.
U2(CON) supply voltage for contactor control.
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Index-1
Index
Numerics
2DI 4–9
2DI COM 1–7
2DI COM control module 1–7
2DI control module 4–9
2DI LC COM 1–7, 4–13
2DI LC COM control module 1–7, 4–13
3-phase feed-in terminal 1–3
A
Actual motor current 10–6
After overload tripping 4–5
Aggregate current 6–16
Assignment of the terminal modules 6–2
AUX1 Gl–1
AUX2 Gl–1
AUX3 Gl–1
Auxiliary switch block 11–25
B
Brake control 12–5
Brake control module xB2 and
xB4 12–21, 12–25
C
Caps 1–3, 3–36, 6–6, 6–7, 6–8, 6–10,
6–11, 6–12, 6–14, 6–15
Circuit breaker 8–9, 8–46, 9–8
Coasting down time 8–36
Coding 3–17, 3–21, 3–22, 3–30
Coding (motor starter safety, local
solution) 11–17
Color coding labels 6–4, 11–6, 11–13,
13–5, 13–7
CON 7–2, 11–21, Gl–1
Configuration 4–14
Configuration of an ET 200S with motor
starters 3–3
Configuration options 1–13
Contact carrier 11–24
Contact holder 11–24
contactor 8–9, 8–25, 9–8, 9–25
Control kit 1–5, 4–7
Control unit 1–5, 4–8
Cover cap of a backplane bus
connector 3–3
CPU/master STOP 10–25
Cross-circuit proof Gl–2
Current flow via the power bus 6–16
Current limit 10–18, 10–22, 10–38
Current-carrying capacity 1–19, 6–14
Cyclic duration factor CD 8–37
Cyclic test of the F-CM 13–19
Cyclic test of the F-DS1e-x 8–15
Cyclic test of the F-RS1e-x 9–14
D
Derating 3–6
DI input signal 4–40, 4–41, 4–44
DI, input signal 4–40, 4–41
Diagnostic options 2–12
Diagnostics 4–23
Dimensioned drawings C–1
DIN standard rail 1–2
Diodes 4–5
Direct soft starters 1–6, 8–27
Direct starter 1–4, 1–6, 8–5, 8–11, Gl–1
DM-V15 1–2, 3–10, 12–11
DM-V15 spacing module 3–9
DO output signal 4–43
DO, output signal 4–40, 4–43
DS1e-x 1–6, 8–11
DSS1e-x 1–6, 8–27
DS-x1 1–4, 8–5
E
Electrical connections 3–23, 3–30
Electrical isolation 4–5
Electrical life 8–10, 8–26, 9–9, 9–26
EMC protection circuit 8–2, 9–2, 11–28,
13–23, D–2
Emergency start 10–23
Emergency stop circuit 11–25, 11–26
Enabling circuit Gl–2
Environmental conditions 5–3
ET 200S DS1e-x direct starters 1–6, 8–11
SIMATIC - ET 200Smotor starters
Index-2 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Index
ET 200S DS1-x direct starters 1–4, 8–5
ET 200S DSS1e-x direct soft
starters 1–6, 8–32
ET 200S F-DS1e-x fail-safe direct
starters 1–8, 8–11
ET 200S F-RS1e-x fail-safe refersing
starters 1–8, 9–10
ET 200S RS1e-x reversing starters 1–6,
9–10
ET 200S RS1-x reversing starters 1–4,
9–4
ET 200S manuals 1–21, 1–22
External short-circuit protection 4–4
Externally powered brake xB1,
xB3 12–18
F
Factory setting 10–54
Fail-safe direct starters 1–8, 8–11
Fail-safe kit (= F-Kit) 11–24
Fail-safe kit 1 1–11, 11–25
Fail-safe kit 2 1–11, 11–26
Fail-safe modules 13–1, Gl–2
Fail-safe motor starter Gl–2
Fail-safe reversing starters 1–8, 9–10
Fail-safe systems Gl–2
FB125 4–23
FC125 4–23
F-CM 1– 9, 13–16
F-CM contact replicator 1–9, 13–16
F-CM module replacement 13–20
F-DS1e-x 1–8, 8–11
F-DS1e-x module change 8–19
Feedback loop 11–24, 11–25, 11–26, Gl–4
Feed-in terminal 1–3
F-RS1e-x 1–8, 9–10
F-RS1e-x module change 9–18
G
General warning 4–41
Group error 4–26, 4–41
H
Help 2–14
high feature 1–6, 8–11, 8–27, 8–32, 9–10
HW Config 2–13
I
Idle time 10–16
IM 151 1–2
IM 151 interface module 1–2
Infeed contactor 1–11, 11–3
Input behavior 4–42
Inserting power modules 3–21
Installation measurements and
clearances 3–5
Installation position 3–4
Installation rules 3–3
Installing motor starters 3–23, 3–30
Installing terminal modules 3–17
Installing the brake control module 12–30
Internally powered brake xB2 and
xB4 12–21, 12–25
L
L1/L2/L3 jumper module 1–3
Labelling strips 3–17, 11–17
Labelling the modules 3–17, 11–17
Latched positions 3–23, 3–30
Laying regulations for lines 13–12
Load group 1–17, 6–16, Gl–2
LOGO! PC cable 4–10
M
Main circuit 8–8, 8–24, 8–45, 9–7, 9–24
Manual operation local 4–13, 4–41, 8–12,
8–32, 9–11, 10–41
Manuals 1–21, 1–22
Maximum current-carrying capacity 1–19
Monitored start-up Gl–3
Monitoring 4–23
Motor connection 6–14
Motor current 4–41
Motor Starter ES 4–9, 4–45
Motor starters 8–1, 9–1, 10–1
N
Number of modules 3–3
O
Operating position 3–24, 3–31
Overload tripping test 4–4
P
Parameter length 1–18
Parameters of the soft starters 8–42
Parked position 3–24, 3–31
PE/N jumper module 1–3, 1–7
PE/N terminal block 6–15
PELV Gl–3
Phase firing 8–29
PM-D 1–2, 7–1
PM-D F PROFIsave 1–9
PM-D F X1 1–9, 13–9
PM-D F5 11–20
PM-D power module 7–1
PM-D F PROFIsave power module 1–9
PM-D F X1 module replacement 13–13
PM-D F X1 power/expansion
module 1–9, 13–9
PM-D F1 to 5 1–10, 11–6, 11–15
PM-D F1, F2 11–18
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15 Index-3
Index
PM-D F3, F4 11–19
PM-X 1–10, 11–6, 11–23
PM-X connection module 11–23
Potential group 1–17, 11–7, Gl–3
Potential subgroup 11–7, Gl–3
Potentiometer 8–40
Power bus 6–14
Power bus infeed 6–6, 6–7, 6–8, 6–10,
6–11, 6–12, 6–14
Power bus throughfeed 6–6, 6–7, 6–8,
6–10, 6–11, 6–12, 6–14
Power modules PM-D F1 through
511–15
Preventing unauthorized persons from
switching on 4–6
Process mappings 4–40
PROFIBUS-DP 4–23
Profile rails 3–4
Protection against dirt 3–36
Protection circuit 8–2, 9–2, 11–28, 13–23,
D–2
PWR 7–2, 11–21, 13–22, Gl–4
R
Ramp time 8–36
Rated operating current 10–10, 10–11,
10–18, 10–22, 10–25, 10–26, 10–34
Recovery time 10–5
Reducing the starting current 8–28
Reductions 8–39
Redundancy Gl–4
Removal of the motor starters 3–23,
3–30
Removing motor starters 3–25, 3–32
Reversing starters 1–4, 1–6, 4–5, 9–4,
9–10, Gl–4
Revision level 4–42
Rotary current asynchronous
motors 8–27
RS1e-x 1–6, 9–10
RS-x1 1–4, 9–4
S
Safety regulations 13–12
Safety relay 4–28, 4–29, 4–30, 4–31,
4–32, 4–34
Safety-related standards 11–21, 13–15,
13–22
Self-test 8–16, 9–15
SELV Gl–4
Set current Ie 4–3
Settings 8–35
SGx Gl–4
Shipping conditions 5–2
Short-circuit tripping 4–5
SIRIUS switchgear 8–5, 8–11, 8–32, 9–4,
9–10
Soft coasting-down function 8–35
Soft starter 8–29, 8–46
Soft starting function 8–35
Spacing module 1–2, 3–6, 12–11
Specifying the safety group 3–29
standard 1–4, 8–5, 9–4
Star starting 8–28
Start time 8–36
Starting current 8–27
Starting time 8–41
Starting torque 8–39
Starting voltage 8–36
starting voltage 8–36, 8–39
Station width 3–3, 3–4
Stop time 8–36
Storage conditions 5–2
Storage temperature 5–2
Switch-over interval 9–4
T
Table of contents vii
Terminal block 1–5, 6–14
Terminal modules 6–1
Terminating cover for control bus 1–3,
3–36
Terminating module 1–3, 3–36
Time ramp 8–36
TM-DS45 1–4, 6–3, 6–6
TM-DS65 1–6, 6–3, 6–7
TM-FCM30 1–9, 6–3
TM-FCM30 S47 13–4
TM-FDS65 1–8, 6–3, 6–8
TM-FRS130 1–8, 6–3, 6–12
TM-P15 1–2, 6–2, 6–4
TM-PF30 1–10, 6–2, 11–6, 11–9
TM-PFX30 6–3, 13–5, 13–7
TM-PFX30 S47 13–4
TM-RS130 1–6, 6–3, 6–11
TM-RS90 1–4, 6–3, 6–10
TM-X15 1–10, 6–2, 11–6
TM-xB15 1–12, 12–3
TM-xB215 1–12, 12–3
Trip Reset 4–26
Tripping class 8–20
U
U1 7–2, 11–21, 13–22, Gl–4
U2 7–2, 11–21, Gl–4
User program 4–23
V
Voltage tolerance for the contactor
supply 4–3
SIMATIC - ET 200Smotor starters
Index-4 GWA-4NEB950007202-15
Index
X
xB1 12–18
xB1 and xB3 brake control module 12–18
xB1 to 4 1–12, 12–4
xB2 12–21, 12–25
xB3 12–18
xB4 12–21, 12–25
Z
Zener diodes 4–5
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15
To
Siemens AG
DF CP PRM IM 2
92220 Amberg
Fax: 09621 / 80-3337
SIMATIC ET 200S motor starter safety-integrated system manual
Have you come across any errors in this manual?
Please describe the errors on this form.
We will be very grateful to you for any ideas and suggestions for improvements.
Sender (please complete)
Name
Company / Office
Address
Phone
Fax
SIMATIC - ET 200S motor starters
GWA-4NEB950007202-15